I
Supplement to the1996 Express andSavana uwner’s Manual
This supplement includes thelatest inforrnation at the time of printing. We reserve the right to make changes in the
product afer that time withoutfirther notice. For vehiclesfirst sold in Canada, substitute the name
“General Motors of Canada ”for General Motors wherever it appears in this manual.
@Copyright1996 General Motors Corporation.All rights reserved. Printed in U.S.A. GENERAL MOTORS and the
names EXPRESS and SAVANA are registered trademarksof General Motors Corporation.
PART NUMBER 15029395
c’
This information replaces the “Removing the Rear Seat
’’
and “Replacing the RearSeat” portion located in
Section 1 in your owner’s manual.
Removing the Rear Seat
2. Lift the carpedmat flap atthe inboard side of the seat
base in the rear.
1. Disconnect the quick release latch plates for the lap
shoulder beltson the bench seat to be removed.To do
this, press the tipof a key into the release holeof the
safety belt buckle while pulling upon the safety belt.
2
3. Locate the red handle on the inboard side of the seat
base, rotate thered handle up.
4. Once the red handle is rotated up, pull the handle to
remove the locking pin.
5. Stow the locking pin on the rear of the seat base in
the hole that is provided.
6. Repeat this procedure for the other seat base.
7. Remove the seat from the vehicle.
8. Install the trim covers to the floor rails.
3
The 1996 Chevrolet Express Owner’s Manual
.............................................................
..................................................................
This section explains how to start and operate your vehicle.
Comfort Controls and Audio Systems .....................................................
Seats and Restraint Systems
This section tells you how to use your seats and safety belts properly.It also explains the “SIR’ system.
FeaturesandControls
1-1
2-1
3-1
This section tells you how to adjust the ventilation and comfort controls andhow to operate your
audio system.
..............................................................
Here you’ll find helpful information and tips about the road and how to drive under different conditions.
ProblemsontheRoad ..................................................................
YourDrivingandtheRoad
4-1
5-1
This section tells you what to do if you have a problem while driving, such as a flat tire or overheated
engine, etc.
............................................................ 6-1
Here the manual tells you how to keep your vehicle running properly and looking good.
Maintenanceschedule .................................................................. 7-1
This section tells you when to perform vehicle maintenance and what fluids and lubricantsto use.
CustomerAssistanceInformation ........................................................8-1
Service and Appearance Care
This section tells you how to contact Chevrolet for assistance and how to get service and owner
publications. It also gives you information on “Reporting Safety Defects” on page 8-8.
Index
................................................................................
9-1
Here’s an alphabetical listing of almost every subject in this manual. You can use it to quickly find
something you want to read.
i
We support voluntary
technician certification.
u
CHEVROLET
GENERAL MOTORS,GM, the GM Emblem,
CHEVROLET, the CHEVROLET Emblem and the
name EXPRESS are registered trademarks of General
Motors Corporation.
This manual includes the latest information at the time it
was printed. We reserve the right to make changes in the
product after that time without further notice. For
vehicles first sold in Canada, substitute the name
“General Motors of Canada Limited” for Chevrolet
Division whenever it appears in this manual.
Please keep this manual in your vehicle, so it will be
there if you ever need it when you’re on the road. If you
sell the vehicle, please leave thismanual in it so the new
owner canuse it.
Litho in U.S.A.
C9614 B First Edition
ii
WE SUPPORT
VOLUNTARY TECHNICIAN
CERTIFICATION THROUGH
National Institute for
AUTOMOTIVE
SERVICE
EXCELLENCE
For Canadian OwnersWho Prefer a
French Language Manual:
Aux propriktaires canadiens: Vous pouvez vous
procurer un exemplaire dece guide en franGais chez
votre concessionaire ou au:
DGN Marketing Services Ltd.
1500 Bonhill Rd.
Mississauga, Ontario L5T IC7
@CopyrightGeneral Motors Corporation 1996
All Rights Reserved
How to Use this Manual
Safety Warnings and Symbols
Many people W d their owner’s manual from beginning
to end when they first receive their new vehicle. If you
do this, it will help you learn about the features and
controls for yourvehicle. In this manual, you’ll find
that pictures and words work together to explain
things quickly.
You will find a number of safety cautions in this book.
We use a box and the word CAUTION to tell you
about things that could hurt you if you were to ignore
the warning.
Index
A good place to look for what you need is the Index
in the back of the manual. It’s an alphabetical list of
all that’s in the manual, and the page number where
you’ll find it.
In the caution area, we tell you what the hazard is. Then
we tell you what to do to help avoid or reduce the
hazard. Please read these cautions. If you don’t, you or
others couldbe hurt.
iii
You will also find a circle
with a slash through it in
this book. This safety
symbol means “Don’t,”
“Don’t do this,” or “Don’t
let this happen.’’
In the notice area, we tell you about somethingthat can
damage your vehicle. Many times, this damage would
not be covered by your warranty, and it could be costly.
But the notice will tell you what to do to help avoid
the damage.
When you read other manuals, you might see
CAUTION and NOTICE warnings in different colors or
in different words.
You’ll also seewarning labels on your vehicle. They use
the same words, CAUTION or NOTICE.
Vehicle Damage Warnings
Also, in this book you will find these notices:
1 NOTICE:
These mean thereis something that could
damage your vehicle.
iv
Vehicle Symbols
These aresome of the symbols you may find on your vehicle.
For example,
these symbols
are used on an
original battery:
CAUTION
POSSIBLE
INJURY
A
These symbols
are important
for you and
your passengers
whenever your
vehicle is
driven:
DOOR LOCK
UNLOCK
PROTECT
EYES BY
SHIELDING
CAUSTIC
BATTERY
ACID COULD
CAUSE
BURNS
These symbols
have to do with
your lights:
TURN
SIGNALS
These symbols
are on some of
your controls:
COOLANT
TEMP
ee
SPARK OR
FLAME
COULD
EXPLODE
BATTERY
,\I/,
FOG LAMPS
-0
#0
-*
VENTILATING
FAN
Here are some
other symbols
you may see:
FUSE
ENGINE OIL
PRESSURE
ANTI-LOCK
BRAKES
t
LIGHTER
(0)
)tr
a
b
HORN
BRAKE
COOLANT
DAYTIME
RUNNING
LAMPS
--
BATTERY
CHARGING
SYSTEM
WINDSHIELD
DEFROSTER
FASTEN
SEAT
BELTS
These symbols
are used on
warning and
indicator lights:
SPEAKER
e,
FUEL
m
(@)
V
Model Reference
This manual covers these models:
Passenger Van
Cargo Van
vi
1
Cab and Chassis
Section 1 Seats and Restraint Systems
Here you'll find information aboutthe seats in your
vehicle and how to use your safety belts properly. You
can also learn about some thingsyou should nut do with
air bags and safety belts.
Manual Front Seats
Seats and SeatControls
This part tells you about the seats -- how to adjust them,
take them out and put them back in. It also tellsyou
about reclining front seatbacks.
1-1
The bucket seats can be adjusted forward or rearward
with the lever at the front of the seat.
Power Seat (Option)
To adjust the seat, pull the lever up to release the seat
bottom and slide the seat where you want it. Then
release the lever and try to move the seat with your
body, to make sure the seat is locked into place.
I
’A
CAUTION:
You can lose controlof the vehicle if you tryto
adjust a manual driver’s seat while the vehicle
is
moving. The sudden movement could startle and
confuse you, or make you pusha pedal when you
don’t want to. Adjust the driver’s seat only when
the vehicle is not moving.
1-2
I
If your vehicle has a power seat on the driver or
passenger’s side, you can adjust it with this switch at the
front center cushionof the seat.
You can use these switches to move the seat where you
want it. To raise the seat, move the center knob up. To
Reclining Seatbacks
lower the. seat, move the center knob down. To move the
seat forward, move the center knob toward the right. To
move the seat rearward, move the center knob toward
the left.
You can raise and lower the front and rear of the seat. To
raise the front of the seat, move the right lever up. To
lower it, move the right lever down. To raise the rear of
the seat, move the left lever up. To lower it, move the
left lever down.
To adjust the seatback, lift the front of this lever which
is located a t the inner edgeof the. seat cushion.
Move the seatback with your body and release the lever
to lock the seatback where yo11 want it. I x a n forward
and pull u p on the front o f ' the lever and the seatback
will go to an upright position.
1-3
A CAUTION:
But don’t have a seatback reclined if your vehicle
is moving.
1-4
Sitting in a reclined position whenyour vehicle is
in motion can be dangerous. Even if you buckle
up, your safety beltscan’t do theirjob when
you’re reclined like this.
The shoulder belt can’t do its job
because it
won’t be against your body. Instead, it will be in
front of you. In a crash you could go into it,
receiving neckor other injuries.
The lap belt can’t do its job either. In a crash the
belt could go up over your abdomen. The belt
forces would be there, not at your pelvic bones.
This could cause serious internal injuries.
For proper protection when the vehicle is in
motion, have the seatback upright. Then sit
well
back in the seatand wear your safety belt properly.
IA
Head Restraints
Head restraintsare fixed OB some models and adjustable
on others. Slidean adjustable head restraintup or down
so that the topof the restraintis closest to thetop of
your ears. This position reduces the chance
of a neck
injury in a crash.
A safety belt that is twisted or not properly
attached won't provide the protectionneeded in
a crash. The person wearing the beltcould be
i seriously injured. After installing the seat, always
i check to be sure that thesafety belts are not
twisted and are'properly attached.
1
Rear Seats
'A
CAUTION:
'
CAUTION:
i
rn
A seat that isn't locked into place properly can
move around in acollision or sudden stop. People
in the vehicle could be injured. Be sure to lock
the seat intoplace properly when installing it.
-
~~
-
I
,
1-5
..
Removing the Rear Seat
3. Lift up on the latch lever located at the front of
each seat support. The latch lever will stay in the
up position.
I . Disconnect the quick release latch plates for the lap
shoulder belts on the bench seat to be removed. To
do this, press the tip of a key into the release hole of
the safety belt end release buckle while pulling up on
the safety belt.
4. Roll the scat toward the open slots in both rails. Lift
the seat up and out of both rails.
2. At the floor, remove the plastic trim covers in front
of and behind the seat supports.
6. Install long trim covers to the front portion of the
floor rails.
5 . Remove the seat from the vehicle.
Replacing the Rear Seat
1. Position the seat into the open slots in both rails.
Make sure that the latch levers at the front of the seat
are in the up position.
2. Roll the seat to the set location and lock into place.
'
3. Lower the latch lever by lifting up on the release
located at the mid-position of each seat support.
Check that both sides of the seat are locked securely
by trying to move the seat forward and backward. A
click should be heard when the seat is locked in place.
4. At the floor, replace the plastic trim covers in front
of and behind the seat supports.
5. Connect the quick release latch plates for the lap
shoulder belts by inserting the latch plates into the
buckles attached at the outboard positions of the
bench seat.
1-7
Safety Belts: They’re for Everyone
This part of the manual tells you how to use safety belts
properly. It also tells you some things you should not do
with safety belts.
’
Your vehicle has a light that
comes on as a reminder to
buckle up. (See “Safety
Belt Reminder Light” in
the Index.)
And it explains the Supplemental Inflatable Restraint
(SIR), or air bag system.
I
, / 1 \
CAUTION:
Don’t let anyone ride where he or she can’t wear
a safety belt properly. If you are in a crash and
you’re not wearing a safety belt, your injuries
can be much worse. You can hit thingsinside the
vehicle or be ejected from it. You can be seriously
injured or killed. In the same crash, you might
not be if you are buckled up. Always fasten your
safety belt, and check that your passengers’ belts
are fastened properly too.
In most states and Canadian provinces, the law says to
wear safety belts. Here’s why: They work.
You never know if you’ll be in a crash. If you do have a
crash, you don’t know if it will be a bad one.
A few crashes are mild, and some crashes can be so
serious that even buckled up a person wouldn’t survive.
But most crashes are in between. In many of them,
people who buckle up can survive and sometimes walk
away. Without belts they could have been badly hurt
or killed.
After more than 25 years of safety belts in vehicles,
the facts are clear. In most crashes buckling up does
matter ... a lot!
1-8
Why Safety BeltsWork
When you ride in or on anything, you go as fast as
it goes.
e
Put someoneon it.
Take the simplestvehicle. Suppose it’s just a seat
on wheels.
1-9
I
Get it up to speed. Then stop the vehicle. The rider
doesn't stop.
1-10
. ......
The person keeps going until stopped by something.
In a real vehicle, it could be the windshield ...
J
or theinstrument panel ...
or the safety belts!
With safety belts, you slow down as the vehicle does.
You get more time to stop. You stop over more distance,
and your strongest bones take the forces. That’s why
safety belts make such good sense.
1-11
Here Are QuestionsMany People Ask
About Safety Belts-- and the Answers
Won’t I be trapped in the vehicleafter an
accident if I’m wearing a safety belt?
A:
You could be -- whether you’re wearing a safety
belt or not. But you can unbuckle a safety belt,
even if you’re upside down. And your chance of
being conscious during and after an accident, so
you can unbuckle and get out, is ~?zuch
greater if
you are belted.
&= If my vehicle hasair bags, why shouldI have to
wear safety belts?
A:
Air bags are in many vehicles today and will
be in most of them in the future. But they are
supplemental systems only; so they work ~ : i t h
safety belts -- not instead of them. Every air bag
system ever offered for sale has required the use of
safety belts. Even if you’re in a vehicle that has air
bags, you still have to buckle up to get the most
protection. That’s true not only in frontal collisions,
but especially in side and other collisions.
1-12
@
If I’m a good driver, and I never drive far from
home, why should I wear safety belts?
A:
You may be an excellent driver, but if you’re in an
accident -- even one that isn’t your fault -- you and
your passengers can be hurt. Being a good driver
doesn’t protect you from things beyond your
control, such as bad drivers.
Most accidents occur within 25 miles (40 km) of
home. And the greatest number of serious injuries
and deaths occur at speeds of less than 40 mph
(65 km/h).
Safety belts are for everyone.
How to Wear Safety Belts Properly
Adults
This part is only for people of adult size.
Be aware that there are special things to know about
safety belts and children. And there are different rules
for smaller children and babies. If a child will be riding
in your vehicle, see the part of this manual called
“Children.” Follow those rules for everyone’s protection.
First, you’ll want to know which restraint systems your
vehicle has.
We’ll start with the driver position.
Driver Position
This part describes the driver’s restraint system.
Lap-Shoulder Belt
3. Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt across you.
Don’t let it get twisted.
The driver has a lap-shoulder belt. Here’s how to wear
it properly.
4. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks.
1. Close and lock the door.
2. Adjust the seat (to see how, see “Seats” in the Index)
so you can sit up straight.
Pull up on the latch plate to make sure it is secure.
If the belt isn’t long enough, see “Safety Belt
Extender” at the end of this section.
Make sure the release button on the buckle is
positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the
safety belt quickly if you ever had to.
1-13
5. To make the lap part tight, pull down on the buckle
end of the belt as you pull up on the shoulder belt.
The lap part of the belt should be worn low andsnug on
the hips, just touching the thighs. In a crash, this applies
force to the strong pelvic bones. And you’d be less likely
to slide under the lap belt. If you slid under it, the belt
would apply force at your abdomen. This could cause
serious or even fatal injuries. The shoulder belt should go
over the shoulder and across the chest. These parts of the
body are best able to take belt restraining forces.
The safety belt locks if there’s a sudden stop or a crash.
1-14
~
Shoulder Belt Height Adjuster
Before you begin to drive, move the shoulder belt
adjuster to the heightthat is right for you. ,
To move it down, push in at the word PRESS and move
the height adjuster to the desired position. You can move
the adjuster up just by pushing up on the shoulder belt
guide. After you move the adjuster to where you want it,
try to move it down without pushing in to make sure it
has locked into position.
Adjust the height so that the shoulder portion of the
belt is centered on your shoulder. The belt should be
away from your face and neck, but not falling off
your shoulder.
1-15
What’s wrong with this?
I
You can be seriously hurt if your shoulder belt
is
too loose. In a crash, you would move forward
too much, which could increase injury. The
shoulder belt shouldfit against your body.
A:
The shoulder belt is too loose. It won’t give nearly
as much protection this way.
1-16
Qz
What's wrong with this?
A CAUTION:
m
You can be seriously injured if your belt is
buckled in thewrong place like this. In a crash,
the belt would go up over your abdomen. The
belt forces would be there, not at the pelvic
bones. This could cause serious internal injuries.
Always buckle your belt into thebuckle
nearest you.
A:
The belt is buckled in the wrong place.
1-17
&:
What’s wrong with this?
.-
&, CAb I’ION:
I
You can be seriously injured if your belt goes
over an armrest like this. The belt would bemuch
too high. In a crash, you can slide under thebelt.
The belt force would then be applied at the
abdomen, not at the pelvic bones, and thatcould
cause serious or fatal injuries. Be sure thebelt
goes under the armrests.
A:
The belt is over an armrest.
What’s wrong with this?
A CAUTICU:
You can be seriously injured if you wear the
shoulder belt under your arm. In a crash, your
body would move too far forward, which would
increase thechance of head and neck injury.
Also, the belt would apply too much force to the
ribs, which aren’t as strongas shoulder bones.
You could also severely injure internal organs
like your liver or spleen.
A:
The shoulder belt is worn under the arm. It should
be worn over the shoulder at all times.
1-19
&.’ What’s wrong with this?
You can be seriously injured
by a twisted belt. In
a crash, you wouldn’t have the full width of the
belt to spread impact forces. If a belt is twisted,
make it straightso it can work properly, orask
your dealerto fix it.
A:
The belt is twisted across the body.
Supplemental Inflatable Restraint
(SIR) System
This part explains the Supplemental Inflatable
Restraint (SIR) system or air bag system.
If it says SUPPLEMENTAL
INFLATABLE RESTRAINT
on the middle part of the
steering wheel and there’s
a right front passenger seat,
your vehicle has two air
bags -- one air bag for the
driver and another air bagfor
the right front passenger.
To unlatch the belt, just push the button on the buckle.
The belt should go back out of the way.
Before you close the door, be sure the belt is out of the
way. If you slam the door on it, you can damage both the
belt and your vehicle.
1-21
If it says SUPPLEMENTAL INFLATABLE
RESTRAINT on the middle part of the steering wheel
but there is no right front passenger seat, your vehicle
has an air bagfor the driver only.
If it doesn’t say SUPPLEMENTAL INFLATABLE
RESTRAINT on the middle part of the steering wheel,
your vehicle doesn’t have air bags.
Here are the most important things to know about the
air bag system:
You can be severelyinjured or killed in a crash if
you aren’t wearing your safety belt even if you
have an airbag. Wearing your safety belt during
a crash helps reduce your chance of hitting things
inside the vehicle or being ejected from it. The air
bag is only a “supplemental restraint.” That is, it
works with safety belts but doesn’t replace them.
CAUTION: (Continued)
--
1-22
CAUTION: 0
Air bags are designed to work only in moderate to
severe crashes where the front of your vehicle hits
something. They aren’t designed to inflate at all in
rollover, rear, side or low-speed frontal crashes.
Everyone in your vehicle, including the driver,
should wear a safety beltproperly whether or
not there’san airbag for thatperson.
--
IA
C1”’
L
ION:
Air bags inflate with great force, faster than the
blink of an eye. If you’re too closeto aninflating
air bag, it could seriously injure you. Safety belts
help keep you in position for anair bag inflation
in a crash. Always wear your safety belt, even
with an air bag. The driver should sit asfar
back as possible while still maintaining control
of the vehicle.
If your vehicle has an air bag for the right front
passenger, please read this:
A CAUTION:
r
An inflating air bag can seriously injure small
children. Always securechildren properly in your
vehicle. To read how, see the part ofthis manual
called “Children”and the caution label on the
right front passenger’s safety belt.
AIR
BAG
There is an air bag readiness
light on the instrument
panel, which shows
AIR BAG.
The system checks the air bag’s electrical system for
malfunctions. The light tells you if there is an electrical
problem. See “Air Bag Readiness Light” in the Index
for more information.
1-23
How the Air Bag System Works
Where is the air bag?
The driver’s air bag is in the middle of the steering wheel.
1-24
The right front passenger’s air bagis in the instrument
panel on the passenger’s side.
Don’t put anything on, or attach anything to,
the steeringwheel or instrumentpanel. Also,
don’t put anything (such as pets or objects)
between any occupantand the steeringwheel or
instrument panel. And don’t hang anything from
the assist handle on the passenger’s side of the
instrument panel. If something is between an
occupant and an airbag, it could affect the
performance of the air bag or worse, it could
cause injury.
--
When should an air bag inflate?
The air bag is designed to inflate in moderate to severe
frontal or near-frontal crashes. The air bagwill inflate
only if the impact speed is above the system’s designed
“threshold level.” If your vehicle goesstraight into a
wall that doesn’t move or deform, the threshold level is
about 1 1 to 16 mph ( 1 8 to 26 km/h). The threshold level
can vary, however, with specific vehicle design, so that
it can be somewhat above or below this range. If your
vehicle strikes something that will move or deform, such
as a parked car, the threshold level will be higher. The
air bag is not designed to inflate in rollovers, side
impacts or rear impacts, because inflation would not
help the occupant.
In any particular crash, no one can say whether an air
bag should have inflated simply because of the damage
to a vehicle or because of what the repair costs were.
Inflation is determined by the angle of the impact and
the vehicle’s deceleration. Vehicle damage is only one
indication of this.
What makesan air bag
inflate?
In a frontal or near-frontal impact of sufficient severity,
the air bag sensing system detects that the vehicle is
suddenly stopping as a result of a crash. Thesensing
system triggers a chemical reaction of the sodium azide
sealed in the inflator. The reaction produces nitrogen
gas, which inflates the air bag. The inflator, air bag and
related hardware are all part of the air bag modules
packed inside the steering wheel and in the instrument
pane! in front of the right front passenger.
1-25
How does an air bag restrain?
In moderate to severe frontal or near-frontal collisions,
even belted occupants can contact the steering wheel or
the instrument panel. The air bag supplements the
protection provided by safety belts. Air bags distribute
the force of the impact more evenly over the occupant’s
upper body, stopping the occupant more gradually. But
air bags would not help you in many types of collisions,
including rollovers, rear impacts and side impacts,
primarily because an occupant’s motion is not toward
the air bag. Air bags should never be regarded as
anything more than a supplement to safety belts,
and then only in moderate to severe frontal or
near-frontal collisions.
What will you see after anair bag inflates?
After the air bag inflates, it quickly deflates. This occurs
so quickly that some people may not even realize the air
bag inflated. Some componentsof the air bag module
in the steering wheel hub for the driver’s air bag, or the
instrument panel for the right front passenger’s bag, will
be hot for a short time. The part of the bag that comes
into contact with you may be warm, but it will never be
too hot to touch. There will be some smoke and dust
coming from vents in the deflated air bags. Air bag
1-26
inflation will not prevent the driver from seeing or from
being able to steer the vehicle, nor will it stop people
from leaving the vehicle.
r
-
When an air bag inflates, there
is dust in the air.
This dust could cause breathing problems
for
people with a history of asthma
or other
breathing trouble. To avoid this, everyone in the
vehicle should get outas soon as it is safe todo so.
If you have breathing problems but can’t get out
of the vehicle afteran air bag inflates, then get
fresh air by opening a windowor door.
The air bags are designed to inflate only once. After
they inflate, you’ll need some new parts for your air
bag system. If you don’t get them, the air bag system
won’t be there to help protect you in another crash.
A new system will include air bag modules and
possibly other parts. The service manual for your
vehicle covers the need to replace other parts.
0
0
Your vehicle is equippedwith a crash sensingand
diagnostic module, which records information
about the air bag system.The module records
information about the readiness of the system, when
the sensors are activated and driver’ssafety belt
usage at deployment.
Let only qualified technicians work on your air bag
system. Improper servicecan mean that your air bag
system won’t work properly. See your dealer
for service.
Servicing Your Air Bag-Equipped Vehicle
Air bags affect how your vehicle should be serviced.
There areparts of the air bag systemin several places
around your vehicle. You don’t want the system to
inflate while someoneis working on your vehicle. Your
GM dealer and the service manual have information
about servicing your vehicle and the air bag system.To
purchase a service manual, see “Service and Owner
Publications” in the Index.
NOTICE:
If you damage thecover for the driver’sor the
right frontpassenger’s air bag, they may not
work properly. You may have to replace the
air bag module in the steeringwheel or both the
air bag module and the instrumentpanel for the
right frontpassenger’s air bag. Do not open or
break the airbag covers.
For upto 10 minutes after theignition key is
turned off and the batteryis disconnected, an air
bag canstill inflate during improperservice. You
can be injured if you are close to an airbag when
it inflates. Avoid wires wrapped with yellow tape
or yellow connectors. They are probably part of
the air bag system. Be sure to follow proper
service procedures, and make surethe person
performing work for you is qualified to doso.
The air bag system does not need regular maintenance.
1 37
Adding Equipment toYour Air
Bag-Equipped Vehicle
&.” If I add a push bumperor a bicycle rack to the
front of my vehicle, will it keep the
air bags
from working properly?
A:
As long as the push bumper or bicycle rack is
attached to your vehicleso that the vehicle’s basic
structure isn’t changed, it’s not likely to keep the
air bags fromworking properly in a crash.
1-28
@
Is there anythingI might add to the front of the
vehicle that could keep the air bags from
working properly?
A:
Yes. If you add things that change your vehicle’s
frame, bumper system, front end sheet metalor
height, they may keep the air bag system from
working properly. Also, the air bag system may not
work properly if you relocate any of the air bag
sensors. If you have any question about this, you
should contact Customer Assistance before you
modify your vehicle. (The phone numbers and
addresses for Customer Assistanceare in Step Two of
the Customer Satisfaction Procedure in this manual.
See “Customer Satisfaction Procedure” in the Index.)
The best way to protect the fetus is to protect the
mother. When a safety belt is worn properly, it’s more
likely that the fetus won’t be hurt in a crash. For
pregnant women, as for anyone, the key to making
safety belts effective is wearing them properly.
Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy
Safety belts work for everyone, including pregnant
women. Like all occupants, they are more likely to be
seriously injured if they don’t wear safety belts.
i
Right Front Passenger Position
...I
The right front passenger’s safety belt works the same
way as the driver’s safety belt. See “Driver Position”
earlier in this section.
~
When the shoulder belt is pulled out all the way, it will
lock. If it does, let it go back all the way and start again.
Rear Seat Passengers
It’s very important for rear seat passengers to buckle up!
Accident statistics show that unbelted people in the rear
seat are hurt more often in crashes than those who are
wearing safety belts.
Rear passengers who aren’t safety belted can be thrown
out of the vehicle in a crash. And they can strike others
in the vehicle who arewearing safety belts.
A pregnant woman shouldwear a lap-shoulder belt, and
the lap portion should be worn as low as possible, below
the rounding, throughout the pregnancy.
Rear Seat Outside Passenger Positions
Lap-Shoulder Belt
The positions next to the windows have lap-shoulder
belts. Here’s how to wear one properly.
1. Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt across you.
Don’t let it get twisted.
2. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks.
Pull up on the latch plate to make sure it is secure.
When the shoulder belt is pulledout all the way, it will
lock. If it does, let it go back all the way and startagain.
If the belt is not long enough, see“Safety Belt
Extender” at the end of this section.
1-30
Make sure the release button
on the buckle is positioned
so you would beable to unbuckle the safety belt quickly
if you ever had to.
3. To make the lap part tight, pull down on the buckle
end of the belt as you pull up on the shoulder part.
The lap part of the belt should be worn low and snug on
the hips, just touching the thighs. In a crash, this applies
force to the strong pelvic bones. And you'd be less
likely to slide under the lap belt, If you slid under it, the
belt would apply force at your abdomen. This could
cause serious or even fatal injuries. The shoulder belt
should go overthe shoulder and across the chest.
These parts of the body are best able to take belt
restraining forces.
1-31
The safety belt locks if there’s a sudden stop ora crash.
- -
A CAUTION:
You can be seriously hurt if your shoulder belt
is
too loose. In a crash, you would move forward
too much, which could increase injury. The
shoulder belt shouldfit against your body.
To unlatch the belt, just push the button on the buckle.
1-32
Center Passenger Position
Lap Belt
If your vehiclehas rear bench seats, someonecan sit in
the center positions.
When you sit in a center seatingposition, you have a lap
safety belt, which has no retractor. To make the belt
longer, tilt the latch plate and pull it along the belt.
1-33
Children
Everyone in a vehicle needs protection! That includes
infants and all children smallerthan adult size. In fact,
the law in every state in the United States and in every
Canadian province says children up to some age must be
restrained while in a vehicle.
Smaller Children and Babies (Except Cargo
Vans with Passt-- r Air B
I
To make the belt shorter, pull its free end as shown until
the belt is snug.
-Buckle, position and release it the same way as the lap
part of a lap-shoulder belt. If the belt isn’t long enough,
see “Safety Belt Extender” at the end of this section.
Make sure the release button on the buckle is positioned
so you would be able to unbuckle the safety belt quickly
if you ever had to.
1-34
Smaller children and babies should always be
restrained in a child or infant restraint. The
instructions for the restraint
will say whether it
is the righttype and size for your child. A very
young child’s hip bones are so small that a
regular belt might not stay low on the hips, as it
should. Instead, thebelt will likely beover the
child’s abdomen. In a crash, thebelt would apply
force right on the child’s abdomen, which could
cause serious or fatal injuries. So, be sure that
any child small enough for one is always properly
restrained in a child or infant restraint.
r
I
heavy you can’t hold it. For example, in a crash
at only 25 mph (40 km/h), a 12-lb. (5.5 kg) baby
will suddenly become a 240-lb. (110 kg) force on
your arms. Thebaby would be almost impossible
to hold.
Secure the baby in an infant restraint.
Never hold a baby in your arms while riding in a
vehicle. A baby doesn’t weigh much until a
crash. During a crash a baby will become so
CAUTION: (Continued)
--
Smaller Children and Babies (Cargo
Vans
with Passenger AirBags)
A very young child’s hip bones are so small that a
regular belt might not stay low on the hips, as it
should. Instead, thebelt will likely be over the
child’s abdomen. In a crash, thebelt would apply
force right on the child’s abdomen, which could
cause serious or fatalinjuries. Smaller children
and babies should always be restrained in a child
restraint. However, infants, who should be
restrained in a rear-facing child restraint, cannot
ride safely in this vehicle. The instructions for the
restraint will say whether it is the righttype and
size for your child. If a forward-facing child
restraint is suitable for your child, be sure the
child is always properly restrained while riding
in thisvehicle.
A CAUTION:
Never hold a baby in your arms while riding in a
vehicle. A baby doesn’t weigh much until a
crash. During a crash a baby will become so
heavy you can’t hold it. For example, in a crash
CAUTION: (Continued)
--
I
1-36
I
I
CAUTIOPT. ipontinuedi
at only 25mph (40 km/h), a 12-1b. (5.5 kg) baby
will suddenly become a 240-lb. (110 kg) force on
your arms. The babywould be almost impossible
to hold.
Child Restraints
Be sure the child restraint is designed to beused in a
vehicle. If it is, it will have a label saying that it meets
Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards.
Then follow the instructions forthe restraint. You may
find these instructionson the restraint itself or in a
booklet, or both. These restraintsuse the belt system in
your vehicle, but the child also hasto besecured within
the restraint to help reduce the chanceof personal injury.
The instructions that come with the infant or child
restraint will show you how to do that.
passenger air bag,neuer put a rear-facing child restraint
in the front passenger seat. Here’s why:
IA
I
CAUTION:
A child in a rear-facing child restraint can be
seriously injured if the right frontpassenger’s
air bag inflates. This isbecause the back of a
rear-facing child restraint would be very closeto
the inflatingair bag. If your vehicle has a right
front passenger’s air bag, always secure a
rear-facing child restraint in a rear
seat.
You may, however,secure a forward-facingchild
restraint in the right frontseat. Before you secure
a forward-facingchild restraint, always movethe
front passenger seat as far back as itwill go. Or,
secure the child restraint in arear seat.
Where to Put the Restraint (Except Cargo
Vans and Cab and Chassis Models)
Wherever you install it, be sure to securethe child
-estraint properly.
Accident statistics showthat children are saferif they
are restrained in the rear rather than the front seat. We at
General Motors therefore recommend that you put your
child restraint in a rear seat. If your vehicle has a front
Keep in mind that an unsecured child restraint can move
around in a collisionor sudden stop and injure people in
the vehicle. Be sure to properly secure any child
restraint in your vehicle -- even when no child is in it.
1-37
Where to.Put the Restraint (Cargo Vans
and Cab and Chassis Models)
Top Strap
The childrestraint must be secured properly in the
passenger seat. If your vehicle has a passenger air bag,
never-put a rear-facing child restraint in this vehicle.
Here's why:
r"
A child in a rear-facing child restraint can be
seriously injured if the passenger's air bag
inflates. Thisis because the back of a rear-facing
child restraint would be very closeto the inflating
air bag. Do not use a rear-facing child restraint in
this vehicle.
If a forward-facing child restraint is suitable for
your child, always movethe passenger seat asfar
back as itwill go.
Keep in mind that an unsecured child restraint can move
around in a collision or sudden stop and injure people
in the vehicle. Be sure to properly secure any child
restraint in your vehicle' -- even when no child is in it.
1-38
If your child restraint has a top strap, itshould be
anchored. If you need to have an anchor installed, you
can askyour GM dealer to put it in for you. If you want
to install an anchor yourself, your 'dealer can
tell you
how to do it.
Securing a Child Restraint in a Rear
Outside Seat Position
around the restraint. The child restraint instructions
will show you how.
If the shoulder belt goes in front of the child’s face or
neck, put it behind the child restraint.
You’ll be using the lap-shoulder belt.See the earlier part
about the top strap if the child restraint has one.
1. Put the restraint on the seat. Follow the instructions
for the child restraint.
2. Secure the child in the child restraint as the
instructions say.
3. Pick up the latch plate, and run the lap and shoulder
portions of the vehicle’s safety belt through or
4. Buckle the belt. Make sure the release button is
positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the
safety belt quickly if you ever had to.
1-39
5. Pull the rest of the shoulder beltall the way out of
the retractor to set the lock.
6. To tighten the belt, feed the shoulder belt back
into the retractor while you push down on the
child restraint.
7. Push and pull the child restraint in different
directions to be sure it is secure.
To remove the child restraint, just unbuckle the vehicle’s
safety belt and let it go back all the way. The safety belt
will move freely again and be ready to work for an adult
or larger child passenger.
1-40
Securing a Child Restraintin a
Center Seat Position
You’ll be using the lap belt.
I . Make the belt as long aspossible by tilting the latch
plate and pulling it along the belt.
See the earlier part about the top strap if the child
restraint has one.
2. Put the restraint on the seat. Follow the instructions
for the child restraint.
3. Secure the child in the child restraint as the
instructions say.
1-41
4. Run the vehicle’s safety belt through or around the
restraint. The child restraint instructions will show
you how.
7. Push and pull the child restraint in different
directions to be sure it is secure. If it isn’t, secure the
restraint in a different place in the vehicle and
contact the child restraint maker for their advice
about how to attach the child restraint properly.
To remove the child restraint, just unbuckle the vehicle’s
safety belt. It will be ready to work for an adult or larger
child passenger.
Securing a Child Restraintin the Right
Front Seat Position
5. Buckle the belt. Make sure the release button is
positioned so you would be able tounbuckle the
safety belt quickly if you ever had to.
6. To tighten the belt, pull its free end while you push
down on the child restraint.
1-42
If your vehicle has a front passenger air bag,
n.ever put a
rear-facing child restraint in this seat.Here’s why:
You’ll be using the lap-shoulder belt. See the earlier part
about the top strap if the child restraint has one.
I A CAUTION:
-
1. If your vehicle has a front passenger air bag, always
A child in a rear-facingchild restraint can be
seriously injured if the front passenger’s air bag
inflates. This is because the back of a rear-facing
child restraint would be very close to the inflating
air bag. If your vehicle is a passenger van, always
secure a rear-facingchild restraint in a rear seat.
If your vehicle is a cargovan, do not use a
rear-facing child restraint in thisvehicle. If a
forward-facing child restraint is suitable for your
child, always move the passenger seat as far back
as it will go.
move the seat as farback as it will go before
securing a forward-facing childrestraint. (See
“Seats” in the Index.)
2. Put the restraint on the seat. Follow the instructions
for the child restraint.
3. Secure the child in the child restraint as the
instructions say.
4. Pick up the latch plate, and run the lap and shoulder
portions of the vehicle’s safety belt through or
around the restraint. The childrestraint instructions
will show you how.
If the shoulder belt goes in front of the child’s face or
neck, put it behind the child restraint.
1-43
5. Buckle the belt. Make sure the release button is
positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the
safety belt quickly if you ever had to.
1-44
6. Pull the rest of the shoulder belt all the way out of
the retractor to set the lock.
Larger Children
.,
7. To tighten the belt, feed the shoulderbelt back
into the retractor while you push down on the
child restraint.
8. Push and pull the child restraint in different
directions to be sure it is secure.
To remove the childrestraint, just unbuckle the vehicle’s
safety belt and let it go back all the way. The safety belt
will move freely again and be ready to work for an adult
or larger child passenger.
Children whohave outgrown child restraints should
wear the vehicle’s safety belts.
If you have the choice, a child should sit next to a
window so the child can wear a lap-shoulder belt and
get the additional restraint a shoulder belt canprovide.
1-45
Accident statistics show that children are safer if they
are restrained in the rear seat. But they need to use the
safety belts properly.
Children who aren’t buckled up can be thrown out in
a crash.
Children who aren’t buckled up can strike other
people who are.
1-46
Never do this.
Here two children are wearing the same belt. The
belt can’t properly spread theimpact forces. In a
crash, thetwo children can be crushed together
and seriously injured. A belt must be used by
only one person at a time.
Q:
What if a child is wearing a lap-shoulder belt,
but thechild is so small that the shoulder belt is
very closeto the child’s face or neck?
A:
Move the child toward the center of the vehicle, but
be sure that the shoulder belt still is on the child’s
shoulder, so that in a crash thechild’s upper body
would have the restraint that belts provide. If the
child is so small that the shoulder belt is still very
close to the child’s face or neck, you might want to
place the child in a seat that has a lap belt, if your
vehicle has one.
Never do this.
Here a child issitting in a seat that has a
lap-shoulder belt, but the shoulder part is behind
the child. If the child wears the belt in this way, in
a crash thechild might slide under thebelt. The
belt’s force would then be applied right on the
child’s abdomen. That could cause serious or
fatal injuries.
Wherever the child sits,the lap portion of the belt
should be worn low and snug on the hips, just touching
the child’s thighs. This applies belt forceto the child’s
pelvic bones in a crash.
1-47
Safety Belt Extender
If the vehicle’s safety belt will fasten around you, you
Replacing Restraint System Parts
After a Crash
should use it.
If you’ve had a crash, do you need new belts?
But if a safety belt isn’t long enough to fasten,your
dealer will order you an extender. It’s free. When you go
in to order it, take the heaviest coat you will wear, so the
extender will be long enough for you. The extenderwill
be justfor you, and just for the seat in your vehicle that
you choose. Don’t let someone else use it, and use it
only for the seat it is made to fit. To wear it, just attach it
to the regular safety belt.
After a very minor collision, nothing may be necessary.
But if the belts were stretched, as they would be if worn
during a more severe crash,then you need new belts.
Checking Your Restraint Systems
Now and then, make sure the safety belt reminder light
and all your belts, buckles, latch plates, retractors and
anchorages areworking properly. Look for any other
loose or damaged safety belt system parts. Tf you see
anything that might keep a safety belt system from
doing itsjob, have it repaired.
Torn or frayed safety belts may not protect you in a
crash. They can rip apart under impact forces. If a belt is
torn or frayed, get a new one right away.
Also look for any opened or broken air bag covers, and
have them repaired or replaced. (The air bag system
does not need regular maintenance.)
1-48
I f belts are cut or damaged, replace them. Collision
damage also may mean you will need to have safety belt
or seatparts repaired or replaced. New parts and repairs
may be necessary even if the belt wasn’t being used at
the time of the collision.
If an air bag inflates, you’ll need to replace air bag
system parts. See the part on the air bag system earlier in
this section.
NOTES
1-49
NOTES
1-50
Section 2 FeaturesandControls
Here you can learn about the many standard and
optional features on your vehicle, and information on
starting, shifting and braking. Also explained arethe
instrument panel and the warning systems that tell you
if everything is working properly -- and what to do if
you have a problem.
Keys
Leaving young children in a vehicle with the
ignition key is dangerous for many reasons.
A child or others couldbe badly injured or
even killed.
They could operate power windowsor other
controls or even make the vehicle move.
Don't
leave the keys in a vehicle with young children.
2-1
Your vehicle has one
double-sided key for the
ignition and all door locks.
The bar-coded tag has a code on it that tells your dealer
or a qualified locksmith how to make extra keys. Keep
this tag in a safe place. If you lose your key, you’ll be
able to have a new one made easily using this tag.
NOTICE:
If you ever lose your key, your dealer will be able to
assist you with obtaining a new one.
2-2
Your vehiclehas a number of new features that
can help prevent theft. But you can have a lot of
trouble getting into yourvehicle if youever lock
your key inside. You may even have to damage
your vehicle to get in. So be sure you have an
extra key.
To lock the door fromthe
inside, slide the lever on
your door down.
Door Locks
A CAUTION:
To unlock the door, slide
the lever up.
Unlocked doors canbe dangerous.
Passengers especially children can easily
open the doorsand fall out.When a door is
locked, the inside handle won’t open it.
Outsiders can easily enter through anunlocked
!.
door when you slowdown or stop your vehicle
This may not be so obvious: You increase the
chance of being thrown outof the vehicle in a
crash if the doors aren’tlocked. Wear safety b
properly, lock your doors,and you will befar
better off whenever you drive your vehicle.
--
--
Power Door Locks (Option)
Press the bottom side of the
power door lock switch to
lock the doors at once.
There are several waysto lock and unlock your vehicle.
From the outside, use your key.
When a door is locked, the inside door handle will notwork.
2-3
Child Security Locks
Child security locks are located on the passenger side
rear cargo door,the side sliding door or the front portion
of the 60/40 side swing out door.
1
1
With this feature, you can
I
r
CHILD
SECURITY
LOCK
Move the button to
the left to engage the
security feature. Move
the button to the right to
return the door locks to
normal operation.
dI
Side Sliding Door
Printed In U.S.A.
I
I
Rear Cargo Door
2-4
to normal operation.
Keyless Entry SysteeJ
If your vehicle has this option,you can lock and unlock
your doors fromup to 30 feet (9 m) away using the key
chain transmitter suppliedwith your vehicle.
Your Keyless Entry System operates on a radio
frequency subject to Federal Communications
Commission (FCC) Rules.
Changes or modifications to this system by other than an
authorized service facility could void authorization to
use this equipment.
Operation
BfF
This device complieswith Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
Operation is subjectto the following two conditions:
( 1) This device may not cause harmful interference,
and (2) This device must accept any interference
received, including interference thatmay cause
undesired operation.
Should interference to this system occur, try this:
0
Check to determine if battery replacement is
necessary. See the instructions on battery
replacement.
0
Check the distance. You may be too far from your
vehicle. This product has a maximum range.
0
Check the location. Other vehiclesor objects may
be blocking the signal.
0
See your GM dealer or a qualified technician
for service.
To unlock the driver’s door, press the UNLOCK button.
If you press this button again within five seconds, all
the doors will unlock. Press the REAR button to unlock
the rear door only. When the UNLOCK or REAR button
is pressed, the interior dome lamps are turned on for
40 seconds or until the ignition switch is activated.
2-5
MatchingTransmitter(s) To YourVehicle
Each key chain transmitter is coded to prevent another
transmitter from unlocking your vehicle. If a transmitter
is lost or stolen, a replacement can be purchased through
your dealer. Remember to bring any remaining
transmitters with you when you go to your dealer. When
the dealer matches the replacement transmitter to your
vehicle, any remaining transmitters must also be
matched. Once the new transmitter is coded, the lost
transmitter will not unlock your vehicle. Each vehicle
can have only two transmitters matched to it.
2. Twist the dime to separate the two halves of the
transmitter housing. Separate the housing, bottom
half first.
Battery Replacement
Under normal use, the batteries in your key chain
transmitter should last about two years.
You can tell the batteries are weak if the transmitter
won’t work at the normal range in any location. I f you
have toget close to your vehicle before the transmitter
works, it’s probably time to change the batteries.
3. Remove and replace the batteries. Put the new
batteries in with the printed side down.
Use two Duracell@type DL2016 batteries or a similar
type. To replace the batteries:
4. Align the halves of the housing and snap
them together.
1. Insert a dime in the side seam of the transmitter
housing near the key ring hole.
2-6
Your Doors and How They Work
Front Doors
To open the door from the outside, pull the handle and
pull the door open.
To open the door from the inside, pull the lever toward
you and push the door open.
60140 Swing-Out Side Door
To open the “60” (front) portion of a 60/40 door from
the inside, pull the handle toward you and push open
the door.
To open the “60” (front) portion of a 60/40 door from
the outside, pull up on the handle and pull the handle
toward you.
2-7
To open the door beyond 90 degrees, close the door
partially, pull the check strap outward at the spring hole
and then open the door. When you close the. door, the
check strap will automatically re-engage.
Sliding Side Door (Option)
To open the “40” (rear) portion of a 60/40 door from the
outside, pull the handle on the side of the rear door and
pull it toward you.
To close the side doors, close the “40” (rear) door first.
Then close the “60” (front) door. Check to make sure
both doors are completely closed.
The front side swing-out door has a check strap
assembly in the door frame to keep the door from
opening beyond 90 degrees.
2-8
To open the sliding side door from outside, pull the
handle toward the rear of the vehicle. Then, slide the
door toward the rear of the vehicle to open.
To close the sliding side door from outside, use the
outside door handle to slide the door toward the front of
the vehicle.
When the door slides shut completely, it will be flush
with the side of the body.
To open the sliding door from inside, pull the handle and
slide the door toward the rear of the vehicle.
Rear Doors
To close the sliding door from inside, grasp the inside
handle and slide the door toward the front of the vehicle
to a closed position.
Make sure the door is completely shut before driving
your vehicle.
2-10
To open the rear doors from the outside, open the
passenger side rear door first. Pull the the handle toward
you to open the door.
A CAUTION:
To open the driver side rear door, pull the latch release
lever at the inside edge of the door.
Both rear doors canbe opened past 90 degrees by
opening the doors past the first detent (90 degrees open),
then opening fully.
To close the rear doors, close the driver side rear door
first. Then, closethe passenger side rear door. Check to
make sure both doors are completely closed.
It can be dangerous to drivewith the rear doors
open because carbon monoxide (CO) gas can
come into your vehicle. You can’t see or smell
CO. It can cause unconsciousness and even death.
If you must drive with the reardoors open or if
electrical wiring or othercable connections must
pass through the seal between the body and the
rear doors:
0 Make sure all windows are shut.
0 l b r n the fan on your heating or cooling
system to its highest speed with the setting
on VENT, HEAT, BLEND or DEF.
Additionally, on vehicles with heatinglair
conditioning systems, NORM A/C or
BI-LEV A/C can be used. That will force
outside air into your vehicle. See “Comfort
Controls” in theIndex.
If you have air outlets onor under the
instrument panel, open them all theway.
See “Engine Exhaust” in theIndex.
2-11
Theft
Parking at Night
Vehicle theft is big business, especially in some
cities. Although your vehicle has a number of
theft-deterrent features, we know that nothing we
put on it can make it impossible to steal. However,
there are ways you can help.
Park in a lighted spot, closeall windows and lock your
vehicle. Remember to keep your valuables out of sight.
Put them in a storage area, or take them with you.
Key in the Ignition
If you leave your vehicle with the keys inside, it’s an
easy target for joy riders or professional thieves -- so
don’t do it.
When you park your vehicle and open the driver’s
door, you’ll hear a tone remindingyou to remove your
key from the ignition and take it with you. Always do
this. Your steering wheel will be locked, and so will
your ignition and transmission. And remember to lock
the doors.
2-12
Parking Lots
If you park in a lot where someone will be watching
your vehicle, it’s best to lock it up and take your keys.
But what if you have to leave your ignition key? What
if you have to leave something valuable in your vehicle?
Put your valuables in a storage area, like your
glove box.
Lock all the doors except the driver’s.
New Vehicle “Break-In”
Your key lets you turn the ignition switch to five
different positions.
NOTICE:
Your modern vehicle doesn’t needan elaborate
“break-in.” But it will perform betterin the long
run if you followthese guidelines:
0 Keep your speed at 55 mph (88 km/h) or
less for the first500 miles (804 km).
0 Don’t1 drive at any one speed
fast or
slow for thefirst 500 miles -(SO4km).7
Don’t make full-throttlestarts.
0 Avoid making hard stops for the first
200 miles (322 km) or so. During thistime
your new brake linings aren’t yet broken
in. Hard stops with new linings can mean
premature wear and earlierreplacement.
Follow this breaking-inguideline every
time you get newbrake linings.
0 Don’t towa trailer duringbreak-in. See
“Towing a Trailer” in the Indexfor more
information.
--
Ignition Switch
C
I
--
E
ACCESSORY (A): ACCESSORY lets you use
things like the radio, power windows and the
windshield wipers when the engine is off. To get into
ACCESSORY, push in the key and turn it toward you.
Your steering wheel will remain locked,just as it was
before you inserted the key.
2-13
LOCK (B): This position locks your ignition, steering
wheel and transmission. It’s a theft-deterrent feature.
You will only be able to remove your key when the
Starting Your Gasoline Engine
If you have a diesel engine, see “Starting Your Diesel
Engine” in the Diesel Engine Supplement.
ignition is turned to LOCK.
Move your shift lever to PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N).
Your engine won’t start in any other position -- that’s a
safety feature. To restart when you’re already moving,
use NEUTRAL (N) only.
OFF (C): This position lets you turn off the engine but
still turn the steering wheel. It doesn’t lock the steering
wheel like LOCK. Use OFF if you must have your
vehicle in motion while the engine is off (for example,
if your vehicle is being pushed).
I NOTICE:
RUN (D): This is the position for driving.
START (E): This starts your engine.
I NOTICE:
If your key seemsstuck in LOCK and you can’t
turn it, be sure it is all the way in. If it is, then
turn the steeringwheel left and right while you
turn the key hard. But turn the key only with
your hand. Using a tool to force it could break
the key or the ignition switch. If none of this
works, then your vehicle needs service.
2-14
~
Don’t try to shiftto PARK (P) if your vehicle
is moving. If you do, you could damage the
transmission. Shift to PARK (P) only when
your vehicle is stopped.
1. Without pushing the accelerator pedal, turn your
ignition key to START. When the engine starts, let
go of the key, The idle speed will go down as your
engine gets warm.
NOTICE:
Holding your key in START for longer than
15 seconds at a time will cause your battery tobe
drained much sooner. And the excessive heat can
damage yourstarter motor.
2. If it doesn’t start right away, hold your key in
START. If it doesn’t start in 10 seconds, push the
accelerator pedal all the way down for five more
seconds, or until it starts.
NOTICE:
Your engine is designed to work with the
electronics in your vehicle. If youadd electrical
parts oraccessories, you could change the way
the engine operates. Before adding electrical
equipment, check with your dealer. If you don’t,
your engine might not perform properly.
If you ever have to have your vehicle towed, see
the part of this manual thattells how to do it
without damaging your vehicle. See “Towing
Your Vehicle” in the Index.
3. If your engine still won’t start (or starts but then
stops), wait 15 seconds and start over.
When the engine starts, let go of the key and the
accelerator pedal.
2-15
Engine Coolant Heater (Option)
Plugging the cord into an ungrounded outlet
could cause an electrical shock. Also, the wrong
kind of extension cord could overheat and cause
a fire. You could be seriously injured. Plug the
cord intoa properly grounded three-prong
110-volt AC outlet. If the cord won’t reach, use a
heavy-duty three-prong extension cord rated for
at least 15 amps.
-
In very cold weather, 0°F (- 1SOC) or colder, the engine
coolant heater can help. You’ll get easier starting and
better fuel economy during engine warm-up. Usually,
the coolant heater should be plugged in a m i n i m u m of
four hours prior to starting your vehicle.
To use the coolant heater:
1. Turn off the engine.
2. Open the hood and unwrap the electrical cord.
3. Plug it into a normal, grounded 1 10-volt AC outlet.
2-16
4. After you’ve used the coolant heater, be sure to store
the cord as it was before to keep it away from moving
engine parts. If you don’t, it could be damaged.
How long should you keep the coolant heater plugged
in? The answer dependson the outside temperature, the
kind of oil you have, and some other things. Instead of
trying to list everything here, we ask that you contact a
GM dealer in the area where you’ll be parking your
vehicle. The dealer can give you the best advice for that
particular area.
Automatic Transmission Operation
There are several different
positions for your shift lever.
If your vehicle is equipped with an automatic
transmission, it now features an electronic shift position
indicator within the instrument cluster. This display
must be powered anytime the shift lever is capable of
being moved out of the PARK (P) position. This means
that if your key is in the OFF position, but not locked,
there will be a small current drain on your battery which
could discharge your battery over a period of time. If
you have a need to leave your key in the ignition in the
OFF position for an extended period for any reason, it is
recommended that you disconnect the battery cable from
the battery to prevent discharging your battery.
PARK (P): This locks your rear wheels. It’s the best
position to use when you start your engine because your
vehicle can’t move easily.
A CAUTIO
:
It is dangerous toget out of your vehicle ifthe
shift lever is not fully in PARK (P) with the
parking brake firmlyset. Your vehiclecan roll.
Don’t leave your vehicle when the engine is
running unless youhave to. If you have left the
engine running, the vehicle can move suddenly.
You or others could be injured. To be sure your
vehicle won’t move, even when you’re on
fairly
level ground, always set your parkingbrake and
move the shift lever to PARK (P).
See “Shifting Into PARK (P)” in the Index. If
you’re pulling a trailer, see “Towinga Trailer’’
in the Index.
Your vehicle has a brake-transmission shift interlock.
With the ignition in the RUN position, you must fully
apply your regular brakes before you can shift from
PARK (P).
2-17
’
If you cannot shiftout of PARK (P), ease pressure on
the shift lever andpush the shift lever all the way into
PARK (P) asyou continue pressing the brake pedal.
Then move the shift lever into the gear you want. If you
still cannotshift the shift lever outof PARK (P), see
“Shifting Out of PARK (P)” later in this section.
REVERSE (R): Use this gear to backup.
NOTICE:
U
Shifting out of PARK (P)or NEUTRAL (N)
while your engine is“racing” (running at high
speed) isdangerous. Unless your foot is firmly
on the brake pedal, your vehicle could move
very rapidly. You could losecontrol andhit
people or objects. Don’t shift outof PARK (P)
or NEUTRAL (N) while your engine is racing.
Shifting into REVERSE (R)while your vehicle is
moving forward could damage your transmission.
Shift to REVERSE (R) onlyafter your vehicle
I
is stopped.
To rock yourvehicle back and forth to get out of snow,
ice or sandwithout damaging yourtransmission, see
“Stuck: In Sand, Mud, Ice or Snow”in the Index.
NEUTRAL (N): In this position, your enginedoesn’t
connect with the wheels. To restart when you’re
already moving, use NEUTRAL, (N) only. Also, use
NEUTRAL (N) when your vehicle is being towed.
2-18
NOTICE:
Damage to your transmission caused by shifting
out of PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N) with the
engine racing isn’t coveredby your warranty.
DRIVE (D): This position is for normal driving. If you
FIRST (1): This position gives you even more power
need more power for passing, and you’re:
(but lower fuel economy) than SECOND (2). You can
use it on very steep hills, or in deep snow or mud. If
the selector lever is put in FIRST (l),the transmission
won’t shift into first gear until the vehicle is going
slowly enough.
Going less than about 35 mph (56 km/h), push your
accelerator pedal about halfway down.
Going about 35 mph (56 k d h ) or more, push the
accelerator all the way down.
You’ll shift down to the next gear and have more power.
You should use DRIVE (D) (or, as you need to, a lower
gear) when towing a trailer. Operating your vehicle in
DRIVE (D) when towing a trailer will minimize heat
build-up and extend the life of your transmission.
THIRD (3): This position is also used for normal
driving, however, it offers more power and lower fuel
economy than DRIVE (D).You should use THIRD(3)
when carrying a heavy load or driving on steep hills.
SECOND (2): This position gives you more power
but lower fuel economy.You can use SECOND (2)
on hills. It can help control yourspeed as you go
down steep mountainroads, but then you would also
want to use your brakes off and on. If you manually
select SECOND (2), the transmission will drive in
second gear. You may use this feature for reducing
torque to the rear wheels when you are trying to start
your vehicle from a stopon slippery road surfaces.
NOTICE:
- -
--
If your rear wheels can’t rotate, don’t try
to
drive. This might happen if you are stuck in
very deep sand or mud or are up against a solid
object. You could damage your transmission.
Also, if you stop when going uphill, don’t hold
your vehicle there with only the accelerator
pedal. This could overheat and damage the
transmission. Use your brakesor shift into
PARK (P) to hold your vehicle in positionon
a hill.
2-19
Locking Rear Axle
If you have this feature, your rear axle can give you
additional traction on snow, mud, ice, sand or gravel. It
works like a standard axle most of the time, but when
one of the rear wheels has no traction and the other does,
the locking feature will allow the wheel with traction to
move the vehicle.
Parking Brake
To set the parking brake, hold the regular brake pedal
down with your right foot. Push down the parking brake
pedal with your left foot.
If the ignition is on, the brake system warning light will
come on.
To rclease the parking brake, hold the regular brake
pedal down. PLIII thehandle, located just above the
pal-king brake pedal. marked BRAKE RELEASE to
release the parking brake.
I f the ignition is o n when the parking brake is released,
the brake system warning light will go off.
2-20
NOTICE:
Driving with the parking brakeon can cause
your rear brakes tooverheat. You may have to
replace them, and you could also damage other
parts of your vehicle. Always check to be sure
your parking brake is fully released before
you drive.
If you are towing a trailer and are parking o n any hill,
see “Towing a Trailer” in the Index. That section shows
what to do first to keep the trailer from moving.
Shifting I: :o 11 C (P)
I A CAUTIJN:
I
It can be dangerous toget out of your vehicle if
the shift lever is not fully in PARK (P) with the
parking brakefirmly set. Your vehiclecan roll.
If you have left the engine running, the vehicle
can move suddenly. You or others could be
injured. To be sure your vehicle won’t move,
even when you’re onfairly level ground, use the
steps thatfollow. If you’re pulling a trailer, see
“Towing a Trailer” in theIndex.
1. Hold the brake pedal down with your right foot and
set the parking brake.
2. Move the shift lever into PARK (P) position like this:
Move the lever up as far as it will go.
Pull the lever toward you.
2-22
3. Move the ignition key to LOCK.
4. Remove the key and take it with you. I f you can
leave your vehicle with the ignition key in your
hand, your vehicle is in PARK (P).
Leaving Your Vehicle With the
Engine Running
A CAUTION:
It canbe dangerous to leave your vehicle with
the engine running.Your vehicle could move
suddenly if the shift leveris not fully inPARK (P)
with the parking brake firmly set. And, if you
leave the vehicle with the engine running, it could
overheat and even catch fire.
You or others could
be injured. Don’t leave your vehicle with the
engine running unless you have to.
Torque Lock
If you are parking on a hill and you don’t shift your
transmission into PARK (P) properly, the weight of the
vehicle may put too much force on the parking pawl in
the transmission. You may find it difficult topull the
shift lever out of PARK (P). This is called “torque
lock.”
To prevent torque lock, set the parking brake and then
shift into PARK (P) properly before you leave the
driver’s seat. To find out how, see “Shifting Into
PARK (P)” in the Index.
When you are ready to drive, move the shift lever out of
PARK (P) before you release the parking brake.
If torque lock does occur, you may need to have another
vehicle push yours a little
uphill to take some of the
pressure from the transmission,so you can pull the shift
lever outof PARK (P).
Shifting Out of PARK (P)
Your vehicle has a brake-transmission shift interlock
system. You have to fully apply your regular brakes
before you can shift from PARK (P). See “Automatic
Transmission” in the Index.
If you cannot shiftout of PARK (P), ease pressureon
the shift lever and push the shift lever all the way up
into PARK (P) as you maintain brake application. Then,
move the shift lever intothe gear you want.
If you ever hold the brake pedal down but still can’t
shift out of PARK (P), try this:
1. Turn the key to OFF.
2. Apply and hold the brake until the end of Step 4.
3. Shift to NEUTRAL (N).
4. Start the vehicle andthen shift to the drive gear you
want.
5. Have the brake-transmission shift interlock system
fixed as soon as you can.
2-23
Parking Over Things That Burn
Engine Exhaust
A CAU‘-ION:
Things that can burn could touch hot exhaust
parts underyour vehicle and ignite. Don’t park
over papers, leaves, dry grass or other things that
can burn.
2-24
Engine exhaust can kill. It contains the gas
carbon monoxide (CO),which you can’t see or
smell. It can cause unconsciousness and death.
You might have exhaust coming in if:
Your exhaust system sounds strange
or different.
Your vehicle gets rusty underneath.
Your vehicle was damaged in a collision.
Your vehicle was damaged when driving over
high points on the road or over road debris.
Repairs weren’t done correctly.
Your vehicle or exhaust system had been
modified improperly.
If you ever suspect exhaust is coming into
your vehicle:
0 Drive it only with all the windows down to
blow out any CO; and
0 Have your vehicle fixed immediately.
Running Your Engine While
You’re Parked
It’s better not to park with the engine running. ifBut
you
ever have to, here are some things know.
to
Idling theengine with the air system control off
could allowdangerous exhaust into your
vehicle
(see the earlier Caution under
“Engine
Exhaust”).
Also, idling in a closed-in place can let deadly
carbon monoxide (CO) into yourvehicle evenif
the fanswitch is at the highest setting. One place
this can happenis a garage. Exhaust with
CO can come in easily. NEVER park in a
garage with the engine running.
Another closed-in place can be a blizzard.
(See “Blizzard” in theIndex.)
--
--
It can be dangerous toget out of your vehicle if
the shiftlever isnot fully in PARK (P) with the
parking brake firmlyset. Your vehiclecan roll.
Don’t leave your vehicle whenthe engine is
running unless you have to. If you’ve left the
engine running, thevehicle can move suddenly.
You or otherscould be injured.To be sure your
vehicle won’t move, even when you’re
on fairly
level ground, always set your parkingbrake and
move the shiftlever to PARK (P).
Follow the proper steps to be sure your vehicle won’t
move. See “Shifting IntoPARK (P)” in the Index.
If you’re pullinga trailer, see“To,wing a Trailer” in
the Index.
L
2-25
Manual Windows
The driver’s door has a switch for the passenger
window as well. Your power windows will work when
the ignition has been turned to the RUN position.
To operate your manual windows, turn the hand crank
on each door to raise or lower your side door windows.
Push the rear of the switch with the power window
symbol on it to lower the window.
Power Windows
Push the front of the switch with the power window
symbol on it to raise the window.
Windows
The driver’swindow switch also has an express-down
feature that allows the window to lower without holding
the switch. Press and hold the side of the window
switch marked AUTO for one second to activate the
express-down mode. The express-down mode can be
cancelled at any time by pressing the opposite side of
the switch. To open the window part way, lightly tap the
switch until the window is at the desired position.
If you have the optional power windows, the controls
are on each of the side doors.
2-26
Swing-Out Windows
Rear Swing-Out Window
Side Swing-Out Window
To open your side door swing-out windows,pull out the
latch at the edgeof the window, swing the window out
and push down the latch into the locked openposition.
To close the window, pull the latch toward you and push
down on the latch to lock it. Your rear swing-out
windows work the same way, but the latch is at the
bottom edge of the window.
2-27
CAUTION:
It can be dangerous to drivewith the rear
swing-out windows or reardoor(s) open because
carbon monoxide (CO) gas can come into your
vehicle. You can’t see or smell CO.It can cause
unconsciousness and even death.
If you must drive with the rearswing-out
windows or reardoor(s) open or if electrical
wiring or other cable connections must pass
through theseal between the body and the rear
swing-out windows or reardoor(s):
Make sure all windows are shut.
CAUTION: (Continued)
CAUTION: (Continued)
Turn the fan on your heating or cooling
system to itshighest speed with the setting
on VENT, HEAT, BLENDor DEF.
Additionally, on vehicleswith heatingair
conditioning systems, NORM A/Cor
BI-LEV A/C can be used. That will force
outside air into your vehicle. See“Comfort
Controls” in the Index.
If you have air outlets on or under the
instrument panel, open them all the way.
See “Engine Exhaust” in the Index.
Horn
Press one of the horn buttons at each side of the steering
wheel to sound the horn.
2-28
Tilt Wheel (Option)
Turn SignaVMultifunctionLever
A tilt steering wheel allows you to adjust the steering
wheel before you drive. You can also raise it to the
highest level to give your legs more room when you
enter and exit the vehicle.
The lever on the left side of the steering column
includes your:
0 Turn Signal and Lane Changer
To tilt the wheel, hold the steering wheel and pull the
lever. Move the steering wheel to a comfortable level,
then release the lever to lock the wheel in place.
0
Headlamp High/Low Beam Changer
0
Windshield Wipers
0
Windshield Washer
0
Cruise Control (Option)
2-29
’hrn Signal and Lane Change Signals
The turn signal has two upward (for right) and two
downward (for left) positions. These positions allow you
to signal a turn or a lane change.
To signal a turn, move the lever all the way up or down.
When the turn is finished, the lever will return
automatically.
An arrow on the instrument
panel will flash in the
direction of the turn or
lane change.
As you signal a turn or a lane change, if the arrows flash
at twice the normal rate, a signal bulb may be burned
out and other drivers may not see your turn signal.
If a bulb is burned out, replace it to help avoid an
accident. If.the arrowsdon’t go on at all when you
signal a turn,check for burned-out bulbs and a blown
fuse (see “Fuses and Circuit Breakers” in the Index).
Headlamp High/Low Beam Changer
To change the headlamps from low beam to high or high
to low, pull the multifunction lever all the way toward
you. Then release it.
When the high beams
are on, this light on the
instrument panel also
will be on.
To signal a lane change,just raise or lower the lever
until the arrow starts to flash. Hold it there until you
complete your lane change. The lever will return by
itself when you release it.
2-30
.
-
Windshield Wipers
You control the windshield
wipers by turning the band
with the wiper symbol on it.
For a single wiping cycle, turn the band to MIST. Hold
it there until the wipers start, then let go. The wipers will
stop after one cycle. If you want more cycles, hold the
band on MIST longer.
You can set the wiper speed for a long or short delay
between wipes. This can be very useful in light rain or
snow. Turn the band to choose the delay time. The
closer to LOW, the shorter the delay.
For steady wiping at low speed, turn the band to
the LOW position. For high-speed wiping, turn the
band further, to HIGH. To stop the wipers, move the
band to OFF.
Remember that damaged wiper blades may prevent
you from seeing well enough to drive safely. To
avoid damage, be sure to clear ice and snow from the
wiper blades before using them. If they are frozen to
the windshield, carefully loosen or thaw them. If
your blades do become damaged, get new blades or
blade inserts.
Heavy snow or ice can overload your wipers. The
windshield wiper motor is protected from overload
by a circuit breaker and a fuse. If the motor overheats
due to heavy snow, etc., the wiper will stop until the
motor cools. Although the circuit is protected from
electrical overload, overload due toheavy snow, etc.
may cause wiper linkage damage. Always clear ice
and heavy snow from the windshield before using your
windshield wipers.
2-31
Windshield Washer
Cruise Control (Option)
At the top of the lever, there’s a paddle with the word
PUSH on it.To spray washer fluid on the windshield,
push the paddle.
With cruise control, you can maintain a speed of about
25 mph (40 kmk) or more without keeping your foot
on the accelerator. This can really help on long trips.
Cruise control does not work at speeds below about
25 mph (40 krnk).
Washer fluid will spray as long as you push the paddle.
When you let go of the paddle, the wipers will continue
to wipe for approximately two more wipe cycles and
then either stop orreturn to the preset speed.
When you apply your brakes, the cruise control
shuts off.
Driving without washer fluid can be dangerous. A
bad mud splash can block your vision. You could hit
another vehicle or go off the road. Check your washer
fluid level often.
I
A CAUTION:
In freezing weather, don’t use your washer until
the windshield is warmed. Otherwise the washer
fluid can form ice on the windshield, blocking
your vision.
2-32
A CAUTION:
I
I
Cruise control can be dangerous where you
can’t drive safely at a steady speed. So,
don’t use your cruise controlon winding
roads or in heavy traffic.
Cruise control can be dangerous on
slippery roads. On such roads, fast changes
in tire tractioncan cause needless wheel
spinning, and you could lose control. Don’t
use cruise control on slippery roads.
Resuming a Set Speed
Setting Cruise Control
I
~
A
CAUTION:
I
If you leaveyour cruise control switch on when
you’re not using cruise, you might hit a button
and go into cruise when you don’t want to. You
could bestartled andeven lose control. Keepthe
cruise control switch OFF until you want to use it.
1. Move the cruise controlswitch to ON.
2. Get up to the speed you want.
Suppose you set your cruise control at a desired speed
and then you apply the brake. This, of course, shuts off
the cruise control. But you don’t need to reset it.
Once you’re going about25 mph (40 kmh) or more,
you can move the cruise control switch from ON to
R/A (Resume/Accelerate) for abouthalf a second.
You’ll go right back up to your chosen speed and
stay there.
Remember, if you hold the switch at R/A longer than
half a second, the vehicle will keep going faster until
you release the switch or apply the brake. You could be
startled and even lose control.So unless you want to go
faster, don’t hold the switch at R/A.
3. Press in the SET button
at the end of the lever
and release it.
4. Take your foot off the accelerator pedal.
2-33
Increasing Speed WhileUsing Cruise Control
There are twoways to goto a higher speed:
Use the accelerator pedal to get to the higher speed.
Push the button at the end of the lever, then release
the button and the accelerator pedal. You’ll now
cruise at the higher speed.
Move the cruise switch from ON to R/A. Hold it
there until you get up to the speed you want, and
then release the switch. To increase your speed in
very small amounts, move the switch to R/A for less
than half a second. Each time you do this, your
vehicle will go about 1 mph (1.6 k d h ) faster.
Reducing Speed While Using Cruise Control
There are twoways to reduce your speed while using
cruise control:
Push in the button at the end of the lever until you
reach the lower speed you want, then release it.
To slow down in very small amounts, push the
button for lessthan half a second. Each time you do
this, you’ll go 1 mph (1.6 k d h ) slower.
Passing Another Vehicle While Using Cruise Control
Use the accelerator pedal to increase your speed. When
you take your foot off the pedal, your vehicle will slow
down to the cruise control speed you set earlier.
2-34
Using Cruise Controlon Hills
How well your cruise control will work on hills depends
upon your speed, load and the steepness of the hills.
When going up steep hills, you may have to step on
the accelerator pedal to maintain your speed. If the
steepness of the hill causes the vehicle speed to drop
more than 15 mph (9.4 km/h) below the set speed, your
cruise control will automatically disengage. When going
downhill, you may have to brake or shift to a lower gear
to keep your speed down. Of course, applying the brake
takes you out of cruise control. Many drivers find this to
be too much trouble and don’t use cruise control on
steep hills.
Ending Cruise Control
There are two ways to turn off the cruise control:
Step lightly on the brake pedal; or
Move the cruise switch to OFF.
Erasing Speed Memory
When you turn off the cruise control or the ignition,
your cruise control set speed memory is erased.
Lamps
When the wheel is turned to full brightness, and then
into the first detent position, the radio display and
PRNDL display will go to the day mode (full intensity).
This is known as “parade” mode. The rest of the I/P
illumination will stay in the maximum dimming state
(full brightness dimming). Turning the wheel up one
more detent will activate the interior dome light circuit
(with slightly higher effort).
Rotate the switch knob clockwise to the parking lamp
symbol to turn on:
0
Parking Lamps
Sidemarker Lamps
Your parking/headlamp switch is on the driver’s
side of your instrument panel.
Your instrument panel dimmer wheel has two
detent positions.
0
Taillamps
0
License Plate Lamps
Instrument Panel Lights
0
Ashtray Lamp
0
Glove Box Lamp
2-35
Rotate the switch knob clockwise again to the master
lighting symbol to turn on all the lamps listed as well as
the headlamps.
Rotate the switch counterclockwise to OFF to turn off
your lamps.
Rotate the thumb wheel next to the switch knob up to
adjust instrument panel lights. Rotate the thumb wheel up
to the first notch to return the radio display and gearshift
indicator display to full intensity when the headlamps or
parking lamps are on.
Rotate the thumb wheel up to the second notch to
activate the interior dome lamps.
You can switch your headlamps from high to low beam
by pulling on the turn signalhigh beam lever.
A circuit breaker protects your headlamps. If you have
an electrical overload, your headlamps will flicker on
and off. Have your headlamp wiring checked right away
if this happens.
Headlamps On Reminder
A buzzer will sound when your headlamps are turned on
and your ignition is in OFF, LOCK or ACCESSORY.
If you need to use your headlamps when the ignition
switch is in OFF, LOCK or ACCESSORY, the buzzer
can beturned off by turning the thumb wheel next to the
parking lampheadlamp switch all the way down.
Daytime Running Lamps(If Equipped)
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) can make it easier for
others to see the front of your vehicle during the day.
DRL can be helpful in many different driving
conditions, but they can be especially helpful in the
short periods after dawn and before sunset.
The DRL system will make your headlamps come on at
a reduced brightness when:
0
The ignition is on,
The headlamp switch is off and
0
The parking brake is released.
If your vehicle was first sold, when new, in Canada,
your headlamps will come on at reduced brightness.
2-36
If your vehicle was first sold, when new, in the United
States, your vehiclemay be equipped with DRL. If your
vehicle has DRL, you will see the the DRL indicator
light on your instrument panel and your low-beam
headlamps will come on at reduced brightness.
When the DRL are on,only your headlamps will be on.
The taillamps, sidemarkerand other lamps won’t be on.
Your instrument panel won’t be lit up either,
When it begins to getdark, your DRL indicator light
is a reminder to turn your headlamp switchon. The
other lamps that come onwith your headlamps will also
come on.
When-you turn off the headlamp switch, the regular
lamps will go off, and your headlampswill change to
the reduced brightnessof DRL.
To idle your vehicle with the engine onand the DRL off,
set the parking brake. The DRLwill stay off until you
release the parking brake.
As with any vehicle, you should turn on the regular
headlamp system when you need it.
Dome Lamps
The dome lamps will come on when you open the doors.
You can also turn the dome lamps on by rotating the
thumb wheel, located next to the headlamp knob, all
the way up to the second notch. In this position, the
dome lamps will remain on whether the doors are
opened or closed.
You can use the dome
lamp button, located
below the headlamp knob,
to set the dome lamps to
automatically come on
when the doors are open,
or to remain off.
To turn the lamps off, push the button once. With the
button in this position, the dome lamps will remain off
when the doors are open.To return the lamps to
automatic operation, push the button again and return it
to the out position. With the button in this position, the
dome lamps will come on when you open the doors.
The delayed entry will allow you to enter or exit your
vehicle with the lamps staying on for about 20 seconds,
after the door is closed or ignition is cycled.
2-37
Underhood Reel Lamp (Option)
Reading Lamps (Option)
I
I f your vehicle has reading lamps, press the button next
to the lamp to turn the lamp on.
Press the button again to turn the lamp off.
2-38
If you have an underhood reel lamp, it is located on the
passenger side of the engine compartment. The lamp can
be switched on without unreeling the cord. Also, you
can use it as a flashlight.
Mirrors
Inside Mirror
Push or pull the tab under the mirror to reduce glare
from headlamps behind you after dark.
Outside Mirrors
Adjust your outside mirrors so you can just see the
side of your vehicle, and have a clear view of objects
behind you. Some mirrors can be folded in to enter
narrow doorways.
Electric Outside RearviewMirrors (Option)
To use the lamp as a flashlight, pull down on the lever
located under the lamp, unlocking the lamp and pull the
lamp out. The cord will unreel as you pull the lamp.
If you have electric mirrors, they can be adjusted to
point where you want from inside the vehicle.
When you are done using the lamp, reel the cord back
into the housing by turning the handle.
Then, slide the lamp into the holder and press the
lever marked PUSH at the bottom of the holder to
lock into place.
2-39
Select the mirror you want
to move by rotating the
switch counterclockwise to
adjust the passenger side
mirror and clockwise to
adjust the driver side
mirror. The center position
is neutral.
Then, adjust the mirror angle by pressing the outer
arrows on the switch until the mirror is adjusted
where you want it.
Your electric outside
rearview mirrors can be
defrosted by pressing the
switch next to the heater
controls. (See “Comfort
Controls” in the Index.)
I
2-40
Convex Outside .Mirror
Your passenger’s side mirror is convex.A convex
mirror’s surface is curved so you can see more from the
driver’s seat.
CAUTION:
A convex mirror can make things (like other
vehicles) look farther away than they really are.
If you cut too sharply into the right lane, you
could hit a vehicle on your right. Check your
inside mirror or glance over your shoulder before
changing lanes.
Storage Compartments
. .
Your front storage compartment is a t the center of the
instrument panel extension, by the floor. To open the
compartment, squeeze and pull the handle at the top.
Storage compartments may also be included on the
inside of each front door.
Sun Visors
To block out glare, you can swing down the visors. You
can also swing them from side to side. Your visors have
elastic straps you can use to hold items such as maps.
2-41
Visor VanityMirror (Option)
Some visors have illuminated mirrors on them. Pull the
visor downand lift the mirror cover (if there is one), to
use themirror.
Cigarette LightedAshtrays
The front ashtray is located in the instrument panel
extension, at the center of the instrument panel. Lift up
on the ashtray door to open it.
I NOTICE:
To use the cigarette lighter, push it in all the way, and let
go. When it’s ready, it will pop back by itself.
NOTICE:
Holding a cigarette lighter in
with your hand
while it is heating can makeit overload,
damaging the lighter and the
heating element.
Just push the lighterall the way in and let go.
When it’s done, it will pop back by itself.
To remove the front ashtray, pull up on the tab with
Papers and other things that burn into your
ashtrays could be set on fire by cigarettes or
other smoking materials. That could cause a
fire andpossibly damage yourvehicle. Do not
store papers and other
things that burnin
your ashtrays.
a key or screw driver inserted in the tab, and lift the
ashtray out.
Instrument Panel
A.
B.
C,
D.
Lamp Controls
Air Vents
Instrument Cluster
Comfort Control System
E. Audio System
E Auxiliary Power Outlet
G . Cupholder
H. Ashtray
I.
J.
K.
L.
CigaretteLighter
Convenience Tray
Horn/Air Bag
Turn SignalAhltifunction Lever
2-43
Instrument Cluster
Your instrument cluster is designed to letyou know at aglance how your vehicle is running. You’ll know
how fast you’re going, how much fuel you’re using, and many other things you’ll need to know to drive safely
and economically.
A
A A
Speedometer
the new odometer can be set to the mileage total of the
old odometer, then it must be. But if it can’t, then it’s set
at zero, and a label must be put on the driver’s door to
show the old mileage reading when the new odometer
was installed.
Trip Odometer
The trip odometer can
tell you how f i r your
vehicle has been driven
since you last set the trip
odometer to zero.
Your speedometer lets you see your speed in both miles
per hour (mph) and kilometers per hour (km/h). Your
odometer shows how far your vehicle has been driven,
in either miles (used in the United States) orkilometers
(used in Canada).
You may wonder what happens if your vehicle needs a
new odometer installed. Laws vary as to the procedure
~ r or
that must be followed, so check with y o ~ state
provincial vehicle registration office. But generally, if
To reset the trip odometer, fu.lly press the reset button
located near the trip odometer readout.
The odometer can show either total miles or trip miles
by using the push control in the cluster.
2-45
Warning Lights, Gages and Indicators
This part describes the warning lights and gages that
may be on your vehicle. The pictures will help you
locate them.
Warning lights and gages can signal that something is
wrong before it becomes seriousenough to causean
expensive repair or replacement. Paying attention to
your warning lights and gages could also saveyou or
others from injury.
Warning lights come on when there may be or is a
problem with one of your vehicle’s functions. As you
will see in the details on the next few pages, some
warning lights come on briefly when you start the
engine just to let you know they’re working. If you are
familiar with this section, you should not be alarmed
when this happens.
Gages canindicate when there may be or is a problem
with one of your vehicle’s functions. Often gages and
warning lights work together to let you know when
there’s a problem with your vehicle.
When one of the warning lights comes on and stays on
when you are driving,or when one of the gages shows
there may be a problem, check the section that tells you
what to do about it. Please follow this manual’s advice.
Waiting to do repairs can be costly-- and even dangerous.
So please get to know your warning lights and gages.
They’re a big help.
Safety Belt Reminder Light
When the key is turned to RUN or START, a tone will
come on for about eight seconds to remind people to
fasten their safety belts, unless the driver’s safety belt is
already buckled.
The safety belt light will
also come onand stay on
for about 20 seconds, then
it will flash for about
55 seconds. If the driver’s
belt is already buckled,
neither the tone nor the
light will come on.
Air Bag Readiness Light
There is an air bag readiness light
on the instrument
panel, which shows AIR BAG. The system checksthe
air bag’s electrical system for malfunctions. The light
tells you if there is an electrical problem. The system
check includes the air bag sensor, the air bagmodules,
the wiring and the crash sensing and diagnostic module.
For more information on the air bag system, see“Air
Bag” in the Index.
AIR
BAG
You will see this light flash
for a few secondswhen you
turn your ignition to RUN
or START. Then the light
should go out. This means
the system is ready.
If the air bag readiness light doesn’t come on when you
start your vehicle, or stays on, or comeson when you
are driving, your air bag system may not work properly.
Have your vehicle serviced rightaway.
Charging System Light
This light should come on
briefly when you turn on the
ignition, before startingthe
engine, as a checkto show
you it is working.
After the engine starts, thelight should go out. If it stays
on or comeson while you are driving, you may have a
problem with your charging system.It could indicate a
problem with the alternator drivebelt, or some other
charging systemproblem. Have it checked right away.
Driving while this light is on could drain your battery.
If you must drive a short distance with this light on, it
helps to turn off all your accessories, such as the radio
and air conditioner.
2-47
Brake System Warning Light
Your vehicle’s hydraulic brake system is divided into
two parts. If one part isn’t working, the other part can
still work and stop you. For good braking, though, you
need both parts working well.
If the light comes on while you are driving, pull off the
road and stop carefully. You may notice that the pedal is
harder to push.Or, the pedal may go closer to the floor.
It may take longer to stop. If the light is still on, have the
vehicle towed for service. (See “Towing Your Vehicle”
in the Index.)
If the warning light comes on,there could be a brake
problem. Have your brake system inspected right away.
Your brake system may not be working properly
if the brake system warning light is on. Driving
with the brake system warning light on can lead
to an accident. If the light is still on after you’ve
pulled off the road and stopped carefully, have
the vehicle towed for service.
BRAKE
United States
Canada
This light should come on briefly when you turn the
ignition key to RUN. If it doesn’t come onthen,
have it fixed so it will be ready to warn you if there’s
a problem.
2-48
When the ignition is on, the brake system warning light
will also coke on when you set your parking brake. The
light will stay on if your parking brake doesn’t release
fully. If it stays on after your parking brake is fully
released, it means you have a brake problem.
Anti-Lock Brake System Warning Light
The anti-lock brake system warning light should come
on briefly when you turn the ignition key to RUN. If the
light doesn’t come on then, have it fixed so it will be
ready to warn you if there is a problem.
Daytime Running Lamps Indicator Light
ANTI LOCK
United States
Canada
With the anti-lock brake system, this light will come on
when you start your engine and may stay on for several
seconds. That’s normal.
You may have this light on
the instrument panel. It will
light whenever the DRL are
on. It is also a reminder to
turn on your headlamps
when driving at night. For
more details about DRL, see
“Headlamps and Vehicle
Lighting” in this section.
If the light stays on, or comes on when you’re driving,
your vehicle needs service. I f the regular brake system
have brakes, but YOLI
warning light isn’t on, y0~1’still
don’t have anti-lock brakes. I f the regular brake system
warning light is also on, you don’t have anti-lock brakes
and there’s a problem with your regular brakes. See
“Brake System Warning Light” earlier in this part.
2-49
Malfunction IndicatorLamp (Service
Engine Soon Light) (Gasoline Engine)
SERVICE
ENGINE SOON
Your vehicle is equipped
with a computer which
monitors operation of the
fuel, ignition and emission
control systems.
This system is called OBD I1 (On-Board
Diagnostics-Second Generation) and is intended to
assure that emissions are at acceptable levels for the
life of the vehicle, helping to produce a cleaner
environment. The SERVICE ENGINE SOON light
comes on to indicate that there is a problem and service
is required. Malfunctions often will be indicated by the
system before any problem is apparent, which may
prevent more serious damage to your vehicle. This
system is also designed to assist your service technician
in correctly diagnosing any malfunction.
2-50
I
NOTICE:
If you keep driving your vehicle with this light
on, aftera while, your emission controls may not
work as well, your fuel economy may not be
as
good and your engine may not run
as smoothly.
This could leadto costly repairs that may not be
covered by your warranty.
This light should come on, as a check to show you it is
working, when the ignition is on and the engine is not
running. If the light doesn’t come on, have it repaired.
This light will also come on during a malfunction in one
of two ways:
Light Flashing -- A misfire condition has been
detected. A misfire increases vehicle emissions and
may damage the emission control system on your
vehicle. Dealer or qualified service center diagnosis
and service is required.
0
Light On Steady -- An emission control system
malfunction has been detected on your vehicle.
Dealer or qualified service center diagnosis and
service may be required.
If the Light Is Flashing
Are you low on fuel?
The following may prevent more serious damage to
your vehicle:
0 Reduce vehicle speed.
0 Avoid hard accelerations.
0 Avoid steep uphill grades.
If towing a trailer, reduce the amount of cargo being
hauled as soon as it is possible.
As your engine starts to run out of fuel, your engine may
not run as efficiently as designed since small amountsof
air are suckedinto the fuel line causing a misfire. The
system can detectthis. Adding fuel should correct this
condition. Make sure to install the fuel cap properly. It
will take a few driving tripsto turn the light off.
If the light stops flashingand remains on steady, see --IT
the Light Is On Steady” following.
If the light continues to flash, when it is safe to do so,
stop the vehicle. Put your vehicle in PARK (P). Turn the
key off, wait at least 10 seconds and restart the engine.
If the light remains on steady, see “If the Light Is On
Steady” following. If the light is still flashing follow the
previous steps, and drivethe vehicle to your dealer or
qualified service center for service.
If the LightIs On Steady
You may be able to correctthe emission system
malfunction by considering the following:
Did you just drive through a deep puddleof water?
If so, your electrical system may be wet. The condition
will usually be corrected when the electrical system
dries out. A few driving trips should turn the light off.
Have you recently changed brands of fuel?
If so, be sure to fuel your vehicle with quality fuel (see
“Fuel” in the Index). Poor fuel quality will cause your
engine not to run as efficiently as designed. You may
notice this as stalling after start-up, stalling when you put
the vehicle into gear, misfiring, hesitation on acceleration
or stumbling on acceleration. (These conditions may go
away once the engine is warmed up.) This will be
detected by the system and cause the light to turn on.
If you experience this condition, change the fuel brand
you use. It will require at least one full tank of the
proper fuel to turn the light off.
If none of the above steps have made the light turn off,
have your dealeror qualified service center checkthe
vehicle. Your dealer has the proper test equipment and
diagnostic tools to fix any mechanical or electrical
problems that may have developed.
2-51
Oil Pressure Gage
The oil pressure gage
shows the engine oil
pressure in psi (pounds
per square inch) when the
engine is running. Canadian
vehicles indicate pressure
in kPa (kilopascals).
OIL
-1TION:
Don't keep drivingif the oil pressure is
low. If
you do, your engine can becomeso hot that it
catches fire.You or others could be burned.
Check your oil as soon as possible and have your
vehicle serviced.
9 3
Oil pressure may vary with engine speed, outside
temperature and oil viscosity, but readings above the
low pressure zone indicate the normal operating range.
A reading in the low pressure zone may be caused by a
dangerously low oil level or other problem causing low
oil pressure. Check your oil as soon as possible.
2-52
AC
NOTICE:
Damage to your engine from neglected
oil
problems can be costly and is not covered by
your warranty.
Fuel Gage
Check Gages Light
The CHECK GAGES light
will come on briefly when
you are starting the engine.
The fuel gage, when the
ignition is on, tells you
about how much fuel you
have left in your tank.
CHECK
GAGES
UNLEADED
FUEL ONLY
If the light comes on and stays on while you are driving,
check your coolant temperature and engine oil pressure
gages to see if they are in the warning zones.
The gage will first indicate EMPTY (E) before you
are out of fuel, and you should get more fuel as soon
as possible.
2-53
Listed are four situations you may experience with your
fuel gage:
Engine Coolant Temperature Gage
At the gas station, the fuel pump shuts off before the
gage reads FULL (F).
It takes a little more or less fuel to fill up than the
fuel gage indicated. For example, the gage may have
indicated the tank was half full, but it actually took a
little more or less than half the tank’s capacity to fill
the tank.
0
The gage moves a little when you turn a corner or
speed up.
The gage doesn’t go back to EMPTY (E) when you
turn off the ignition.
None of these indicate a problem with the fuel gage.
260
TEMP
This gage showsthe
engine coolant temperature.
If the gage pointer moves
into the red area your
engine is too hot!
J-vw
It means that your engine coolant has overheated. If you
have been operating your vehicle under normal
operating conditions, you should pull off the road, stop
your vehicle, and turn off the engine assoon as possible.
In “Problems on the Road,” this manual shows what to
do. See “Engine Overheating” in the Index.
3
LA
Voltmeter
When your engineis not
running, but the ignition is
on (in the RUN position),
this gage shows your
battery’s state of charge
in DC volts.
W
VOLTS
When the engineis running, the gage shows the
condition of the charging system. Readingsbetween
the low and high warning zones indicate the normal
operating range.
Readings in the low warning zone may occur when a
large number of electrical accessories are operatingin
the vehicle and the engine is left at an idle for an
extended period. This condition is normal since the
charging system is not able to provide full power at
engine idle. As engine speeds are increased,this
condition should correct itself as higher engine speeds
allow the charging system to create maximum power.
You can only drive for a short time with the reading in
either warning zone. If you must drive, turn off all
unnecessary accessories.
Readings in either warningzone indicate apossible
problem in the electrical system. Have thevehicle
serviced as soon as possible.
Electronic Road-Speed Governor
(Gasoline Engines)
This optional system automatically controls vehicle top
speed. The system controller receives a signal from the
vehicle speed sensor and reduces power when the
vehicle speed reaches the maximum 65 mph (105 km/h)
governed speed.
2-55
Center High-Mounted Stoplamp
If items are loaded on the roof of the vehicle, as in a
luggage carrier, care should be taken not to block or
damage the center high-mounted stoplamp unit.
If you tow a trailer that is equipped with provisions for
a center high-mounted stoplamp, see your GM dealer
‘forinstructions on how to make it operate with your
vehicle’s electrical system. As with any electrical system
modification, have the work Derformed by a qualified
electrical service person.
Your vehicle’s center high-mounted stoplamp is located
above the rear doors at the center of the vehicle.
2-56
NOTES
NOTES
2-58
Sectic I 3 Comfort Controls and Audio Systems
In this section you’ll find out how to operate the comfort
Heater Controls
control and audio systems offeredwith your vehicle. Be
sure to read about the particular systems supplied with
your vehicle.
Comfort Controls
This section tells you how to make your air systemwork
for you. Your comfort control systemuses
ozone-friendly R- 134a refrigerant.
With these systems, you can control the heating,
cooling and ventilation in your van. Your vehicle also
has a flow-throughventilation system described laterin
this section.
If your vehicle does not have air conditioning,your
heater controls will look like this.
3-1
Fan Knob
Mode Knob
The knob on the left side of the heating system control
panel controls the fan speed. The knob
has four speed
positions. To increase airflow, move the knob toward
HI. To decrease airflow, move it toward LO. To turn the
fan off, move the knob to OFF.
The right knob changes the heater setting.
Temperature Knob
The middle knob lets you select the relative temperature
of the air flowing into the passenger areaof your
vehicle. This knob will allow you to adjust the relative
air temperature independently of the function knob
setting. Move the knob clockwise to the red area for
warmer air. Move the knob counter clockwise to the
blue area forcooler air.
3-2
+a
/J VENT: This setting directs air through the
instrument panel vents.
’#
+e
VENTMEAT Use this setting to divide airflow
between the heater floor vents and instrument panel vents.
e
+” HEAT This setting directs air through the heater
floor vents. This setting is useful for cold weather.
’
Wa
HEAT/DEFROST Use this setting to divide
airflow between the heater floor vents and windshield.
DEFROST This setting with the defrost symbol
directs air through the windshield defroster vents.
This setting is useful when you have fog or ice on
the windshield.
Heater/Air Conditioning Controls
Fan Knob
The knob on the left side of the heating system control
panel controls the fan speed. The knob has four speed
positions. To increase airflow, move the knob toward
HI. To decrease airflow, move it toward LO.
Temperature Knob
The middle knob on the control panel lets you select the
relative temperature of the air flowing into the passenger
area of your vehicle. This knob will allow you to adjust
the relative air temperature independently of the
function knob setting. Move the knob clockwise toward
the red area for warmer air. Move the knob
counterclockwise toward the blue area for cooler air.
If your vehicle has air conditioning, your heaterhir
conditioning controls will look like this.
Before using your vehicle’s air conditioning, open the
windows to clear the vehicle of hot air.
3-3
Mode Knob
The right knob on the control panel changes the
heatedair conditioning setting.
MAX A/C: With A/C on, move the right knob to
MAX A/C for maximum cooling. This setting puts the
system in the recirculation mode and helps to maximize
your air conditioner’s performance and your vehicle’s
fuel economy. This setting also coolsthe air the fastest.
After the vehicle’s interior reaches a comfortable
temperature, move the knob clockwise to place the air
conditioning system in the A/C mode.
A/C: Use for normal cooling on hot days. This setting
cools outside airand directs it through the instrument
panel outlets.
+e
@
VENT: This setting, with the arrow pointing at
the figure’s head, directs air throughthe instrument
panel vents.
3-4
+e
‘N
VENTMEAT Use this setting, with the arrows
pointing at the figure’s feet and head, to divide
airflow between the heater floor vents and instrument
panel vents.
+#
0
HEAT This setting, with the arrow pointing at the
figure’s feet, directs air through the heater floor vents.
U
This setting is useful forcold weather.
W
?#
O
HEATDEFROST Use this setting, with the
arrow pointing at the figure’s feet and the defroster
symbol near the figure’s head, to divide airflow between
the heater floor vents and windshield.
DEFROST This setting with the defrost symbol
directs air through the windshield defroster vents.
This setting is useful when you have fog or iceon
the windshield.
Rear Heater (Without Air Conditioning)
Rear Air Conditioning and Rear Heater
If you have a rear heater (without rear air conditioning),
the control switch is located on the instrument panel.
If your vehicle has a rear air conditioning and rear heater
system combination, controls are provided to regulatethe
temperature, location and speed of the air flow.
To increase and decrease the flow of heated air to the
rear floor vents, move the switch marked REAR HEAT
to the blower speed you want.
The knob has three speed positions. To increase the flow
of heated air, move the switch toward HIGH. To turn the
fan off, move the switch to OFF.
Front Passenger Control
To adjust the air temperature, turn the temperature knob
on the right side of the control panel.
For warmer air, turn the knob clockwise toward the red
area, and for cooler air, turn the knob counterclockwise
toward the blue area.
3-5
To regulate the airflow location, adjust the center knob
on the control panel. Turn the knob counterclockwise
for floorvent air flow or clockwise for
headliner vent air
flow. Generally, the upper vents are used for air
conditioning and the floor vents for heating. The control
knob can be set to any blend setting.
To adjust the air flow speed, turn the fan control knob
on the left side of the control panel to the desired
blower setting.
To activate the rear control, move the fan knob on the
front control to REAR CNTL.
The rear control works just like the front control. It will
allow second seat passengers to adjust the controls as
they desire.
3-6
Air Conditioning
Before using your vehicle’s air conditioning,open the
windows to clearthe vehicle of hot air. This reduces the
time it takes for your vehicle to cool down. Then keep
your windows closed for the air conditionerto work at
its best.
You can use MAX A/C with the temperature knob in the
blue area, when it’s really hot outside and you need to
cool the inside air quickly. MAX A/C lets in only a little
air from the outside.
If you first use MAX A/C, you can then use A/C with
the temperature knob in the blue area, as soon as the
vehicle has cooled down, so outside air will be going
through your vehicle.
If your vehicle has rear air conditioning, setting it on LO
may enhance front A/C performance by allowing
trapped refrigerant in rear lines to circulate.
When the air conditioning, DEFROST orBLEND is on,
you may notice a slight increase or decrease in engine
speed, due to compressor operation. Thisis normal
because the system is designed to cycle the compressor
on and off to keep the desired temperature.
Heating
On cold days, use HEATER with the temperature knob
in the red area. Outside airwill be brought in through
the floor outlets.The heater works best if you keep your
windows closed while using it.
If you use the optional engine coolant heater before
starting your engine, your heating system will produce
warmer air ftdster to heat the passenger compartment in
cold weather. See “Engine Coolant Heater”in the Index.
3-7
Ventilation Tips
Keep the hood and front air inlet free of ice, snow, or
any other obstruction (such as leaves). The heater
and defroster will work far better, reducing the
chance of fogging the inside of your windows.
When you enter a vehicle in cold weather, turn the
blower fan to HI for a few moments before driving
off. This helps clear the intake ducts of snow and
moisture, and reduces the chance of fogging the
inside of your windows.
Keep the air path under the front seats clear of
objects. This helps air to circulate throughout
your vehicle.
Your vehicle has air vents in the center and on the sides
of your instrument panel.
You can move the vents from side to side orup and
down to direct the flow of air, or close the vents
altogether. When you close a vent, it will increase the
flow of air comingout of any vents that are open.
3-8
Rear Window Defogger (Option)
You can tell if your vehicle has this optionby looking at
the rear window. There will be lines across the glass.
These are the wire-like elements which heat your window.
NOTICE:
Scraping the inside of your rear window could
cut and damage the defogger.
Your warranty
would not cover this damage. Don’t put decals
there; you might haveto scrape them off.
Audio Systems
AM-FM Stereo
Your DelcoB audio systemhas been designed to operate
easily and giveyears of listening pleasure. You will get
the most enjoyment out of it if you acquaint yourself
with it first. Find out what your Delco system can do
and how to operate all its controls, to be sure you're
getting the most out of the advanced engineeringthat
went into it.
Setting theClock for AM-FM Stereo and
AM-FM Stereo with Cassette
Tape Player
Press SET. Within five seconds, press and hold the
SEEK right arrow until the correct minute appears on
the display. Press and hold the SEEK left arrow until the
correct hour appearson the display.
Setting theClock for AM-FM Stereo with
Compact Disc Player
Press and hold HR until the correct hour appears onthe
display. Press and hold MIN until the correct minute
appears on the display. To display the clock with the
ignition off, press RECALL and the time will be displayed
for a few seconds. There is an initial two-second delay
before the clock goes into the time-set mode.
Playing the Radio
VOLUME: Turn the knob clockwise to turn the radio
on and counterclockwise to turn it off. To increase
volume, turn the knob clockwise. Turn the knob
counterclockwise to decrease volume.
RECALL: Display the time with the ignition off by
pressing this knob. When the radio is playing, press this
knob to recall the station frequency.
3-9
Finding a Station
AM-FM: Press the lower knob to get AM or FM.
TUNE: Turn this knob to tune in radio stations.
SEEK: Press the right arrow to tune to the next higher
station and the left arrow to tune to the next lower
station and stay there.
SCAN: Press both SEEK buttons to listen to a few
seconds of each radio station. SCAN will light up on
the display. Press the right arrow to tune in the next
higher station and press the left arrow to tune to the
next lower station. Press VOLUME or both SEEK
buttons to stop scanning.
In addition to the four stations set as above, up to three
additional stations may be preset on each band by
pressing two adjoining buttons at the same time. Just:
1. Tune in the desired station.
2. Press SET.
3. Press two adjoining buttons at the same time, within
five seconds. Whenever you press the same two
buttons, the station you set will return.
4. Repeat these steps for each pair of buttons.
Setting theTone
BASS: Slide this lever up to increase the bass.
PUSHBUTTONS: The four numbered pushbuttons let
you return to your favorite stations. You can set up to
14 stations (seven AM and seven FM).
TREB: Slide this lever up to increase the treble. Slide the
lever down to reduce noise with a weak or noisy station.
1. Tune in the desired station.
Adjusting the Speakers
BAL: The control behind the upper knob balances the
sound between the right and left speakers.
2. Press SET.
3. Press and hold one of the four pushbuttons, within
five seconds. Wheneveryou press that numbered
button, the station you set will return.
4. Repeat these steps for each pushbutton.
3-10
FADE: The control behind the lower knob fsldes the
sound between the front and rear speakers.
AR
[
Stereo with CassetteTape
Finding a Station
AM-FM: Press the lower knob to get AM or FM.
TUNE: Turn the lower knob to tune in radio stations.
SEEK: Press this button and the radio will tune to the
next higher or lower station and stay there.
PUSHBUTTONS: The four numbered pushbuttons let
you return to your fmorite stations. You can set up to
14 stations (seven AM and seven FM). Just:
Playing the Rt
VOLUME: Turn the knob clockwise to turn the radio
on and counterclockwise to turn it off. To increase
volume, turn the knob clockwise. Turn the knob
counterclockwise to decreasevolume.
RECALL: Display the time with the ignition off by
pressing this knob. When the radio is playing, press this
button to recall the station frequency.
I . Tune in the desired station.
2. Press SET.
3. Press and hold one of the four pushbuttons, within
five seconds. Wheneveryou press that numbered
button, the station you set will return.
4. Repeat these steps for each pushbutton.
In addition to the four stations set as above, up to three
additional stations may be preset on each band by
pressing two adjoining buttons at the same time. Just:
1. Tune in the desired station.
2 . Press SET.
3. Press two adjoining buttons at the same time, within
five seconds. Whenever you press the same two
buttons, the station you set will return.
4. Repeat these steps for each pair of buttons.
3-11
P.SCAN: Press both SEEK buttons to scan through each
of the preset stations. Thesystem will scan through and
play each preset station stored on your pushbuttons for a
few seconds. Press either SEEKbutton or RECALL to
stop scanningthrough the preset stations.
Setting the Tone
BASS: Slide this lever up to increase the bass.
TREB: Slide this lever up to increase the treble. Slide
the
lever down to reduce noise witha weak or noisy station.
Adjusting the Speakers
BAL: The control behind the upper knob balances the
sound between the right and left speakers.
FADE: The control behind the lower knob fades the
sound between the front and rear speakers.
Playing a Cassette Tape
Your tape player is built to work best with tapes that are
30 to 45 minutes long on each side. Tapes longer than
that are so thin they may not work well in this player.
3
Once the tape is playing, use the knobs for VOLUME,
FADE and BAL just asyou do for the radio.
FWD: Press the SEEK right arrow to advance the
cassette tape. Press the SEEK left arrow to stop
forwarding the tape.
REV Press the SEEK left arrow to reverse the
cassette tape. Press the SEEK right arrow to stop
reversing the tape.
RECALL: Press this button to switch tape sides.
EJECT: Press this button to remove the tape or stop the
tape and play the radio.
CLN: This message may appear on the display. If it
does, your cassette tape player needs to be cleaned. It
will still play tapes, but you should clean it as soon as
possible to prevent damage to your tapes and player. See
“Care of Your Cassette Tape Player” in the Index.
After you clean the player, press and hold EJECT for
five seconds to reset the CLN indicator. The radiowill
display --- to show the indicator was reset.
AM-FM Stereo with CassetteTape and
Automatic Tone Control
SCV This is the Speed-Compensated-Volume (SCV)
knob. Move the control ring behind the PWR-VOL
knob clockwise to adjustthe SCV. Set the volume at the
desired level. As you drive, the SCV automatically
increases the volume, as necessary, to overcome road
and wind noise at any particular speed. The volume
should always sound the same. Each clockwiseposition
on the control ring allows for more compensation at a
faster rate.
Finding a Station
AM-FM: Press this button to switch between AM, FMl
and FM2. The display will show your selection.
Playing the Radio
PWR-VOL: Press this knob to turn the system on and
off. To increase volume, turn the knob clockwise. Turn
it counterclockwise to decrease volume. The faster the
PWR-VOL knob is rotated, the quicker the volume is
increased or decreased.
TUNE: Press lightly on this knob torelease it from its
stored position. Rotate the knob clockwise to increase
frequency and counterclockwise to decrease frequency.
When finished tuning, press the knob again to return it
to its stored position.
SEEK: Press the right arrow to tune to the next higher
station and the left arrow to tuneto the next lower station
and stay there. The sound will mute while seeking.
RECALL: Display the time with the ignition off by
pressing this knob.When the radio is playing, press this
button to recall the station frequency.
3-13
SCAN: Press and hold SEEK for two seconds until
SCAN appears on the display. SCAN allows you to
listen to stations for a fewseconds. The receiver will
continue to scan and momentarily stop at each station
until you press the button again. The sound will mute
while scanning.
PUSHBUTTONS: The six numbered pushbuttons let
you return to your favorite stations. You can set up to
18 stations (six AM, six FMl and six FM2).
1. Press AM-FM to select the band.
2. Tune in the desired station.
3. Press AUTO TONE to select the setting you prefer.
4. Press and hold one of the six pushbuttons. The sound
will mute. When it returns, release the button.
Whenever you press that numbered button, the
station you set will return and the tone you selected
will be automatically selected for that button.
5. Repeat these steps for each pushbutton.
2 I A
P.SCAN: The preset scan button lets you scan through
your fdvorite stations stored on your pushbuttons. Select
either the AM, FMl or FM2 mode and then press
P.SCAN. It will scan through each station stored on your
pushbuttons and stop for a few seconds before
continuing to scan through all of the pushbuttons. Press
P.SCAN again or one of the pushbuttons to stop
scanning to listen to a specific preset station. P.SCAN
will light up on the display while in this mode. If one of
the stations stored on a pushbutton is too weak for the
location you are in, the radio display will show the
channel number (P 1-P6) for several seconds before
advancing to the next preset station.
Setting theTone
Adjusting the Speakers
BASS: Press lightly on this knob to release it from its
BAL: Press this button to remove the control from its
stored position. Turn the knob clockwise to increase the
bass and counterclockwise to decreasethe bass. When
the BASS control is rotated, the AUTO TONE setting
will change to MAN.
stored position. Turn the control clockwise to adjust
sound to the right speakers and counterclockwise to
adjust sound to the left speakers. Press the button again
to return BAL to its stored position.
TREB: Press lightly on the TREB knob to release it
FADE: Press this button to remove the control from its
from its stored position. Turn the knob clockwise to
increase the treble and counterclockwise to decrease the
treble. When the TREB control is rotated, the AUTO
TONE setting will change to MAN.
stored position. Turn the control clockwise to adjust the
sound to the front and counterclockwise for rear
speakers. Press the button again to return FADE to its
stored position.
Push these knobs back in to their stored position when
you’re not using them.
Playing a CassetteTape
AUTO TONE: Press this button to select among the
five preset equalization settings and tailor the sound to
the music or voice being heard. Each time you press the
button, the selection will switch to one of the preset
settings of CLASSIC, NEWS, ROCK, POP or JAZZ. To
return to the manual mode, press and release this button
until MAN appears on the display. This will return the
tone adjustment to the TREB and BASS controls. If a
TREB or BASS control is rotated, the AUTO TONE
setting will change to MAN.
Your tape player is built to work best with tapes that are
30 to 45 minutes long on each side. Tapes longer than
that are so thin they may not work well in this player.
To load a cassette tape with the ignition off, press EJECT
or RECALL. Then, insert the cassette tape. If the ignition
is on but the radio is off, the tape will begin playing.
The player automatically senses if the cassette tape is
metal or Cr02 and adjusts for best playback sound.
For metal tapes, the double-D symbol will appear on
the display.
Once the tape is playing, use the VOL, BAL, FADE,
TREB and BASS controlsjust as you do for the radio.
The tape symbol and a direction arrow will be on the
display whenever a tape is being played. Anytime a tape
is inserted, the top side is selected forplay first.
PREV (I): Press the PREV or the SEEK left arrow to
search for the previous selection. A minimum
three-second blank gap is required for the player to stop
at the beginning of the selection. Thetape direction
arrow will blink during the SEEK operation.
PROG (2): Press this button to switch from one side of
the tape to the other.
NEXT (3): Press NEXT or the SEEK right arrow to
search for the next selection. A minimum three-second
blank gap is required for the player to stop at the
beginning of the selection. The tape direction arrow will
blink during the SEEK operation.
REV (4): Press this button to rapidly reverse the tape to
the beginning of the cassette reel or until you press REV
again. The radio will play the last selected station while
reversing the tape. The tape direction arrow will blink
during REV operation.
00 (5): Press this button to reduce cassette tape noise.
The double-D symbol will appear on the display while
the player is in this mode.
Dolby Noise Reduction is manufactured under a license
from Dolby Laboratories Licensing Corporation. Dolby
and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby
Laboratories Licensing Corporation.
FWD (6): Press this button to rapidly forward the tape
to the end of the cassette reel or until you press FWD
again. The radio will play the last selected station while
forwarding the tape. The tape direction arrow will blink
during FWD operation.
AM-FM: Press this button to switch from a tape to
the radio.
TAPE AUX: Press this button to return to the tape
player. The lighted arrow will appear and show the
direction of play when a tape is in the active mode.
EJECT Press this button to remove the tape. The radio
the ignition
will now play. EJECT can be used with either
or radio off. To load a cassette tape with the ignition or
radio off, press EJECT before loading the cassette.
CLN: This message may appear on the display. If it
does, your cassette tape player needs to be cleaned. It
will still play tapes, but you should clean it as soon as
possible to prevent damage to your tapes and player. See
“Care of Your Cassette Tape Player’’ in the Index.
After you clean the player, press and hold EJECT for
five seconds to reset the CLN indicator. The radio will
display --- to show the indicator was reset.
CD Adapter Kits
Although this is not a recommended practice, it is possible
to use a CD adapter kit with your cassette tape player.
Playing a Compact Disc in the Single Remote
Disc Player
a regular
The adapter kit cassette should begin playing like
audio cassette tape once inserted. If the cassette
immediately ejects, turn the radio off, turn the ignition on
and press and hold theTAPE AUX button until the tape
icon flashes on the display. Irisert the adapter cassette
again. It will power up the radio and begin playing.
This override routinewill remain active until EJECT
is pressed.
If you have this option, you can play one compact disc
(CD) at a time.
To load a CD into the player, hold the disc with the label
side up and insert it carefully into the player
(approximately half way). The disc will automatically
be pulled into the player. If the radio is off and the
ignition is on when a CD is inserted, the radio will turn
on and begin playing the CD. It is possible to load and
unload CD’s with the ignition off. To load a disc with
the ignition off, press the EJECT button on the remote
player and then insert the disc. To remove the disc, press
the EJECT button and remove the disc from the player.
3-17
A disc that has been ejected but is still sitting in the
remote CD player will be pulled back into the player
after approximately 30 seconds. Thisprotects the disc
and player from damage. The disc will not start playing.
To remove the disc, press the EJECT button and remove
the disc from the player.
All of the compact disc functions arecontrolled by the
radio buttons except for EJECT. When a disc is in the
player, a CD symbol will appear on the display. When a
disc is playing, the letters CD will appear next to the CD
symbol in the bottom left corner. The track number will
also be displayed.
If the disc comes back out and ERR appears on the
display, it could be that:
0 The disc is upside down.
0
It is dirty, scratched or wet.
0
There’s too much moisture in the air. (Wait about an
hour and try again.)
0
You are driving on a very rough road.
Please contact your dealer if any error recurs or cannot
be corrected.
PREV (1): Press this button togo back to the start of the
current track if more than eight seconds have played. Press
PREV again to go to the previous track on the disc.
PROG (2):This button is active only when you have
the 12-disc changer.
NEXT (3): Press this button to advance to the next track
on the disc.
REV (4): Press and hold this button to quickly reverse
within a track (song). As the CD reverses, elapsed time
will be displayed to help you find the correct passage.
FWD (6): Press and hold this button to quickly advance
within a track (song). As the CD advances, elapsed time
will be displayed to help you find the correct passage.
SEEK: Press the left arrow while playing a CD to go
back to the start of the current track. It will go back to
the current track if more than eight seconds have played.
Press the left arrow again to go to previous tracks. Press
the right arrow to go to the next higher track on the disc.
TAPE AUX: With a disc loaded in the player and the
radio playing, press this button once to play the compact
disc. To return to playing the radio, press AM-FM. If
both a cassette tape and CD are loaded, press TAPE
AUX to switch between the tape and compact disc.
AM-FM Stereo with Compact Disc Player
and Automatic Tone Control
RANDOM: Press P.SCAN to enter the random play
mode. RANDOM will appear on the display. While in
this mode, the tracks on the discs will be played in
random order. If you press SEEK, PREV or NEXT
while in the random mode, the PREV or NEXT track
will be scanned randomly. Press P.SCAN again to turn
off RANDOM and return to normal operation.
RECALL: Press this button to see what track
is currently playing. Press RECALL again within
five seconds to seehow long the track has been playing.
When a new track starts to play, the track number will
also appear. Press RECALL a third time and the time of
day will be displayed.
EJECT Press this button on the remote player to eject a
compact disc.
Playing the Radio
PWR-VOL: Press this knob to turn the system on and
off. To increase volume, turn the knob clockwise. Turn
it counterclockwise to decrease volume. The faster the
PWR-VOL knob is rotated, the quicker the volume is
increased or decreased.
RECALL: Display the time with the ignition off by
pressing this knob. When the radio is playing, press this
button to recall the station frequency.
3-19
SCV: This is the Speed-Compensated-Volume (SCV)
knob. Move the control ring behind the PWR-VOL
knob clockwise to adjust the SCV. Set the volume at the
desired level. As you drive, the SCV automatically
increases the volume, as necessary, to overcome road
and wind noise at any particular speed. The volume
should always sound the same. Each clockwise position
on the control ring allows for more compensation at a
faster rate.
SCAN: Press and hold SEEK for two seconds until
SCAN appears on the display. SCAN allows you to
listen to stations for afew seconds. The receiver will
continue to scanand momentarily stop at each station
until you press the button again. The sound will mute
while using the SCAN feature.
Finding a Station
I. Press AM-FM to select the band.
AM-FM: Press this button to switch between AM, FM1
and FM2. The display will show your selection.
2. Tune in the desired station.
TUNE: Press lightly on this knob to release it from its
stored position. Rotate theknob clockwise to increase
frequency and counterclockwise to decrease frequency.
When finished tuning, press the knob again to return it
to its stored position.
SEEK: Press the right arrow to tune to the next higher
station and the left arrow to tune to the next lower
station and stay there. The sound will mute while using
the SEEK feature.
3-20
PUSHBUTTONS: The six numbered pushbuttons let
you return to your favorite stations.You can set up to
18 stations (six AM, six FM 1 and six FM2).
3. Press AUTO TONE to select the setting you prefer.
4. Press and hold one of the four pushbuttons. The
sound will mute. When it returns, release the button.
Whenever you press that numbered button, the
station you set will return and the tone you selected
will be automatically selected forthat button.
5. Repeat these steps for each pushbutton.
P.SCAN: The preset scan button lets you scan through
your favorite stations storedon your pushbuttons. Select
either the AM, FM1 or FM2 mode and then press
P.SCAN. It will scan through each station stored on your
pushbuttons and stop for a few secondsbefore
continuing to scan through all of the pushbuttons. Press
P.SCAN again or oneof the pushbuttons to stop
scanning to listen to a specific stored station. P.SCAN
will light up on the display while in this mode. If one of
the stations stored on a pushbutton is too weak for the
location you are in, the radio display will show the
channel number (P 1-P6) for several seconds before
advancing to the next preset station.
Setting theTone
BASS: Press lightly on this knob to release it from its
stored position. Turn the knob clockwise to increase the
bass and counterclockwise to decrease the bass. When
the BASS control is rotated, the AUTO TONE setting
will change to MAN.
TREB: Press lightly on the TREB knob to release it
from its stored position. Turn the knob clockwise to
increase the treble and counterclockwise to decrease the
treble. When the TREB control is rotated, the AUTO
TONE setting will change to MAN.
AUTO TONE: Press this button to select among the
five preset equalization settingsand tailor the sound to
the music or voice being heard. Each time you press the
button, the selection will switch to one of the preset
settings of CLASSIC, NEWS, ROCK, POP or JAZZ.
The display will show which mode the receiver is in. To
return to the manual mode, press and release this button
until MAN appears on the display. This will return the
tone adjustment to the TREB and BASS controls. When
a TREB or BASS control is rotated, tone is
automatically set to MAN.
Adjusting the Speakers
BAL: Press lightly on this knob to release it from its
stored position. Turn the control clockwise to adjust
sound to the right speakers and counterclockwise to
adjust sound to the left speakers.
FADE: Press lightly on this knob to release it from its
stored position. Turn the control clockwise to adjust the
sound to the front and counterclockwise for rear speakers.
Push these knobs back in to their stored position when
you’re not using them.
Push these knobs back in to their stored position when
you’re not using them.
3-21
Playing a CompactDisc
PWR: Press this knob to turn the system on. (Please note
that you can also turn the systemon when you insert a
compact disc intothe player with the ignitionon.)
Insert a disc partway into the slot, label side up. The
player will pull it in. Wdit a few seconds and the disc
should play. CD and a CD symbol will also appear on
the display. Anytime you are playing a CD,the letters
CD will be next to the CD symbol.
If the disc comes back out and ERR appears on the
display, it could be that:
0
You are driving on a very rough road. (The disc
should play when the road gets smoother.)
0
The disc is upside down.
0
It is dirty, scratched or wet.
0
It is very humid. (If so, wait about an hour and
try again.)
0
The disc player is very hot.
Press RECALL to make ERR go off the display.
3-22
RECALL: Press this button to see what track is playing.
Press it again within five seconds to see how long the
CD has been playing that track. Elapsed time is
displayed in minutes and tenths of a second. The track
number will also appearwhen a new track begins to
play. Press RECALL again to return to the time display.
PREV (1): Press PREV or the SEEK left arrow to
search for the previous selection. If you hold this button
or press it more than once, the disc will advance further.
Sound is muted in this mode.
RDM (2): Press this button to play the tracks on the disc
in random (instead of 1, 2,3. . .) order. While in the
RDM mode, RANDOM appears on the display. Press
RDM again to return to normal play.
NEXT (3): Press NEXT or the SEEK right arrow to
search for the next selection. If you hold this button or
press it more than once, the disc will advance further.
The next track number will appear on the display. Sound
is muted in this mode.
a
REV (4): Press and hold REV to return rapidly to a
favorite passage. You will hear the disc selection play at
high speed while you press the REV button. This allows
you to listen and find out when the disc is a t the desired
selection. Release REV to resume playing.
FWD (6): Press and hold this button to advance rapidly
within a track. You will hear the disc selection play at
high speed while you press the FWD button. This allows
you to listen and find out when the disc is at the desired
selection. Release FWD to resume playing.
AM-FM: While in the CD mode, press this button to
stop playing the CD and play the radio. The CD symbol
will still display but the word CD will be replaced with
either AM, FM I or FM2. (If the radio is turned off, the
disc stays in the player and will resume playing at the
point where it stopped.)
CD AUX: To switch between the player and the radio
when a disc is playing, press the AM-FM button. To
return to the player, press CD AUX. When a disc is
playing, the letters CD and the CD symbol will appear
on the display. (If the radio is turned off, the disc stays
in the player and will resume playing at the point where
it stopped.)
EJECT Press this button to eject the disc from the
player and play the radio. When the same or anew disc
is inserted, the disc will start playing on track one. I f a
compact disc is left sitting i n the opening for more than
a few seconds, the player will pull the CD back in. The
radio will continue playing. When the ignition is off,
press this button to load a CD.
Theft-Deterrent Feature
THEFTLOCK is designed to discourage theft of your
radio. It works by using a secret code to disable all radio
functions whenever battery power is removed.
TM
The THEFTLOCK featurefor the radio may be used or
ignored. If ignored, the system plays normally and the
radio is not protected by the feature. I f THEFTLOCK is
activated, your radio will not operate if stolen.
When THEFTLOCK is activated, the radio will display
LOC to indicate a locked condition anytime battery
power is removed. If your battery loses power for any
reason, you must unlock the radio with the secret code
before it will operate.
3-23
Activating the Theft-Deterrent Feature
5. Press MN and 000 will appear on the display.
The instructions which follow, explain how to enter your
secret code to activate the THEFTLOCK system.It is
recommended that you read through all nine steps
before starting the procedure.
6. Press MN again to make the last two digits agree
with your code.
NOTE: If you allow more than 15 seconds to elapse
between any steps, the radio automatically reverts to
time and you must start the procedure over at Step 4.
8. Press AM-FM after you have confirmed that the
code matches the secret code you have written down.
The display will show REP to let you know that you
need to repeat Steps 5 through 7 to confirm your
secret code.
1. Write down any three or four-digit number from
000 to 1999 and keep it in a safe place separate from
the vehicle.
2. Turn the ignition to the ACCESSORY or
RUN position.
3. Turn the radio off.
4. Press the 1 and 4 buttons together. Hold them down
until --- shows on the display. Next you will use the
secret code number which you have written down.
7. Press HR to make the first one or two digits agree
with your code.
9. Press AM-FM and this time the display will show
SEC to let you know that your radio is secure. The
indicator by the volume control will begin flashing
when the ignition is turned off.
Unlocking the Theft-Deterrent Feature After
a
Power Loss
Enter your secret codeas follows; pause no more than
15 seconds between steps:
1. LOC appears when the ignition is on.
2. Press MN and 000 will appear on the display.
3. Press MN again to make the last two digits agree
with your code.
4. Press HR to make the first one or two digits agree
with your code.
5. Press AM-FM after you have confirmed that the
code matches thesecret code you have written down.
The display will show SEC, indicating the radio is
now operable and secure.
If you enter the wrong code eight times, INOP
will
appear on the display. You will have to wait an hour
with the ignition on before you can try again. When you
try again, you will only have three chances to enterthe
correct code before INOP appears.
Disabling theTheft-Deterrent Feature
Enter your secret code as follows; pause no more than
15 seconds between steps:
1. Turn the ignition to the ACCESSORY or RUN
position.
2. Turn the radio off.
3. Press the 1 and 4 buttons together. Hold them down
until SEC shows on the display.
4. Press MN and 000 will appear on the display.
5. Press MN again to make the last two digits agree
with your code.
6. Press HR to make the first one or two digits agree
with your code.
7. Press AM-FM after you have confirmed that the
code matches the secret code you have written down.
The display will show ---,indicating that the radio is
no longer secured.
If you lose or forget your code,contact your dealer.
3-25
If the code entered is incorrect, SEC will appear on the
display. The radio will remain secured until the correct
code is entered.
When battery power is disconnected from a secured
radio, the radio won’t turn on and LOC will appear on
the display.
To unlock a secured radio, see “Unlocking the
Theft-Deterrent Feature After a Power Loss” earlier in
this section.
3-26
Understanding Radio Reception
FM Stereo
FM stereo will give you the best sound. But FM signals
will reach only about 10 to 40 miles (16 to 65 km). Tall
buildings or hills can interfere with FM signals, causing
the sound to come and go.
AM
The range for most AM stations is greater than for FM,
especially at night. The longer range, however, can
cause stations to interfere with each other. AM can pick
up noise from things like storms and power lines. Try
reducing the treble to reduce this noise if you ever get it.
Tips About Your Audio System
Hearing damage from loud noise is almost undetectable
until it is too late. Your hearing can adapt to higher
volumes of sound. Sound that seems normal can be loud
and harmful to your hearing. Take precautions by
adjusting the volume control on your radio to a safe
sound level before your hearing adapts to it.
To help avoid hearing loss or damage:
Adjust the volume control to the lowest setting.
Increase volume slowly until you hear comfortably
and clearly.
NOTICE:
Before you add any sound equipment to your
vehicle like a tape player, CB radio, mobile
telephone or two-way radio be sure you can add
what you want. If you can, it’s very important to
do it properly. Added sound equipment may
interfere with the operation of your vehicle’s
engine, Delcoradio or other systems, and even
damage them. Your vehicle’s systems mayinterfere
with the operation of sound equipmentthat has
been added improperly.
So, before adding sound equipment, check with
your dealer andbe sure tocheck Federal rules
covering mobile radio and telephone units.
--
--
3-27
Care of Your Cassette Tape Player
A tape player that is not cleaned regularly can cause
reduced sound quality, ruined cassettes ora damaged
mechanism. Cassette tapes should be stored in their
cases away from contaminants, direct sunlight and
extreme heat. If they aren’t, they may not operate
properly or may cause failure of the tape player.
Your tape player should be cleaned regularly after every
50 hours of use. Your radio may display CLN to indicate
that you have used your tape player for 50 hours without
resetting the tape clean timer. If you notice a reduction in
sound quality, try a known good cassette tosee if the tape
or the tape player is at fault.If this other cassette hasno
improvement in sound quality, clean the tape player.
Cleaning may be done with a scrubbing action,
non-abrasive cleaning cassette with pads which scrub
the tape head as the hubs of the cleaner cassette turn. It
is normal for the cassette to eject while cleaning. Insert
the cassette at least three times to ensurethorough
cleaning. A scrubbing action cleaning cassetteis
available through your GM dealer
3-28
You may also choose a non-scrubbing action, wet-type
cleaner which uses a cassette with a fabric belt to clean
the tape head. This type of cleaning cassette will not
eject, It may not clean as thoroughly as the scrubbing
type cleaner.
Cassettes aresubject to wear and the sound quality may
degrade over time. Always make surethat the cassette
tape is in good condition before you have your tape
player serviced.
Care of Your Compact Discs
Handle discs carefully. Store them in their original cases
or other protective cases and away from direct sunlight
and dust. If the surface of a disc is soiled, dampen a
clean, soft cloth in a mild, neutral detergent solution and
clean it, wiping from the center to the edge.
Be sure never to touch the signal surface when handling
discs. Pick up discs by grasping the outer edges or the
edge of the hole and the outer edge.
Power Antenna Mast Care
Your power antenna will look its best and workwell if it’s
cleaned from time to time. To clean the antenna mast:
1. Turn on the ignition and radio to raise the antenna.
2. Dampen a clean cloth with mineral spirits or
equivalent solvent.
3. Wipe the cloth over the mast secrtions, removing
any dirt.
4. Wipe dry with a clean cloth.
5. Make the antenna go up and down by turning the
radio or ignition off and on.
6. Repeat if necessary.
I NOTICE:
Don’t lubricate thepower antenna. Lubrication
could damage it.
NOTICE:
Before entering an automatic car wash, turn off
your radio to make the
power antenna go down.
This will prevent the mast from possibly getting
damaged. If the antennadoes not go down when
you turn the radiooff, it may be damaged or
need to be cleaned. In eithercase, lower the
antenna by hand by carefully pressing the
antenna down.
If the mast portion of your antenna is damaged, you can
easily replace it. See your dealer for a replacement kit
and follow the instructions in the kit,
Adjustable Mast Antenna
The mast should be fully retracted before entering
any automated wash facility to minimize the risk of
antenna damage.
I f the mast should ever become slightly bent, you can
straighten it out by hand. If the mast is badly bent, as it
might be by vandals, you should replace it.
Check every once in a while to be sure the antenna is
still tightened to the body side panel.
3-29
NOTES
3-30
NOTES
3-31
NOTES
3-32
Section 4 Your Driving and the Road
Defensive Driving
The best advice anyone can give about driving is:
Drive defensively.
Please start with a very important safety device in your
vehicle: Buckle up. (See “Safety Belts” in the Index.)
Defensive driving really means “be ready for anything.”
On city streets, rural roads or freeways, it means
“always expect the unexpected.”
Assume that pedestrians or other drivers are going to be
careless and make mistakes. Anticipate what they might
do. Be ready for their mistakes.
Here you’ll find information about driving on different
kinds of roads and in varying weather conditions. We’ve
also included many other useful tips on driving.
1
Rear-end collisions are about the most preventable of
accidents. Yet they are common. Allow enough
following distance. It’s the best defensive driving
maneuver, in both city and rural driving. You never
know when the vehicle in front of you is going to brake
or turn suddenly.
4-1
Death and injury associated with drinking and driving
is a national tragedy. It’s the number one contributorto
the highway death toll, claiming thousands of victims
every year.
The obvious way to solve this highway safety problem
is for people never to drink alcohol and then drive. But
what if people do? How much is “too much” if the
driver plans to drive? It’s a lot less than many might
think. Although it depends on each person and situation,
here is some general information on the problem.
Alcohol affects four things that anyone needs to
drive a vehicle:
The Blood Alcohol Concentration (BAC) of someone
who is drinking depends upon four things:
Drunken Driving
Judgment
0
The amount of alcohol consumed
Muscular Coordination
0
The drinker’s body weight
0
Vision
0
0
Attentiveness.
The amount of food that is consumed before and
during drinking
0
The length of time it has taken the drinker to
consume the alcohol.
Police records show that almost half of all motor
vehicle-related deaths involve alcohol. In most cases,
these deaths are the result of someone who was drinking
and driving. In recent years, some 18,000 annual motor
vehicle-related deaths have been associated with the use
of alcohol, with more than 300,000 people injured.
Many adults -- by some estimates, nearly half the adult
population -- choose never to drink alcohol, so they
never drive after drinking. For persons under 21, it’s
against the law in every U.S. state to drink alcohol.
There are good medical, psychological and
developmental reasons for these laws.
4-2
According to the American Medical Association, a
180-lb. (82 kg) person who drinks three 12-ounce
(355 ml) bottles of beer in an hour will end up with a
BAC of about 0.06 percent. The person would reach the
same BACby drinking three 4-ounce (120 ml) glasses
of wine or three mixed drinks if each had 1-1/2 ounces
(45 ml) of a liquor like whiskey, gin or vodka.
Since alcoholis carried in body water, this means that a
woman generally will reach a higher BAC level than a
man of her same body weight when each has the same
number of drinks.
The law in many U.S. states sets the legal limitat a BAC
of 0.10 percent. Ina growing number of U.S. states, and
throughout Canada, the limit is 0.08 percent. In some
other countries, it’s even lower. The BAC limit for all
commercial drivers in theUnited States is 0.04 percent.
The BAC will be over 0.10 percent after three to six
drinks (in one hour). Of course, as we’ve seen, it
depends on how much alcohol is in the drinks, and how
quickly the person drinks them.
It’s the amount of alcohol that counts. For example,if
the same person drank three double martinis (3 ounces
or 90 ml of liquor each) within an hour, the person’s
BAC would be close to 0.12 percent. A person who
consumes foodjust before or during drinkingwill have
a somewhat lower BAC level.
There is a gender difference, too.Women generally have
a lower relative percentageof body water than men.
But the ability to drive is affected well below a BAC
of 0.10 percent. Research shows that the driving
skills of many people are impaired at a BAC
approaching 0.05 percent, and that the effects are worse
at night. All drivers are impaired at BAC levels above
0.05 percent. Statistics show that the chance of being
in a collision increases sharply for drivers who have a
BAC of 0.05 percent or above. A driver with a BAC level
of 0.06 percent has doubled his or her chance of having a
collision. At a BAC level of 0.10 percent, the chance of
this driver having a collision is 12 times greater; at a level
of 0.15 percent, the chance is 25 times greater!
4-3
The body takes about an hour to rid itself of the alcohol
in one drink. No amount of coffee ornumber of cold
showers will speed that up. “I’ll be careful” isn’t the
right answer. What if there’s an emergency, a need to
take sudden action, as when a child darts into the street?
A person with even a moderate BAC might not be able
to react quickly enough to avoid the collision.
There’s something else aboutdrinking and driving that
many people don’t know. Medical research shows that
alcohol in a person’s system can make crash injuries
worse, especially injuries to the brain, spinal cord or
heart. This means that when anyone who has been
drinking -- driver or passenger -- is in a crash, that
person’s chance of being killed or permanently disabled
is higher than if the person had not been drinking.
4-4
Drinking and then driving is verydangerous.
Your reflexes, perceptions, attentiveness and
judgment can be affected by even a small amount
of alcohol. You can have a serious or even
fatal collision if you drive after drinking.
Please don’t drink anddrive or ride with a driver
who has been drinking. Ride home in a cab; or if
you’re with a group, designate a driver who will
not drink.
--
--
Control of a Vehicle
Braking
You have three systems that make your vehicle go where
you want it to go. They are the brakes, the steering and
the accelerator. All three systems have to do their work
at the places where the tires meet the road.
Braking action involves perwption time and
reaction time.
First, you have to decide to push on the brake pedal.
That’s perception time. Then you have to bring up
your foot and do it. That’s reaction time.
Average reaction time is about 3/4 of a second. But
that’s only an average. It might be less with one
driver and as long as two or three seconds ormore
with another. Age, physical condition, alertness,
coordination and eyesight all play a part. So do alcohol,
drugs and frustration. But even in 3/4 of a second, a
vehicle moving at 60 mph (100 km/h) travels 66 feet
(20 m). That could be a lot of distance in an emergency,
so keeping enough space between your vehicle and
others is important.
And, of course, actual stopping distances vary greatly
with the surface of the road (whether it’s pavement or
gravel); the condition of the road (wet, dry, icy); tire
tread; and the condition of your brakes.
Sometimes, as when you’re driving on snow or ice, it’s
easy to ask more of those control systems than the tires
and road can provide. That means you can lose control
of your vehicle.
4-5
Avoid needless heavy braking. Some people drive in
spurts -- heavy acceleration followed by heavy
braking -- rather than keeping pace with traffic. This
is a mistake. Your brakes may not have time to cool
between hard stops. Your brakes will wear out much
faster if you do a lot of heavy braking. If you keep pace
with the traffic and allow realistic following distances,
you will eliminate a lot of unnecessary braking. That
means better braking and longer brake life.
If your engine ever stopswhile you’re driving, brake
normally but don’t pump your brakes. If you do, the
pedal may get harder to push down. If your engine
stops, you will still have some power brake assist. But
you will use it when you brake. Once the power assist is
used up, it may take longer to stop and the brake pedal
will be harder to push.
4-6
Anti-Lock Brakes
Your vehicle has anti-lock brakes (ABS). ABS is an
advanced electronic braking system that will help
prevent a braking skid.
When you start your engine and begin to drive away,
your anti-lock brake system will check itself. You may
hear a momentary motor or clicking noise while this test
is going on. This is normal.
If there’s a problem.with
the anti-lock brake system,
this warning light will stay
on. See “Anti-Lock Brake
ANTI LOCK
The anti-lock system can change the brake pressure
faster than any driver could. The computer is
programmed to make the most of available tire and
road conditions.
Here’s how anti-lock works. Let‘s say the road is wet.
You’re driving safely. Suddenly an animal -jumpsout in
front of you.
You slam on the brakes. Here’s what happens with ABS.
A computer senses that wheels are slowing down. If one
of the wheels is about to stop rolling, the computer will
separately work the brakes at each front wheel and at the
rear wheels.
You can steer around the obstacle while braking hard.
As you brake, your computer keeps receiving updates on
wheel speed and controls braking pressure accordingly.
4-7
Remember: Anti-lock doesn’t change the time you need
to get your foot up to the brake pedal or always decrease
stopping distance. If you get too close to the vehicle in
front of you, you won’t have time to apply your brakes
if that vehicle suddenly slows or stops. Always leave
enough room up ahead to stop, even though you have
anti-lock brakes.
Using Anti-Lock
Don’t pump the brakes. Just hold the brake pedal
down and let anti-lock work for you. You may feel the
brakes vibrate, or you may notice some noise, but this
is normal.
Braking in Emergencies
Use your anti-lock braking system when you need to.
With anti-lock, you can steer and brake at the same
time. In many emergencies, steering can help you more
than even the very best braking.
A Q
Steering
Power Steering
If you lose power steering assist because the engine
stops or the system is not functioning, you can steer but
it will take much more effort.
Steering Tips
Driving on Curves
It’s important to take curves at a reasonable speed.
A lot of the “driver lost control” accidents mentioned on
the news happen on curves. Here’s why:
Experienced driver or beginner, each of us is subject to
the same laws of physics when driving on curves. The
traction of the tires against the road surface makes it
possible for the vehicle to change its path when you turn
the front wheels. If there’s no traction, inertia will keep
the vehicle going in the same direction. If you’ve ever
tried to steer a vehicle on wet ice, you’ll understand this.
The traction you can get in a curve depends on the
condition of your tires and the road surface, the angle
at which the curve is banked, and your speed.
While you’re in a curve, speed is the one factor you
can control.
Suppose you’re steering through a sharp curve. Then you
suddenly accelerate. Both control systems -- steering and
acceleration -- have to do their work where the tires meet
the road. Adding the sudden acceleration can demand too
much of those places. You can lose control.
What should you do if this ever happens? Ease up on the
accelerator pedal, steerthe vehicle the way you want it
to go, and slow down.
Speed limit signs near curves warn that you should
adjust your speed.Of course, the posted speeds are
based on good weather and road conditions. Under less
favorable conditions you’ll want to go slower.
Steering in Emergencies
There are times when steering can be more effective
than braking. For example, you come over a hill and
find a truck stopped in your lane, or a car suddenly
pulls out from nowhere, or a child darts out from
between parked cars and stops right in front of you.
You can avoid these problems by braking -- if you
can stop in time. But sometimes you can‘t; there isn’t
room. That’s the time for evasive action -- steering
around the problem.
Your vehicle can perform very well in emergencies like
these. First apply your brakes. (See “Braking in
Emergencies” earlier in this section.) It is better to
remove as much speed as .you can from a possible
collision. Then steeraround the problem, to the left or
right depending on the space available.
If you need to reduce your speed as you approach a
curve, do it before you enter the curve, while your front
wheels are straight ahead.
Try to adjust your speed so you can “drive” through the
curve. Maintain a reasonable, steady speed. Wait to
accelerate until you are out of the curve, and then
accelerate gently into the straightaway.
4-9
Off-Road Recovery
You may find sometimethat your right wheels have
dropped off the edge of a road onto theshoulder while
you’re driving.
OFF-ROAD RECOVERY
/
An emergency like this requires close attention and a
quick decision. If you are holding the steering wheel at
the recommended 9 and 3 o’clock positions, you can
turn it a full 180 degrees very quickly without removing
either hand. But you have to act fast, steer quickly, and
just as quickly straighten the wheel once you have
avoided the object.
The fact that such emergency situations are always
possible is a good reason to practicedefensive driving at
all times and wear safety belts properly.
~
4-10
w
rY/
edge of pawed surface
If the level of the shoulder is only slightly below the
pavement, recovery should be fairly easy. Ease off the
accelerator and then, if there is nothing inthe way, steer
so that your vehiclestraddles the edge of the pavement.
You can turn the steering wheel upto one-quarter turn
until the rightfront tire contacts the pavement edge. Then
turn your steering wheel to go straight down the roadway.
Passing
The driver of a vehicle about to pass another on a
two-lane highway waits for justthe right moment,
accelerates, moves aroundthe vehicle ahead, then goes
back into the right lane again. A simple maneuver?
Not necessarily! Passing another vehicleon a two-lane
highway is a potentially dangerous move, sincethe
passing vehicle occupies the same laneas oncoming
traffic for several seconds.A miscalculation, an error in
judgment, or abrief surrender to frustration or anger
can
suddenly put the passing driver face tof x e with the
worst of all traffic accidents -- the head-on collision.
So here are some tips for passing:
“Drive ahead.” Look down the road, to the sides and
to crossroads for situationsthat might affect your
passing patterns. If you have any doubt whatsoever
about making a successful pass, wait for a better
time.
Watch for traftic signs, pavement markings and lines.
If you can see a sign up ahead that might indicate a
turn or an intersection, delay your pass.A broken
center line usually indicatesit’s all right to pass
(providing the road ahead is clear). Never crossa solid
line on your side of the lane or a double solid line,
even if the road seems empty of approaching traffic.
Do not get too close to the vehicle you want to
pass while you’re awaiting an opportunity. For one
thing, following too closely reduces your area of
vision, especially if you’re following a larger
vehicle. Also, you won’t have adequate space if
the vehicle ahead suddenly slows or stops. Keep
back a reasonable distance.
When it looks like a chance to pass is coming up,
start to accelerate but stay in the right lane and don’t
get too close. Time your move so you will be
increasing speed as the time comes to move into the
other lane. If the way is clear to pass, you will have
a “running start”that more than makes up for the
distance you would lose by dropping back. And if
something happens to cause you to cancel your pass,
you need only slow down and drop back again and
wait for anotheropportunity.
If other cars are lined up to pass a slow vehicle, wait
your turn. But take care that someone isn’t trying to
pass you as you pull out to pass the slow vehicle.
Remember to glance over your shoulder and check
the blind spot.
Check your mirrors, glance over your shoulder and
start your left lane change signal before moving out
of the right lane to pass. When you are farenough
ahead of the passed vehicle to see its front in your
inside mirror, activate your right lane change signal
and move back into the right lane. (Remember that
your right outside mirror is convex. The vehicle you
just passed may seem to be farther away from you
than it really is.)
0
Try not to pass more than one vehicle at a time
on two-lane roads. Reconsider before passing the
next vehicle.
Don’t overtake a slowly moving vehicle too rapidly.
Even though the brake lamps are not flashing, it
may be slowing down or starting to turn.
If you’re being passed, make it easy for the
following driver toget ahead of you. Perhaps you
can ease a little to the right.
Loss of Control
Let’s review what driving experts say about what
happens when the three control systems (brakes, steering
and‘acceleration) don’t have enough friction where the
tires meet the road to do what the driver has asked.
In any emergency, don’t give up. Keep trying to
steer and constantly seek an escape route or area
of less danger.
Skidding
In a skid, a driver can lose control of the vehicle.
Defensive drivers avoid most skids by taking
reasonable care suited to existing conditions, and
by not ‘‘overdriving” those conditions. But skids are
always possible.
The three types of skids correspond to your vehicle’s
three control systems. In the braking skid, your wheels
aren’t rolling. In the steering or cornering skid, too
much speed or steering in a curve causes tires to slip and
lose cornering force. And in the acceleration skid, too
much throttle causes the driving wheels to spin.
A cornering skid and an acceleration skid are best
handled by easing your foot off the accelerator pedal.
A 13
If your vehicle starts to slide, ease your foot off the
accelerator pedal and quickly steer the way you want the
vehicle to go. If you start steering quickly enough, your
vehicle may straighten out. Always be ready for a
second skid if it occurs.
Driving at Night
Of course, traction is reduced when water, snow, ice,
gravel or other material is on the road. For safety, you’ll
want to slow down and adjust your driving to these
conditions. It is important to slow down on slippery
surfaces because stopping distance will be longer and
vehicle control more limited.
While driving on a surface with reduced traction, try
your best to avoid sudden steering, acceleration or
braking (including engine braking by shifting to a
lower gear). Any sudden changes could cause the tires
to slide. You may not realize the surface is slippery
until your vehicle is skidding. Learn to recognize
warning clues -- such as enough water, ice or packed
snow on the road to make a “mirrored surface” -- and
slow down when you have any doubt.
Remember: Any anti-lock brake system (ABS) helps
avoid only the braking skid.
Night driving is more dangerous than day driving.
One reason is that some drivers are likely to be
impaired -- by alcohol or drugs, with night vision
problems, or by fatigue.
4-13
Here are some tips on night driving.
0
Drive defensively.
0
Don’t drink and drive.
0
Adjust your inside rearview mirror to reduce the
glare from headlamps behind you.
0
Since you can’t see as well, you may need to
slow down and keep more space between you
and other vehicles.
0
Slow down, especially on higher speed roads. Your
headlamps can light up only so much road ahead.
0
In remote areas, watch for animals.
0
If you’re tired, pull off the road in a safe place
and rest.
Night Vision
No one can see as well at night as in the daytime. But as
we get older these differences increase. A 50-year-old
driver may require at least twice as much light to see the
same thing at night as a 20-year-old.
What you do in the daytime can also affect your night
vision. For example, if you spend the day in bright
sunshine you are wise to wear sunglasses. Your eyes will
4-14
have less trouble adjusting to night. But if you’re
driving, don’t wear sunglasses at night. They may cut
down on glare from headlamps, but they also make a
lot of things invisible.
You can be temporarily blinded by approaching
headlamps. It can take a second or two, or even several
seconds, for your eyes to readjust to the dark. When you
are faced with severe glare (as from a driver who
doesn’t lower the high beams, or a vehicle with
misaimed headlamps), slow down a little. Avoid staring
directly into the approaching headlamps.
Keep your windshield and all the glass on your vehicle
clean -- inside and out. Glare at night is made much
worse by dirt on the glass. Even the inside of the glass
can build up a film caused by dust. Dirty glass makes
lights dazzle and flash more than clean glass would,
making the pupils of your eyes contract repeatedly.
Remember that your headlamps light up far less of a
roadway when you are in a turn or curve. Keep your
eyes moving; that way, it’s easier to pick out dimly
lighted objects. Just as your headlamps should be
checked regularly for proper aim, so should your eyes
be examined regularly. Some drivers suffer from night
blindness -- the inability to see in dim light -- and aren’t
even aware of it.
hiving in Rain and onWet Roads
your tire-to-road traction isn’t as good as on dry roads.
And, if your tires don’t have much tread left, you’ll get
even less traction. It’s always wise to go slowerand be
cautious if rain starts to fall while you are driving. The
surface may get wet suddenly when your reflexes are
tuned for driving on dry pavement.
if your
The heavier the rain, the harder it is to see. Even
windshield wiper blades are in good shape, aheavy rain
can make it harder to see road signs and traffic signals,
pavement markings, the edge of the road and even
people walking.
It’s wise to keep your wiping equipment in good shape
and keep your windshield washer tank filled with
washer fluid. Replace your windshield wiper inserts
when they show signs of streaking or missing areas on
the windshield, or when strips of rubber start to separate
from the inserts.
Rain and wet roads can mean driving trouble. On a wet
road, you can’t stop, accelerate orturn as well because
4-15
Wet brakes can causeaccidents. They won’t work
well in a quick stop and maycause pulling to one
side. You could lose controlof the vehicle.
of water or
After driving through a large puddle
a car wash, apply your brake pedal lightly until
your brakeswork normally.
Driving too fast through large water puddles or even
going through some car washes can cause problems, too.
The water may affect your brakes. Try to avoid puddles.
But if you can’t, try to slow down before you hit them.
4-16
Hydroplaning
Driving Through Deep Standing Water
Hydroplaning is dangerous. So much water can build up
under your tires that they can actually ride on the water.
This canhappen if the road is wet enough and you’re
going fast enough.When your vehicle is hydroplaning,
it has little or no contact with the road.
I
NOTICE:
If you drive too quickly throughdeep puddles
or standing water, watercan come in through
your engine’sair intake and badly damage your
engine. Never drive through water that
is slightly
lower than the underbody
of your vehicle.If you
can’t avoid deep puddlesor standing water, drive
through them very slowly.
Hydroplaning doesn’t happen often. But it can if your
tires haven’t much tread or if the pressure in one or
more is low. It can happen if a lot of water is standing on
the road. If you can see reflections from trees, telephone
poles or other vehicles, and raindrops “dimple” the
water’s surface, there could be hydroplaning.
Hydroplaning usually happens at higher speeds. There
just isn’t a hard and fast rule about hydroplaning. The
best advice is to slow down when it is raining.
Some Other Rainy Weather Tips
0 Turn on your low-beam headlamps -- not just
your parking lamps -- to help make you more
visible to others.
0
Besides slowing down,allow some extra following
distance. And be especially careful when you pass
another vehicle. Allow yourself more clear room
ahead, and be prepared to have your view restricted
by road spray.
Have good tires with proper tread depth. (See
“Tires” in the Index.)
4-17
City Driving
Here are ways to increase your safety in city driving:
Know the best way to get to where you are
going. Get a city map and plan your trip into an
unknown part of the city just asyou would for a
cross-country trip.
Try to use the freeways that rim and crisscross
most large cities. You’ll save time and energy. (See
the next part, “Freeway Driving.”)
Treat a green light as a warning signal. A traffic
light is there because the corner is busy enough to
need it. When a light turns green, and just before
you start to move, check both ways for vehicles that
have not cleared the intersection or may be running
the red light.
One of the biggest problems with city streets is the
amount of traffic on them. You’ll want to watch out for
what the other drivers are doingand pay attention to
traffic signals.
4-18
Freeway Driving
The most important advice on freeway driving is: Keep
up with traffic and keep to the right. Drive at the same
speed most of the other drivers aredriving. Too-fast or
too-slow driving breaks a smoothtraffic flow. Treat the
left lane on a freeway as a passing lane.
At the entrance, there is usually a ramp that leads to the
freeway. If you have a clear view of the freeway as you
drive along the entrance ramp, you should begin to
check traffic. Try to determine where you expect to
blend with the flow. Try to merge into the gap at close to
the prevailing speed. Switch on your turn signal, check
your mirrors and glance over your shoulder as often as
necessary. Try to blend smoothly with the traffic flow.
Once you are on the freeway, adjust your speed to the
posted limit or to the prevailing rate if it’s slower. Stay
in the right lane unless you want to pass.
Before changing lanes, check your mirrors. Then use
your turn signal.
Mile for mile, freeways (also called thruways, parkways,
expressways, turnpikes or superhighways) are the safest
of all roads. But they have their own special rules.
Just before you leave the lane, glance quickly over
your shoulder to make sure there isn’t another vehicle in
your “blind” spot.
4-19
Once you are moving on the freeway, make certain
you allow a reasonable following distance.Expect to
move slightly slower at night.
When you want to leave the freeway, move to the
proper lane well in advance. If you miss your exit, do
not, under any circumstances, stop and back up. Drive
on to the next exit.
The exit rampcan be curved, sometimes quitesharply.
Is your vehicle ready for a long trip? If you keep it
serviced and maintained, it’s ready to go. If it needs
service, have it done before starting out. Of course,
you’ll find experienced and able service experts in GM
dealers all across North America. They’ll be ready and
willing to help if you need it.
Here are some things you can check before a trip:
0
Windshield Washer Fluid: Is the reservoir full? Are
all windows clean inside and outside?
0
Wiper Blades: Are they in good shape?
0
Fuel, Engine Oil, Other Fluids:Have you checked
all levels?
0
Lamps: Are they all working? Are the lenses clean?
0
Tires: They are vitally important to a safe,
trouble-free trip. Is the tread good enough for
long-distance driving? Are the tires all inflated to the
recommended pressure?
0
Weather Forecasts: What’s the weather outlook
along your route? Should you delay your trip a short
time to avoid a major storm system‘?
0
Maps: Do you have up-to-date maps?
The exit speed is usually posted.
Reduce your speed according to your speedometer, not
to your sense of motion. After driving for any distance
at higher speeds, you may tend to think you are going
slower than you actually are.
Before Leavingon a Long Trip
Make sure you’re ready. Try to be well rested. If you
must start when you’re not fresh -- such as after a day’s
work -- don’t plan to make too many miles that first part
of the journey. Wear comfortable clothingand shoes you
can easily drivein.
4-20
Highway Hypnosis
Hill and Mountain Roads
Is there actually such a condition as “highway
hypnosis”? Or is it just plain falling asleep at the
wheel? Call it highway hypnosis, lack of awareness,
or whatever.
There is something about an easy stretch of road with
the same scenery, along with the hum of the tires on
the road, the drone of the engine, and the rush of the
wind against the vehicle that can make you sleepy.
Don’t let it happen to you! If it does, your vehicle can
leave the road in less than a second, and you could
crash and be injured.
What can you do about highway hypnosis‘?First, be
aware that it can happen.
Then here are some tips:
0
Make sure your vehicle is well ventilated, with a
comfortably cool interior.
Keep your eyes moving. Scan the road ahead and
to the sides. Check your mirrorsand your
instruments frequently.
If you get sleepy, pull off the road into a rest, service
or parking areaand take a nap, get some exercise, or
both. For safety, treat drowsiness on the hinhway as
an emergency.
Driving on steep hills or mountains is different from
driving in flat or rolling terrain.
If you drive regularly in steep country, or if you’re
planning to visit there, here are some tips that can make
your trips safer and more enjoyable.
4-21
0
Keep your vehicle in good shape. Check all fluid
levels and also the brakes, tires, cooling system and
transmission. These parts can work hard on
mountain roads.
rA\
Coasting downhill inNEUTRAL (N) or with the
ignition off is dangerous. Yourbrakes will have to
do all the work of slowing down. They could getso
hot that they wouldn’t work well. You would then
have poorbraking or even none going down a hill.
You could crash. Always haveyour engine running
and your vehicle in gear when you go downhill.
Know how to go down hills. The most important
thing to know is this: let your enginedo some of the
slowing down. Shift to a lower gear when you go
down a steep or long hill.
A CAUTION:
If you don’t shift down, your brakes could getso
hot that they wouldn’t work well. You would then
have poor braking or even none going downa hill.
You could crash. Shift down to let your engine
assist your brakes on a steep downhill slope.
0
0
0
0
4-22
CAUTIO :
Know how to go uphill. You may want to shift down
to a lower gear. The lower gears help coolyour engine
and transmission, and you can climb thehill better.
Stay in your own lane when driving on two-lane
roads in hills or mountains. Don’t swing wide or
cut across the center of the road. Drive at speeds
that let you stay in your own lane.
As you go over the top of a hill, be alert. There could be
something in your lane, likea stalled car or an accident.
You may see highway signs on mountains that warn of
special problems. Examples are long grades, passing or
no-passing zones, a falling rocks area or winding
roads. Be alert to these and take appropriate action.
Winter Driving
Here are sometips for winter driving:
0
Have your vehicle in good shape for winter.
0
You may want to put winter emergency supplies in
your vehicle.
Include an ice scraper, a small
brush or broom, a supply
of windshield washer fluid, a rag, some winter outer
clothing, a small shovel, a flashlight, red
a cloth and a
couple of reflective warning triangles. And, if you will
be driving under severe conditions, include small
a
bag
of sand, a pieceof old carpet or a coupleof burlap bags
to help provide traction. Be sure you properly secure
these items in your vehicle.
Driving on Snow or Ice
Most of the time, those places where your tires meet the
road probably have good traction.
However, if there is snow or ice between your tires and
the road, you can have a very slippery situation. You’ll
have a lot less traction or “grip” and will need to be
very careful.
What’s the worst time for this‘? “Wet ice.” Very cold
snow or ice can be slick and hard to drive on. But wet
ice can be even more trouble because it may offer the
least traction of all. You can get wet ice when it’s about
freezing (32°F; 0°C) and freezing rain begins to fall.
Try to avoid driving on wet ice until salt and sand crews
can get there.
4-23
t
2.
I
Whatever the condition -- smooth ice, packed, blowing
or loose snow -- drive with caution.
If You’re Caught in a Blizzard
Accelerate gently. Try not to breakthe fragile traction. If
you accelerate too fast, the drive wheels will spin and
1 polish the surface under the tires even more.
<
,’
$
%
e
,’
8
,,’
’:
1’
Your anti-lock brakes improve your vehicle’s stability
when you make a hard stop on a slippery road. Even
though you have an anti-lock braking system, you’ll
want to begin stopping sooner than you would on dry
pavement. See “Anti-Lock” in the Index.
Allow greater following distance on any slippery road.
Watch for slippery spots. The road might be fine
until you hit a spot that’s covered with ice. On an
otherwiseclear road, ice patches may appear in
shaded areas where the sun can’t reach: around
clumps of trees, behind buildings or under bridges.
Sometimes the surface of a curve or an overpass may
remain icy when the surrounding roads are clear. If
you see a patch of ice aheadof you, brake before you
are on it.Try not to brake while you’re actually on
the ice, and avoid sudden steering maneuvers,
If you are stopped by heavy snow, you could be in a
serious situation. You should probably stay with your
vehicle unless you know for surethat you are near help
and you can hike through the snow. Here are some
things to do to summon help and keep yourself and your
passengers safe:
0
Turn on your hazard flashers.
0
Tie a red cloth to your vehicle to alert police that
you’ve been stoppedby the snow.
0
Put on extra clothing or wrap a blanket around
you.
If you have no blankets or extra clothing,make body
insulators fromnewspapers, burlap bags, rags,floor
mats -- anything you can wrap around yourself or
tuck under your clothingto keep warm.
I
A CAUTION:
Snow can trap exhaust gases under your vehicle.
This can cause deadly CO (carbonmonoxide) gas
to get inside. CO could overcome you and kill
you. You can’t see it or smell it, so you might not
know it is in your vehicle. Clear away snow from
around the base of your vehicle, especiallyany
that is blocking your exhaust pipe. And check
around again from time to time to be suresnow
doesn’t collect there.
Open a window just a little on the side of the
vehicle that’s away from the wind. This will help
keep CO out.
i
You can run the engine to keepwarm, but be careful.
i
4-25
Run your engine only as long as you must. This saves
fuel. When you run the engine, make it go a little faster
than just idle. Thatis, push the accelerator slightly.
This uses less fuel for the heat that you get and it
keeps the battery (or batteries) charged. You will need
a well-charged battery (or batteries) to restart the
vehicle, and possibly for signaling later on with your
headlamps. Let the heater run for awhile.
If you have a diesel engine, you may have to run it at a
higher speed to get enough heat. Then, shut the engine
off and close the window almost all the way to preserve
the heat. Start the engine again and repeat this only
when you feel really uncomfortable from the cold. But
do it as little as possible. Preserve the fuel as long as you
can. To help keep warm, you can get out of the vehicle
and do some fairly vigorous exercises every half hour or
so until help comes.
4-26
Loading Your Vehicle
The Certificationflirelabel is found on the rear edge
of the driver’s door. The label shows the size of your
original tires and the inflation pressures needed to obtain
the gross weight capacity your vehicle. This is called
GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating). The GVWR
includes the weight of the vehicle, all occupants, fuel
and cargo.
The Certification/Tire label also tells you the maximum
weights for the front and rear axles, called Gross Axle
Weight Rating (GAWR). To fine out theactual loads
on your frontand rear axles, you need to go to a weigh
station and weigh your vehicle. Your dealer can help
you with this. Be sure to spreadout your load equally
on both sides of the centerline.
Never exceed the GVWRfor your vehicle, orthe
GAWR for either the front rear
or axle.
And, if you do have a heavy load, you should spread
it out.
Do not load your vehicle any heavier than
the GVWR, or either themaximum front or
rear GAWR. If you do, parts on your vehicle
can break,or itcan change the way your
vehicle handles. These could cause you to lose
control. Also, overloading can shorten thelife
of your vehicle.
A CAUTION:
1
~
I
Things you put inside your vehicle can strike
and injurepeople in a sudden stopor turn, or
in a crash.
Put things in the cargo area of your vehicle.
Try to spread theweight evenly.
Never stack heavier things, like suitcases,
inside the vehicle so that some of them are
above the tops of the seats.
Don’t leave an unsecured child restraint in
your vehicle.
When you carry something inside the
vehicle, secure it whenever you can.
Don’t leave a seat folded down unless you
need to.
4-27
Towing a Trailer
~
~
NOTICE:
If you don’t use the correctequipment and drive
properly, you can lose control when you pull a
trailer. For example, if the traileris too heavy, the
brakes may not work well or even at all. You
and your passengers could be seriously injured.
Pull a trailer only if you have followed all the
steps in this section. Ask your GM dealer for
advice and information about towing a trailer
with your vehicle.
--
Pulling a trailer improperly can damage your
vehicle and result in costly repairs not covered by
your warranty. To pull a trailer correctly, follow
the advice in this part, andsee your GM dealer
for importantinformation about towing a trailer
with your vehicle.
Your vehicle can tow a trailer. To identify what the
vehicle trailering capacity is for your vehicle, you
should read the information in “Weight of the Trailer’’
that appears later in this section. But trailering is
different than just driving your vehicle by itself.
Trailering means changes in handling, durability and
fuel economy. Successful, safetrailering takes correct
equipment, and it has to be used properly.
That’s the reason for this section. In it are many
time-tested, important trailering tips and safety rules.
Many of these are important for your safety and that of
your passengers. So please read this section carefully
before you pull a trailer.
,4128
If You Do Decide To Pull A Trailer
0
Then, during the first 500 miles (800 km) that you
tow a trailer, don’t drive over 50 mph (80 kmh) and
don’t make startsat full throttle. This helps your
engine and other parts of your vehicle wear in at the
heavier loads.
0
You should use DRIVE (D) (or, as you need to,
a lower gear)when towing a trailer. Operating
your vehicle in DRIVE (D) when towing a trailer
will minimize heat build-up and extendthe life of
your transmission.
If you do, here are some importantpoints:
0
0
0
There are many different laws, including speed limit
restrictions, having to do with trailering. Make sure
your rig will be legal, not only where you live but
also where you’ll be driving. A good source for this
information can be state or provincial police.
Consider using a sway controlif your trailer will
weigh 4,000 lbs. (1 800 kg) or less. You should
always use a sway control if your trailer will weigh
more than 4,000 lbs. ( 1 800 kg). You can ask ahitch
dealer aboutsway controls.
Don’t tow a trailer at all during the first 500 miles
(800 km) your new vehicle is driven. Your engine,
axle or other parts could be damaged.
Three important considerationshave to dowith weight:
the weight of the trailer,
the weight of the trailer tongue
and the weight on your vehicle’s tires.
Weight of the Trailer
How heavy can a trailer safely be?
It depends on how you plan to use your rig. For
example, speed, altitude, road grades, outside
temperature and how much your vehicle is used to pull a
trailer are all important. And, it can also depend on any
special equipment that you have on your vehicle.
The following chart shows how much your trailer can
weigh, based upon vehicle model and options.
4-30
ModelEngineAxleRatioWeight
3.42
G 10000 4.3L
3.73
5 .OL
3.42
5.7L
3.42
3.73
G20000
4.3L
3.42
4.10
5 .OL
3.42
5.7L
3.42
3.73
4.10
6.5L
3.73
4.10
5.7L
G30000
3.73
4.10
6.5L
3.73
4.10
7.4L
3.42
3.73
4.10
Max. Trailer
(lbs.) (kg)
4000
(1816)
(2043)
4500
5000
(2270)
5500
(2497)
(2724)
6000
4000
(1816)
(2270)
5000
5000 (2270)
5500
(2497)
(2724)
6000
7500
(3405)
6500
(295 1)
8000
(3632)
6000
(2724)
7500
(3405)
6500
(295 1 )
8000
(3632)
7000
(3178)
8000
(3632)
10,000 (4540)
Maximum trailer weight is calculated assuming the
driver and one passenger are inthe towing vehicle andit
has all the required trailering equipment. The weight of
additional equipment, passengersand cargo in the
towing vehicle must be must be subtracted from the
above maximum trailer weights.
You can ask your dealer for our
trailering information or
advice, or you can write us at the address listed in your
Warranty and Owner Assistance Information Booklet.
In Canada, write to:
General Motors of Canada Limited
Customer Communication Centre
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, OntarioL 1H 8P7
Weight of the Trailer Tongue
The tongue load (A) of any trailer is an important
weight to measure because it affects the total or gross
weight of your vehicle. The Gross Vehicle Weight
(GVW) includes the curb weight of the vehicle, any
cargo you may carry in it, and the people who will be
riding in the vehicle. And if you will tow a trailer, you
must add the tongue load to the GVW because your
vehicle will be carrying that weight, too. See “Loading
Your Vehicle” in the Index for more information about
your vehicle’s maximum load capacity.
A
B
4-31
If you’re using your platform hitch as aweight-carrying
hitch, the trailer tongue (A) should weigh 10 percent of
the total loaded trailer weight (B). If you’re using your
platform hitch as a weight-distributing hitch, the trailer
tongue (A) should weigh 12 percent of the total loaded
trailer weight (B).
After you’ve loaded your trailer, weigh the trailer and
then the tongue, separately, to see if the weights are
proper. If they aren’t, you may be able to get them right
simply by moving some itemsaround in the trailer.
Hitches
It’s important to have the correct hitch equipment.
Crosswinds, large trucks going by and rough roads are a
few reasons why you’ll need the right hitch. Here are
some rules to follow:
0
The bumpers on your vehicle are not intended for
hitches. Do not attach rental hitches or other
bumper-type hitches to them. Use only a
frame-mounted hitch that does not attach to the
bumper. Do not use a ball hitch, because it could pull
the bumper loose.
0
If you’ll be pulling a trailer that, when loaded, will
weigh more than 4,000 lbs. (1 800 kg), be sure to use
a properly mounted, weight-distributing hitch and
sway control of the proper size. This equipment is
very important for proper vehicle loading and good
handling when you’re driving.
Total Weight on Your Vehicle’s Tires
Be sure your vehicle’s tires are inflated to the limit for
cold tires. You’ll find these numbers on the Certification
label at the rear edge of the driver’sdoor or see “Tire
Loading” in the Index. Then be sure you don’t go over
the GVW limit for yourvehicle, including the weight of
the trailer tongue.
4-32
0
Will you have to make any holes in the body of your
vehicle when you install a trailer hitch?
If you’re using the wiring provided by the
factory-installed hitch, you should not need to make
any holes in the body of your vehicle. However, if
you have an aftermarket hitch installed, :you may
need to make holes in the body.
If you do, then be sure to seal the holes later when
you remove the hitch. If you don’t seal them, deadly
carbon monoxide (CO) from your exhaust can get
into your vehicle(see “Carbon Monoxide” in the
Index). Dirt and water can, too.
Safety Chains
You should always attach chains between your vehicle
and your trailer. Cross the safety chains under the tongue
of the trailer so that the tongue will not drop tothe road
if it becomes separated fromthe hitch. Instructions
about safety chains may be provided by the hitch
manufacturer or by the trailer manufacturer. Follow the
manufacturer’s recommendation for attaching safety
chains and do not attach them to the bumper. Always
leave just enoughslack so you can turn with your rig.
And, never allow safety chains to drag on the ground.
Trailer Brakes
If your trailer weighs more than 1,000 lbs.(450 kg)
loaded, then it needs its own brakes -- and they must be
adequate. Be sure to read and follow the instructionsfor
the trailer brakes so you’ll be able to install, adjust and
maintain them properly.
Driving with a m
.’.er
If you have a rear-most window open and you
pull a trailer with your vehicle, carbon monoxide
(CO) could comeinto your vehicle. You can’t see
or smell CO. It can cause unconsciousness or
death. (See “Engine Exhaust” in the Index.) To
maximize your safety when towinga trailer:
a Have your exhaust system inspected for
leaks, and make necessary repairs before
starting on your trip.
a Keep the rear-most windows closed.
a If exhaust does come into your vehicle
through a window in therear or another
opening, drive with your front, main
heating or cooling system on and with the
fan on any speed. This will bring fresh,
outside air into your vehicle. Do not use
MAX A/C because it only recirculates the
air inside your vehicle. (See“Comfort
Controls” in the Index.)
4-34
Towing a trailer requires a certain amount of experience.
Before setting out for the open road, you’ll want to get
to know your rig. Acquaint yourself with the feel of
handling and braking with the added weight of the
trailer. And always keep in mind that the vehicle you are
driving isnow a good deal longer and not nearly as
responsive as your vehicle is by itself.
Before you start, checkthe trailer hitch and platform
(and attachments), safety chains, electrical connector,
lamps, tires and mirror adjustment. If the trailer has
electric brakes, start your vehicle and trailer moving and
then apply the trailer brake controller by hand to be sure
the brakes are working. This lets you check your
electrical connection at the same time.
During your trip, check occasionally to be sure that the
load is secure, and that the lamps and any trailer brakes
are still working.
Following Distance
Stay at least twice as far behind the vehicle ahead as you
would when driving your vehicle without a trailer. This
can help you avoid situations that require heavy braking
and sudden turns.
Passing
You’ll need more passing distance up ahead when
you’re towing atrailer. And, because you’re a good deal
longer, you’ll need to go much farther beyond the
passed vehicle before you can return to your lane.
Backing Up
Hold the bottom of the steering wheel with one hand.
Then, to movethe trailer to the left, just move that hand
to the left. To move the trailer to the right, move your
hand to the right. Always back up slowly and, if
possible, have someone guideyou.
Making firns
I NOTICE:
Making very sharp turns while trailering could
cause the trailer to come in contact with the
vehicle. Your vehicle couldbe damaged. Avoid
making very sharp turns while trailering.
When you’re turning with a trailer, make wider
turns than normal. Do this so your trailer won’t
strike soft shoulders, curbs,road signs, trees or other
objects. Avoid jerky or suddenmaneuvers. Signal well
in advance.
lhrn Signals When Towing a Trailer
When you tow a trailer, your vehicle has to have extra
wiring and a heavy-duty turn signal flasher (included in
the optional trailering package).
The green arrows on your instrument panel will flash
whenever you signal a turn or lane change.Properly
hooked up, thetrailer lamps will also flash, telling other
drivers you’re about to turn, changelanes or stop.
When towing atrailer, the green arrows on your
instrument panel will flash for turns even if the bulbs on
the trailer are burned out. Thus, you may think drivers
behind you are seeing your signal when they are not. It’s
important to check occasionallyto be sure the trailer
bulbs are still working.
4-35
Driving On Grades
Parking on Hills
Reduce speed and shift to a lower gear before you start
down a long or steep downgrade.If you don’t shift
down, you might have to useyour brakes so much that
they would get hot and no longer work well.
You really should not park your vehicle, with a trailer
attached, on a hill. If something goes wrong, your rig
could start to move. People can be injured, and both
your vehicle and the trailer can be damaged.
On a long uphill grade, shift down and reduce your
speed to around 45 mph (70 k d h ) to reduce the
possibility of engine and transmission overheating.
But if you ever have to park your rig on a hill, here’s
how to do it:
1. Apply your regular brakes, but don’t shift into
PARK (P) yet. Then turn your wheels into the curb
if facing downhill or into traffic if facing uphill.
’
When towing at high altitude on steep uphill grades,
consider the following: Engine coolant will boil at a
lower temperature than at normal altitudes. If you turn
your engine off immediately after towing at high altitude
on steep uphill grades, your vehicle may show signs
similar to engine overheating. To avoid this, let the
engine run while parked (preferablyon level ground)
with the automatic transmission in PARK (P) for a few
minutes before turning the engine off. If you do get the
overheat warning, see “Engine Overheating” in the Index.
4-36
2. Have someone place chocks under the trailer wheels.
3. When the wheel chocks are in place, release the
regular brakes until the chocks absorbthe load.
4. Re-apply the regular brakes. Then apply your
parking brake and then shift to PARK (P).
5. Release the regular brakes.
When You Are Ready to Leave After
Parking on aHill
1. Apply your regular brakes and hold the pedal down
while you:
Start your engine;
Shift into a gear; and
Release the parking brake.
2. Let up on the brake pedal.
3. Drive slowly until the trailer is clear of the chocks.
4. Stop and have someone pick up and store the chocks.
Main mr ce When Trailer Towing
~
~
Your vehicle will need service more oftenwhen you’re
pulling a trailer. See the Maintenance Schedule formore
on this. Things that are especially importantin trailer
operation are automatictransmission fluid (don’t
overfill), engine oil, axle lubricant,belt, cooling system
and brake adjustment. Each of these is covered in this
manual, and the Index will help you find them quickly.
If you’re trailering, it’s a good idea to review these
sections before you start your trip.
Trailer Wiring Harness
The eight-wire harness, if you have one, is stored under
your vehicle along the rear frame crossmember. It is
wrapped and bound with a plastic strap. The harness has
a 30-amp battery feed and no connector, and you should
have a qualified electrical serviceperson wire your
harness for you. Attach the harness to the trailer, then
tape or strap it to your vehicle’s frame rail. Be sure you
leave it loose enough so the wiring doesn’t bend or
break, but not so loose that it drags on the ground.
Store the harness in its original place. Wrap the harness
together and tie it neatly so it won’t be damaged.
The five-wire harness, if you have one, is stored inside
the vehicle at the passenger side rear corner, behind the
jack. This should be wired by a qualifiedelectrical
service person. It must be routed out of your vehicle
between the rear door and the floor, with enough of the
harness left on both sides so that the trailer or the body
won’t pull it.
Store the harness in its original place. Wrap the harness
together and tie it neatly so it won’t be damaged.
Check periodically to see that all hitch nuts and bolts
are tight.
4-37
NOTES
4-38
NOTES
4-39
NOTES
4-40
Section 5 Problems on theRoad
Here you’ll find what to do about some problems that
can occur on the road.
Hazard Warning Flashers
Your hazard warning flashers let you warn others. They
also let police know you have a problem. Your front and
rear turn signal lamps will flash on and off.
But they won’t flash if you’re braking.
Push the button at the top of
the steering column all the
way down to make your
front and rear turn signals
flash on and off.
Your hazard warning flashers work no matter what
position your key is in, and even if the key isn’t in.
5-1
To turn off the flashers, push the button until the first
click and release.
When the hazard warning flashers areon, your turn
signals won’t work.
Other Warning Devices
If you carry reflective triangles, you can use them to
warn others. Set one up at the side of the road about
300 feet (100 m) behind your vehicle.
Jump Starting
If your battery has run down, you may wantto use another
Iehicle and somejumper cables to start your vehicle. But
)lease use the following steps listedto do it safely.
A CAUTJON:
Batteries can hurt you. They can be
dangerous because:
They contain acid that can burn you.
They contain gas that can explode or ignite.
They contain enough electricityto burn you.
If you don’t follow these steps exactly, someor all
of these things can hurt you.
5-2
NOTICE:
Ignoring these steps could result in costly damage
to your vehicle that wouldn’t be covered by
your warranty.
Trying to startyour vehicle by pushing or pulling
it won’t work, and itcould damage your vehicle.
1. Check the other vehicle. It must have a 12-volt
battery with a negative ground system.
NOTICE:
If the othersystem isn’t a 12-volt system with a
negative ground, both vehicles can be damaged.
If you have a diesel engine vehicle with two batteries
(or more) you should know before you begin that,
especially in cold weather, you may not be able to
get enough power from a single battery in another
vehicle to start your diesel engine.
If your vehicle has more than one battery, use the
battery that is under the hood of the vehicle -- this
will reduce the electrical resistance.
2. Get the vehicles close enough so the jumper cables
can reach, but be surethe vehicles aren’t touching
each other. If they are, it could cause a ground
connection you don’t want. You wouldn’t be able to
start your vehicle, and the bad grounding could
damage the electrical systems.
Set the parking brake firmlyon each vehicle. Put an
automatic transmission in PARK (P) or amanual
transmission in NEUTRAL (N).
3. Turn off the ignition on both vehicles. Turn off all
lamps that aren’t needed, and radios. Thiswill avoid
sparks and help save both batteries, and could save
your radio!
NOTICE:
If you leaveyour radioon, it could be badly
damaged. The repairswould not be covered by
your warranty.
4. Open the hoods and locate the batteries. Find
the positive (+) and negative (-) terminals on
each battery.
A CAUTION:
Using a match near a battery cancause battery
gas to explode. People have been hurt doing this,
and some have been blinded. Use a flashlight if
you need more light.
Be sure the battery (or batteries) has
enough
water. You don’t need to add water to theDelco
Freedom@ battery (or batteries)
installed in
every new GM vehicle. But if a battery hasfiller
caps, be sure the right amount
of fluid is there. If
it is low, add water to take careof that first. If
you don’t, explosive gas could be present.
Battery fluid contains acid that can burn you.
Don’t getit on you. If you accidentally get it in
your eyes or on your skin, flush the place with
water and get medical help immediately.
5. Check that the jumpercables don’t have loose or
missing insulation. If they do, you could get a shock.
The vehicles could be damaged,too.
Before you connect thecables, here are somebasic
things you should know. Positive (+) will go to
positive (+) and negative (-) will.go tonegative (-)
or a metal engine part. Don’t connect positive (+) to
negative (-) or you will get a short that would
damage the battery and maybe other parts, too.
-
I /I\ CAUTION:
Fans or other moving engine parts can injure you
6. Connect the red positive (+) cable to the positive (+)
badly. Keep your hands away from moving parts
terminal of the vehicle with the dead battery. Use a
once the engines are running.
remote positive (+) terminal if the vehicle has one.
5-4
7. Don’t let the other end
touch metal. Connect it
to the positive (+)
terminal of the good
battery. Use a remote
positive (+) terminal if
the vehicle has one.
8.
Now connect the black
negative (-) cable to
the good battery’s
negative (-) terminal.
Don’t let the other end touch anything until the
next step.
9. Make your last connection away from the battery,
to the engine block, frame or othermetal parts of
your vehicle.
10. Now start the vehicle with the good battery and run
the engine for a while.
11. Try to start the vehicle with the dead battery.
If it won’t start after a few tries, it probably
needs service.
5-5
12. Remove the cables in reverse order to prevent
electrical shorting. Take care that they don’t touch
each other or any other metal.
I
B
+
Towing Your Vehicle
Try to have yourGM dealer or a professional towing
service tow your vehicle. They can provide the right
equipment and know how to tow
it without damage. See
“Roadside Assistance” in your Index.
If your vehicle has been changed since it was
factory-new, by adding things like fog lamps, aero
skirting, or special tires and wheels, these things could
be damaged during towing.
Before you do anything, turnon the hazard
warning flashers.
When you call, tell the towing service:
That your vehicle has rear wheel drive.
0
0
C . Dead Battery
The make, model and yearof your vehicle.
0
Whether you can move the shift lever for
the transmission.
0
If there was an accident, what was damaged.
A. Engine Block, Frame, Heavy Metal Engine Part
B. Good Battery
,
IA
I
A CAUTION:
CAUTION:
To help avoid injury to you or others:
0 Never let passengers ride in a vehicle that is
being towed.
Never tow faster thansafe or posted speeds.
0 Never tow with damaged parts not
fully secured.
0 Never get under your vehicle after it has
been lifted by the tow truck.
Always use separate safety chains on each
side when towing a vehicle.
I
I
A vehicle can fall from a car carrierif it isn’t
adequately secured. This can cause a collision,
serious personal injury and vehicle damage. The
vehicle should be tightly secured with chains or
steel cables before it is transported.
Don’t use substitutes (ropes, leather straps,
canvas webbing, etc.) that canbe cut by sharp
edges underneath the towed vehicle.
When your vehicle is being towed, have the ignition
key off. The steering wheel should be clamped in a
straight-ahead position, with a clamping device
designed for towing service.Do not use the vehicle’s
steering column lock for this. Thetransmission should
be in NEUTRAL (N) and the parking brake should
be released.
5-7
Front Towing
A towing dolly must be used under the drive wheels
when towingfrom the front.
Tow Limits -- 35 mph (56 km/h), 50 miles (80 km)
NOTICE:
Do not tow with sling-type equipment or the
front bumper system will be damaged. Use
wheel-lift or car-carrier equipment. Additional
ramping may be required for car-carrier
equipment. Use safety chains and wheel straps.
Towing a vehicle over rough surfaces could
damage a vehicle or wheel-lift equipment.
To help avoid damage, install a towing dolly
a,nd raise the vehicle until adequateclearance
is obtained between the ground and/or
wheel-lift equipment.
Rear Towing
NOTICE:
Do not tow the vehicle from therear with
loads approaching rated GVW as theweight
transfer will cause the frontsuspension to
become overloaded.
NOTICE:
Do not tow with the sling-type equipment or the
rear bumperwill be damaged. Use wheel-lift or
car-carrier equipment. Additional ramping may
be required for car-carrier equipment. Use safety
chains and wheel straps.
Towing a vehicle over rough surfaces could
damage a vehicle. To help avoid damage, install a
towing dolly and raise thevehicle until adequate
clearance is obtained between the ground and/or
wheel-lift equipment.
5-9
Engine Overheating
(Gasoline Engine)
You will find a coolant temperature gage on your
vehicle instrument panel. If you have a diesel engine,
you will also find a low coolant light on your
instrument panel.
If your vehicle has a diesel engine, see"Engine
Overheating" in the GM Diesel Engine Supplement.
If Steam Is Coming From Your Engine
---
-
>?.
Steam from an overheated engine can burn you
badly, evenif you just open the hood. Stay away
from the engine if you seeor hearsteam coming
from it. Just turn it off and get everyone away
from the vehicle until itcools down. Wait until
there is no sign of steam or coolant before
opening the hood.
If you keep driving when your engine is
overheated, the liquids in it cancatch fire. You or
others could be badly burned. Stop your engine if
it overheats, and get out of the vehicle until the
engine is cool.
NOTICE:
If your engine catches fire because you keep
driving with no coolant, your vehicle can be
badly damaged. The costly repairs would not be
covered by your warranty.
5-10
If No Steam Is Coming From Your Engine
If you get the overheat warning but see or hear no
steam, the problem may not be too serious. Sometimes
the engine can get a little too hotwhen you:
0
Climb a long hill on a hot day.
0
Stop after high-speed driving.
0
Idle for long periods in traffic.
0
Tow a trailer. See “Driving on Grades” in the Index.
If you get the overheat warning with no sign of steam,
try this for aminute or so:
1. If you have an air conditioner, turn it off.
2. Turn on your heater to full hot at the highest fan
speed and openthe window as necessary.
If you no longer have the overheat warning, you can
drive. Just tobe safe, drive slower forabout 10 minutes.
If the warning doesn’t come back on, you can
drive normally.
If the warning continues, pull over, stop, and park your
vehicle right away.
If there’s still no sign of steam, you can idle the engine
for two or three minutes while you’re parked, to push
the accelerator until the engine speed is about twice as
fast as normal idle speed. Bring the engine speed back to
normal idle speed after two or three minutes. Now see if
the warning stops. But then, if you still have the
warning, turn o f t h e engine and get everyone out qf the
vehicle until it cools down.
You may decide not to lift the hood but to get service
help right away.
3. If you’re in a traffic jam, shift to NEUTRAL (N);
otherwise, shift to the highest gear while
driving -- DRIVE (D).
5-11
Cooling System
If the coolant inside the coolant recovery tank is boiling,
don’t do anything else until it cools down.
When you decide it’s safe to lift the hood, here’s what
you’ll see:
A. Radiator Pressure Cap
B. Coolant Recovery Tank
C. Engine Fan(s)
5-12
The coolant level should be at or above the FULL
COLD mark. If it isn’t, you may have a leak in the
radiator hoses, heater hoses, radiator, water pump or
somewhere else in the cooling system.
A CAUTION:
Heater and radiatorhoses, and otherengine
parts, can be very hot. Don’t touch them. If you
do, you can be burned.
Don’t run theengine if there is a leak. If you run
the engine, it could lose all coolant. That could
cause an engine fire, andyou could be burned.
Get anyleak fixed before you drive thevehicle.
NOTICE:
Engine damage from runningyour engine
without coolant isn’t covered by your warranty.
If there seems to be no leak,start the engine again. See
if the fan speed increases when idle speed is doubled by
pushing the accelerator pedal down. If it doesn’t, your
vehicle needs service. Turn off the engine.
How to Add Coolant to the Coolant
Recovery Tank
If you haven’t found a problem yet, but the coolant level
isn’t at the FULL COLD mark, add a 5060 mixture of
clean water (preferably distilled) and DEX-COOL’”
(orange-colored, silicate-free) antifreezeat the coolant
recovery tank. (See “Engine Coolant”in the Index for
more information.)
Adding only plain water toyour cooling sy,,,m
can be dangerous. Plain water, or some other
liquid like alcohol, can boil before the proper
coolant mix will. Your vehicle’scoolant warning
system is set for the propercoolant mix. With
plain wateror thewrong mix, your engine could
get too hot but you wouldn’t get the overheat
warning. Your engine could catch fire and you or
others could be burned. Use a 50/50 mix of clean
water and DEX=COOL antifreeze.
TM
c
1 1
I NOTICE:
~~
In cold weather, water can freeze and crack the
engine, radiator, heater core and other parts.
Use the recommended coolant and the proper
coolant mix.
A
CAIJTION:
You can be b
ed if you spill coolant on hot
engine parts. Coolant contains ethylene glycol
and itwill burn if the engine parts arehot
enough. Don’t spillcoolant on a hot engine.
When the coolant in the coolant recovery tank is at the
FULL COLD mark, start your vehicle.
If the overheat warning continues, there’s one more
thing you can try. You can add the proper coolant mix
directly to the radiator, but be sure the cooling system is
cool before you do it.
5-14
Steam and scalding liquids froma hot cooling
system can blow out and burn you badly. They
are underpressure, and if you turn the pressure
cap even a little they can come out at high
speed. Neverturn thecap when the cooling
system, including the radiatorpressure cap,is
hot. Wait for the cooling system and radiator
pressure capto cool if you ever have to turn the
pressure cap.
--
--
5-15
How to Add Coolant to the Radiator
2. Then keep turning the pressure cap,but now push
down as you turn it. Removethe pressure cap.
1. You can remove the radiator pressure cap when the
cooling system, including the radiator pressure cap
and upper radiator hose, is no longer hot.Turn the
pressure cap slowly counterclockwise until it first
stops. (Don’t press down while turning the
pressure cap.)
If you hear a hiss, wait for that to stop. A hiss means
there is still some pressure left.
5-16
I
3. Fill the radiator with the proper mix, up to the base
of the fillerneck.
4. Then fill the coolant recoverytank to the FULL
COLD mark.
5-17
I
5. Put the cap back on the coolant recovery tank, but
leave the radiator pressure capoff.
6. Start the engine and let it run until you can feel the
upper radiator hose getting hot. Watch out for the
engine fan.
7. By this time the coolant level inside the radiator
filler neck may be lower. If the level is lower, add
more of the proper mix through the filler neck until
the level reaches the base of the filler neck.
5-18
Engine Fan Noise
Your vehicle has a clutched engine cooling fan. When the
clutch is engaged, the fan spins faster to provide more air
to cool the engine. In most every day driving conditions,
the fan is spinning slower and clutch is not fully engaged.
This improves fuel economy and reduces fan noise.
Under heavy vehicle loading, trailer towing and/or high
outside temperatures, the fan speed increases as the clutch
more fully engages. So you may hear an increase in fan
noise. This is normal and should not be mistaken as the
transmission slipping or making extra shifts. It is merely
the cooling system functioning properly. The fan will
slow down when additional cooling is not required and
the clutch partially disengages.
8. Then replace the pressure cap. At any time during
this procedure if coolant begins to flow out of the
filler neck, reinstall the pressure cap. Be sure the
arrows on the pressure cap line up like this.
You may also hear this Fan noise when you start
the engine. It will go away as the fan clutch
partially disengages.
5-19
If a Tire Goes Flat
Changing a Flat Tire
It’s unusual for a tireto “blow out” while you’re driving,
especially if you maintain your tires properly. If air goes
out of a tire, it’s much more likely to leak out slowly.
But if you should ever have a “blowout,” here are a few
tips about what to expect and what to do:
If a tire goes flat,avoid further tire and wheel damage
by driving slowly to a level place. Turn on your hazard
warning flashers.
If a front tire fails, the flat tire will create a dragthat
pulls the vehicle toward that side. Take your foot off the
accelerator pedal and grip the steering wheel firmly.
Steer tomaintain lane position, and then gently brake to
a stop well out of the traffic lane.
A rear blowout, particularly on a curve, acts much like a
skid and may require the same correction you’d use in a
skid. In any rear blowout, remove your foot from the
accelerator pedal. Get the vehicle under control by
steering the way you want the vehicle to go. It may be
very bumpy and noisy, but you can still steer. Gently
brake to a stop -- well off the road if possible.
If a tire goes flat,the next part shows how to use your
jacking equipment to change a flat tire safely.
5-20
I
Changing a tire can cause an injury. The vehicle
can slip off the jack androll over you or other
people. You and they could be badly injured.
Find a level place to change your tire. To help
prevent the vehicle from moving:
1. Set the parking brakefirmly.
2. Put the shift lever in PARK (P).
3. ”urn off the engine.
To be even more certain thevehicle won’t move,
you can put blocks at the front and rear
of the
tire farthestaway from the one being changed.
That would be the tireon the otherside of the
vehicle, at the opposite end.
Removing the Spare Tire and Tools
The following steps will tell you how to use the jack and
change a tire.
Your spare tire is stored underneath the rear of your
vehicle. You will use the ratchet and extension to lower
the spare tire.
5-21
NOTICE:
Never remove or restorea tire frondto a stowage
position under the vehicle while the vehicle
is
supported bya jack. Always tighten the tire
fully against the underside of the vehicle
when restowing
A flat rear tire reduces clearance to remove the spare
tire. If there is less than 12 inches (30.48 cm) between
the ground and the rear bumper or any trailer hitch, jack
up the vehicle until the flat tireis off the ground.
(See “Removing the Flat Tire” and “Installing the
Spare Tire,’’ Steps 4 through 8, in this section.)
Unless your vehicle has a flatrear tire, do not remove or
restore a tire from/to a stowage position under the
vehicle while the vehicle is supported by a jack.Always
tighten the tire fully against the underside of the vehicle
when restowing.
5-22
If you have a vehicle which was completed from a cab
and chassis, refer to the information from the body
suppliedinstaller.
The spare tire is a full size tire, like the other tires on
your vehicle.
For cargo vans, the jack
is secured in the rear
Remove the retaining wing bolt and lift it off the
mounting bracket. Set the jack and jacking equipment
near the flat tire.
The ratchet has an UP side anda DOWN side.
For passenger vans, the jack is secured on the rear
passenger side floorof the vehicle.
Remove the retaining wing bolt and lift it out of the
mounting bracket. Setthe jack and jacking equipment
near the flat tire.
5-23
inside of the wheel and pull the spare tire out from under
the vehicle.
When the tire has been lowered, tilt the retainer at the
end of the cable and pull it through the wheel opening.
Attach the ratchet, with the DOWN side facing you, to
the extension. The extension has a socket end and a flat
chisel end.
Put the flat end of the extension on an angle through the
hole in the rear door frame, above the bumper. Be sure
the flat end connects into the hoist shaft.
Turn the ratchet counterclockwise to lower the spare tire
to the ground. If you are changing aflat rear tire and the
vehicle is already jacked up, use the jack handle and
extension to hook the cable. Then pull the spare from
beneath the vehicle. If the retainer pulls out, hook the
5-24
I NOTICE:
To help avoid vehicle damage,do not drive
vehicle before the cableis restored.
Jacking Tool Storage
A. Socket
B. Jack Handle
The tools you’ll be using include the jack (A), jack
handle extension (B), jack handle (C), socket (D) and
the ratchet (E).
C. Ratchet
D. Jacking Tool Storage Box
E. Jack Handle Extension
5-25
Removing the Wheel Coversand Locking
Wheel Nuts
2. Loosen the plastic nut caps with the ratchet and
socket and remove them. Make sure the DOWN
side faces you.
1. You will need to take off the wheel n u t caps to reach
your wheel nuts.
5-26
Removing the Flat Tire and Installing the
Spare Tire
3. Remove the center cap.
I . With the DOWN side Facing you, use the ratchet and
socket to loosen a l l the wheel nuts. Don't remove
them yet.
5-27
3. Rotate the ratchet clockwise. That will raise the jack
lift head a little.
2 . The jackhas a bolt on the end. AtLach the socket end
of the extension to the jack bolt.
Attach the ratchet to the extension with the UP side
facing you.
5-28
Front Position
4. Position jack under the
vehicle as shown.
Rear Position
AC
A
UTION:
5. Raise the vehicle by rotating the ratchet clockwise.
Make sure the UP mark faces you. Raise the vehicle
h r enough off the ground so there is enough room
for the spare tire to fit.
Getting undera vehicle when itis jacked up is
dangerous. If the vehicle slipsoff the jack, you
could be badly injuredor killed. Never get under
a vehicle when it is supported onlyby a jack.
5-29
6. Remove all the wheel
nuts, and take off the
flat tire.
7. Remove any rust or dirt
from the wheel bolts,
mounting surfaces and
spare wheel.
A CAUTION:
Rust or dirton the wheel, or on the parts to
which it is fastened, can make thewheel nuts
become looseafter atime. The wheel could come
off and cause an accident. When you change a
wheel, remove any rust or dirtfrom the places
where the wheel attaches to thevehicle. In an
emergency, you can use a cloth or a paper towel
to do this; but be sure to use a scraper or wire
brush later, if you need to, to get all the rustor
dirt off.
I A CAUTION:
Never use oilor grease on studs or nuts. If you
do, the nutsmight come loose. Your wheel could
fall off, causing a serious accident.
I
5-30
I
8. Replace the wheel nuts
with the rounded end of
the nuts toward the
wheel. Tighten each
wheel nut by hand until
the wheel is held against
the hub.
10. Tighten the nuts firmly
in a criss-cross sequence
as shown. Rotate the
wheel wrench
clockwise.
9. Lower the vehicle by rotating the jack handle
counterclockwise. Lowerthe jack completely.
5-31
A CAUTION:
Incorrect wheel nuts orimproperly tightened
wheel nuts can cause the wheel to become loose
and even comeoff. This could lead to anaccident.
Be sure touse the correctwheel nuts. If youhave
to replace them, be sure toget new GM original
equipment wheel nuts.
Stop somewhere as soon as you can and have
the nutstightened with a torque wrench to
122 lb-ft (165 Nom).
5-32
NOTICE:
Improperly tightened wheel nuts can lead to
brake pulsation and rotordamage. To avoid
expensive brake repairs, evenly tighten the wheel
nuts in the propersequence and to the proper
torque specification.
11. Put the wheel cover back on, if you have one.
Remove any wheel blocks.
Remember that the jack, jackingequipment and tire
must be properly stored in their original storage
position before you begin driving again. The next
part will show you how.
Storing a Flat or Spare Tire and Tools
Storing a jack, a tire or other equipment in the
passenger compartmentof the vehicle could
cause injury. In a sudden stop or collision, loose
equipment could strikesomeone. Store all these
in the proper place.
I . Put the tire on the ground at the rear of the vehicle,
with the valve stem pointed down.
2. Pull the retaining bar through the center of the
wheel, making sure it is properly attached.
5-33
3. Pull the wheel toward the rear of the vehicle keep the
cable tight.
5-34
4. Attach the ratchet, with the UP side facing you, to
the extension.
If You’re Stuck: In Sand, Mud,
Ice or Snow
What you don’t want to do when your vehicle is stuck is
to spin your wheels too fast. The method known as
“rocking’’ can help you get out when you’re stuck, but
you must use caution.
5. Put the flat end of the extension on an angle through
the hole in the rear door frame, abovethe bumper.
Turn the ratchet clockwise until the tire is against the
underside of the vehicle.
You will hear two “clicks” when the tire is up all the
way. Try to move the tire with your hands to make
sure it is securely in place.
If you let your tires spin at high speed, they can
explode, and you or others could be injured.
And, the transmission or other partsof the
vehicle can overheat. That could cause an engine
compartment fireor otherdamage. When you’re
stuck, spin thewheels as little as possible. Don’t
spin the wheels above 35 mph (55 km/h) as shown
on the speedometer.
Return the jacking equipment tothe proper location.
Secure the items and replace the jack cover.
L 2t
I NOTICE:
Spinning your wheels can destroy parts of your
vehicle as well as the tires. If you spin the wheels
too fast while shifting your transmission back
and forth, you can destroy your transmission.
~
~
~~
For information about usingtire chains onyour vehicle,
see “Tire Chains” in the Index.
5-36
Rocking your vehicleto get it out:
First, turn your steering wheel left and right. That will
clear the area around your front wheels. Then shift back
and forth between REVERSE (R) and a forward gear,
spinning the wheels as little as possible. Release the
accelerator pedal while you shift, and press lightly on
the accelerator pedal when the transmission is in gear. If
that doesn’t get you out after a few tries, you may need
to be towed out. I f you do need to be towed out, see
“Towing Your Vehicle” in the Index.
Section 6 Service and Appearance Care
Here you will find information about the care of your
vehicle. This section begins with service and fuel
information, and then it shows how to check important
fluid and lubricant levels. There is also technical
information about your vehicle, and a part devoted to its
appearance care.
We hope you’ll want to keep your GM vehicle all GM.
Genuine GM parts have one of these marks:
Service
Your GM dealer knows yourvehicle best and wants you
to be happy with it. We hope you’ll go to your dealer for
all your service needs. You’ll get genuine GM parts and
GM-trained and supported service people.
Doing Your Own Service Work
If you want to do some of your own service work, you’ll
want to get the proper GM Service Manual. It tells you
much more about how to service your vehicle than this
manual can. To order the proper service manual, see
“Service and Owner Publications’’ in the Index.
Your vehicle may have an air bag system. If it does, see
“Servicing Your Air Bag-Equipped Vehicle” in the
Index before attempting to do your own service work.
You should keep a record with all parts receipts and list
the mileage and the date of any service work you
perform. See “MaintenanceRecord” in the Index.
You can be injured and your vehicle could be
damaged if you try todo service work on a
vehicle without knowing enough about it.
Be sure you have sufficient knowledge,
experience, and the proper replacement
parts and tools before you attempt any
vehicle maintenance task.
0 Be sure to use the proper nuts, bolts and
other fasteners. “English” and “metric”
fasteners canbe easily confused.If you use
the wrong fasteners, parts can later break
or fall off. You could be hurt.
6-2
Fuel (Gasoline Engine)
If your vehicle has a diesel engine, see “Diesel Fuel
Requirements and Fuel System” in the Diesel Engine
Supplement. For vehicles with gasoline engines, please
read this.
Use regular unleaded gasoline rated at 87 octane or
higher. At a minimum, it should meet specifications
ASTM D48 14 in the United States and CGSB 3.5-M93
in Canada. Improved gasoline specifications have been
developed by the American Automobile Manufacturers
Association (AAMA) for better vehicle performance
and engine protection. Gasolines meeting the AAMA
specification could provide improved driveability and
emission control system protection compared to
other gasolines.
Be sure the posted octane is at least 87. If the octane is
less than 87, you may get a heavy knocking noise when
you drive. If it’s bad enough, it can damage your engine.
If you’re using fuel rated at 87 octane or higher and you
still hear heavy knocking, your engine needs service.
But don’t worry if you hear a little pinging noise when
you’re accelerating or driving up a hill. That’s normal,
and you don’t have to buy a higher octane fuel to get rid
ofpinging. It’s the heavy, constant knock that means
you have a problem.
If your vehicle is certified to meet California Emission
Standards (indicated on the underhood tune-up label), it
is designed to operate on fuels that meet California
specifications. If such fuels are not available in states
adopting California emissions standards,your vehicle
will operate satisfactorily on fuels meeting federal
specifications, but emission control system performance
may be affected. The malfunction indicator lamp on
your instrument panel may turn on and/or your vehicle
may fail a smog-check test. If this occurs, return to your
authorized GM dealer for diagnosis to determine
the
cause of hilure. In the event it is determined that the
cause of the condition is the type of fuels used, repairs
may not be covered by your warranty.
To provide cleaner air, all gasolines are now required to
contain additives that will help prevent deposits from
forming in your engine and fuel system, allowing your
emission control system to function properly. Therefore,
you should not have to add anything to the fuel. In
addition, gasolines containing oxygenates, suchas ethers
and ethanol, and reformulated gasolines may be
available in your area to help clean the air. General
Motors recommends that you use these gasolines if they
comply with the specifications described earlier.
In Canada, some gasolines contain an octane-enhancing
additive called MMT. If you use such fuels, your
emission control system performance may deteriorate
and the malfunction indicator lamp on your instrument
panel may turn on. If this happens, return to your
authorized GM dealer for service.
Your vehicle was not designedfor fuel that
contains methanol. Don’t use it.
It can corrode
metal parts in your fuel system and
also damage
plastic and rubber parts. That damage wouldn’t
be covered under your warranty.
NOTICE:
6-3
Fuels in Foreign
Countries -- Gasoline Engines
Filling Your Tank
If you plan on driving in another country outside the
United States or Canada, the proper fuel may be hard to
find. Never use leaded gasoline or any other fuel not
recommended in the previous text on fuel. Costly repairs
caused by use of improper fuelwouldn’t be covered by
your warranty.
~
1
j
To check on fuel availability, ask an auto club, or
contact a major oil company that does business in the
country where you’ll be driving.
You can alsowrite us at thefollowing address for
advice. Just tell us where you’re going and give your
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN).
General Motors Overseas Distribution Corporation,
North American Export Sales(NAES)
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
1 C ,U
ION:
Gasoline vapor is highly flammable. It burns
violently, and that can cause very bad injuries.
Don’t smoke if you’re near gasolineor refueling
your vehicle. Keep sparks, flames and smoking
materials away.fromgasoline.
I
I
If you getgasoline on yourself and then
something ignites it, you could be badly burned.
Gasoline can spray out on youif you open the
fuel filler cap too quickly.This spray can happen
if your tank is nearly full, and is more likely in
hot weather. Open the fuel filler cap slowly and
wait for any “hiss” noise to stop. Then unscrew
the capall the way.
While refueling, hang the cap inside the fuel
door.
To take off the cap, turn it slowly to
the left
Be careful not to spill gasoline. Clean gasoline from
painted surfacesas soon as possible. See “Cleaning
the
Outside of Your Vehicle” in the Index.
(counterclockwise).
6-5
When you put the cap back on, turn it to the right until
you hear at least three clicks. Make sureyou fully install
the cap. The diagnosticsystem can determine if the fuel
cap has been left off or improperly installed. This would
allow fuel to evaporate into the atmosphere. See
“Malfunction Indicator Lamp” in the Index.
I NOTICE:
If’you needa new cap, be sure to get the right
type. Your dealer can get one for you. If you get
the wrong type,it may notfit or have proper
venting, and your fuel tank and emissions system
might be damaged.
6-6
I
Checking Things Under theHood
To open the hood, first pull
this handle inside the
vehicle. It is just in front of
the driver’s side door frame
near the floor.
Lift the hood, release the
hood prop from its retainer
and put the hood prop into
the slot in the hood hinge.
The underhood lamp will
automatically come on
and stay on until the hood
is closed.
Then go to the front of the vehicle and release the
secondary hood release.
6-7
When you lift the hood, you’ll see these items:
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
Battery
Coolant Recovery Tank
Engine Oil Dipstick
Engine Oil Fill
Transmission Dipstick
6-8
F.
G.
H.
I.
Air Cleaner
Power Steering Reservoir
Brake Master Cylinder
Windshield Washer Fluid
If your vehicle has a 7.4L engine and air conditioning,
your vehicle will have a auxiliary engine fan in addition
to the belt driven fan.
A CAUTION:
If your vehicle has airconditioning, the auxiliary
engine fan underthe hood can start up and
injure you even whenthe engine is not running.
Keep hands, clothing and tools away from any
underhood electric fan.
Things that burncan get on hot engine parts and
start a fire. These include liquids like gasoline,
oil, coolant, brake fluid, windshield washer and
other fluids, and plastic or rubber. You or others
could be burned. Be careful not to drop orspill
things that will burn onto a hot engine.
Before closing the hood, be sure all the filler caps are
on properly.
Then lift the hood to relieve pressure on the hood prop.
Remove the hood prop from the slot in the hood and
return the prop to its retainer. Then just letthe hood
down and close it firmly.
Noise Control System
The following information relates to compliance with
Federal noise emission standards for vehicles with a
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) of more than
10,000 lbs. (4 536 kg). The Maintenance Schedule
booklet provides information on maintaining the noise
control system to minimize degradation of the noise
emission control system during the life of your vehicle.
The noise control system warranty is given in your
Warranty booklet.
These standards apply only to vehicles sold in the
United States.
6-9
Tampering With Noise Control
System Prohibited
Engine:
Removal or rendering engine speed governor (if so
equipped) inoperative so as to allow engine speed to
exceed manufxturer specifications.
Federal law prohibits the following acts or the
causing thereof
1. The removal or rendering inoperative by any person,
other than for purposes of maintenance, repair or
replacement, of any device orelement of design
incorporated into any new vehicle for the purpose of
noise control, prior to its sale ordelivery to the
ultimate purchaser or while it is in use; or
2. The use of the vehicle after such device or element
of design has been removed or rendered inoperative
by any person.
Among those acts presumed to constitute tampering are
the acts listed below.
Insulation:
0
Removal of noise shields or underhood insulation.
6-10
Fan and Drive:
Removal of fan clutch (if so equipped) or rendering
clutch inoperative.
Removal of fm shroud (if so equipped).
Air Intake:
0
Removal of air cleaner silencer.
0
Reversing air cleaner cover.
Exhaust:
0
Removal of muffler and/or resonator.
Removal of exhaust pipes and exhaust pipe clamps.
Engine Oil (Gasoline Engine)
If your vehicle has a diesel engine, see “EngineOil
(Diesel Engine)” in the Diesel Engine Supplement.
It’s a good idea to check your engine oilevery time you
get fuel. In order to get an accurate reading, the oil must
be warm and the vehicle must be on level ground.
Turn off the engine and give
the oil a few minutes to drain
back into the oil pan. If you
don’t, the oil dipstick might
not show the actual level.
When to Add Oil
If the oil is at or below the ADD mark, then you’ll need to
add some oil. But you must use the right kind. This part
explains what kind of oil to use. For crankcase capacity,
see “Capacities and Specifications” in the Index.
I NOTICE:
Checking Engine Oil
Pull out the dipstick and clean it with a paper towel or
cloth, then push it back in all the way. Remove it again,
keeping the tip down, and check the level.
Don’t add too much oil.If’your engine has so much
oil that the oil level gets above the upper mark that
shows the proper operating range,your engine
could be damaged.
6-11
What Kind of Oil to Use
Oils recommended for your vehicle can be identified by
looking for the “Starburst” symbol. This symbol
indicates that the oil has been certified by the American
Petroleum Institute (API). Do not use any oil which
does not carry this Starburst symbol.
The engineoil filler cap is located between the air
cleaner and engine oil dipstick.
Just fill it enough to put the level somewhere in the
proper operating range. Push the dipstick all the way
back in when you’re through.
6-12
If you change your ownoil,
be sure you use oil that has
the Starburst symbol on the
front of the oil container.
If you have your oil
changed for you, be sure
the oil put into your engine
is American Petroleum
Institute certified for
gasoline engines.
You should also use the proper viscosity oil for your
vehicle, as shown in the following chart:
RECOMMENDED SAE VlSCOSlTV GRADE ENGINE OILS
FOR BEST FUEL ECONOMY AND COLD STARTING, SELECT THE LOWEST
SAE VISCOSITY GRADE OIL FOR THE EXPECTED TEMPERATURE RANGE.
WOK
FOR MIS
SYMBOL
HOT
WEATHER
As shown in the chart, SAE 5W-30 is best for your
vehicle. However, you can use SAE IOW-30 if it’s going
to be 0°F (-18°C) or above. These numbers on an oil
container show its viscosity, or thickness. Do not use
other viscosity oils, such as SAE 20W-50.
I NOTICE:
Use only engine oil with the American Petroleum
Institute Certified For Gasoline
Engines
“Starburst” symbol. Failureto use the
recommended oil can result
in engine damage
not covered by your warranty.
GM Goodwrench@oil meets all the requirements for
your vehicle.
Engine Oil Additives
r
1-30
RED
Don’t add anything to your oil. Your GM dealer is ready
to advise if you think something should be added.
COLD
WEATHER
DO NOTUSESAE 2OW-50 OR ANYOTHER
GRADE OIL NOT RECOMMENDED
6-13
When to Change Engine Oil
What toDo with Used Oil
See if any one of these is true for you:
Did YOU know that used engine oil contains certain
elements that may be unhealthy for yourskin and could
even causecancer? Don’t let used oil stay on your skin
for very long. Clean your skin and nails with soap and
water, or a good hand cleaner. Wash or properly throw
away clothing or rags containing
used engine oil. (See
the manufacturer’s warnings about the use and disposal
of oil products.)
0
Most trips are less than 5 to 10 miles (8 to 16 km).
This is particularly important when outside
temperatures are below freezing.
Most trips include extensive idling (such as frequent
driving in stop-and-go traffic).
Most trips are through dusty areas.
0
You frequently tow a trailer or use a carrier on top of
your vehicle.
The vehicle is used for delivery service, police, taxi
or other commercial application.
Driving under these conditions causes engine oil to
break down sooner. If any one of these istrue for your
vehicle, then you need to change your oil and filter
every 3,000 miles (5 000 km)or 3 months -- whichever
occurs first.
If done of them is true, change the oil and filter every
7,500 miles (12 500 km) or 12 months -- whichever
occurs first. Driving a vehicle with a fully warmed
engine under highway conditions causes engine oil to
break down slower.
6-14
Used oil can be a real threat to theenvironment. If you
change your own oil, be sure todrain all free-flowing oil
from the filter before disposal. Don’t ever dispose of oil
by putting it in the trash, pouring it on the ground, into
sewers, or into streams or bodies of water. Instead,
recycle it by taking it to a place that collects used oil. If
you have a problem properly disposing of your used oil,
ask your dealer, a service station or a local recycling
center for help.
Air Cleaner
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine when to
replace the air filter and crankcase ventilation filter.
See “Scheduled Maintenance Services” in the Index.
I
-\CAUTAN:
Operating theengine with the aircleaner off can
cause you or others to be burned. The air cleaner
not only cleans the air, it stopsflame if the engine
backfires. If it isn’t there, and the engine
backfires, you could be burned. Don’t drive with
it off, and be careful working on the engine with
the air cleaner off.
70 remove the air cleaner nlter:
loosen screw bolt to air induct hose
0 remove the three bolts
remove the full air cleaner housing
unsnap the three clips
Then tilt the top cover up and back to expose the filter
element. Install anew filter element with the folds in the
down position.
See “Normal Replacement Parts” for the proper filter
to use.
I NOTICE:
I
If the air cleaner is off, a backfire can cause a
damaging engine fire. And, dirt can easily get
into your engine, which will damage it. Always
have the air cleaner in place when you’re driving.
6-15
Automatic Transmission Fluid
How to Check
When to Check and Change
.Because this operation can be a little difficult, you
may choose tohave this done at your GM dealer
Service Department.
A good time to check your automatic transmission fluid
level is when the engine oil is changed.
Change both the fluid and filterevery 50,000 miles
(83 000 km) if the vehicle’s GVWR is over 8,600 or
if the vehicle is mainly driven under one or more of
these conditions:
0
In heavy city traffic where the outside temperature
regularly reaches 90°F (32°C) orhigher.
0
In hilly or mountainous terrain.
0
When doing frequent trailer towing.
0
Uses such as found in taxi, police or delivery service.
If your vehicle’s GVWR is not over 8,600 and you do
not use your vehicle under any of these conditions, the
fluid and filterdo not require changing.
If you do it yourself, be sure to follow all the
instructions here, or you could get a falsereading on
the dipstick.
NOTICE:
Too much or too little fluid can damage
your
transmission. Too much can mean that some of
the fluid could comeout and fallon hot engine
parts or exhaust system parts, starting a fire. Be
sure to get an accurate reading if you check your
transmission fluid.
See “Scheduled Maintenance Services” in the Index.
6-16
-
Wait at least 30 minutes before checking the
transmission fluid levelif you have been driving:
When outside temperatures are above 90°F (32°C).
0
At high speed for quite a while.
0
In heavy traffic -- especially in hot weather.
0
While pulling a trailer.
To get the right reading, the fluid should be at normal
operating temperature, whichis 180°F to 200°F
Checking Transmission Fluid Cold
A cold checkis made after the vehicle has been sitting
for eight hours or more with the engine off and is
used only as a reference. Let the engine run at idle for
five minutes if outside temperatures are50°F (10°C) or
more. If it's colder than 50°F ( 10°C), you may have to
idle the engine longer. Should the fluid level be low
during a cold check,you must perform a hot check
before adding fluid. Thiswill give you a more accurate
reading of the fluid level.
(82°C to 93°C).
Checking Transmission FluidHot
Get the vehicle warmed up by driving about 15 miles
(24 km) when outside temperatures are above50°F
(10°C). If it's colder than 50°F (lO"C), drive the
vehicle in DRIVE (D) until the engine temperature
gage moves and then remains steady for 10 minutes.
Then follow thehot check procedures.
Checking the Fluid Hot or Cold
Park your vehicle on a level place. Keep the
engine running.
With the parking brake applied, place the shift lever
in PARK (P).
0
With your foot on the brake pedal, move the shift
lever through each gear range, pausing for about
three seconds in each range. Then, position the shift
lever in PARK (P).
Let the engine run at idle for three minutes or more.
-
6-17
Then, without shuttingoff the engine, follow these steps:
3. Check both sides of the dipstick, and read the lower
level. The fluidlevel must be in the COLD area for a
cold check or in the HOT area or cross-hatched area
for a hot check.
1. Flip the handle up and then pull out the dipstick and
wipe it with a clean rag or paper towel.
2. Push it back in all the way, wait three seconds and
then pull it back out again.
6-18
4. If the fluid level is in the acceptable range, push the
dipstick back in all the way; then flip the handle
down to lock the dipstick in place.
How to Add Fluid
Rear Axle
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine what
kind of transmission fluid to use. See “Recommended
Fluids and Lubricants” in the Index.
When to Check and Change Lubricant
Add fluid only after checking the transmission fluid
HOT. (A COLD check is used only as a reference.) If
the fluid level is low, add only enough of the proper
fluid to bring the level up to the HOT area for ahot
check. It doesn’t take much fluid, generally less than a
pint (0.5 L). Don ’t overjX. We recommend you use only
fluid labeled DEXRON@-111, because fluid with that
label is made especially for your automatic transmission.
Damage caused by fluid other than DEXRON-I11 is not
covered by your new vehicle warranty.
Refer to the Maintenance Scheduleto determine how
often to check the lubricant and when to change it. See
“Scheduled Maintenance Services”in the Index.
How to Check Lubricant
If the level is below the
bottom of the filler plug
hole, you’ll need to add
some lubricant. Add
enough lubricantto raise
the level to the bottom of
the filler plug hole.
After adding fluid, recheck the fluid level as
described under “How to Check.”
0
When the correct fluid level is obtained, push the
dipstick back in all the way; then flip the handle
down to lock the dipstick in place.
What to Use
Refer to the Maintenance Scheduleto determine what
kind of lubricant to use. See “Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants” in the Index.
6-19
Engine Coolant
The cooling system in your vehicle is filled with new
DEX-COOL TM (orange-colored, silicate-free) engine
coolant. Thiscoolant is designed to remain in your
vehicle for 5 years or 100,000 miles ( 166 000 km),
whichever occurs first.
The following explains your cooling system and how to
add coolant when it is low. If you have a problem with
engine overheating, see “Engine Overheating” in
the Index.
A 5060 mixture of water and the proper coolant for
your vehicle will:
0
Give freezing protection down to -34°F (-37°C).
Give boiling protection up to 265 “F ( 129O C).
Protect against rust and corrosion.
0
Help keep the proper engine temperature.
Let the warning lights and gages work as they should.
6-20
NOTICE:
When adding coolant itis important that you use
DEX-COOL (orange-colored, silicate-free)
coolant meeting GM Specification 6277M.
If silicated coolant is added to the system,
premature engine, heater coreor radiator
corrosion may result. In addition, the engine
coolant will require change sooner at
30,000 miles (50 000 km) or 24 months,
whichever occurs first.
TM
--
What toUse
Use a mixture of one-half clean water (preferably
distilled) and one-half DEX-COOLRul (orange-colored,
silicate-free) antifreeze that meets
GM Specification
6277M, which won’t damage aluminum parts. Use
GM Engine Coolant Supplement (sealer)(GM Part
No. 3634621) with any complete coolant change. If you
use this mixture, you don’t needto add anything else.
’/d
CAUTION:
’
Adding only plain water to yourcooling system
can be dangerous. Plain water, or some other
liquid like alcohol, can boil before the proper
coolant mix will. Your vehicle’scoolant warning
system is set for the propercoolant mix. With
plain water or the wrong mix, your engine could
get too hot but you wouldn’t get the overheat
warning. Your engine could catch fire andyou or
others could be burned. Use a 50/50 mix of clean
water and DEX-COOL (orange-colored,
silicate-free) antifreeze.
TM
6-21
NOTICE:
Checking Coolant
If you use an improper coolant mix, your engine
could overheat and be badly damaged. The
repair cost wouldn't be coveredby your
warranty. Too much water in themix can freeze
and crack theengine, radiator, heater core and
other parts.
If you have to add coolant more than four times a year,
have your dealer check your cooling system.
NOTICE:
If you use the propercoolant, you don't have to
add extra inhibitorsor additives which claim to
improve the system. These can be harmful.
6-22
When your engine is cold, the coolant level should be at
FULL COLD, or a little higher.
Adding Coolant
If you need more coolant, add theproper mix ut the
coolant recovery tank.
A CAUTION:
-
,
-
.'.
-
You can be burned if you spill coolant on hot
engine parts. Coolant contains ethylene glycol,
and it will burn if the engine parts arehot
enough. Don't spill coolant on a hot engine.
I
Turning theradiator pressure cap when the
engine and radiator arehot can allow steam
and scalding liquids toblow out and burnyou
badly. With the coolant recovery tank, you will
almost never have to addcoolant at the radiator.
Never turn the radiator pressure cap even a
little when the engine and radiator arehot.
--
0-
L
Add coolant mix at the recovery tank, but be careful not
to spill it.
Radiator PressureCap
The radiator pressure cap must be tightly installed with
the arrows on the cap lined up with the overflow tube on
the radiator filler neck.
I NOTICE:
Your radiator capis a pressure-type cap and
must be tightly installed to prevent coolant loss
and possible engine damage from overheating. Be
sure the arrowson the cap line up with the
overflow tube on the radiator filler neck.
6-23
Thermostat
When to Check Power Steering Fluid
Engine coolant temperature is controlled by a thermostat
in the engine cooling system. The thermostat stops the
flow of coolant through the radiator until the coolant
reaches apreset temperature.
It is not necessary to regularly check power steering
fluid unless you suspect there is a leak in the system or
you hear an unusual noise. A fluid loss in this system
could indicate a problem. Have the system inspected
and repaired.
When you replace your thermostat, an AC@ thermostat
is recommended.
Power SteeringFluid
How To Check Power Steering Fluid
When the engine compartment is cool, unscrew the cap
and ,wipe the dipstick with a clean rag. Replace the cap
and completely tighten it. Then remove the cap again
and look at the fluid level on the dipstick.
The level should be at the FULL COLD mark. If
necessary, add only enough fluid to bring the level up to
the mark.
To prevent brake fluid contamination, never check or fill
the power steering reservoir with the master cylinder
cover off.
What to Use
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine what
kind of fluid to use. See “Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants’’ in the Index. Always use the proper fluid.
Failure to use the proper fluid can cause leaks and
damage hoses and seals.
6-24
Open the cap labeledWASHER FLUID. Add washer
fluid until the tank is full.
Windshield Washer Fluid
What to Use
~
When you need windshield washer fluid, b, S‘ure to re:ad
the manufacturer’s instructions beforeuse. If you will be
operating your vehicle in an area where the temperature
may fall below freezing, use a fluidthat has sufficient
protection against freezing.
I P
Adding Washer Fluid
NOTICE:
0
0
0
0
I
When using concentrated washer fluid,
follow the manufacturer’s instructions for
adding water.
Don’t mix water with ready-to-use washer
fluid. Water cancause the solution to fre,eze
and damage yourwasher fluid tank and
other partsof the washer system. Also,
water doesn’t clean as well as washer fluid.
Fill your washer fluid tank only
three-quarters full when it’s very cold.This
allows for expansion, which coulddamage
the tank if it is completely full.
Don’t use radiator antifreeze in your
windshield washer. It can damage your
washer system and paint.
Brakes
Brake Fluid
I
goes back up. The other reason is that fluid is leaking out
of the brake system. If it is, you should have your brake
system fixed, since a leak means that sooner or later your
brakes won’t work well, or won’t work at all.
So, it isn’t a good idea to “top off’ your brake fluid.
Adding brake fluid won’t correct a leak. If you add fluid
when your linings are worn, then you’ll have too much
fluid when you get new brake linings. You should add
(or remove) brake fluid, as necessary, only when work is
done on the brake hydraulic system.
- Your brake master cylinder reservoir is here. It is filled
with DOT-3 brake fluid.
There are only two reasonswhy the brake fluid level in the
reservoir might go down. The first is that the brake fluid
goes down to an acceptable level during norrnal brake
lining wear. When new linings are put in, the fluid level
6-26
I
If you have too much brake fluid, it can spill on the
engine. The fluidwill burn if the engine is hot
enough. You or others could be burned, and your
vehicle could be damaged. Add brake fluid only
when work is done on the brake hydraulic system.
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine when to
check your brake fluid. See “Periodic Maintenance
Inspections” in the Index.
Checking Brake Fluid
What to Add
When you do need brake fluid, use only DOT-3 brake
fluid -- such as Delco Supreme 1 1 (GM Part
No. 1052535). Use new brake fluid from a sealed
container only, and always clean the brake fluid
reservoir cap before removing it.
@
1 A CAUTION:
With the wrong kindof fluid in your brake
system, your brakes may not work well,
or they
may not even workat all. This could cause a
crash. Always use the proper brake fluid.
You can check the brake fluid without taking off the cap.
Just look at the windows on the brake fluid reservoir.
The fluid levels should be above MIN. If they aren’t,
have your brake system checked to see if there is a leak.
After work is done on the brake hydraulic system,
make sure the levels are aboveMIN and below the top
of each window.
6-27
NOTICE:
a Using the wrong fluid can badly damage
0
brake system parts. For example, just a few
drops of mineral-based oil, such as engine
oil, in your brake system can damage brake
system parts so badly that they’ll have to be
replaced. Don’t let someone put in the
wrong kind of fluid.
If you spill brake fluid on your vehicle’s
painted surfaces, the paintfinish can be
damaged. Be careful not to spill brake fluid
on your vehicle. If you do, washit off
immediately. See“Appearance Care” in
the Index.
Brake Wear
Your vehicle has front disc brakes and rear drum brakes.
Disc brake pads have built-in wear indicators that make a
high-pitched warning sound when thebrake pads are worn
and new pads are needed. The sound may come and go or
be heard all the time your vehicle is moving (except when
you are pushing on the brake pedal firmly).
I
The brake wear warning sound means that
sooner or later your brakes won’t work well.
That could lead to an accident. When you hear
the brake wear warning sound, have your
vehicle serviced.
I NOTICE:
Continuing to drive with worn-out brake pads
could result in costly brake repair.
Some driving conditionsor climates may cause a brake
squeal when the brakes are first applied
or lightly
applied. This doesnot mean something is wrong with
your brakes.
Free movement or Drake calipers and properly torqued
wheel nuts are necessary to help preventbrake
pulsation. When tires are rotated, inspect brake calipers
for movement, brake pads for
wear, and evenly torque
wheel nuts inthe proper sequence to GM specifications.
Your rear drum brakes don’t have wear indicators, butif
you ever hear a rear brake rubbing noise, have the rear
brake linings inspected. Also, the rear brakedrums should
be removed and inspected each time the tires
are removed
for rotation or changing. When you have the front brakes
replaced, have the rear brakes inspected, too.
Brake Pedal Travel
See your dealerif the brakepedal does not return to
normal height, or if there is a rapid increase in pedal
travel. This couldbe a sign of brake trouble.
Brake Adjustment
Every time you make a brake stop, yourdisc brakes
adjust forwear.
If your brake pedal goes down farther than normal, your
rear drum brakes may need adjustment. Adjust them by
backing up and firmly applying the brakes a few times.
Brake linings should always be replaced
as complete
axle sets.
6-29
Replacing Brake System Parts
Battery
The braking system on amodern vehicle is complex. Its
many parts have to be of top quality and work well
together if the vehicle is to have really good braking.
Vehicles we design and test have top-quality GM brake
parts in them, as your vehicle does when it is new. When
you replace parts of your braking system -- for example,
when your brake linings wear down and you have to
have new ones put in -- be sure you get new genuine
GM replacement parts. If you don’t, your brakes may
no longer work properly. For example,if someone
puts in brake linings that are wrong for your vehicle,
the balance between your frontand rear brakes can
change -- for the worse. The braking performance
you’ve come to expectcan change in many other ways if
someone puts in the wrong replacement brake parts.
Every new vehicle has a Delco Freedom@battery. You
never have to add water to one of these. When it’s time
for a new battery, we recommend a Delco Freedom
battery. Get one that has the replacement number shown
on the original battery’s label.
6-30
Vehicle Storage
If you’re not going to drive your vehicle for 25 days
or more, take off the black, negative (-) cable from
the battery. This will help keep your battery from
running down.
A CAUTION:
i
Batteries have acid that can burn you ana gas
that can explode. You can be badly hurt if you
aren’t careful. See “Jump Starting” in the Index
for tips onworking around a battery without
getting hurt.
Halogen Bulbs
’A
I
I
I
CAUTION:
Halogen bulbs have pressurized gas inside and
can burst if you drop or scratch thebulb. You or
others could be injured. Be sure to read and
follow the instructionson the bulbpackage.
Contact your dealerto learn how to prepare your vehicle
for longer storageperiods.
Headlamps
Also, for your audio system, see“Theft-Deterrent
Feature” in the Index.
You have either a sealed beam headlamp system or a
composite system.
Bulb Replacement
Before you replace any bulbs,be sure that all the lamps
are off and the engine isn’t running. See “Replacement
Bulbs” in the index for the proper types of bulbs to use.
6-31
Sealed Beam Headlamps
..
.
2. Unplug the lamp assembly from the connector.
1. Remove the four screws from the headlamp retainer.
Pull the retainer out and set it aside.
6-32
3. Install a new headlamp.
4. Reverse Steps 2 through 3 to reinstall the headlamp.
Composite Headlamps
1. Open the hood.
2. Locate the rear side of each of the headlamps.
5. Install a new bulb. Do not handle the glass part of
the bulb.
6. Reverse Steps 3 through 4 to reinstall the headlamp.
3. Without removing the headlamp assembly itself,
remove the bulb assembly from the back of the
headlamp on the driver's side by turning the bulb
counterclockwise one quarterturn.
4. On the passenger side, turn the bulb clockwise
one-quarter turn. Also, to remove the bulb on the
passenger side, you will need to move the battery.
6-33
Front Parking/Turn Signal Lamps
To replace the front parkingkurn signal lamps:
L
2. Remove the lamp from the grille.
1. Remove the outer screws from the parkinghrn
signal lamp lens assembly. (There are either two or
four screws, depending on your vehicle’s trim level.)
6-34
Sidemarker Lamps
3. Remove the bulb assembly from the back of the lens
and replacethe bulb.
4. Follow Steps 2 and 3 to replace the bulb. Turn the
socket clockwise to replace it in the lens assembly.
1. Remove the screw from the top of the lens.
6-35
Taillamps
1. Open the rear door.
2. Un-clip the bottom of the lamp from the grille.
3. Remove the bulb by twisting it out of the socket.
Turn the bulb to remove it. Install the new bulb.
4. Reverse these steps to reinstall the lamp.
6-36
2. Push the socket protector until you can see
the fasteners.
3. Remove the nutswith a deep socket wrench.
4. Remove the hidden upper nuts.
6-37
5. Lift the lamp as you
rotate it toward the
rear of the vehicle.
6. Turn the sockets to the left to remove.
6-38
Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement
7. With the door open, turn the bulb to the left to
remove it. Install the new bulb.
5. Reverse the above steps to reinstall the lamp.
See “Normal Maintenance ReplacementParts” in the
Index for theproper type of replacement blade.
6-39
Replacement blades come in different types and are
removed in different ways. To remove the type with a
release clip:
4. To install the new wiper insert, slide the notched end
last, into the end with two blade claws. Slide all the
way through the blade claws at the opposite end.
1. To remove the old wiper blades, lift the wiper arm
until it locks into a vertical position.
5. Be sure that the notches are locked by the bottom
claws. Make sure that all other claws are properly
locked on both sides of the insert slots.
2. Press down on the blade assembly pivot locking tab.
Pull down on the blade assembly to release it from
the wiper arm hook.
3. Remove the insert from the blade assembly. The
insert has two notches at one end that are locked by
bottom claws of the blade assembly. At the notched
end, pull the insert from the blade assembly.
6-40
6. Put the blade assembly pivot in the wiper arm
hook. Pull up until the pivot locking tab locks in
the hook slot.
7. Carefully lower the wiper arm and blade assembly
into the windshield.
Tires
We don’t make tires. Your new vehicle comes with
high-quality tires made by a leading tire manufacturer. If
you ever have questions about your tirewarranty and
where to obtain service, see your GM Warranty booklet
for details.
0
0
Poorly maintained and improperly used tires
are dangerous.
Overloading your tires can cause
overheating as a result of too much friction.
You could have an air-out anda serious
accident. See “Loading Your Vehicle” in
the Index.
CAUTION: (Continued)
Underinflated tires pose the same danger as
overloaded tires. The resulting accident
could cause serious injury. Check all tires
frequently to maintain therecommended
pressure. Tire pressure should be checked
when your tires are cold.
Overinflated tires are more likely to be
cut, punctured or broken by a sudden
impact such as when you hit a pothole.
Keep tires at the recommended pressure.
Worn, old tires can cause accidents. If your
tread is badly worn, or if your tires have
been damaged, replace them.
--
0
6-41
Inflation
-- Tire Pressure
The Certificationflire label, which is on the rear edge of
the driver’s door, shows the correct inflation pressures
for your tires when they’re cold. “Cold” means your
vehicle has been sitting forat least threehours or driven
no more than 1 mile (1.6 km).
I NOTICE:
Don’t let anyone tell you that .underinflation or
overinflation is all right. It’s not. If your tires
don’t have enough air junderinflation), you can
get the following:
Too much flexing
Too much heat
0 Tire overloading
Bad wear
Bad handling
Bad fuel economy.
NOTICE: (Continued)
6-42
I NOTICE: (Continued)
If your tires have too much air (overinflation),
you can get the following:
Unusual wear
Bad handling
Rough ride
Needless damage from road hazards.
When to Check
Check your tires once a month or more. Also, check the
tire pressure of the spare tire.
How to Check
Use a good quality pocket-type gage to check tire
pressure. You can’t tell if your tires are properly inflated
simply by looking at them. Radial tires may look
properly inflated even when they’re underinflated.
Be sure to put the valve caps back on the valve stems.
They help prevent leaks by keeping out dirt and moisture.
I
Tire Inspection and Rotation
Tires should be inspected every
6,000 to 8,000 miles
(10 000 to 13 000 km)for any signsof unusual wear. If
unusual wear is present, rotate your tires as soon as
possible and check wheelalignment. Also check for
damaged tires or wheels. See “When It’s Time forNew
Tires” and “Wheel Replacement” laterin this section for
more information.If your vehicle has dual rearwheels,
also see“Dual Tire Operation’’ later in this section.
If your vehiclehas single rear wheels, always use one of
the correct rotation patterns shown herewhen rotating
your tires.
II
The purpose of regular rotation is to achieve more
uniform wear for all tires on the
vehicle: The first
rotation is the most important. See “Scheduled
Maintenance Services”in the Index for scheduled
rotation intervals.
I
FRT
FRT
If your vehicle has dual rear wheels, always use oneof
the correctrotation patterns shown here when rotating
your tires.
When you install dual wheels, be sure the vent holes in
the inner and outer wheels on each side arelined up.
After the tires have been rotated, adjust the frontand
rear inflation pressures as shown on the
Certificationmire label. Makecertain that all wheel nuts
are properly tightened. See “Wheel Nut Torque’’ in
the Index.
6-43
A CAUTION:
Rust or dirton a wheel, or on the parts to which
it is fastened, can makewheel nuts become loose
after a time. The wheel could comeoff and cause
an accident. When you change a wheel, remove
any rust or dirt
from places where the wheel
attaches to thevehicle. In anemergency, you can
use a cloth or a paper towel to do this; but be
sure touse a scraper orwire brush later, if you
off. (See
need to, to get all the rust or dirt
Index.)
“Changing a Flat Tire” in the
I
When It’s Time for New Tires
One way to tell when it’s
time fornew tires is to
check the treadwear
indicators, which will
appear when your tires have
only 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) or
less of tread remaining.
Some commercial truck
tires may not have
treadwear indicators.
You need a new tire if any of the following statements
are true:
0
6-44
You can see the indicators at three or more places
around the tire.
You can see cord or fabric showing through the
tire’s rubber.
The tread or sidewall is cracked, cutor snagged deep
enough to show cord or fabric.
The tire has a bump, bulge or split.
The tire has a puncture, cut or other damage that
can’t be repaired well because of the size orlocation
of the damage.
Dual Tire Operation
Buying New Tires
To find outwhat kind and size of tires you need, look at
When the vehicle is new, or whenever a wheel, wheel
bolt or wheel nut is replaced, check the wheel nut torquethe Certificatioflire label.
after 100, 1,000 and 6,000 miles (160, 1 600and
The tires installed on your
vehicle when it was new had
10 000 km)of driving. For proper torque, see “Wheel
a Tire Performance Criteria Specification(TPC Spec)
,Nut Torque” in the Index.
number on each tire’s sidewall. Whenyou get new tires,
The outer tire on a dual wheel setup generally
wears
faster than the inner tire.Your tires will wear more
evenly and last longerif you rotate the tiresperiodically.
If you’re goingto be doing a lotof driving on
high-crown roads, you can reduce tirewear by adding
5 psi (35 kPa) to the tire pressurein the outer tires.Be
sure toreturn to the recommended pressureswhen no
longer driving under those conditions. See “Changing a
Flat Tire” in the Index for more information.
get ones with that same TPC Specnumber. That way
your vehicle will continue to have tiresthat are designed
to give proper endurance, handling, speed rating,
traction, ride and other things during normal service on
your vehicle. If your tires have an all-seasontread
design, the TPC numberwill be followed by an “MS”
(for mud and snow).
11 you
ever replace your tireswith those not having a
TPC Specnumber, make sure they are the same size,
load range, speed rating and construction type (bias,
bias-belted or radial)as your original tires.
If you operate your vehicle with a tire that
is
badly underinflated, the tire can overheat. An
overheated tire can lose air suddenly or catch
fire. You or others could be injured.
Be sure all
tires (including the spare) are properly inflated.
6-45
' A CAUTION:
I
Mixing tires could cause you to lose control while
driving. If you mix tires of different sizes or types
(radial andbias-belted tires), the vehicle may not
handle properly, and you could havea crash.
Using tires of different sizes mayalso cause
damage to your vehicle. Be sure to use the same
size and type tires on all wheels.
Uniform Tire Quality Grading
The following information relates to the system
developed by the United States National Highway
Traffic Safety Administration, which grades tires by
treadwear, traction and temperature performance. (This
applies only to vehicles sold in the United States.) The
grades are molded on the sidewalls of most passenger
car tires. The Uniform Tire Quality Grading system does
not apply to deep tread, winter-type snow tires,
space-saver or temporary use spare tires, tires with
nominal rim diameters of 10 to 12 inches (25 to 30 cm),
or to some limited-production tires.
While the tires available on General Motors passenger
cars and light trucks may vary with respect to these
grades, they must also conform to Federal safety
requirements and additional General Motors Tire
Performance Criteria (TPC) standards.
6-46
Treadwear
The treadwear gradeis a comparative rating based on
the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled
conditions on a specified governmenttest course. For
example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and a half
(1 1/2) times as well on the government course as a tire
graded 100. The relative performanceof tires depends
upon the actual conditions of their use, however, and
may depart significantly fromthe norm due to variations
in driving habits, service practices and differences in
road characteristics and climate.
--
Traction A, B, C
The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are A, B, and
C, and they represent the tire’s ability to stop on wet
pavement as measured under controlled conditions on
specified government test surfacesof asphalt and concrete.
A tire marked C may have poor traction performance.
Warning: The traction grade assigned to thistire is based
on braking (straightahead) traction tests and ,does not
include cornering (turning) traction.
Temperature
-- A, B, C
The temperature grades areA (the highest), B, and C,
representing the tire’s resistance to the generation of
heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under
controlled conditions ona specified indoorlaboratory
test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the
material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and
excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure.
The grade C corresponds to alevel of performance
which all passenger car tires must meet under the
Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109.
Grades B and A represent higher levels of performance
on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required
by law.
Warning: The temperature grade for this tire is
established for a tire that is properly inflated and not
overloaded. Excessive speed,underinflation, or
excessive loading, eitherseparately or in combination,
can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure.
6-47
Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance
The wheels on your vehicle were aligned and balanced
carefully at the factory to give you the longest tire life
and best overall performance.
In most cases, you will not need to have your wheels
aligned again. However, if you notice unusual tire wear
or your vehicle pulling one way or the other, the
alignment may need to be reset. If you notice your
vehicle vibrating when driving on a smooth road, your
wheels may need to be rebalanced.
Each new wheel should have the same load-carrying
capacity, diameter, width, offset and be mounted the
same way as the one it replaces.
If you need to replace any of your wheels, wheel bolts
or wheel nuts, replace them only with new GM original
equipment parts. This way, you will be sure to have the
right wheel, wheel bolts and wheel nuts for your vehicle.
I
Wheel Replacement
Replace any wheel that is bent, cracked, orbadly rusted
or corroded. If wheel nuts keep coming loose, the wheel,
wheel bolts and wheel nuts should be replaced. If the
wheel leaks air, replace it (except some aluminum
wheels, which can sometimes be repaired). See your
GM dealer if any of these conditionsexist.
Your dealer will know the kind of wheel you need.
6-48
~
A CAUTION:-
-
Using the wrong replacement wheels, wheel bolts
or wheel nutson your vehicle can be dangerous.
It could affect the braking and. handling of your
vehicle, make your tires loseair and make you
lose control.You could have a collision in which
you or others could be injured. Always use the
correct wheel, wheel bolts and wheel nuts
for replacement.
Used Replacement Wheels
NOTICE:
The wrong wheel can also cause problems
with
bearing life, brake cooling, speedometer or
odometer calibration, headlampaim, bumper
height, vehicle ground clearance and tireor tire
chain clearance to the
body and chassis.
Whenever a wheel,wheel bolt or wheel nut is replaced
on a dualwheel setup, checkthe wheel nut torque after
100, 1,000 and 6,000 miles (160, 1 600and 10 000 km)
of driving. For proper torque, see “Wheel
Nut Torque”
in the Index.
Putting aused wheel on yourvehicle is
dangerous. You can’t know how it’s been usedor
how many miles it’sbeen driven. It could fail
suddenly and cause an accident. If you have to
replace a wheel, use a new GM original
equipment wheel.
See “Changing aFlat Tire” in the Index for
more information.
6-49
Never use these to clean your vehicle:
Tire Chains
~~
NOTICE:
0
Gasoline
0
Benzene
Naphtha
Carbon Tetrachloride
0
Use tire chains only where legal
and only when you
must. Use chains that are the proper size for your
tires. Install themon the tires of the rear axle.
Tighten them as tightly as possible with the ends
securely fastened. Drive slowlyand follow the chain
manufacturer’s instructions.If you can hear the
chains contactingyour vehicle, stop and retighten
them. If the contact continues,slow down until it
stops. Drivingtoo fast or spinning thewheels with
chains onwill damage your vehicle.
Appearance Care
Remember, cleaning products can be hazardous. Some
are toxic. Others can burst into flame if you strike a
match or getthem on a hot part of the vehicle. Some are
dangerous if you breathe their fumes in a closed space.
When you use anything from a containerto clean your
vehicle, be sure to follow the manufacturer’s warnings
and instructions. And always open your doors or
windows when you’re cleaning the inside.
6-50
0
0
Acetone
Paint Thinner
0
Turpentine
Lacquer Thinner
0
Nail Polish Remover
0
They can all be hazardous -- some more than
others -- and they can all damage your vehicle, too.
Don’t use any of these unless this manual says you can.
In many uses, these will damage your vehicle:
0
0
0
0
Alcohol
Laundry Soap
Bleach
Reducing Agents
Cleaning theInside of Your Vehicle
Using Foam-Type Cleaner on Fabric
Use a vacuum cleaner often
to get rid of dust and loose
dirt. Wipe vinyl or leather with a clean, damp cloth.
1. Vacuum and brush the area to removeany
loose dirt.
Your GM dealer has twoGM cleaners, a solvent-type
spot lifter and a foam-type powdered
cleaner. They will
clean normal spots and stainsvery well. Do not use
them on vinyl or leather.
2. Always clean awhole trim panel or section.
Mask surrounding trim along stitch or welt lines.
Here are some cleaningtips:
4. Use suds only and apply with a clean sponge.
3. Mix Multi-Purpose Powdered Cleaner following
the directions on the container label.
Always read the instructions on the cleaner label.
5. Don’t saturate the material.
Clean up stains as soon as you can -- before they set.
6 . Don’t rub it roughly.
0
Use a clean cloth or sponge, and change to a clean area
often. A soft brush may be used if stainsare stubborn.
7. As soon as you’ve cleaned the section, use a
sponge to remove the suds.
0
Use solvent-type cleaners in a well-ventilated area
only. If you use them, don’t saturate the stained area.
8. Rinse the section with a clean, wet sponge.
0
If a ring forms after spot cleaning, clean the entire
area immediately or it will set.
0
9. Wipe off what’s left with a slightly damp paper
towel or cloth.
10. Then dry it immediately with a blow dryer.
11. Wipe with a clean cloth.
6-51
Using Solvent-’Qpe Cleaner on Fabric
Special CleaningProblems
First, see if you have to use solvent-type cleaner at all.
Some spotsand stains will clean off better with just
water and mild soap.
Greasy or Oily Stains
If you need to use a solvent:
Gently scrape excess soil from the trim material with
a clean, dull knife or scraper. Use very little cleaner,
light pressure and clean cloths(preferably
cheesecloth). Cleaning should start at the outside of
the stain, “feathering” toward the center. Keep
changing to a clean sectionof the cloth.
When you clean a stain from fabric, immediately
dry the area with a blow dryer to help prevent a
cleaning ring.
Fabric Protection
Your GM has upholstery and carpet that has been treated
with Scotchgard” Fabric Protector, a 3M product. It
protects fabrics by repelling oil and water, which are the
carriers of most stains. Even with this protection, you
still need to clean your upholstery and carpet often to
keep it looking new.
Further information on cleaning is available by calling
1-800-433-3296 (in Minnesota, 1-800-642-6 167).
6-52
Stains caused by grease, oil, butter, margarine, shoe
polish, coffeewith cream, chewing gum, cosmetic
creams, vegetable oils, wax crayon, tar and asphalt can
be removed as follows:
1. Carefully scrape off excess stain.
2. Follow the solvent-type instructions described earlier.
3. Shoe polish, wax crayon, tar and asphalt will stain if
left on a vehicle’s seat fabric. They should be removed
as soon as possible. Be careful, because the cleaner
will dissolve them and may cause themto spread.
Non-Greasy Stains
Cleaning Vinyl
Stains caused by catsup, coffee (black), egg, fruit, fruit
juice, milk, soft drinks, wine, vomit, urine and blood can
be removed as follows:
Use warm water and a clean cloth.
0
1. Carefully scrape off excess stain, then sponge the
soiled area with cool water.
2. If a stain remains, follow the foam-type instructions
described earlier.
3. If an odor lingers after cleaningvomit or urine, treat
the area with a waterhaking soda solution:
1 teaspoon ( 5 ml) of baking soda to 1 cup (250 ml)
of lukewarm water.
Things like tar, asphalt and shoe polish will stain if
you don’t get them off quickly. Use a clean cloth and
a GM VinyULeather Cleaner or equivalentproduct.
Cleaning Leather
Use a soft cloth with lukewarm water and a mild soap or
saddle soap.
0
For stubborn stains, use a GM VinyVLeather Cleaner
or equivalent product.
0
Never use oils, varnishes, solvent-based or abrasive
cleaners, furniturepolish or shoe polish on leather.
0
Soiled leather should be cleaned immediately. If dirt is
allowed to work into the finish, it can harm the leather.
4. If needed, clean lightly with solvent-type cleaner.
Combination Stains
Stains caused by candy, ice cream, mayonnaise, chili
sauce and unknown stainscan be removed as follows:
0
Carefully scrape off excess stain, then clean with
cool water and allow todry.
0
If a stain remains, clean it with solvent-type cleaner.
Rub with a clean, damp cloth to remove dirt. You
may have to do it more than once.
Cleaning theTop of the Instrument Panel
Glass
Use only mild soap and water to clean the top surfaces Glass should be cleaned often.
GM Glass Cleaner
'of the instrument panel. Sprays containing silicones or (GM Part No. 1050427) or a liquid household glass
waxes may cause annoying reflections in the windshield cleaner will remove normal tobacco smoke and
and even make it difficult to see through the windshield dust films.
under certain conditions.
Don't use abrasive cleaners on glass, because they may
cause scratches. Avoid placing decals on the inside rear
Care of Safety Belts
window, since they may have to be scraped off later.
If
Keep belts clean and dry.
abrasive cleanersare used on the inside of the rear
window, an electric defogger element may be damaged.
Any temporary license should not be attached across the
CAUTION:
defogger grid.
IA
Do not bleach or dye safety belts.
If you do, it
~
~
1
may severely weaken them.In a crash, they
might not be able to provide adequate protection.
Clean safety belts only with mild soap and
lukewarm water.
6-54
Cleaning the Outsideof the
Windshield and Wiper Blades
If the windshield is not clear after using thewindshield
washer, or if the wiper blade chatterswhen running, wax
or other material may be on the blade or windshield.
Clean the outside of the windshield with GM
Windshield Cleaner, Bon-Ami Powder@(GM Part
No. 105001 1). The windshield is clean
if beads do not
form when you rinse it with water.
Clean the blade by wiping vigorously with a cloth
soaked in full-strength windshield washer solvent. Then
rinse the bladewith water.
Wiper blades should be checked on a regular basis and
replaced when worn.
Weatherstrips
Silicone grease on weatherstrips will make them last
longer, seal better, and not stick or squeak. Apply silicone
grease with a clean cloth at least every six months.
During very cold, damp weather more frequent
application may be required. (See “Recommended
Fluids and Lubricants” in the Index.)
Cleaning the Outsideof Your Vehicle
The paint finish on your vehicle provides beauty, depth
of color, gloss retention and durability.
Washing Your Vehicle
The best way to preserve your vehicle’s finish isto keep it
clean by washing it often with lukewarm or cold water.
Don’t wash your vehicle in the direct raysof the sun.
Don’t use strong soaps or chemical detergents. Use
liquid hand, dish or car washing (mild detergent) soaps.
Don’t use cleaning agentsthat are petroleum based, or
that contain acid or abrasives. All cleaning agents
should be flushed promptly and not allowed to dry on
the surface, or they could stain. Dry the finish with a
soft, clean chamois ora 100% cotton towel toavoid
surface scratchesand water spotting.
High pressure vehicle washes may cause water to enter
your vehicle.
6-55
Occasional waxing or mild polishing of your vehicle by
hand may be necessary to remove residue from the paint
finish. You can get GM-approved cleaning products
from your dealer. (See “Appearance Care and Materials”
in the Index.)
Foreign materials such as calcium chloride and other
salts, ice melting agents, road oil and tar, tree sap, bird
droppings, chemicals from industrial chimneys, etc.,can
damage your vehicle’s’finishif they remain on painted
surfaces. Wash the vehicle as soon as possible. If
necessary, use non-abrasive cleaners that are marked
safe forpainted surfaces to remove foreign matter.
Your GM manufactured vehicle may have a
“basecoat/clearcoat” paint finish. The clearcoat gives
more depth and gloss to the colored basecoat. Always
use waxes and polishes that are non-abrasive and made
for a basecoat/clearcoat paint finish.
Exterior painted surfaces are subject to aging, weather
and chemical fallout that can take their toll over a period
of years. You can help to keep the paint finish looking
new by keeping your vehicle garaged or covered
whenever possible.
I NOTICE:
Protecting Exterior Bright Metal Parts
Finish Care
Machine compoundingor aggressive polishing on
a basecoat/clearcoat paint finish may dull the
finish or leave swirl marks.
6-56
Bright metal parts should be cleaned regularly to keep
their luster. Washing with water is all that is usually
needed. However, you may use GM Chrome Polish on
chrome or stainless steel trim, if necessary.
Use special care with aluminum trim. To avoid
damaging protective trim, never use auto or chrome
polish, steam or caustic soap to clean aluminum. A
coating of wax, rubbed to high polish, is recommended
for all bright metal parts.
Alur-inum Wheels(If So Equipped)
Sheet Metal Damage
Keep your wheels clean using a soft clean cloth with
mild soap and water. Rinse with clean water. After
rinsing thoroughly, dry with a soft clean towel. A wax
may then be applied.
The surface of these wheels is similar to the painted
surface of your vehicle. Don’t use strong soaps,
chemicals, abrasive polishes, abrasive cleanersor
abrasive cleaning brushes on them because you could
damage the surface.
Don’t take your vehicle through an automatic vehicle wash
that has silicon carbide tire cleaning brushes. These
brushes can also damage the surfaceof these wheels.
If your vehicle is damaged and requires sheet metal
repair or replacement, make sure the body repair shop
applies anti-corrosion material to the parts repaired or
replaced to restore corrosion protection.
Tires
Finish Damage
Any stone chips, fracturesor deep scratchesin the finish
should be repaired right away. Bare metal will corrode
quickly and may develop into a majorrepair expense.
Minor chips and scratches canbe repaired with touch-up
materials available from your dealeror other service
outlets. Larger areas of finish damage can be corrected
in your dealer’s body and paint shop.
To clean your tires,use a stiff brush with a tire cleaner.
I NOTICE:
When applying a tire dressingalways take careto
wipe off any oversprayor splash from all painted
surfaces on the body or wheels of the vehicle.
Petroleum-based products maydamage the
paint finish.
6-57
Underbody Maintenance
Chemical Paint Spotting
Chemicals used for ice and snow removal and dust control
can collect on the underbody.If these are not removed,
accelerated corrosion (rust) can occuron the underbody
parts such as fuel lines, frame, floor pan and exhaust
system even though they have corrosion protection.
Some weather and atmospheric conditions can createa
chemical fallout. Airborne pollutants can fall upon and
attack painted surfaces on your vehicle. This damage
can take two forms: blotchy, ringlet-shaped
discolorations, and small irregular dark spots etched
into the paint surface.
At least every spring, flush these materials from the
underbody with plain water. Clean any areas where mud
and other debriscan collect. Dirt packed in closed areas
of the frame should be loosened before being flushed.
Your dealer oran underbody vehicle washing system
can do this for you.
Although no defect in the paint job causes this, GM will
repair, at no charge to the owner, the surfaces of new
vehicles damaged by this fallout condition within
12 months or 12,000 miles (20 000 km) of purchase,
whichever occurs first.
This applies only to materials manufactured and sold by
General Motors. Bodies, body conversions or equipment
not made or sold by General Motors arenot covered.
6-58
Appearance Care Materials Chart
6-59
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
Service Parts IdentificationLabel
You’ll find this label on the front passenger door frame.
It’s very helpful if you ever need to order parts. On this
label is:
I!E I
SAMPLE4UXTM072675
I I
II
your VIN,
the model designation,
paint information, and
0
This is the legal identifier for your vehicle. It appears on
a plate in the front corner of the instrument panel, on the
driver’s side. You can see it if you look through the
windshield from outside your vehicle. The VIN also
appears on the Vehicle Certification and Service Parts
labels and the certificates of title and registration.
Engine Identification
The eighth character in your VIN is the engine code.
This code will help you identify your engine,
specifications and replacement parts.
6-60
a list of all production options and special
equipment.
Be sure that this label is not removed from the vehicle.
Electrical System
Headlamp Wiring
Add-on Electrical Equipment
The headlamp wiring is protected by a circuit breaker in
the lamp switch.An electrical overload will cause the
lamps to flickeron and off, or in some cases to remain
off. If this happens, have your headlamp wiring checked
right away.
NOTICE:
Don’t add anything electrical to your vehicle unless
you check with your dealer first. Some electrical
equipment can damage your vehicle and the
damage wouldn’t be covered by your warranty.
Some add-on electrical equipment can keep other
components from working as they should.
Your vehicle has an air bag system. Before attempting to
add anything electricalto your vehicle, see “Servicing
Your Air Bag-Equipped Vehicle” in the Index.
Windshield Wiper Fuses
The windshield wiper motor is protected by a circuit
breaker and a fuse. If the motor overheats due to heavy
snow, etc., the wiper will stop until the motor cools.
Although the circuit is protected from electrical
overload, overload dueto heavy snow, etc., may cause
wiper linkage damage. Always clearice and heavy snow
from the the windshield before using the windshield
wipers. If the overload is caused by some electrical
problem and not snow, etc., be sure toget it fixed.
Power Windows and Other Power Options
Circuit breakers in the fuse panel protect the power
windows and other power accessories. When the current
load is too heavy, the circuit breaker opens and closes.
This protects the circuit until the current load returns to
normal or the problem is fixed.
6-61
Instrument Panel FuseBlock
~
The fuseblock access door
is on the driver’s side of the
instrument panel below the
hood release lever.
feature of your vehicle that you can get along
without -- like the radio or cigarettelighter -- and use
its fuse, if it is of the value you need. Replace it as soon
as you can. See “Fuses and Circuit Breakers” in the
Index for more information.
FUSE BLOCK INFORMATION
(u
30A
hD
You can remove fuses with a fuseextractor. The fuse
extractor is mounted to the fuseblock access door.
To remove fusesif you don’t have a fuseextractor, hold
the end of the fuse between your thumb and index finger
and pull straight out.
Be sureto use the correct fuse.If you ever have a
problem on the road and don’t have aspare fuse, you
can “borrow” one of the correct value. Just pick some
6-62
E F ~
d
1
;
:1 a
20A
10A
F D I O q
$2
9
25A
15990609
CIRCUITS PROTECTED
POSITION
NAME
1.
STOP
Stop/CHMSL, Stoplamps
2.
HTD MIR
Electric Heated Mirrors
3.
CTSY
Courtesy Lamps, Dome/RDG Lamps, Vanity Mirrors, Power Mirrors
4
GAUGES
IP Cluster, DRL Relay, DRL Module, HDLP Switch, Keyless Entry
Illumination, Low CoolantModule, CHIME Module, DRAB Module
5.
Hazard
Hazard LampsKHIME Module
6.
CRUISE
Cruise Control
7.
PWR AUX
Auxiliary Power Outlet, ALDL
8.
Crank
9.
PARK LPS
License Plate Lamp, Parking Lamps, Taillamps,Front Sidemarkers,
Glove Box Ashtray
10.
AIR BAGS
SDM
11.
WIPER
Wiper Motor, Washer Pump
12.
HTR-A/C
N C , A/C Blower, High Blower Relay, HTD Mirror
13.
CIG LTR
Power Amp, Cigarette Lighter, Door Lock
Relay
14.
ILLUM
LP Cluster, HVAC Controls, RR HVAC Controls, IP Switches, Radio
Illumination, Door Switch Illumination
15.
DRL
DRL Relay
6-63
POSITION
16.
NAME
TURN B/U
CIRCUITS PROTECTED
Front Turn, RR Turn, Back-up Lamps, BTSI Solenoid
17.
RADIO- 1
Radio (Ign, Accy)
18.
BRAKE
4WAL PCM, ABS, Cruise Control
19.
RADIO-B
Radio (Battery), Power Antenna
20.
TRANS
PRNDL, Automatic Transmission
21.
RR FOG
Rear Window Defog
22.
Not Used
23.
Not Used
24.
RR HVAC
RR HVAC Controls, HIGH, MED, LOW Relays
A.7-
PWR ACCY
Power Door Lock, Six-Way Power Seat, Keyless Entry
Illumination Module
€3.7
PWR WDO
Power Windows
?Circuit Breaker
Do not use fuses of higher amperage than those recommended above. Fuse amperage levels are also imprinted on the
fuse panel under the dash.
6-64
Capacities and Specifications
Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts
Replacement part numbers listed in this section are based on the latest information available at the time of printing,
and are subject to change.If a part listed in this manual is not the same as the part used in your vehicle when it was
built, or if you have any questions, please contactyour GM truck dealer.
These specifications are for informationonly. If you have any questions, see the service manual for the chassis or
refer to the body manufacturer’s publications.
Engine Identification-- Gasoline Engines
Engine
“VORTEC” 4300
“VORTEC” 5000
V6
V8
M
SFI
Type
VIN Code
Fuel System
w
SFI’
Sequential Central Port Fuel Injection
“VORTEC” 5700
V8
R
SFI’
“VORTEC” 7400
V8
J
SFI~
2Sequential Multi-Port Fuel Injection
Wheel Nut Torque
MODEL
All
TORQUE
122 ft-lb ( 165 N-m)
L LC
Cooling System Capacity
ENGINE
“VORTEC” 4300
“VORTEC” 5000
“VORTEC” 5700
“VORTEC” 7400
W
M
R
J
QTY Without Rear Heater*
11 quarts ( 10.4 L)
17 quarts ( 16 L)
17 quarts ( 16 L)
23 quarts (2 1.8 L)
QTY With Rear Heater*
14 quarts(13.2 L)
20 quarts (18.9 L)
20 quarts ( 18.9 L)
26 quarts (24.6 L)
After refill,the level MUST be checked as outlinedunder “Engine Cooling System”in Section 5.
*All quantities are approximate.
Crankcase Capacity
ENGINE
VIN
Quantity With Filter
“VORTEC” 4300
W
4.5 quarts (4.3 L)
“VORTEC” 5000
M
5 quarts (4.8 L)
“VORTEC” 5700
R
5 quarts (4.8 L)
“VORTEC” 7400
J
7 quarts (6.5 L)
All quantities are approximate.
After refill, the level MUST be checked as outlined under “Engine Oil And Filter Recommendations” in Section 5.
*Add an additional quart ( 1 L) for RPO 521 and RPO KL5 Models.
Fuel Tank Capacity
QUANTITY
TYPE
3 1 gallons (1 17.3 L)
Standard Tank
Cutaway Standard Tank
35 gallons (132 L)
Cutaway Optional Tank
55 gallons (208.2 L)
All quantities are approximate.
Normal Replacement Parts
00
“VORTEC”
Engine
VIN
Oil Filter
Air Cleaner
Filter*
lve
PCV
Spark Plugs
Fuel Filter
Cap Radiator
w
PF52
A9 17C
CV789C
4 1-932
GF48 1
VORTEC” 5000
M
PF1218
A9 17C
cv774c
“VORTEC” 5700
R
PF1218
A9 17C
cv774c
“VORTEC” 7400
J
PF1218
A917C
cv774c
4 1-932
GF48 1
RC36
4 1-932
4 1-932
GF48 1
RC36
GF48 1
RC36
*For severe dusty conditions, use AC Air Filter, Part No. 1236C.
6-67
Air Conditioning Refrigerants
Not all air conditioning refrigerants are the same.
If the air conditioningsys&m in your vehicle needs refrigerant, be
sure the proper refrigerant is used. If you’re
not sure, ask yourGM dealer.
u
TYPE
Refrigerant
R- 134a
QTY Front
Only
3.00 lbs.
(1.36 kg)
QTY Front and
Rear
4.875 lbs.
(2.21 kg)
Lamp and Bulb Data
LAMP OR BULB
HEADLAMPS
2 Headlamp System (Sealed BeamSystem)
Low/High Beam
4 Headlamp System (Composite Headlamp System)
Low/High Beam
High Beam
TRADE NO.
POWER RATING
AT 12.8V, WATTS
H6054
35/65
2
6052
9005
51
60
2
2
LAMP ORBULB
EXTERIOR
Front Sidemarker Lamp
Front Park and Turn Lamp
Rear Parking Lamp
Rear Stop and Turn Lamp
Back-up Lamp
Back-up Lamp
Rear Park, Stopand Turn Lamp
CHMSL
License Plate Lamp
Underhood Lamp
Reel Lamp
TRADE NO.
194
2357NA
3057
3057
2
4
3156
1156
1157
92 1
I94
232
232
6-69
LAMP OR BULB
INTERIOR
Dome Lamps
Reading Lamps
IP Courtesy Lamp
Stepwell Lamp
instrument Panel Compartment Lamp
Ashtray Lamp
Sunshade Vanity Mirror
TRADE NO.
LAMP OR BULB
INSTRUMENT PANEL
Daytime Running Lamps Indicator
Charging System Indicator Lamp
instrument Cluster Illumination
Headlamp Beam Indicator
Turn Signal Indicator
Brake Warning indicator
SIR (Air Bag)
Safety Belt Warning
Check Gages Indicator
Malfunction Indicator
(“Service Engine Soon”) Lamp
TRADE NO.
6-70
21 1-2
21 1-2
194
194
194
194
74
74
74
194
74
74
74
74
74
74
74
3
6
2
214
1
1
4
1
1
6
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
NOTES
6-71
NOTES
6-72
Section 7 Maintenance Schedule
Introduction
IMPORTANT:
KEEP ENGINE OIL
AT THE PROPER
,EVEL AND CHANGE A:
RECOMMENDED
This section coversthe maintenance required for your
vehicle. Your vehicle needs these services toretain its
safety, dependability and emission control performance.
GP”
m
Protection
Plan
Your Vehicle and the Environment
Proper vehicle maintenancenot only helpsto keep your
vehicle in good working condition,but also helps the
environment. All recommended maintenance procedures
are important. Improper vehicle maintenance can even
affect the quality of the air we breathe. Improper fluid
levels or the wrong tire inflation can increase the level
of emissions from yourvehicle. To help protect our
environment, andto keep your vehiclein good
condition, pleasemaintain your vehicle properly.
Have you purchased the GM Protection Plan? The Plan
supplements your new vehicle warranties. Seeyour
Wurranty and Owner Assistance booklet,o r your
GM dealer for details.
7-1
How This Section is Organized
The remainderof this section is divided into fiveparts:
“Part A: Scheduled Maintenance Services” shows
what to have done and how often. Some of these
services can be complex, so unless you are technically
qualified and have the necessary equipment, you should
let your dealer’s service department or another qualified
service center do these jobs.
kerformmg maintenance work on a vehicle can
be dangerous. In trying todo some jobs, YOU can
be seriously injured. Do your own maintenance
work only if you have the required know-how
and the propertools and equipment for the job.
If you have any doubt, have a qualified
technician do the work.
If you are skilled enough to do somework on your
vehicle, you will probably want to get the service
information GM publishes. See “Service and Owner
Publications’’ in the Index.
7-2
“Part B: Owner Checks and Services” tells you what
should be checked whenever you stop forfuel. It also
explains what you can easily do to help keep your
vehicle in good condition.
“Part C: Periodic Maintenance Inspections” explains
important inspections that your GM dealer’s service
department or another qualified service center
should perform.
“Part D: Recommended Fluids and Lubricants” lists
some products GM recommends to help keep your
vehicle properly maintained. These products, or their
equivalents, should be used whether you do the work
yourself or have it done.
“Part E: Maintenance Record” provides a place for
you to record the maintenance performed on your
vehicle. Whenever any maintenance is performed, be
sure to write it down in this part. This will help you
determine when your next maintenance should be done.
In addition, it is a good idea to keep your maintenance
receipts. They may be needed to qualify your vehicle for
warranty repairs.
Part A: Scheduled Maintenance
Services
Using Your Maintenance Schedule
We at General Motors want to help you keep your
vehicle in good working condition. But we don’t know
exactly how you’ll drive it. You may drive very short
distances only a few times a week. Or you may drive
long distances all the time in very hot, dusty weather.
You may use your vehicle i n making deliveries. Or
you may drive it to work, to do errands or in many
other ways.
Because of all the different ways people. use their GM
vehicles, maintenance needs vary. You may even need
more frequent checksand replacements than you‘ll find
in the schedules in this section. So please read this
section and note how you drive. If you have any
questions on how to keep your vehicle in good
condition, see your GM dealer.
This part tells you the maintenance services you should
have done and when you should schedule them.If you
go to your dealer for your service needs, you’ll know
that GM-trained and supported service people will
perform the work using genuine GM parts.
The proper fluids and lubricants to use are 1iste.d in
Part D. Make sure whoever services your vehicle uses
these. All parts should be replaced and all necessary
repairs done before you or anyone else drivesthe
vehicle.
I nese
schedules are forvehicles that:
0
carry passengers and cargo within recommended
limits. You will find these limits on your vehicle’s
CertificatiodTire label. See “Loading Your Vehicle”
in the Index.
0
are driven on reasonable road surfaces within legal
driving limits.
0
use the recommended fuel. See “Fuel“ in the Index.
Selecting the Right Schedule
First you’ll need to decide which of the two schedules is
right for your vehicle. Here’s how to decide which
schedule to follow:
Gasoline engine vehicles and diesel engine vehicles
have different maintenance requirements. If you have a
diesel engine, follow a schedule designated for diesel
engine vehicles only.
See the Diesel Engine Supplement for diesel engine
maintenance schedules.
7-3
Maintenance Schedule
I Short Trip/City Definition -- Gasoline Engines I
Follow the Short TripKity Maintenance Schedule if any
one of these conditions is true for your vehicle:
Short Trip/City Intervals
-- Gasoline Engines
1
Most trips are less than 5 to 10 miles (8 to 16 km).
This is particularly important when outside
temperatures are below freezing.
Every 3,000 Miles (5 000 km): Engine Oil and Filter
Change (or 3 months, whichever occurs first). Chassis
Lubrication (or 3 months, whichever occurs first).
Drive Axle Service (or 3 months, whichever
occurs first).
Most trips include extensive idling (such as frequent
driving in stop-and-go traffic).
At 6,000 Miles (10 000 km) Then Every
12,000 Miles (20 000 km): Tire Rotation.
--
You frequently tow a trailer or use a carrier on top of
your vehicle. (With some models, you should never
tow a trailer. See “Towing a Trailer” in the Index.)
Every 15,000 Miles (25 000 km): Air Cleaner Filter
Inspection, if driving in dusty conditions. Shields and
Underhood Insulation Inspection (GVWR above
8,500 Ibs. only). Thermostatically Controlled Engine
Cooling Fan Check (or every 12 months, whichever
occurs first). Front Wheel Bearing Repack (or at each
brake relining, whichever occurs first).
If the vehicle is used for delivery service, police, taxi
or other commercial application.
Every 30,000 Miles (50 000 km): Air Cleaner Filter
Replacement. Fuel Filter Replacement.
Most trips are through dusty areas.
You frequently tow a trailer or use a carrier on top of
your vehicle.
One of the reasons you should follow this schedule (f
you operate your vehicle under anyof these conditions
is that these conditionscuuse engine oil to break
down soonex
Every 50,000 Miles (83 000 km):Automatic
Transmission Service (vehicles over 8600 GVWR
or driven under severe conditionsonly).
Maintenance Schedule
I ShortTripKityIntervals -- GasolineEngines I
Every 60,000 Miles (100 000 km): Engine Accessory
Drive Belt Inspection. FuelTank, Cap and Lines
Inspection. Exhaust Gas Recirculation System
Inspection. Evaporative Control System Inspection.
Every 100,000 Miles (166 000 km): Cooling System
Service (or evezy 60 months, whichever occursfirst).
Spark Plug Wire Inspection.Spark Plug Replacement.
Positive Crankcase Ventilation (PCV) Valve Inspection.
Long WplHighway Definition -- ,asoline Engines
1
Follow this maintenance schedule
only if none of the
conditions from the Short
TripKity Maintenance
Schedule is true.
Driving a vehicle with afully warmed engine under
highway conditions causes engine oil
to break
down slowel:
These intervals only summarize maintenance services.
Be sure to followthe complete maintenance scheduleon
the following pages.
7-5
-
Maintenance Schedule
I LongTripMighwayIntervals
-- Gasoline En
Every 7,500 Miles (12 500 km): Engine Oil and Filter
Change (orevery 12 months, whichever occurs first).
Chassis Lubrication (or every 12 months, whichever
occurs first). Drive Axle Service.
--
At 7,500 Miles (12 500 km) Then Every
15,000 Miles (25000 km): Tire Rotation.
Every 15,000 Miles (25 000 km): Shields and
Underhood Insulation Inspection (GVWR above
8,500 lbs. only). Thermostatically Controlled Engine
Cooling Fan Check (or every 12 months, whichever
occurs first).
Every 30,000 Miles (50 000 km): Fuel Filter
Replacement. Air Cleaner Filter Replacement.
Front Wheel Bearing Repack (or at each brake
relining, whichever occurs first).
Every 50,000 Miles (83 000 km): Automatic
Transmission Service (vehicles over8600 GVWR or
driven under severe conditions only).
1,ong ‘lrip/Highn.ay
Intervals
-- GasolineEngines
Every 60,000 Miles (100 000 km): Engine Accessory
Drive Belt Inspection. Fuel Tank, Cap and Lines
Inspection. Exhaust Gas Recirculation System
Inspection. Evaporative Control System Inspection.
Every 100,000 Miles (166 000 km): Cooling System
Service (or every 60 months, whichever occurs first).
Spark Plug Wire Inspection. Spark Plug Replacement.
Positive Crankcase Ventilation (PCV) Valve Inspection.
These intervals only summarizemaintenance services.
Be sure to follow the complete maintenance schedule
on
the following pages.
Short TripKity Maintenance Schedule -- Gasoline Engines I
The services shown in this schedule up to 100,000 miles
(166 000 km) should be performed after 100,000 miles
(166 000 km) at the same intervals.
** Drive axle service:
0
Locking Differential -- Drain fluid and refill at first
engine oil change. At subsequent oil changes,check
fluid level and add fluid asneeded. If driving in
dusty areas or towing a trailer, drain fluid and refill
every 15,000 miles (25 000 km).
0
Standard Differential -- Check fluid level and add
fluid as needed at every oil change.If driving in
dusty areas or towing a trailer, drain fluid and refill
every 15,000 miles (25 000 km).
0
More frequent lubricationmay be required for
heavy-duty use.
Footnotes
The U.S. Environmental Protection Agency or the
California Air Resources Board has determined that the
failure to perform this maintenance itemwill not nullify
the emission warranty or limit recallliability prior to the
completion of the vehicle’s useful life. We, however,
urge that all recommended maintenance services
be
performed at the indicated intervals and the maintenance
be recorded.
# Lubricate the front suspension, kingpin bushings,
steering linkage and rear driveline center splines.
7-7
I
Short TripKity Maintenance Schedule -- Gasoline Engines
I
3,000 Miles (5 000 km)
6,000 Miles (10 000 km)
0Change engine oil and filter (or every
0Change engine oil and filter (or every
3 months, whichever occurs first).
3 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service.
An Emission Control Service.
0Lubricate chassis components; see
footnote ## (or every 3 months, whichever
occurs first).
0Check axle fluid level and add fluid
as needed. **
DATE
7-8
ACTUAL MILEAGE
SERVICED B Y
0Lubricate chassis components; see footnote#
(or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).
0Check axle fluid level and add fluid
as needed. **
0Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and
Rotation’’ in the Index for proper rotation
pattern and additional information. During
tire rotation, check brake calipers for
freedom of movement. Refer to the
appropriate GM service manual for proper
caliper service procedures.
--
Short TkipKity Maintenance Schedule Gasoline Engines
9,000 Miles (15 000 km)
12,000 Miles (20 000 km)
0Change engine oil and filter (or every
0Change engine oil and filter (or every
3 months, whichever occurs first).
3 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service.
An Emission Control Service.
0Lubricate chassis components; see
0Lubricate chassis components; see
footnote # (or every 3 months, whichever
occurs first).
0Check axle fluid level and add fluid
as needed. **
footnote # (or every 3 months, whichever
occurs first).
0Check axle fluid level and add fluid
as needed. **
I
DATE
ACTUAL MILEAGE
SERVICED BY:
I
I
DATE
ACTUAL MILEAGE
SERVICED B Y
7-9
Short TripKity Maintenance Schedule -- Gasoline Engines
15,000 Miles (25 000 km)
0Change engine oil and filter (or every
3 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service.
0Lubricate chassis components; see
footnote # (or every 3 months, whichever
occurs first).
0Inspect air cleaner filter if you are driving
in dusty conditions. Replace filter if
necessary. An Emission Control Service.
Check axle fluid level and add fluid
as needed. :k*
0Clean and repack the front wheel bearings
(or at each brake relining, whichever
occurs first).
7-10
0Vehicles With GVWR Above 8,500 lbs.
On'ly: Inspect shields and underhood
insulation for damage or looseness. Adjust
or replace as required. This is (I Noise Emission
Control Service. Applicable only to vehicles sold in
the United Stlltes.
t
0If your engine hasa thermostatically
controlled cooling fan, inspect all hoses
and ducts for proper hook-up (or every
12 months, whichever occurs first). Be sure
the valve works properly.This is a Noise
Emission Control Service. Applicable only to
vehicles sold in the United Sfates.
I
Short TripKity Maintenance Schedule
-- Gasoline Engines I
18,000 Miles (30 000 km)
21,000 Miles (35000 km)
0Change engine oil and filter (or every
0Change engine oil and filter (or every
3 months, whichever occurs first).
3 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service.
An Ernissiot?.Control Service.
17 Lubricate chassis components; see footnote#
(or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).
Check axle fluid level and add fluid
as needed. **
0Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and
Rotation” in the Index for proper rotation
pattern and additional information. During
tire rotation, check brake calipers for
freedom of movement. Refer to the
appropriate GM service manual for proper
caliper service procedures.
0Lubricate chassis components; see
footnote ## (or every 3 months, whichever
occurs first).
0Check axle fluid level and add fluid
as needed. w
7-11
I
Short TriplCity Maintenance Schedule -- Gasoline Engines I
24,000 Miles (40 000 km)
27,000 Miles (45000 km)
0Change engine oil and filter (or every
0Change engine oil and filter (or every
3 months, whichever occurs first).
3 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service.
An Emission Control Service.
0Lubricate chassis components; see
0Lubricate chassis components; see
footnote # (or every 3 months, whichever
’ occurs first).
17 Check axle fluid level and add fluid
as needed. **
footnote # (or every 3 months, whichever
occurs first).
0Check axle fluid level and add fluid
as needed. **
DATE
7-12
ACTUAL MILEAGE
SERVICED B Y
DATE
ACTUAL MILEAGE
SERVICED B Y
Short TripKity Maintenance Schedule-- Gasoline Engines
30,000 Miles (50 000 km)
0Change engine oil and filter (or every
0If your engine has a thermostatically
controlled cooling fan, inspect all hoses
and ducts for proper hook-up (or every
12 months, whichever occurs first). Be sure
the valve works properly. This is a Noise
3 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service.
0Lubricate chassis components; see footnote#
(or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).
0Check axle fluid level and add fluid
as needed. **
0Clean and repackthe fiont wheel bearings (or at
each brake relining, whichever occurs first).
0Replace fuel filter.
An Emission Control Service.
Emission Control Service. Applicable only to
vehicles sold in the United States.
0Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and
Rotation” in the Index for proper rotation
pattern and additional information. During
tire rotation, check brake calipers for
freedom of movement. Refer to the
appropriate GM service manual for proper
caliper service procedures.
3-
0Replace air cleaner filter.
An Emission Control Service.
0Vehicles With GVWR Above 8,500 lbs. Only:
I
DATE
I
ACTUAL MILEAGE
ISERVICED B Y
I
Inspect shields and underhood insulation for
damage or looseness. Adjustor replace as
required. This is a Noise Emission Control Service.
Applicable only to vehicles sold in the United States.
7-13
1
--
Short TripKity Maintenance Schedule Gasoline Engines
33,000 Miles (55000 km)
I
36,000 Miles (60 000 km)
0Change engine oil and filter (or every
3 months, whichever occurs first).
Change engine oil and filter (or every
3 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service,
An Emission Control Service.
0Lubricate chassis components; see
0Lubricate chassis components; see
footnote # (or every 3 months, whichever
occurs first).
0Check axle fluid level and add fluid
as needed. **
footnote ## (or every 3 months, whichever
occurs first).
0Check axle fluid level and add fluid
as needed. **
I
I
DATE
7-14
3
I
ACTUAL MILEAGE
SERVICED BY:
I
DATE
ACTUAL MILEAGE
SERVICED BY:
Short TripKity Maintenance Schedule -- Gasoline Engines
39,000 Miles (65 000 km)
42,000 Miles (70 000 km)
0Change engineoil and filter (or every
0Change engineoil and filter (or every
3 months, whichever occurs first).
3 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service.
An Emission Control Service.
0Lubricate
chassis components; see
footnote ## (or every 3 months, whichever
occurs first).
0Check axle fluid leveland add fluid
as needed. **
0Lubricate chassis components; see footnote##
(or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).
0Check axle fluid level and add fluid
as needed. **
0Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and
Rotation” in the Index for proper rotation
pattern and additional information. During
tire rotation, check brake calipers for
freedom of movement. Refer tothe
appropriate GM service manual for proper
caliper service procedures.
7-15
Short TripKity Maintenance Schedule
-- Gasoline Engines
45,000 Miles (75000 km)
0Change engine oil and filter (or every
0Vehicles With GVWR Above 8,500 lbs.
3 months, whichever occurs first).
Only: Inspect shields and underhood
insulation for damage or looseness. Adjust
or replace as required. This is a Noise Emission
An Emission Control Service.
Lubricate chassis components; see
footnote # (or every 3 months, whichever
occurs first).
0Check axle fluid level and add fluid
as needed. **
0Clean and repack the front wheel bearings
(or at each brake relining, whichever
occurs first).
0Inspect air cleaner filter if you are driving
in dusty conditions. Replace filter if
necessary. An Emission Control Service. 7
Control Service. Applicable only to vehicles sold in
the United States.
0If your engine has a thermostatically
controlled cooling fan, inspect all hoses
and ducts for proper hook-up (or every
12 months, whichever occurs first). Be sure
the valve works properly. This is a Noise
Emission Control Service. Applicable only to
vehicles sold in the United States.
I
DATE
I
ACTUAL MILEAGE
(SERVICED B Y
I
I
Short TripKity Maintenance Schedule
-- Gasoline Engines I
50,000 Miles (83 000 km)
48,000 Miles (80 000 km)
0Change automatic transmission fluid and
Change engine oil and filter (or every
3 months, whichever occurs first).
filter if the vehicle’s GVWR is over
8600 lbs. or if the vehicle is mainly driven
under one or more of these conditions:
- In heavy city traffic where the outside
temperature regularly reaches 90 O F
(32 O C) or higher.
- In hilly or mountainous terrain.
- When doing frequent trailer towing.
- Uses such as found in taxi, police or
delivery service.
An Emission Control Service.
0Lubricate chassis components; see
footnote ## (or every 3 months, whichever
occurs first).
0Check axle fluid level and add fluid
as needed. **
I f you do not useyour vehicle under any of these
conditions, thefluid andfilter do
not require changing.
I
I
I
DATE
ACTUAL MILEAGE
SERVICED BY:
1
DATE
ACTUAL MILEAGE
SERVICED BY:
7-17
I
Short Trip/City Maintenance Schedule-- Gasoline Engines
51,000 Miles (85000 km)
Change engine oil and filter (or every
3 months, whichever occurs first).
Lubricate chassis components; see
footnote ## (or every 3 months, whichever
occurs first).
0Check axle fluid level and add fluid
as needed. **
ACTUAL MILEAGE
0Change engine oil and filter (or every
3 months, whichever occurs first).
A n Emission Control Service.
An Emission Control Service.
DATE
54,000 Miles (90 000 km)
SERVICED BY:
0Lubricate chassis components; see footnote#
(or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).
0Check axle fluid level and add fluid
as needed. **
0Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and
Rotation’’ in the Index for proper rotation
pattern and additional information. During
tire rotation, check brake calipers for
freedom of movement. Refer to the
appropriate GM service manual for proper
caliper service procedures.
DATE
ACTUAL MILEAGE
SERVICED BY:
I
Short TripKity Maintenance Schedule -- Gasoline Engines I
57,000 Miles (95 000 km)
60,000 Miles (100 000 km)
0Change engine oil and filter (or every
0Change engine oil and filter (or every
3 months, whichever occurs first).
3 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service.
An Emission Control Service.
0Lubricate chassis components; see
0Lubricate chassis components; see footnote#
footnote # (or every 3 months, whichever
occurs first).
0Check axle fluid level and add fluid
as needed. **
(or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).
0Check axle fluid level and add fluid
as needed. **
0Clean and repack the front wheel bearings
(or at each brake relining, whichever
occurs first).
El Vehicles With GVWR Above 8,500 lbs.
Only: Inspect shields and underhood
insulation for damage or looseness. Adjust
or replace as required. This is n Noise Emission
I
DATE
I
ACTUAL MILEAGE
ISERVICED BY:
I
Control Service. Applicable only to vehicles sold in
the United States.
(Continued)
7-19
--
Short TripKity Maintenance Schedule Gasoline Engines I
60,000 Miles (100 000 km) (Continued)
0If your engine has a thermostatically
0Conduct evaporative control system
controlled cooling fan, inspect all hoses
and ducts for proper hook-up (or every
12 months, whichever occurs first). Be sure
the valve works properly.This is ~1 Noise
inspection. Check all fuel and vapor lines
and hoses for proper hook-up, routing and
condition. Check that the purge valve works
properly (if equipped). Replace as needed.
Emission Control Service. Applicable o ~ ~tol y
vehicles sold in the United States.
An Emission Control Service.
0Replace air cleaner filter.
0Inspect engine accessory drive belt.
An Emission Control Service.
An Emission Control Service.
0Inspect fuel tank, cap and lines for damage
0Replace fuel filter.
or leaks. Inspect fuel cap gasket for any
damage. Replace parts as needed.
An Emission Control Service.
Conduct Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR)
system inspection as described in the
service manual. An Emission Control Service. ?
7-20
AFIEmission Control Service.
I
3
I
I
DATE
ACTUAL MILEAGE
SERVICED B Y
I
Short TripKity Maintenance Schedule -- Gasoline Engines I
63,000 Miles (105 000 km)
66,000 Miles (110 000 km)
0Change engine oil and filter (or every
0Change engine oil and filter (or every
3 months, whichever occurs first).
3 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service.
An Emission Control Service.
0Lubricate chassis components; see
footnote # (or every 3 months, whichever
occurs first).
0Check axle fluid level and add fluid
as needed. **
DATE
ACTUAL MILEAGE
0Lubricate chassis components; see footnote#
(or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).
0Check axle fluid level and add fluid
as needed. **
0Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and
Rotation” in the Index for proper rotation
pattern and additional information. During
tire rotation, check brake calipers for
freedom of movement. Refer to the
appropriate GM service manual for proper
caliper service procedures.
SERVICED B Y
7-21
Short TripKity Maintenance Sryedule -= Gasoline Engines
69,000 Miles (115 000 km)
72,000 Miles (120 000 km)
0Change engine oil and filter (or every
0Change engine oil and filter (or every
3 months, whichever occurs first).
3 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service.
An Emission Control Service.
0Lubricate chassis components; see
footnote ## (or every 3 months, whichever
occurs first).
Check axle fluid level and add fluid
as needed. **
0Lubricate chassis components; see
footnote ## (or every 3 months, whichever
occurs first).
0Check axle fluid level and add fluid
as needed. **
DATE
7-22
ACTUAL MILEAGE
SERVICED B Y
DATE
ACTUAL
MILEAGE
SERVICED BY:
--
Short Trip/City Maintenance Schedule Gasoline Engines
75,000 Miles (125 000 km)
0Change engineoil and filter (or every
3 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service.
0Lubricate chassis components; see
footnote # (or every 3 months, whichever
occurs first).
0Clean and repack the front wheel bearings
(or at each brake relining, whichever
occurs first).
0Inspect air cleaner filter if you are driving
in dusty conditions. Replace filter if
necessary. An Emission Control Service.
Check axle fluid leveland add fluid
as needed. **
0Vehicles With CVWR Above 8,500 lbs.
Only: Inspect shields and underhood
insulation for damage or looseness. Adjust
or replace as required. This is u Noise Emission
Control Service. Applicable only to vehicles sold in
the United States.
0If your engine has a thermostatically
controlled cooling fan, inspect all hoses
and ducts for proper hook-up (or every
12 months, whichever occurs first). Be sure
the valve works properly. This is u Noise
Emission Control Service. Applicable only to
vehicles sold in the United States.
DATE
ACTUAL MILEAGE
SERVICED BY:
7-23
I
Short TripKity Maintenance Schedule-- Gasoline Engines I
78,000 Miles (130 000 km)
81,000 Miles (135 000 km)
0Change engine oil and filter (or every
0Change engine oil and filter (or every
3 months, whichever occurs first).
3 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service.
An Emission Control Service.
0Lubricate chassis components; see footnote##
(or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).
0Check axle fluid level and add fluid
as needed. **
0Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and
Rotation’’ in the Index for proper rotation
pattern and additional information. During
tire rotation, check brake calipers for
freedom of movement. Refer to the
appropriate GM service manual for proper
caliper service procedures.
I
DATE
7-24
I
ACTUAL MILEAGE
ISERVICED
BYJ
Lubricate chassis components; see
footnote # (or every 3 months, whichever
occurs first).
Check axle fluid level and add fluid
as needed. **
DATE
ACTUAL MILEAGE
SERVICED B Y
I
Short TripKity Maintenance Schedule
84,000 Miles (140 000 -=-
~
~
-- Gasoline Engines I
87,000 Miles (i '5 000 km)
0Change engine oil and filter (or every
0Change engine oil and filter (or every
3 months, whichever occurs first).
3 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service.
An Emission Control Service.
0Lubricate chassis components; see
0Lubricate chassis components; see
footnote # (or every 3 months, whichever
occurs first).
0Check axle fluid level and add fluid
as needed. **
footnote # (or every 3 months, whichever
occurs first).
0Check axle fluid level and add fluid
as needed. **
DATE
ACTUAL MILEAGE
SERVICED BY:
DATE
ACTUAL MILEAGE
SERVICED B Y
7-25
I Short Trip/City Maintenance Schedule -- Gasolin-1
90,000 Miles (150 000 km)
0Change engine oil and filter (or every
3 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service.
0Lubricate chassis components; see
footnote # (or every 3 months, whichever
occurs first).
0Check axle fluid level and add fluid
as needed. **
0Clean and repack the front wheel bearings
(or at each brake relining, whichever
occurs first).
0Replace fuel filter.
An Emission Control Service.
7-26
0Replace air cleaner filter.
An Emission Control Service.
0Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and
Rotation” in the Index for proper rotation
pattern and additional information. During
tire rotation, check brake calipers for
freedom of movement. Refer to the
appropriate GM service manual for proper
caliper service procedures.
0Veh’icles With GVWRAbove 8,500 lbs.
Only: Inspect shields and underhood
insulation for damage or looseness. Adjust
or replace as required. This is a Noise Emission
Control Service. Applicable only to vehicles sold in
the United States.
Short TripKity Maintenance Schedule-- Gasoline Engines
93,000 Miles (155 000 km)
0If your engine has a thermostatically
controlled cooling fan, inspect all hoses
and ducts for proper hook-up (or every
12 months, whichever occurs first). Be sure
the valve works properly. This i s LL Noise
Emissior2 Control Service. Applicableorrly to
vehic*iess o l ~ in
l the United States.
DATE
ACTUAL MILEAGE
SERVICED BY:
0Change engine oil and filter (or every
3 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Conttd Service.
0Lubricate chassis components; see
footnote # (or every 3 months, whichever
occurs first).
0Check axle fluid level and add fluid
as needed %:!:
DATE
ACTUAL MILEAGE
SERVICED B Y
7-27
I
--
Short TripKity Maintenance Schedule Gasoline Engines I
96,000 Miles (160 000 km)
99,000 Miles (165 000 km)
0Change engine oil and filter (or every
0Change engine oil and filter (or every
3 months, whichever occurs first).
3 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service.
An Emission Control Service.
0Lubricate chassis components; see
0Lubricate chassis components; see
footnote ## (or every 3 months, whichever
occurs first).
0Check axle fluid level and add fluid
as needed. **
footnote # (or every 3 months, whichever
occurs first).
0Check axle fluid level and add fluid
as needed. **
DATE
7-28
ACTUAL MILEAGE
SERVICED B Y
I
I
DATE
I
ACTUAL MILEAGE
SERVICED B Y
3
Short TripKity Maintenance Schedule -- Gasoline Engines
100,000 Miles (166 000 km)
0Drain, flush and refill cooling system
(or every 60 months since last service,
whichever occurs first). See “Engine
Coolant’’ in the Index for what to use.
Inspect hoses. Clean radiator, condenser,
pressure cap and neck. Pressure test cooling
system and pressure cap.
An Emission Control Service.
0Inspect spark plug wires.
An Emission Control Service.
0Replace spark plugs.
An Emission Control Service.
0Change automatic transmission fluid and
filter if the vehicle’s GVWR is over
8600 lbs. or if the vehicle is mainly driven
under one or more of these conditions:
-
-
In heavy city traffic where the outside
temperature regularly reaches 90°F
(32°C) or higher.
In hilly or mountainous terrain.
When doing frequent trailer towing.
Uses such as found in taxi, police or
delivery service.
If’you do not use your vehicle under an? of
these conditions, the.fluid und
I
Supplement to the1996 Express andSavana uwner’s Manual
This supplement includes thelatest inforrnation at the time of printing. We reserve the right to make changes in the
product afer that time withoutfirther notice. For vehiclesfirst sold in Canada, substitute the name
“General Motors of Canada ”for General Motors wherever it appears in this manual.
@Copyright1996 General Motors Corporation.All rights reserved. Printed in U.S.A. GENERAL MOTORS and the
names EXPRESS and SAVANA are registered trademarksof General Motors Corporation.
PART NUMBER 15029395
c’
This information replaces the “Removing the Rear Seat
’’
and “Replacing the RearSeat” portion located in
Section 1 in your owner’s manual.
Removing the Rear Seat
2. Lift the carpedmat flap atthe inboard side of the seat
base in the rear.
1. Disconnect the quick release latch plates for the lap
shoulder beltson the bench seat to be removed.To do
this, press the tipof a key into the release holeof the
safety belt buckle while pulling upon the safety belt.
2
3. Locate the red handle on the inboard side of the seat
base, rotate thered handle up.
4. Once the red handle is rotated up, pull the handle to
remove the locking pin.
5. Stow the locking pin on the rear of the seat base in
the hole that is provided.
6. Repeat this procedure for the other seat base.
7. Remove the seat from the vehicle.
8. Install the trim covers to the floor rails.
3
The 1996 Chevrolet Express Owner’s Manual
.............................................................
..................................................................
This section explains how to start and operate your vehicle.
Comfort Controls and Audio Systems .....................................................
Seats and Restraint Systems
This section tells you how to use your seats and safety belts properly.It also explains the “SIR’ system.
FeaturesandControls
1-1
2-1
3-1
This section tells you how to adjust the ventilation and comfort controls andhow to operate your
audio system.
..............................................................
Here you’ll find helpful information and tips about the road and how to drive under different conditions.
ProblemsontheRoad ..................................................................
YourDrivingandtheRoad
4-1
5-1
This section tells you what to do if you have a problem while driving, such as a flat tire or overheated
engine, etc.
............................................................ 6-1
Here the manual tells you how to keep your vehicle running properly and looking good.
Maintenanceschedule .................................................................. 7-1
This section tells you when to perform vehicle maintenance and what fluids and lubricantsto use.
CustomerAssistanceInformation ........................................................8-1
Service and Appearance Care
This section tells you how to contact Chevrolet for assistance and how to get service and owner
publications. It also gives you information on “Reporting Safety Defects” on page 8-8.
Index
................................................................................
9-1
Here’s an alphabetical listing of almost every subject in this manual. You can use it to quickly find
something you want to read.
i
We support voluntary
technician certification.
u
CHEVROLET
GENERAL MOTORS,GM, the GM Emblem,
CHEVROLET, the CHEVROLET Emblem and the
name EXPRESS are registered trademarks of General
Motors Corporation.
This manual includes the latest information at the time it
was printed. We reserve the right to make changes in the
product after that time without further notice. For
vehicles first sold in Canada, substitute the name
“General Motors of Canada Limited” for Chevrolet
Division whenever it appears in this manual.
Please keep this manual in your vehicle, so it will be
there if you ever need it when you’re on the road. If you
sell the vehicle, please leave thismanual in it so the new
owner canuse it.
Litho in U.S.A.
C9614 B First Edition
ii
WE SUPPORT
VOLUNTARY TECHNICIAN
CERTIFICATION THROUGH
National Institute for
AUTOMOTIVE
SERVICE
EXCELLENCE
For Canadian OwnersWho Prefer a
French Language Manual:
Aux propriktaires canadiens: Vous pouvez vous
procurer un exemplaire dece guide en franGais chez
votre concessionaire ou au:
DGN Marketing Services Ltd.
1500 Bonhill Rd.
Mississauga, Ontario L5T IC7
@CopyrightGeneral Motors Corporation 1996
All Rights Reserved
How to Use this Manual
Safety Warnings and Symbols
Many people W d their owner’s manual from beginning
to end when they first receive their new vehicle. If you
do this, it will help you learn about the features and
controls for yourvehicle. In this manual, you’ll find
that pictures and words work together to explain
things quickly.
You will find a number of safety cautions in this book.
We use a box and the word CAUTION to tell you
about things that could hurt you if you were to ignore
the warning.
Index
A good place to look for what you need is the Index
in the back of the manual. It’s an alphabetical list of
all that’s in the manual, and the page number where
you’ll find it.
In the caution area, we tell you what the hazard is. Then
we tell you what to do to help avoid or reduce the
hazard. Please read these cautions. If you don’t, you or
others couldbe hurt.
iii
You will also find a circle
with a slash through it in
this book. This safety
symbol means “Don’t,”
“Don’t do this,” or “Don’t
let this happen.’’
In the notice area, we tell you about somethingthat can
damage your vehicle. Many times, this damage would
not be covered by your warranty, and it could be costly.
But the notice will tell you what to do to help avoid
the damage.
When you read other manuals, you might see
CAUTION and NOTICE warnings in different colors or
in different words.
You’ll also seewarning labels on your vehicle. They use
the same words, CAUTION or NOTICE.
Vehicle Damage Warnings
Also, in this book you will find these notices:
1 NOTICE:
These mean thereis something that could
damage your vehicle.
iv
Vehicle Symbols
These aresome of the symbols you may find on your vehicle.
For example,
these symbols
are used on an
original battery:
CAUTION
POSSIBLE
INJURY
A
These symbols
are important
for you and
your passengers
whenever your
vehicle is
driven:
DOOR LOCK
UNLOCK
PROTECT
EYES BY
SHIELDING
CAUSTIC
BATTERY
ACID COULD
CAUSE
BURNS
These symbols
have to do with
your lights:
TURN
SIGNALS
These symbols
are on some of
your controls:
COOLANT
TEMP
ee
SPARK OR
FLAME
COULD
EXPLODE
BATTERY
,\I/,
FOG LAMPS
-0
#0
-*
VENTILATING
FAN
Here are some
other symbols
you may see:
FUSE
ENGINE OIL
PRESSURE
ANTI-LOCK
BRAKES
t
LIGHTER
(0)
)tr
a
b
HORN
BRAKE
COOLANT
DAYTIME
RUNNING
LAMPS
--
BATTERY
CHARGING
SYSTEM
WINDSHIELD
DEFROSTER
FASTEN
SEAT
BELTS
These symbols
are used on
warning and
indicator lights:
SPEAKER
e,
FUEL
m
(@)
V
Model Reference
This manual covers these models:
Passenger Van
Cargo Van
vi
1
Cab and Chassis
Section 1 Seats and Restraint Systems
Here you'll find information aboutthe seats in your
vehicle and how to use your safety belts properly. You
can also learn about some thingsyou should nut do with
air bags and safety belts.
Manual Front Seats
Seats and SeatControls
This part tells you about the seats -- how to adjust them,
take them out and put them back in. It also tellsyou
about reclining front seatbacks.
1-1
The bucket seats can be adjusted forward or rearward
with the lever at the front of the seat.
Power Seat (Option)
To adjust the seat, pull the lever up to release the seat
bottom and slide the seat where you want it. Then
release the lever and try to move the seat with your
body, to make sure the seat is locked into place.
I
’A
CAUTION:
You can lose controlof the vehicle if you tryto
adjust a manual driver’s seat while the vehicle
is
moving. The sudden movement could startle and
confuse you, or make you pusha pedal when you
don’t want to. Adjust the driver’s seat only when
the vehicle is not moving.
1-2
I
If your vehicle has a power seat on the driver or
passenger’s side, you can adjust it with this switch at the
front center cushionof the seat.
You can use these switches to move the seat where you
want it. To raise the seat, move the center knob up. To
Reclining Seatbacks
lower the. seat, move the center knob down. To move the
seat forward, move the center knob toward the right. To
move the seat rearward, move the center knob toward
the left.
You can raise and lower the front and rear of the seat. To
raise the front of the seat, move the right lever up. To
lower it, move the right lever down. To raise the rear of
the seat, move the left lever up. To lower it, move the
left lever down.
To adjust the seatback, lift the front of this lever which
is located a t the inner edgeof the. seat cushion.
Move the seatback with your body and release the lever
to lock the seatback where yo11 want it. I x a n forward
and pull u p on the front o f ' the lever and the seatback
will go to an upright position.
1-3
A CAUTION:
But don’t have a seatback reclined if your vehicle
is moving.
1-4
Sitting in a reclined position whenyour vehicle is
in motion can be dangerous. Even if you buckle
up, your safety beltscan’t do theirjob when
you’re reclined like this.
The shoulder belt can’t do its job
because it
won’t be against your body. Instead, it will be in
front of you. In a crash you could go into it,
receiving neckor other injuries.
The lap belt can’t do its job either. In a crash the
belt could go up over your abdomen. The belt
forces would be there, not at your pelvic bones.
This could cause serious internal injuries.
For proper protection when the vehicle is in
motion, have the seatback upright. Then sit
well
back in the seatand wear your safety belt properly.
IA
Head Restraints
Head restraintsare fixed OB some models and adjustable
on others. Slidean adjustable head restraintup or down
so that the topof the restraintis closest to thetop of
your ears. This position reduces the chance
of a neck
injury in a crash.
A safety belt that is twisted or not properly
attached won't provide the protectionneeded in
a crash. The person wearing the beltcould be
i seriously injured. After installing the seat, always
i check to be sure that thesafety belts are not
twisted and are'properly attached.
1
Rear Seats
'A
CAUTION:
'
CAUTION:
i
rn
A seat that isn't locked into place properly can
move around in acollision or sudden stop. People
in the vehicle could be injured. Be sure to lock
the seat intoplace properly when installing it.
-
~~
-
I
,
1-5
..
Removing the Rear Seat
3. Lift up on the latch lever located at the front of
each seat support. The latch lever will stay in the
up position.
I . Disconnect the quick release latch plates for the lap
shoulder belts on the bench seat to be removed. To
do this, press the tip of a key into the release hole of
the safety belt end release buckle while pulling up on
the safety belt.
4. Roll the scat toward the open slots in both rails. Lift
the seat up and out of both rails.
2. At the floor, remove the plastic trim covers in front
of and behind the seat supports.
6. Install long trim covers to the front portion of the
floor rails.
5 . Remove the seat from the vehicle.
Replacing the Rear Seat
1. Position the seat into the open slots in both rails.
Make sure that the latch levers at the front of the seat
are in the up position.
2. Roll the seat to the set location and lock into place.
'
3. Lower the latch lever by lifting up on the release
located at the mid-position of each seat support.
Check that both sides of the seat are locked securely
by trying to move the seat forward and backward. A
click should be heard when the seat is locked in place.
4. At the floor, replace the plastic trim covers in front
of and behind the seat supports.
5. Connect the quick release latch plates for the lap
shoulder belts by inserting the latch plates into the
buckles attached at the outboard positions of the
bench seat.
1-7
Safety Belts: They’re for Everyone
This part of the manual tells you how to use safety belts
properly. It also tells you some things you should not do
with safety belts.
’
Your vehicle has a light that
comes on as a reminder to
buckle up. (See “Safety
Belt Reminder Light” in
the Index.)
And it explains the Supplemental Inflatable Restraint
(SIR), or air bag system.
I
, / 1 \
CAUTION:
Don’t let anyone ride where he or she can’t wear
a safety belt properly. If you are in a crash and
you’re not wearing a safety belt, your injuries
can be much worse. You can hit thingsinside the
vehicle or be ejected from it. You can be seriously
injured or killed. In the same crash, you might
not be if you are buckled up. Always fasten your
safety belt, and check that your passengers’ belts
are fastened properly too.
In most states and Canadian provinces, the law says to
wear safety belts. Here’s why: They work.
You never know if you’ll be in a crash. If you do have a
crash, you don’t know if it will be a bad one.
A few crashes are mild, and some crashes can be so
serious that even buckled up a person wouldn’t survive.
But most crashes are in between. In many of them,
people who buckle up can survive and sometimes walk
away. Without belts they could have been badly hurt
or killed.
After more than 25 years of safety belts in vehicles,
the facts are clear. In most crashes buckling up does
matter ... a lot!
1-8
Why Safety BeltsWork
When you ride in or on anything, you go as fast as
it goes.
e
Put someoneon it.
Take the simplestvehicle. Suppose it’s just a seat
on wheels.
1-9
I
Get it up to speed. Then stop the vehicle. The rider
doesn't stop.
1-10
. ......
The person keeps going until stopped by something.
In a real vehicle, it could be the windshield ...
J
or theinstrument panel ...
or the safety belts!
With safety belts, you slow down as the vehicle does.
You get more time to stop. You stop over more distance,
and your strongest bones take the forces. That’s why
safety belts make such good sense.
1-11
Here Are QuestionsMany People Ask
About Safety Belts-- and the Answers
Won’t I be trapped in the vehicleafter an
accident if I’m wearing a safety belt?
A:
You could be -- whether you’re wearing a safety
belt or not. But you can unbuckle a safety belt,
even if you’re upside down. And your chance of
being conscious during and after an accident, so
you can unbuckle and get out, is ~?zuch
greater if
you are belted.
&= If my vehicle hasair bags, why shouldI have to
wear safety belts?
A:
Air bags are in many vehicles today and will
be in most of them in the future. But they are
supplemental systems only; so they work ~ : i t h
safety belts -- not instead of them. Every air bag
system ever offered for sale has required the use of
safety belts. Even if you’re in a vehicle that has air
bags, you still have to buckle up to get the most
protection. That’s true not only in frontal collisions,
but especially in side and other collisions.
1-12
@
If I’m a good driver, and I never drive far from
home, why should I wear safety belts?
A:
You may be an excellent driver, but if you’re in an
accident -- even one that isn’t your fault -- you and
your passengers can be hurt. Being a good driver
doesn’t protect you from things beyond your
control, such as bad drivers.
Most accidents occur within 25 miles (40 km) of
home. And the greatest number of serious injuries
and deaths occur at speeds of less than 40 mph
(65 km/h).
Safety belts are for everyone.
How to Wear Safety Belts Properly
Adults
This part is only for people of adult size.
Be aware that there are special things to know about
safety belts and children. And there are different rules
for smaller children and babies. If a child will be riding
in your vehicle, see the part of this manual called
“Children.” Follow those rules for everyone’s protection.
First, you’ll want to know which restraint systems your
vehicle has.
We’ll start with the driver position.
Driver Position
This part describes the driver’s restraint system.
Lap-Shoulder Belt
3. Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt across you.
Don’t let it get twisted.
The driver has a lap-shoulder belt. Here’s how to wear
it properly.
4. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks.
1. Close and lock the door.
2. Adjust the seat (to see how, see “Seats” in the Index)
so you can sit up straight.
Pull up on the latch plate to make sure it is secure.
If the belt isn’t long enough, see “Safety Belt
Extender” at the end of this section.
Make sure the release button on the buckle is
positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the
safety belt quickly if you ever had to.
1-13
5. To make the lap part tight, pull down on the buckle
end of the belt as you pull up on the shoulder belt.
The lap part of the belt should be worn low andsnug on
the hips, just touching the thighs. In a crash, this applies
force to the strong pelvic bones. And you’d be less likely
to slide under the lap belt. If you slid under it, the belt
would apply force at your abdomen. This could cause
serious or even fatal injuries. The shoulder belt should go
over the shoulder and across the chest. These parts of the
body are best able to take belt restraining forces.
The safety belt locks if there’s a sudden stop or a crash.
1-14
~
Shoulder Belt Height Adjuster
Before you begin to drive, move the shoulder belt
adjuster to the heightthat is right for you. ,
To move it down, push in at the word PRESS and move
the height adjuster to the desired position. You can move
the adjuster up just by pushing up on the shoulder belt
guide. After you move the adjuster to where you want it,
try to move it down without pushing in to make sure it
has locked into position.
Adjust the height so that the shoulder portion of the
belt is centered on your shoulder. The belt should be
away from your face and neck, but not falling off
your shoulder.
1-15
What’s wrong with this?
I
You can be seriously hurt if your shoulder belt
is
too loose. In a crash, you would move forward
too much, which could increase injury. The
shoulder belt shouldfit against your body.
A:
The shoulder belt is too loose. It won’t give nearly
as much protection this way.
1-16
Qz
What's wrong with this?
A CAUTION:
m
You can be seriously injured if your belt is
buckled in thewrong place like this. In a crash,
the belt would go up over your abdomen. The
belt forces would be there, not at the pelvic
bones. This could cause serious internal injuries.
Always buckle your belt into thebuckle
nearest you.
A:
The belt is buckled in the wrong place.
1-17
&:
What’s wrong with this?
.-
&, CAb I’ION:
I
You can be seriously injured if your belt goes
over an armrest like this. The belt would bemuch
too high. In a crash, you can slide under thebelt.
The belt force would then be applied at the
abdomen, not at the pelvic bones, and thatcould
cause serious or fatal injuries. Be sure thebelt
goes under the armrests.
A:
The belt is over an armrest.
What’s wrong with this?
A CAUTICU:
You can be seriously injured if you wear the
shoulder belt under your arm. In a crash, your
body would move too far forward, which would
increase thechance of head and neck injury.
Also, the belt would apply too much force to the
ribs, which aren’t as strongas shoulder bones.
You could also severely injure internal organs
like your liver or spleen.
A:
The shoulder belt is worn under the arm. It should
be worn over the shoulder at all times.
1-19
&.’ What’s wrong with this?
You can be seriously injured
by a twisted belt. In
a crash, you wouldn’t have the full width of the
belt to spread impact forces. If a belt is twisted,
make it straightso it can work properly, orask
your dealerto fix it.
A:
The belt is twisted across the body.
Supplemental Inflatable Restraint
(SIR) System
This part explains the Supplemental Inflatable
Restraint (SIR) system or air bag system.
If it says SUPPLEMENTAL
INFLATABLE RESTRAINT
on the middle part of the
steering wheel and there’s
a right front passenger seat,
your vehicle has two air
bags -- one air bag for the
driver and another air bagfor
the right front passenger.
To unlatch the belt, just push the button on the buckle.
The belt should go back out of the way.
Before you close the door, be sure the belt is out of the
way. If you slam the door on it, you can damage both the
belt and your vehicle.
1-21
If it says SUPPLEMENTAL INFLATABLE
RESTRAINT on the middle part of the steering wheel
but there is no right front passenger seat, your vehicle
has an air bagfor the driver only.
If it doesn’t say SUPPLEMENTAL INFLATABLE
RESTRAINT on the middle part of the steering wheel,
your vehicle doesn’t have air bags.
Here are the most important things to know about the
air bag system:
You can be severelyinjured or killed in a crash if
you aren’t wearing your safety belt even if you
have an airbag. Wearing your safety belt during
a crash helps reduce your chance of hitting things
inside the vehicle or being ejected from it. The air
bag is only a “supplemental restraint.” That is, it
works with safety belts but doesn’t replace them.
CAUTION: (Continued)
--
1-22
CAUTION: 0
Air bags are designed to work only in moderate to
severe crashes where the front of your vehicle hits
something. They aren’t designed to inflate at all in
rollover, rear, side or low-speed frontal crashes.
Everyone in your vehicle, including the driver,
should wear a safety beltproperly whether or
not there’san airbag for thatperson.
--
IA
C1”’
L
ION:
Air bags inflate with great force, faster than the
blink of an eye. If you’re too closeto aninflating
air bag, it could seriously injure you. Safety belts
help keep you in position for anair bag inflation
in a crash. Always wear your safety belt, even
with an air bag. The driver should sit asfar
back as possible while still maintaining control
of the vehicle.
If your vehicle has an air bag for the right front
passenger, please read this:
A CAUTION:
r
An inflating air bag can seriously injure small
children. Always securechildren properly in your
vehicle. To read how, see the part ofthis manual
called “Children”and the caution label on the
right front passenger’s safety belt.
AIR
BAG
There is an air bag readiness
light on the instrument
panel, which shows
AIR BAG.
The system checks the air bag’s electrical system for
malfunctions. The light tells you if there is an electrical
problem. See “Air Bag Readiness Light” in the Index
for more information.
1-23
How the Air Bag System Works
Where is the air bag?
The driver’s air bag is in the middle of the steering wheel.
1-24
The right front passenger’s air bagis in the instrument
panel on the passenger’s side.
Don’t put anything on, or attach anything to,
the steeringwheel or instrumentpanel. Also,
don’t put anything (such as pets or objects)
between any occupantand the steeringwheel or
instrument panel. And don’t hang anything from
the assist handle on the passenger’s side of the
instrument panel. If something is between an
occupant and an airbag, it could affect the
performance of the air bag or worse, it could
cause injury.
--
When should an air bag inflate?
The air bag is designed to inflate in moderate to severe
frontal or near-frontal crashes. The air bagwill inflate
only if the impact speed is above the system’s designed
“threshold level.” If your vehicle goesstraight into a
wall that doesn’t move or deform, the threshold level is
about 1 1 to 16 mph ( 1 8 to 26 km/h). The threshold level
can vary, however, with specific vehicle design, so that
it can be somewhat above or below this range. If your
vehicle strikes something that will move or deform, such
as a parked car, the threshold level will be higher. The
air bag is not designed to inflate in rollovers, side
impacts or rear impacts, because inflation would not
help the occupant.
In any particular crash, no one can say whether an air
bag should have inflated simply because of the damage
to a vehicle or because of what the repair costs were.
Inflation is determined by the angle of the impact and
the vehicle’s deceleration. Vehicle damage is only one
indication of this.
What makesan air bag
inflate?
In a frontal or near-frontal impact of sufficient severity,
the air bag sensing system detects that the vehicle is
suddenly stopping as a result of a crash. Thesensing
system triggers a chemical reaction of the sodium azide
sealed in the inflator. The reaction produces nitrogen
gas, which inflates the air bag. The inflator, air bag and
related hardware are all part of the air bag modules
packed inside the steering wheel and in the instrument
pane! in front of the right front passenger.
1-25
How does an air bag restrain?
In moderate to severe frontal or near-frontal collisions,
even belted occupants can contact the steering wheel or
the instrument panel. The air bag supplements the
protection provided by safety belts. Air bags distribute
the force of the impact more evenly over the occupant’s
upper body, stopping the occupant more gradually. But
air bags would not help you in many types of collisions,
including rollovers, rear impacts and side impacts,
primarily because an occupant’s motion is not toward
the air bag. Air bags should never be regarded as
anything more than a supplement to safety belts,
and then only in moderate to severe frontal or
near-frontal collisions.
What will you see after anair bag inflates?
After the air bag inflates, it quickly deflates. This occurs
so quickly that some people may not even realize the air
bag inflated. Some componentsof the air bag module
in the steering wheel hub for the driver’s air bag, or the
instrument panel for the right front passenger’s bag, will
be hot for a short time. The part of the bag that comes
into contact with you may be warm, but it will never be
too hot to touch. There will be some smoke and dust
coming from vents in the deflated air bags. Air bag
1-26
inflation will not prevent the driver from seeing or from
being able to steer the vehicle, nor will it stop people
from leaving the vehicle.
r
-
When an air bag inflates, there
is dust in the air.
This dust could cause breathing problems
for
people with a history of asthma
or other
breathing trouble. To avoid this, everyone in the
vehicle should get outas soon as it is safe todo so.
If you have breathing problems but can’t get out
of the vehicle afteran air bag inflates, then get
fresh air by opening a windowor door.
The air bags are designed to inflate only once. After
they inflate, you’ll need some new parts for your air
bag system. If you don’t get them, the air bag system
won’t be there to help protect you in another crash.
A new system will include air bag modules and
possibly other parts. The service manual for your
vehicle covers the need to replace other parts.
0
0
Your vehicle is equippedwith a crash sensingand
diagnostic module, which records information
about the air bag system.The module records
information about the readiness of the system, when
the sensors are activated and driver’ssafety belt
usage at deployment.
Let only qualified technicians work on your air bag
system. Improper servicecan mean that your air bag
system won’t work properly. See your dealer
for service.
Servicing Your Air Bag-Equipped Vehicle
Air bags affect how your vehicle should be serviced.
There areparts of the air bag systemin several places
around your vehicle. You don’t want the system to
inflate while someoneis working on your vehicle. Your
GM dealer and the service manual have information
about servicing your vehicle and the air bag system.To
purchase a service manual, see “Service and Owner
Publications” in the Index.
NOTICE:
If you damage thecover for the driver’sor the
right frontpassenger’s air bag, they may not
work properly. You may have to replace the
air bag module in the steeringwheel or both the
air bag module and the instrumentpanel for the
right frontpassenger’s air bag. Do not open or
break the airbag covers.
For upto 10 minutes after theignition key is
turned off and the batteryis disconnected, an air
bag canstill inflate during improperservice. You
can be injured if you are close to an airbag when
it inflates. Avoid wires wrapped with yellow tape
or yellow connectors. They are probably part of
the air bag system. Be sure to follow proper
service procedures, and make surethe person
performing work for you is qualified to doso.
The air bag system does not need regular maintenance.
1 37
Adding Equipment toYour Air
Bag-Equipped Vehicle
&.” If I add a push bumperor a bicycle rack to the
front of my vehicle, will it keep the
air bags
from working properly?
A:
As long as the push bumper or bicycle rack is
attached to your vehicleso that the vehicle’s basic
structure isn’t changed, it’s not likely to keep the
air bags fromworking properly in a crash.
1-28
@
Is there anythingI might add to the front of the
vehicle that could keep the air bags from
working properly?
A:
Yes. If you add things that change your vehicle’s
frame, bumper system, front end sheet metalor
height, they may keep the air bag system from
working properly. Also, the air bag system may not
work properly if you relocate any of the air bag
sensors. If you have any question about this, you
should contact Customer Assistance before you
modify your vehicle. (The phone numbers and
addresses for Customer Assistanceare in Step Two of
the Customer Satisfaction Procedure in this manual.
See “Customer Satisfaction Procedure” in the Index.)
The best way to protect the fetus is to protect the
mother. When a safety belt is worn properly, it’s more
likely that the fetus won’t be hurt in a crash. For
pregnant women, as for anyone, the key to making
safety belts effective is wearing them properly.
Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy
Safety belts work for everyone, including pregnant
women. Like all occupants, they are more likely to be
seriously injured if they don’t wear safety belts.
i
Right Front Passenger Position
...I
The right front passenger’s safety belt works the same
way as the driver’s safety belt. See “Driver Position”
earlier in this section.
~
When the shoulder belt is pulled out all the way, it will
lock. If it does, let it go back all the way and start again.
Rear Seat Passengers
It’s very important for rear seat passengers to buckle up!
Accident statistics show that unbelted people in the rear
seat are hurt more often in crashes than those who are
wearing safety belts.
Rear passengers who aren’t safety belted can be thrown
out of the vehicle in a crash. And they can strike others
in the vehicle who arewearing safety belts.
A pregnant woman shouldwear a lap-shoulder belt, and
the lap portion should be worn as low as possible, below
the rounding, throughout the pregnancy.
Rear Seat Outside Passenger Positions
Lap-Shoulder Belt
The positions next to the windows have lap-shoulder
belts. Here’s how to wear one properly.
1. Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt across you.
Don’t let it get twisted.
2. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks.
Pull up on the latch plate to make sure it is secure.
When the shoulder belt is pulledout all the way, it will
lock. If it does, let it go back all the way and startagain.
If the belt is not long enough, see“Safety Belt
Extender” at the end of this section.
1-30
Make sure the release button
on the buckle is positioned
so you would beable to unbuckle the safety belt quickly
if you ever had to.
3. To make the lap part tight, pull down on the buckle
end of the belt as you pull up on the shoulder part.
The lap part of the belt should be worn low and snug on
the hips, just touching the thighs. In a crash, this applies
force to the strong pelvic bones. And you'd be less
likely to slide under the lap belt, If you slid under it, the
belt would apply force at your abdomen. This could
cause serious or even fatal injuries. The shoulder belt
should go overthe shoulder and across the chest.
These parts of the body are best able to take belt
restraining forces.
1-31
The safety belt locks if there’s a sudden stop ora crash.
- -
A CAUTION:
You can be seriously hurt if your shoulder belt
is
too loose. In a crash, you would move forward
too much, which could increase injury. The
shoulder belt shouldfit against your body.
To unlatch the belt, just push the button on the buckle.
1-32
Center Passenger Position
Lap Belt
If your vehiclehas rear bench seats, someonecan sit in
the center positions.
When you sit in a center seatingposition, you have a lap
safety belt, which has no retractor. To make the belt
longer, tilt the latch plate and pull it along the belt.
1-33
Children
Everyone in a vehicle needs protection! That includes
infants and all children smallerthan adult size. In fact,
the law in every state in the United States and in every
Canadian province says children up to some age must be
restrained while in a vehicle.
Smaller Children and Babies (Except Cargo
Vans with Passt-- r Air B
I
To make the belt shorter, pull its free end as shown until
the belt is snug.
-Buckle, position and release it the same way as the lap
part of a lap-shoulder belt. If the belt isn’t long enough,
see “Safety Belt Extender” at the end of this section.
Make sure the release button on the buckle is positioned
so you would be able to unbuckle the safety belt quickly
if you ever had to.
1-34
Smaller children and babies should always be
restrained in a child or infant restraint. The
instructions for the restraint
will say whether it
is the righttype and size for your child. A very
young child’s hip bones are so small that a
regular belt might not stay low on the hips, as it
should. Instead, thebelt will likely beover the
child’s abdomen. In a crash, thebelt would apply
force right on the child’s abdomen, which could
cause serious or fatal injuries. So, be sure that
any child small enough for one is always properly
restrained in a child or infant restraint.
r
I
heavy you can’t hold it. For example, in a crash
at only 25 mph (40 km/h), a 12-lb. (5.5 kg) baby
will suddenly become a 240-lb. (110 kg) force on
your arms. Thebaby would be almost impossible
to hold.
Secure the baby in an infant restraint.
Never hold a baby in your arms while riding in a
vehicle. A baby doesn’t weigh much until a
crash. During a crash a baby will become so
CAUTION: (Continued)
--
Smaller Children and Babies (Cargo
Vans
with Passenger AirBags)
A very young child’s hip bones are so small that a
regular belt might not stay low on the hips, as it
should. Instead, thebelt will likely be over the
child’s abdomen. In a crash, thebelt would apply
force right on the child’s abdomen, which could
cause serious or fatalinjuries. Smaller children
and babies should always be restrained in a child
restraint. However, infants, who should be
restrained in a rear-facing child restraint, cannot
ride safely in this vehicle. The instructions for the
restraint will say whether it is the righttype and
size for your child. If a forward-facing child
restraint is suitable for your child, be sure the
child is always properly restrained while riding
in thisvehicle.
A CAUTION:
Never hold a baby in your arms while riding in a
vehicle. A baby doesn’t weigh much until a
crash. During a crash a baby will become so
heavy you can’t hold it. For example, in a crash
CAUTION: (Continued)
--
I
1-36
I
I
CAUTIOPT. ipontinuedi
at only 25mph (40 km/h), a 12-1b. (5.5 kg) baby
will suddenly become a 240-lb. (110 kg) force on
your arms. The babywould be almost impossible
to hold.
Child Restraints
Be sure the child restraint is designed to beused in a
vehicle. If it is, it will have a label saying that it meets
Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards.
Then follow the instructions forthe restraint. You may
find these instructionson the restraint itself or in a
booklet, or both. These restraintsuse the belt system in
your vehicle, but the child also hasto besecured within
the restraint to help reduce the chanceof personal injury.
The instructions that come with the infant or child
restraint will show you how to do that.
passenger air bag,neuer put a rear-facing child restraint
in the front passenger seat. Here’s why:
IA
I
CAUTION:
A child in a rear-facing child restraint can be
seriously injured if the right frontpassenger’s
air bag inflates. This isbecause the back of a
rear-facing child restraint would be very closeto
the inflatingair bag. If your vehicle has a right
front passenger’s air bag, always secure a
rear-facing child restraint in a rear
seat.
You may, however,secure a forward-facingchild
restraint in the right frontseat. Before you secure
a forward-facingchild restraint, always movethe
front passenger seat as far back as itwill go. Or,
secure the child restraint in arear seat.
Where to Put the Restraint (Except Cargo
Vans and Cab and Chassis Models)
Wherever you install it, be sure to securethe child
-estraint properly.
Accident statistics showthat children are saferif they
are restrained in the rear rather than the front seat. We at
General Motors therefore recommend that you put your
child restraint in a rear seat. If your vehicle has a front
Keep in mind that an unsecured child restraint can move
around in a collisionor sudden stop and injure people in
the vehicle. Be sure to properly secure any child
restraint in your vehicle -- even when no child is in it.
1-37
Where to.Put the Restraint (Cargo Vans
and Cab and Chassis Models)
Top Strap
The childrestraint must be secured properly in the
passenger seat. If your vehicle has a passenger air bag,
never-put a rear-facing child restraint in this vehicle.
Here's why:
r"
A child in a rear-facing child restraint can be
seriously injured if the passenger's air bag
inflates. Thisis because the back of a rear-facing
child restraint would be very closeto the inflating
air bag. Do not use a rear-facing child restraint in
this vehicle.
If a forward-facing child restraint is suitable for
your child, always movethe passenger seat asfar
back as itwill go.
Keep in mind that an unsecured child restraint can move
around in a collision or sudden stop and injure people
in the vehicle. Be sure to properly secure any child
restraint in your vehicle' -- even when no child is in it.
1-38
If your child restraint has a top strap, itshould be
anchored. If you need to have an anchor installed, you
can askyour GM dealer to put it in for you. If you want
to install an anchor yourself, your 'dealer can
tell you
how to do it.
Securing a Child Restraint in a Rear
Outside Seat Position
around the restraint. The child restraint instructions
will show you how.
If the shoulder belt goes in front of the child’s face or
neck, put it behind the child restraint.
You’ll be using the lap-shoulder belt.See the earlier part
about the top strap if the child restraint has one.
1. Put the restraint on the seat. Follow the instructions
for the child restraint.
2. Secure the child in the child restraint as the
instructions say.
3. Pick up the latch plate, and run the lap and shoulder
portions of the vehicle’s safety belt through or
4. Buckle the belt. Make sure the release button is
positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the
safety belt quickly if you ever had to.
1-39
5. Pull the rest of the shoulder beltall the way out of
the retractor to set the lock.
6. To tighten the belt, feed the shoulder belt back
into the retractor while you push down on the
child restraint.
7. Push and pull the child restraint in different
directions to be sure it is secure.
To remove the child restraint, just unbuckle the vehicle’s
safety belt and let it go back all the way. The safety belt
will move freely again and be ready to work for an adult
or larger child passenger.
1-40
Securing a Child Restraintin a
Center Seat Position
You’ll be using the lap belt.
I . Make the belt as long aspossible by tilting the latch
plate and pulling it along the belt.
See the earlier part about the top strap if the child
restraint has one.
2. Put the restraint on the seat. Follow the instructions
for the child restraint.
3. Secure the child in the child restraint as the
instructions say.
1-41
4. Run the vehicle’s safety belt through or around the
restraint. The child restraint instructions will show
you how.
7. Push and pull the child restraint in different
directions to be sure it is secure. If it isn’t, secure the
restraint in a different place in the vehicle and
contact the child restraint maker for their advice
about how to attach the child restraint properly.
To remove the child restraint, just unbuckle the vehicle’s
safety belt. It will be ready to work for an adult or larger
child passenger.
Securing a Child Restraintin the Right
Front Seat Position
5. Buckle the belt. Make sure the release button is
positioned so you would be able tounbuckle the
safety belt quickly if you ever had to.
6. To tighten the belt, pull its free end while you push
down on the child restraint.
1-42
If your vehicle has a front passenger air bag,
n.ever put a
rear-facing child restraint in this seat.Here’s why:
You’ll be using the lap-shoulder belt. See the earlier part
about the top strap if the child restraint has one.
I A CAUTION:
-
1. If your vehicle has a front passenger air bag, always
A child in a rear-facingchild restraint can be
seriously injured if the front passenger’s air bag
inflates. This is because the back of a rear-facing
child restraint would be very close to the inflating
air bag. If your vehicle is a passenger van, always
secure a rear-facingchild restraint in a rear seat.
If your vehicle is a cargovan, do not use a
rear-facing child restraint in thisvehicle. If a
forward-facing child restraint is suitable for your
child, always move the passenger seat as far back
as it will go.
move the seat as farback as it will go before
securing a forward-facing childrestraint. (See
“Seats” in the Index.)
2. Put the restraint on the seat. Follow the instructions
for the child restraint.
3. Secure the child in the child restraint as the
instructions say.
4. Pick up the latch plate, and run the lap and shoulder
portions of the vehicle’s safety belt through or
around the restraint. The childrestraint instructions
will show you how.
If the shoulder belt goes in front of the child’s face or
neck, put it behind the child restraint.
1-43
5. Buckle the belt. Make sure the release button is
positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the
safety belt quickly if you ever had to.
1-44
6. Pull the rest of the shoulder belt all the way out of
the retractor to set the lock.
Larger Children
.,
7. To tighten the belt, feed the shoulderbelt back
into the retractor while you push down on the
child restraint.
8. Push and pull the child restraint in different
directions to be sure it is secure.
To remove the childrestraint, just unbuckle the vehicle’s
safety belt and let it go back all the way. The safety belt
will move freely again and be ready to work for an adult
or larger child passenger.
Children whohave outgrown child restraints should
wear the vehicle’s safety belts.
If you have the choice, a child should sit next to a
window so the child can wear a lap-shoulder belt and
get the additional restraint a shoulder belt canprovide.
1-45
Accident statistics show that children are safer if they
are restrained in the rear seat. But they need to use the
safety belts properly.
Children who aren’t buckled up can be thrown out in
a crash.
Children who aren’t buckled up can strike other
people who are.
1-46
Never do this.
Here two children are wearing the same belt. The
belt can’t properly spread theimpact forces. In a
crash, thetwo children can be crushed together
and seriously injured. A belt must be used by
only one person at a time.
Q:
What if a child is wearing a lap-shoulder belt,
but thechild is so small that the shoulder belt is
very closeto the child’s face or neck?
A:
Move the child toward the center of the vehicle, but
be sure that the shoulder belt still is on the child’s
shoulder, so that in a crash thechild’s upper body
would have the restraint that belts provide. If the
child is so small that the shoulder belt is still very
close to the child’s face or neck, you might want to
place the child in a seat that has a lap belt, if your
vehicle has one.
Never do this.
Here a child issitting in a seat that has a
lap-shoulder belt, but the shoulder part is behind
the child. If the child wears the belt in this way, in
a crash thechild might slide under thebelt. The
belt’s force would then be applied right on the
child’s abdomen. That could cause serious or
fatal injuries.
Wherever the child sits,the lap portion of the belt
should be worn low and snug on the hips, just touching
the child’s thighs. This applies belt forceto the child’s
pelvic bones in a crash.
1-47
Safety Belt Extender
If the vehicle’s safety belt will fasten around you, you
Replacing Restraint System Parts
After a Crash
should use it.
If you’ve had a crash, do you need new belts?
But if a safety belt isn’t long enough to fasten,your
dealer will order you an extender. It’s free. When you go
in to order it, take the heaviest coat you will wear, so the
extender will be long enough for you. The extenderwill
be justfor you, and just for the seat in your vehicle that
you choose. Don’t let someone else use it, and use it
only for the seat it is made to fit. To wear it, just attach it
to the regular safety belt.
After a very minor collision, nothing may be necessary.
But if the belts were stretched, as they would be if worn
during a more severe crash,then you need new belts.
Checking Your Restraint Systems
Now and then, make sure the safety belt reminder light
and all your belts, buckles, latch plates, retractors and
anchorages areworking properly. Look for any other
loose or damaged safety belt system parts. Tf you see
anything that might keep a safety belt system from
doing itsjob, have it repaired.
Torn or frayed safety belts may not protect you in a
crash. They can rip apart under impact forces. If a belt is
torn or frayed, get a new one right away.
Also look for any opened or broken air bag covers, and
have them repaired or replaced. (The air bag system
does not need regular maintenance.)
1-48
I f belts are cut or damaged, replace them. Collision
damage also may mean you will need to have safety belt
or seatparts repaired or replaced. New parts and repairs
may be necessary even if the belt wasn’t being used at
the time of the collision.
If an air bag inflates, you’ll need to replace air bag
system parts. See the part on the air bag system earlier in
this section.
NOTES
1-49
NOTES
1-50
Section 2 FeaturesandControls
Here you can learn about the many standard and
optional features on your vehicle, and information on
starting, shifting and braking. Also explained arethe
instrument panel and the warning systems that tell you
if everything is working properly -- and what to do if
you have a problem.
Keys
Leaving young children in a vehicle with the
ignition key is dangerous for many reasons.
A child or others couldbe badly injured or
even killed.
They could operate power windowsor other
controls or even make the vehicle move.
Don't
leave the keys in a vehicle with young children.
2-1
Your vehicle has one
double-sided key for the
ignition and all door locks.
The bar-coded tag has a code on it that tells your dealer
or a qualified locksmith how to make extra keys. Keep
this tag in a safe place. If you lose your key, you’ll be
able to have a new one made easily using this tag.
NOTICE:
If you ever lose your key, your dealer will be able to
assist you with obtaining a new one.
2-2
Your vehiclehas a number of new features that
can help prevent theft. But you can have a lot of
trouble getting into yourvehicle if youever lock
your key inside. You may even have to damage
your vehicle to get in. So be sure you have an
extra key.
To lock the door fromthe
inside, slide the lever on
your door down.
Door Locks
A CAUTION:
To unlock the door, slide
the lever up.
Unlocked doors canbe dangerous.
Passengers especially children can easily
open the doorsand fall out.When a door is
locked, the inside handle won’t open it.
Outsiders can easily enter through anunlocked
!.
door when you slowdown or stop your vehicle
This may not be so obvious: You increase the
chance of being thrown outof the vehicle in a
crash if the doors aren’tlocked. Wear safety b
properly, lock your doors,and you will befar
better off whenever you drive your vehicle.
--
--
Power Door Locks (Option)
Press the bottom side of the
power door lock switch to
lock the doors at once.
There are several waysto lock and unlock your vehicle.
From the outside, use your key.
When a door is locked, the inside door handle will notwork.
2-3
Child Security Locks
Child security locks are located on the passenger side
rear cargo door,the side sliding door or the front portion
of the 60/40 side swing out door.
1
1
With this feature, you can
I
r
CHILD
SECURITY
LOCK
Move the button to
the left to engage the
security feature. Move
the button to the right to
return the door locks to
normal operation.
dI
Side Sliding Door
Printed In U.S.A.
I
I
Rear Cargo Door
2-4
to normal operation.
Keyless Entry SysteeJ
If your vehicle has this option,you can lock and unlock
your doors fromup to 30 feet (9 m) away using the key
chain transmitter suppliedwith your vehicle.
Your Keyless Entry System operates on a radio
frequency subject to Federal Communications
Commission (FCC) Rules.
Changes or modifications to this system by other than an
authorized service facility could void authorization to
use this equipment.
Operation
BfF
This device complieswith Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
Operation is subjectto the following two conditions:
( 1) This device may not cause harmful interference,
and (2) This device must accept any interference
received, including interference thatmay cause
undesired operation.
Should interference to this system occur, try this:
0
Check to determine if battery replacement is
necessary. See the instructions on battery
replacement.
0
Check the distance. You may be too far from your
vehicle. This product has a maximum range.
0
Check the location. Other vehiclesor objects may
be blocking the signal.
0
See your GM dealer or a qualified technician
for service.
To unlock the driver’s door, press the UNLOCK button.
If you press this button again within five seconds, all
the doors will unlock. Press the REAR button to unlock
the rear door only. When the UNLOCK or REAR button
is pressed, the interior dome lamps are turned on for
40 seconds or until the ignition switch is activated.
2-5
MatchingTransmitter(s) To YourVehicle
Each key chain transmitter is coded to prevent another
transmitter from unlocking your vehicle. If a transmitter
is lost or stolen, a replacement can be purchased through
your dealer. Remember to bring any remaining
transmitters with you when you go to your dealer. When
the dealer matches the replacement transmitter to your
vehicle, any remaining transmitters must also be
matched. Once the new transmitter is coded, the lost
transmitter will not unlock your vehicle. Each vehicle
can have only two transmitters matched to it.
2. Twist the dime to separate the two halves of the
transmitter housing. Separate the housing, bottom
half first.
Battery Replacement
Under normal use, the batteries in your key chain
transmitter should last about two years.
You can tell the batteries are weak if the transmitter
won’t work at the normal range in any location. I f you
have toget close to your vehicle before the transmitter
works, it’s probably time to change the batteries.
3. Remove and replace the batteries. Put the new
batteries in with the printed side down.
Use two Duracell@type DL2016 batteries or a similar
type. To replace the batteries:
4. Align the halves of the housing and snap
them together.
1. Insert a dime in the side seam of the transmitter
housing near the key ring hole.
2-6
Your Doors and How They Work
Front Doors
To open the door from the outside, pull the handle and
pull the door open.
To open the door from the inside, pull the lever toward
you and push the door open.
60140 Swing-Out Side Door
To open the “60” (front) portion of a 60/40 door from
the inside, pull the handle toward you and push open
the door.
To open the “60” (front) portion of a 60/40 door from
the outside, pull up on the handle and pull the handle
toward you.
2-7
To open the door beyond 90 degrees, close the door
partially, pull the check strap outward at the spring hole
and then open the door. When you close the. door, the
check strap will automatically re-engage.
Sliding Side Door (Option)
To open the “40” (rear) portion of a 60/40 door from the
outside, pull the handle on the side of the rear door and
pull it toward you.
To close the side doors, close the “40” (rear) door first.
Then close the “60” (front) door. Check to make sure
both doors are completely closed.
The front side swing-out door has a check strap
assembly in the door frame to keep the door from
opening beyond 90 degrees.
2-8
To open the sliding side door from outside, pull the
handle toward the rear of the vehicle. Then, slide the
door toward the rear of the vehicle to open.
To close the sliding side door from outside, use the
outside door handle to slide the door toward the front of
the vehicle.
When the door slides shut completely, it will be flush
with the side of the body.
To open the sliding door from inside, pull the handle and
slide the door toward the rear of the vehicle.
Rear Doors
To close the sliding door from inside, grasp the inside
handle and slide the door toward the front of the vehicle
to a closed position.
Make sure the door is completely shut before driving
your vehicle.
2-10
To open the rear doors from the outside, open the
passenger side rear door first. Pull the the handle toward
you to open the door.
A CAUTION:
To open the driver side rear door, pull the latch release
lever at the inside edge of the door.
Both rear doors canbe opened past 90 degrees by
opening the doors past the first detent (90 degrees open),
then opening fully.
To close the rear doors, close the driver side rear door
first. Then, closethe passenger side rear door. Check to
make sure both doors are completely closed.
It can be dangerous to drivewith the rear doors
open because carbon monoxide (CO) gas can
come into your vehicle. You can’t see or smell
CO. It can cause unconsciousness and even death.
If you must drive with the reardoors open or if
electrical wiring or othercable connections must
pass through the seal between the body and the
rear doors:
0 Make sure all windows are shut.
0 l b r n the fan on your heating or cooling
system to its highest speed with the setting
on VENT, HEAT, BLEND or DEF.
Additionally, on vehicles with heatinglair
conditioning systems, NORM A/C or
BI-LEV A/C can be used. That will force
outside air into your vehicle. See “Comfort
Controls” in theIndex.
If you have air outlets onor under the
instrument panel, open them all theway.
See “Engine Exhaust” in theIndex.
2-11
Theft
Parking at Night
Vehicle theft is big business, especially in some
cities. Although your vehicle has a number of
theft-deterrent features, we know that nothing we
put on it can make it impossible to steal. However,
there are ways you can help.
Park in a lighted spot, closeall windows and lock your
vehicle. Remember to keep your valuables out of sight.
Put them in a storage area, or take them with you.
Key in the Ignition
If you leave your vehicle with the keys inside, it’s an
easy target for joy riders or professional thieves -- so
don’t do it.
When you park your vehicle and open the driver’s
door, you’ll hear a tone remindingyou to remove your
key from the ignition and take it with you. Always do
this. Your steering wheel will be locked, and so will
your ignition and transmission. And remember to lock
the doors.
2-12
Parking Lots
If you park in a lot where someone will be watching
your vehicle, it’s best to lock it up and take your keys.
But what if you have to leave your ignition key? What
if you have to leave something valuable in your vehicle?
Put your valuables in a storage area, like your
glove box.
Lock all the doors except the driver’s.
New Vehicle “Break-In”
Your key lets you turn the ignition switch to five
different positions.
NOTICE:
Your modern vehicle doesn’t needan elaborate
“break-in.” But it will perform betterin the long
run if you followthese guidelines:
0 Keep your speed at 55 mph (88 km/h) or
less for the first500 miles (804 km).
0 Don’t1 drive at any one speed
fast or
slow for thefirst 500 miles -(SO4km).7
Don’t make full-throttlestarts.
0 Avoid making hard stops for the first
200 miles (322 km) or so. During thistime
your new brake linings aren’t yet broken
in. Hard stops with new linings can mean
premature wear and earlierreplacement.
Follow this breaking-inguideline every
time you get newbrake linings.
0 Don’t towa trailer duringbreak-in. See
“Towing a Trailer” in the Indexfor more
information.
--
Ignition Switch
C
I
--
E
ACCESSORY (A): ACCESSORY lets you use
things like the radio, power windows and the
windshield wipers when the engine is off. To get into
ACCESSORY, push in the key and turn it toward you.
Your steering wheel will remain locked,just as it was
before you inserted the key.
2-13
LOCK (B): This position locks your ignition, steering
wheel and transmission. It’s a theft-deterrent feature.
You will only be able to remove your key when the
Starting Your Gasoline Engine
If you have a diesel engine, see “Starting Your Diesel
Engine” in the Diesel Engine Supplement.
ignition is turned to LOCK.
Move your shift lever to PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N).
Your engine won’t start in any other position -- that’s a
safety feature. To restart when you’re already moving,
use NEUTRAL (N) only.
OFF (C): This position lets you turn off the engine but
still turn the steering wheel. It doesn’t lock the steering
wheel like LOCK. Use OFF if you must have your
vehicle in motion while the engine is off (for example,
if your vehicle is being pushed).
I NOTICE:
RUN (D): This is the position for driving.
START (E): This starts your engine.
I NOTICE:
If your key seemsstuck in LOCK and you can’t
turn it, be sure it is all the way in. If it is, then
turn the steeringwheel left and right while you
turn the key hard. But turn the key only with
your hand. Using a tool to force it could break
the key or the ignition switch. If none of this
works, then your vehicle needs service.
2-14
~
Don’t try to shiftto PARK (P) if your vehicle
is moving. If you do, you could damage the
transmission. Shift to PARK (P) only when
your vehicle is stopped.
1. Without pushing the accelerator pedal, turn your
ignition key to START. When the engine starts, let
go of the key, The idle speed will go down as your
engine gets warm.
NOTICE:
Holding your key in START for longer than
15 seconds at a time will cause your battery tobe
drained much sooner. And the excessive heat can
damage yourstarter motor.
2. If it doesn’t start right away, hold your key in
START. If it doesn’t start in 10 seconds, push the
accelerator pedal all the way down for five more
seconds, or until it starts.
NOTICE:
Your engine is designed to work with the
electronics in your vehicle. If youadd electrical
parts oraccessories, you could change the way
the engine operates. Before adding electrical
equipment, check with your dealer. If you don’t,
your engine might not perform properly.
If you ever have to have your vehicle towed, see
the part of this manual thattells how to do it
without damaging your vehicle. See “Towing
Your Vehicle” in the Index.
3. If your engine still won’t start (or starts but then
stops), wait 15 seconds and start over.
When the engine starts, let go of the key and the
accelerator pedal.
2-15
Engine Coolant Heater (Option)
Plugging the cord into an ungrounded outlet
could cause an electrical shock. Also, the wrong
kind of extension cord could overheat and cause
a fire. You could be seriously injured. Plug the
cord intoa properly grounded three-prong
110-volt AC outlet. If the cord won’t reach, use a
heavy-duty three-prong extension cord rated for
at least 15 amps.
-
In very cold weather, 0°F (- 1SOC) or colder, the engine
coolant heater can help. You’ll get easier starting and
better fuel economy during engine warm-up. Usually,
the coolant heater should be plugged in a m i n i m u m of
four hours prior to starting your vehicle.
To use the coolant heater:
1. Turn off the engine.
2. Open the hood and unwrap the electrical cord.
3. Plug it into a normal, grounded 1 10-volt AC outlet.
2-16
4. After you’ve used the coolant heater, be sure to store
the cord as it was before to keep it away from moving
engine parts. If you don’t, it could be damaged.
How long should you keep the coolant heater plugged
in? The answer dependson the outside temperature, the
kind of oil you have, and some other things. Instead of
trying to list everything here, we ask that you contact a
GM dealer in the area where you’ll be parking your
vehicle. The dealer can give you the best advice for that
particular area.
Automatic Transmission Operation
There are several different
positions for your shift lever.
If your vehicle is equipped with an automatic
transmission, it now features an electronic shift position
indicator within the instrument cluster. This display
must be powered anytime the shift lever is capable of
being moved out of the PARK (P) position. This means
that if your key is in the OFF position, but not locked,
there will be a small current drain on your battery which
could discharge your battery over a period of time. If
you have a need to leave your key in the ignition in the
OFF position for an extended period for any reason, it is
recommended that you disconnect the battery cable from
the battery to prevent discharging your battery.
PARK (P): This locks your rear wheels. It’s the best
position to use when you start your engine because your
vehicle can’t move easily.
A CAUTIO
:
It is dangerous toget out of your vehicle ifthe
shift lever is not fully in PARK (P) with the
parking brake firmlyset. Your vehiclecan roll.
Don’t leave your vehicle when the engine is
running unless youhave to. If you have left the
engine running, the vehicle can move suddenly.
You or others could be injured. To be sure your
vehicle won’t move, even when you’re on
fairly
level ground, always set your parkingbrake and
move the shift lever to PARK (P).
See “Shifting Into PARK (P)” in the Index. If
you’re pulling a trailer, see “Towinga Trailer’’
in the Index.
Your vehicle has a brake-transmission shift interlock.
With the ignition in the RUN position, you must fully
apply your regular brakes before you can shift from
PARK (P).
2-17
’
If you cannot shiftout of PARK (P), ease pressure on
the shift lever andpush the shift lever all the way into
PARK (P) asyou continue pressing the brake pedal.
Then move the shift lever into the gear you want. If you
still cannotshift the shift lever outof PARK (P), see
“Shifting Out of PARK (P)” later in this section.
REVERSE (R): Use this gear to backup.
NOTICE:
U
Shifting out of PARK (P)or NEUTRAL (N)
while your engine is“racing” (running at high
speed) isdangerous. Unless your foot is firmly
on the brake pedal, your vehicle could move
very rapidly. You could losecontrol andhit
people or objects. Don’t shift outof PARK (P)
or NEUTRAL (N) while your engine is racing.
Shifting into REVERSE (R)while your vehicle is
moving forward could damage your transmission.
Shift to REVERSE (R) onlyafter your vehicle
I
is stopped.
To rock yourvehicle back and forth to get out of snow,
ice or sandwithout damaging yourtransmission, see
“Stuck: In Sand, Mud, Ice or Snow”in the Index.
NEUTRAL (N): In this position, your enginedoesn’t
connect with the wheels. To restart when you’re
already moving, use NEUTRAL, (N) only. Also, use
NEUTRAL (N) when your vehicle is being towed.
2-18
NOTICE:
Damage to your transmission caused by shifting
out of PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N) with the
engine racing isn’t coveredby your warranty.
DRIVE (D): This position is for normal driving. If you
FIRST (1): This position gives you even more power
need more power for passing, and you’re:
(but lower fuel economy) than SECOND (2). You can
use it on very steep hills, or in deep snow or mud. If
the selector lever is put in FIRST (l),the transmission
won’t shift into first gear until the vehicle is going
slowly enough.
Going less than about 35 mph (56 km/h), push your
accelerator pedal about halfway down.
Going about 35 mph (56 k d h ) or more, push the
accelerator all the way down.
You’ll shift down to the next gear and have more power.
You should use DRIVE (D) (or, as you need to, a lower
gear) when towing a trailer. Operating your vehicle in
DRIVE (D) when towing a trailer will minimize heat
build-up and extend the life of your transmission.
THIRD (3): This position is also used for normal
driving, however, it offers more power and lower fuel
economy than DRIVE (D).You should use THIRD(3)
when carrying a heavy load or driving on steep hills.
SECOND (2): This position gives you more power
but lower fuel economy.You can use SECOND (2)
on hills. It can help control yourspeed as you go
down steep mountainroads, but then you would also
want to use your brakes off and on. If you manually
select SECOND (2), the transmission will drive in
second gear. You may use this feature for reducing
torque to the rear wheels when you are trying to start
your vehicle from a stopon slippery road surfaces.
NOTICE:
- -
--
If your rear wheels can’t rotate, don’t try
to
drive. This might happen if you are stuck in
very deep sand or mud or are up against a solid
object. You could damage your transmission.
Also, if you stop when going uphill, don’t hold
your vehicle there with only the accelerator
pedal. This could overheat and damage the
transmission. Use your brakesor shift into
PARK (P) to hold your vehicle in positionon
a hill.
2-19
Locking Rear Axle
If you have this feature, your rear axle can give you
additional traction on snow, mud, ice, sand or gravel. It
works like a standard axle most of the time, but when
one of the rear wheels has no traction and the other does,
the locking feature will allow the wheel with traction to
move the vehicle.
Parking Brake
To set the parking brake, hold the regular brake pedal
down with your right foot. Push down the parking brake
pedal with your left foot.
If the ignition is on, the brake system warning light will
come on.
To rclease the parking brake, hold the regular brake
pedal down. PLIII thehandle, located just above the
pal-king brake pedal. marked BRAKE RELEASE to
release the parking brake.
I f the ignition is o n when the parking brake is released,
the brake system warning light will go off.
2-20
NOTICE:
Driving with the parking brakeon can cause
your rear brakes tooverheat. You may have to
replace them, and you could also damage other
parts of your vehicle. Always check to be sure
your parking brake is fully released before
you drive.
If you are towing a trailer and are parking o n any hill,
see “Towing a Trailer” in the Index. That section shows
what to do first to keep the trailer from moving.
Shifting I: :o 11 C (P)
I A CAUTIJN:
I
It can be dangerous toget out of your vehicle if
the shift lever is not fully in PARK (P) with the
parking brakefirmly set. Your vehiclecan roll.
If you have left the engine running, the vehicle
can move suddenly. You or others could be
injured. To be sure your vehicle won’t move,
even when you’re onfairly level ground, use the
steps thatfollow. If you’re pulling a trailer, see
“Towing a Trailer” in theIndex.
1. Hold the brake pedal down with your right foot and
set the parking brake.
2. Move the shift lever into PARK (P) position like this:
Move the lever up as far as it will go.
Pull the lever toward you.
2-22
3. Move the ignition key to LOCK.
4. Remove the key and take it with you. I f you can
leave your vehicle with the ignition key in your
hand, your vehicle is in PARK (P).
Leaving Your Vehicle With the
Engine Running
A CAUTION:
It canbe dangerous to leave your vehicle with
the engine running.Your vehicle could move
suddenly if the shift leveris not fully inPARK (P)
with the parking brake firmly set. And, if you
leave the vehicle with the engine running, it could
overheat and even catch fire.
You or others could
be injured. Don’t leave your vehicle with the
engine running unless you have to.
Torque Lock
If you are parking on a hill and you don’t shift your
transmission into PARK (P) properly, the weight of the
vehicle may put too much force on the parking pawl in
the transmission. You may find it difficult topull the
shift lever out of PARK (P). This is called “torque
lock.”
To prevent torque lock, set the parking brake and then
shift into PARK (P) properly before you leave the
driver’s seat. To find out how, see “Shifting Into
PARK (P)” in the Index.
When you are ready to drive, move the shift lever out of
PARK (P) before you release the parking brake.
If torque lock does occur, you may need to have another
vehicle push yours a little
uphill to take some of the
pressure from the transmission,so you can pull the shift
lever outof PARK (P).
Shifting Out of PARK (P)
Your vehicle has a brake-transmission shift interlock
system. You have to fully apply your regular brakes
before you can shift from PARK (P). See “Automatic
Transmission” in the Index.
If you cannot shiftout of PARK (P), ease pressureon
the shift lever and push the shift lever all the way up
into PARK (P) as you maintain brake application. Then,
move the shift lever intothe gear you want.
If you ever hold the brake pedal down but still can’t
shift out of PARK (P), try this:
1. Turn the key to OFF.
2. Apply and hold the brake until the end of Step 4.
3. Shift to NEUTRAL (N).
4. Start the vehicle andthen shift to the drive gear you
want.
5. Have the brake-transmission shift interlock system
fixed as soon as you can.
2-23
Parking Over Things That Burn
Engine Exhaust
A CAU‘-ION:
Things that can burn could touch hot exhaust
parts underyour vehicle and ignite. Don’t park
over papers, leaves, dry grass or other things that
can burn.
2-24
Engine exhaust can kill. It contains the gas
carbon monoxide (CO),which you can’t see or
smell. It can cause unconsciousness and death.
You might have exhaust coming in if:
Your exhaust system sounds strange
or different.
Your vehicle gets rusty underneath.
Your vehicle was damaged in a collision.
Your vehicle was damaged when driving over
high points on the road or over road debris.
Repairs weren’t done correctly.
Your vehicle or exhaust system had been
modified improperly.
If you ever suspect exhaust is coming into
your vehicle:
0 Drive it only with all the windows down to
blow out any CO; and
0 Have your vehicle fixed immediately.
Running Your Engine While
You’re Parked
It’s better not to park with the engine running. ifBut
you
ever have to, here are some things know.
to
Idling theengine with the air system control off
could allowdangerous exhaust into your
vehicle
(see the earlier Caution under
“Engine
Exhaust”).
Also, idling in a closed-in place can let deadly
carbon monoxide (CO) into yourvehicle evenif
the fanswitch is at the highest setting. One place
this can happenis a garage. Exhaust with
CO can come in easily. NEVER park in a
garage with the engine running.
Another closed-in place can be a blizzard.
(See “Blizzard” in theIndex.)
--
--
It can be dangerous toget out of your vehicle if
the shiftlever isnot fully in PARK (P) with the
parking brake firmlyset. Your vehiclecan roll.
Don’t leave your vehicle whenthe engine is
running unless you have to. If you’ve left the
engine running, thevehicle can move suddenly.
You or otherscould be injured.To be sure your
vehicle won’t move, even when you’re
on fairly
level ground, always set your parkingbrake and
move the shiftlever to PARK (P).
Follow the proper steps to be sure your vehicle won’t
move. See “Shifting IntoPARK (P)” in the Index.
If you’re pullinga trailer, see“To,wing a Trailer” in
the Index.
L
2-25
Manual Windows
The driver’s door has a switch for the passenger
window as well. Your power windows will work when
the ignition has been turned to the RUN position.
To operate your manual windows, turn the hand crank
on each door to raise or lower your side door windows.
Push the rear of the switch with the power window
symbol on it to lower the window.
Power Windows
Push the front of the switch with the power window
symbol on it to raise the window.
Windows
The driver’swindow switch also has an express-down
feature that allows the window to lower without holding
the switch. Press and hold the side of the window
switch marked AUTO for one second to activate the
express-down mode. The express-down mode can be
cancelled at any time by pressing the opposite side of
the switch. To open the window part way, lightly tap the
switch until the window is at the desired position.
If you have the optional power windows, the controls
are on each of the side doors.
2-26
Swing-Out Windows
Rear Swing-Out Window
Side Swing-Out Window
To open your side door swing-out windows,pull out the
latch at the edgeof the window, swing the window out
and push down the latch into the locked openposition.
To close the window, pull the latch toward you and push
down on the latch to lock it. Your rear swing-out
windows work the same way, but the latch is at the
bottom edge of the window.
2-27
CAUTION:
It can be dangerous to drivewith the rear
swing-out windows or reardoor(s) open because
carbon monoxide (CO) gas can come into your
vehicle. You can’t see or smell CO.It can cause
unconsciousness and even death.
If you must drive with the rearswing-out
windows or reardoor(s) open or if electrical
wiring or other cable connections must pass
through theseal between the body and the rear
swing-out windows or reardoor(s):
Make sure all windows are shut.
CAUTION: (Continued)
CAUTION: (Continued)
Turn the fan on your heating or cooling
system to itshighest speed with the setting
on VENT, HEAT, BLENDor DEF.
Additionally, on vehicleswith heatingair
conditioning systems, NORM A/Cor
BI-LEV A/C can be used. That will force
outside air into your vehicle. See“Comfort
Controls” in the Index.
If you have air outlets on or under the
instrument panel, open them all the way.
See “Engine Exhaust” in the Index.
Horn
Press one of the horn buttons at each side of the steering
wheel to sound the horn.
2-28
Tilt Wheel (Option)
Turn SignaVMultifunctionLever
A tilt steering wheel allows you to adjust the steering
wheel before you drive. You can also raise it to the
highest level to give your legs more room when you
enter and exit the vehicle.
The lever on the left side of the steering column
includes your:
0 Turn Signal and Lane Changer
To tilt the wheel, hold the steering wheel and pull the
lever. Move the steering wheel to a comfortable level,
then release the lever to lock the wheel in place.
0
Headlamp High/Low Beam Changer
0
Windshield Wipers
0
Windshield Washer
0
Cruise Control (Option)
2-29
’hrn Signal and Lane Change Signals
The turn signal has two upward (for right) and two
downward (for left) positions. These positions allow you
to signal a turn or a lane change.
To signal a turn, move the lever all the way up or down.
When the turn is finished, the lever will return
automatically.
An arrow on the instrument
panel will flash in the
direction of the turn or
lane change.
As you signal a turn or a lane change, if the arrows flash
at twice the normal rate, a signal bulb may be burned
out and other drivers may not see your turn signal.
If a bulb is burned out, replace it to help avoid an
accident. If.the arrowsdon’t go on at all when you
signal a turn,check for burned-out bulbs and a blown
fuse (see “Fuses and Circuit Breakers” in the Index).
Headlamp High/Low Beam Changer
To change the headlamps from low beam to high or high
to low, pull the multifunction lever all the way toward
you. Then release it.
When the high beams
are on, this light on the
instrument panel also
will be on.
To signal a lane change,just raise or lower the lever
until the arrow starts to flash. Hold it there until you
complete your lane change. The lever will return by
itself when you release it.
2-30
.
-
Windshield Wipers
You control the windshield
wipers by turning the band
with the wiper symbol on it.
For a single wiping cycle, turn the band to MIST. Hold
it there until the wipers start, then let go. The wipers will
stop after one cycle. If you want more cycles, hold the
band on MIST longer.
You can set the wiper speed for a long or short delay
between wipes. This can be very useful in light rain or
snow. Turn the band to choose the delay time. The
closer to LOW, the shorter the delay.
For steady wiping at low speed, turn the band to
the LOW position. For high-speed wiping, turn the
band further, to HIGH. To stop the wipers, move the
band to OFF.
Remember that damaged wiper blades may prevent
you from seeing well enough to drive safely. To
avoid damage, be sure to clear ice and snow from the
wiper blades before using them. If they are frozen to
the windshield, carefully loosen or thaw them. If
your blades do become damaged, get new blades or
blade inserts.
Heavy snow or ice can overload your wipers. The
windshield wiper motor is protected from overload
by a circuit breaker and a fuse. If the motor overheats
due to heavy snow, etc., the wiper will stop until the
motor cools. Although the circuit is protected from
electrical overload, overload due toheavy snow, etc.
may cause wiper linkage damage. Always clear ice
and heavy snow from the windshield before using your
windshield wipers.
2-31
Windshield Washer
Cruise Control (Option)
At the top of the lever, there’s a paddle with the word
PUSH on it.To spray washer fluid on the windshield,
push the paddle.
With cruise control, you can maintain a speed of about
25 mph (40 kmk) or more without keeping your foot
on the accelerator. This can really help on long trips.
Cruise control does not work at speeds below about
25 mph (40 krnk).
Washer fluid will spray as long as you push the paddle.
When you let go of the paddle, the wipers will continue
to wipe for approximately two more wipe cycles and
then either stop orreturn to the preset speed.
When you apply your brakes, the cruise control
shuts off.
Driving without washer fluid can be dangerous. A
bad mud splash can block your vision. You could hit
another vehicle or go off the road. Check your washer
fluid level often.
I
A CAUTION:
In freezing weather, don’t use your washer until
the windshield is warmed. Otherwise the washer
fluid can form ice on the windshield, blocking
your vision.
2-32
A CAUTION:
I
I
Cruise control can be dangerous where you
can’t drive safely at a steady speed. So,
don’t use your cruise controlon winding
roads or in heavy traffic.
Cruise control can be dangerous on
slippery roads. On such roads, fast changes
in tire tractioncan cause needless wheel
spinning, and you could lose control. Don’t
use cruise control on slippery roads.
Resuming a Set Speed
Setting Cruise Control
I
~
A
CAUTION:
I
If you leaveyour cruise control switch on when
you’re not using cruise, you might hit a button
and go into cruise when you don’t want to. You
could bestartled andeven lose control. Keepthe
cruise control switch OFF until you want to use it.
1. Move the cruise controlswitch to ON.
2. Get up to the speed you want.
Suppose you set your cruise control at a desired speed
and then you apply the brake. This, of course, shuts off
the cruise control. But you don’t need to reset it.
Once you’re going about25 mph (40 kmh) or more,
you can move the cruise control switch from ON to
R/A (Resume/Accelerate) for abouthalf a second.
You’ll go right back up to your chosen speed and
stay there.
Remember, if you hold the switch at R/A longer than
half a second, the vehicle will keep going faster until
you release the switch or apply the brake. You could be
startled and even lose control.So unless you want to go
faster, don’t hold the switch at R/A.
3. Press in the SET button
at the end of the lever
and release it.
4. Take your foot off the accelerator pedal.
2-33
Increasing Speed WhileUsing Cruise Control
There are twoways to goto a higher speed:
Use the accelerator pedal to get to the higher speed.
Push the button at the end of the lever, then release
the button and the accelerator pedal. You’ll now
cruise at the higher speed.
Move the cruise switch from ON to R/A. Hold it
there until you get up to the speed you want, and
then release the switch. To increase your speed in
very small amounts, move the switch to R/A for less
than half a second. Each time you do this, your
vehicle will go about 1 mph (1.6 k d h ) faster.
Reducing Speed While Using Cruise Control
There are twoways to reduce your speed while using
cruise control:
Push in the button at the end of the lever until you
reach the lower speed you want, then release it.
To slow down in very small amounts, push the
button for lessthan half a second. Each time you do
this, you’ll go 1 mph (1.6 k d h ) slower.
Passing Another Vehicle While Using Cruise Control
Use the accelerator pedal to increase your speed. When
you take your foot off the pedal, your vehicle will slow
down to the cruise control speed you set earlier.
2-34
Using Cruise Controlon Hills
How well your cruise control will work on hills depends
upon your speed, load and the steepness of the hills.
When going up steep hills, you may have to step on
the accelerator pedal to maintain your speed. If the
steepness of the hill causes the vehicle speed to drop
more than 15 mph (9.4 km/h) below the set speed, your
cruise control will automatically disengage. When going
downhill, you may have to brake or shift to a lower gear
to keep your speed down. Of course, applying the brake
takes you out of cruise control. Many drivers find this to
be too much trouble and don’t use cruise control on
steep hills.
Ending Cruise Control
There are two ways to turn off the cruise control:
Step lightly on the brake pedal; or
Move the cruise switch to OFF.
Erasing Speed Memory
When you turn off the cruise control or the ignition,
your cruise control set speed memory is erased.
Lamps
When the wheel is turned to full brightness, and then
into the first detent position, the radio display and
PRNDL display will go to the day mode (full intensity).
This is known as “parade” mode. The rest of the I/P
illumination will stay in the maximum dimming state
(full brightness dimming). Turning the wheel up one
more detent will activate the interior dome light circuit
(with slightly higher effort).
Rotate the switch knob clockwise to the parking lamp
symbol to turn on:
0
Parking Lamps
Sidemarker Lamps
Your parking/headlamp switch is on the driver’s
side of your instrument panel.
Your instrument panel dimmer wheel has two
detent positions.
0
Taillamps
0
License Plate Lamps
Instrument Panel Lights
0
Ashtray Lamp
0
Glove Box Lamp
2-35
Rotate the switch knob clockwise again to the master
lighting symbol to turn on all the lamps listed as well as
the headlamps.
Rotate the switch counterclockwise to OFF to turn off
your lamps.
Rotate the thumb wheel next to the switch knob up to
adjust instrument panel lights. Rotate the thumb wheel up
to the first notch to return the radio display and gearshift
indicator display to full intensity when the headlamps or
parking lamps are on.
Rotate the thumb wheel up to the second notch to
activate the interior dome lamps.
You can switch your headlamps from high to low beam
by pulling on the turn signalhigh beam lever.
A circuit breaker protects your headlamps. If you have
an electrical overload, your headlamps will flicker on
and off. Have your headlamp wiring checked right away
if this happens.
Headlamps On Reminder
A buzzer will sound when your headlamps are turned on
and your ignition is in OFF, LOCK or ACCESSORY.
If you need to use your headlamps when the ignition
switch is in OFF, LOCK or ACCESSORY, the buzzer
can beturned off by turning the thumb wheel next to the
parking lampheadlamp switch all the way down.
Daytime Running Lamps(If Equipped)
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) can make it easier for
others to see the front of your vehicle during the day.
DRL can be helpful in many different driving
conditions, but they can be especially helpful in the
short periods after dawn and before sunset.
The DRL system will make your headlamps come on at
a reduced brightness when:
0
The ignition is on,
The headlamp switch is off and
0
The parking brake is released.
If your vehicle was first sold, when new, in Canada,
your headlamps will come on at reduced brightness.
2-36
If your vehicle was first sold, when new, in the United
States, your vehiclemay be equipped with DRL. If your
vehicle has DRL, you will see the the DRL indicator
light on your instrument panel and your low-beam
headlamps will come on at reduced brightness.
When the DRL are on,only your headlamps will be on.
The taillamps, sidemarkerand other lamps won’t be on.
Your instrument panel won’t be lit up either,
When it begins to getdark, your DRL indicator light
is a reminder to turn your headlamp switchon. The
other lamps that come onwith your headlamps will also
come on.
When-you turn off the headlamp switch, the regular
lamps will go off, and your headlampswill change to
the reduced brightnessof DRL.
To idle your vehicle with the engine onand the DRL off,
set the parking brake. The DRLwill stay off until you
release the parking brake.
As with any vehicle, you should turn on the regular
headlamp system when you need it.
Dome Lamps
The dome lamps will come on when you open the doors.
You can also turn the dome lamps on by rotating the
thumb wheel, located next to the headlamp knob, all
the way up to the second notch. In this position, the
dome lamps will remain on whether the doors are
opened or closed.
You can use the dome
lamp button, located
below the headlamp knob,
to set the dome lamps to
automatically come on
when the doors are open,
or to remain off.
To turn the lamps off, push the button once. With the
button in this position, the dome lamps will remain off
when the doors are open.To return the lamps to
automatic operation, push the button again and return it
to the out position. With the button in this position, the
dome lamps will come on when you open the doors.
The delayed entry will allow you to enter or exit your
vehicle with the lamps staying on for about 20 seconds,
after the door is closed or ignition is cycled.
2-37
Underhood Reel Lamp (Option)
Reading Lamps (Option)
I
I f your vehicle has reading lamps, press the button next
to the lamp to turn the lamp on.
Press the button again to turn the lamp off.
2-38
If you have an underhood reel lamp, it is located on the
passenger side of the engine compartment. The lamp can
be switched on without unreeling the cord. Also, you
can use it as a flashlight.
Mirrors
Inside Mirror
Push or pull the tab under the mirror to reduce glare
from headlamps behind you after dark.
Outside Mirrors
Adjust your outside mirrors so you can just see the
side of your vehicle, and have a clear view of objects
behind you. Some mirrors can be folded in to enter
narrow doorways.
Electric Outside RearviewMirrors (Option)
To use the lamp as a flashlight, pull down on the lever
located under the lamp, unlocking the lamp and pull the
lamp out. The cord will unreel as you pull the lamp.
If you have electric mirrors, they can be adjusted to
point where you want from inside the vehicle.
When you are done using the lamp, reel the cord back
into the housing by turning the handle.
Then, slide the lamp into the holder and press the
lever marked PUSH at the bottom of the holder to
lock into place.
2-39
Select the mirror you want
to move by rotating the
switch counterclockwise to
adjust the passenger side
mirror and clockwise to
adjust the driver side
mirror. The center position
is neutral.
Then, adjust the mirror angle by pressing the outer
arrows on the switch until the mirror is adjusted
where you want it.
Your electric outside
rearview mirrors can be
defrosted by pressing the
switch next to the heater
controls. (See “Comfort
Controls” in the Index.)
I
2-40
Convex Outside .Mirror
Your passenger’s side mirror is convex.A convex
mirror’s surface is curved so you can see more from the
driver’s seat.
CAUTION:
A convex mirror can make things (like other
vehicles) look farther away than they really are.
If you cut too sharply into the right lane, you
could hit a vehicle on your right. Check your
inside mirror or glance over your shoulder before
changing lanes.
Storage Compartments
. .
Your front storage compartment is a t the center of the
instrument panel extension, by the floor. To open the
compartment, squeeze and pull the handle at the top.
Storage compartments may also be included on the
inside of each front door.
Sun Visors
To block out glare, you can swing down the visors. You
can also swing them from side to side. Your visors have
elastic straps you can use to hold items such as maps.
2-41
Visor VanityMirror (Option)
Some visors have illuminated mirrors on them. Pull the
visor downand lift the mirror cover (if there is one), to
use themirror.
Cigarette LightedAshtrays
The front ashtray is located in the instrument panel
extension, at the center of the instrument panel. Lift up
on the ashtray door to open it.
I NOTICE:
To use the cigarette lighter, push it in all the way, and let
go. When it’s ready, it will pop back by itself.
NOTICE:
Holding a cigarette lighter in
with your hand
while it is heating can makeit overload,
damaging the lighter and the
heating element.
Just push the lighterall the way in and let go.
When it’s done, it will pop back by itself.
To remove the front ashtray, pull up on the tab with
Papers and other things that burn into your
ashtrays could be set on fire by cigarettes or
other smoking materials. That could cause a
fire andpossibly damage yourvehicle. Do not
store papers and other
things that burnin
your ashtrays.
a key or screw driver inserted in the tab, and lift the
ashtray out.
Instrument Panel
A.
B.
C,
D.
Lamp Controls
Air Vents
Instrument Cluster
Comfort Control System
E. Audio System
E Auxiliary Power Outlet
G . Cupholder
H. Ashtray
I.
J.
K.
L.
CigaretteLighter
Convenience Tray
Horn/Air Bag
Turn SignalAhltifunction Lever
2-43
Instrument Cluster
Your instrument cluster is designed to letyou know at aglance how your vehicle is running. You’ll know
how fast you’re going, how much fuel you’re using, and many other things you’ll need to know to drive safely
and economically.
A
A A
Speedometer
the new odometer can be set to the mileage total of the
old odometer, then it must be. But if it can’t, then it’s set
at zero, and a label must be put on the driver’s door to
show the old mileage reading when the new odometer
was installed.
Trip Odometer
The trip odometer can
tell you how f i r your
vehicle has been driven
since you last set the trip
odometer to zero.
Your speedometer lets you see your speed in both miles
per hour (mph) and kilometers per hour (km/h). Your
odometer shows how far your vehicle has been driven,
in either miles (used in the United States) orkilometers
(used in Canada).
You may wonder what happens if your vehicle needs a
new odometer installed. Laws vary as to the procedure
~ r or
that must be followed, so check with y o ~ state
provincial vehicle registration office. But generally, if
To reset the trip odometer, fu.lly press the reset button
located near the trip odometer readout.
The odometer can show either total miles or trip miles
by using the push control in the cluster.
2-45
Warning Lights, Gages and Indicators
This part describes the warning lights and gages that
may be on your vehicle. The pictures will help you
locate them.
Warning lights and gages can signal that something is
wrong before it becomes seriousenough to causean
expensive repair or replacement. Paying attention to
your warning lights and gages could also saveyou or
others from injury.
Warning lights come on when there may be or is a
problem with one of your vehicle’s functions. As you
will see in the details on the next few pages, some
warning lights come on briefly when you start the
engine just to let you know they’re working. If you are
familiar with this section, you should not be alarmed
when this happens.
Gages canindicate when there may be or is a problem
with one of your vehicle’s functions. Often gages and
warning lights work together to let you know when
there’s a problem with your vehicle.
When one of the warning lights comes on and stays on
when you are driving,or when one of the gages shows
there may be a problem, check the section that tells you
what to do about it. Please follow this manual’s advice.
Waiting to do repairs can be costly-- and even dangerous.
So please get to know your warning lights and gages.
They’re a big help.
Safety Belt Reminder Light
When the key is turned to RUN or START, a tone will
come on for about eight seconds to remind people to
fasten their safety belts, unless the driver’s safety belt is
already buckled.
The safety belt light will
also come onand stay on
for about 20 seconds, then
it will flash for about
55 seconds. If the driver’s
belt is already buckled,
neither the tone nor the
light will come on.
Air Bag Readiness Light
There is an air bag readiness light
on the instrument
panel, which shows AIR BAG. The system checksthe
air bag’s electrical system for malfunctions. The light
tells you if there is an electrical problem. The system
check includes the air bag sensor, the air bagmodules,
the wiring and the crash sensing and diagnostic module.
For more information on the air bag system, see“Air
Bag” in the Index.
AIR
BAG
You will see this light flash
for a few secondswhen you
turn your ignition to RUN
or START. Then the light
should go out. This means
the system is ready.
If the air bag readiness light doesn’t come on when you
start your vehicle, or stays on, or comeson when you
are driving, your air bag system may not work properly.
Have your vehicle serviced rightaway.
Charging System Light
This light should come on
briefly when you turn on the
ignition, before startingthe
engine, as a checkto show
you it is working.
After the engine starts, thelight should go out. If it stays
on or comeson while you are driving, you may have a
problem with your charging system.It could indicate a
problem with the alternator drivebelt, or some other
charging systemproblem. Have it checked right away.
Driving while this light is on could drain your battery.
If you must drive a short distance with this light on, it
helps to turn off all your accessories, such as the radio
and air conditioner.
2-47
Brake System Warning Light
Your vehicle’s hydraulic brake system is divided into
two parts. If one part isn’t working, the other part can
still work and stop you. For good braking, though, you
need both parts working well.
If the light comes on while you are driving, pull off the
road and stop carefully. You may notice that the pedal is
harder to push.Or, the pedal may go closer to the floor.
It may take longer to stop. If the light is still on, have the
vehicle towed for service. (See “Towing Your Vehicle”
in the Index.)
If the warning light comes on,there could be a brake
problem. Have your brake system inspected right away.
Your brake system may not be working properly
if the brake system warning light is on. Driving
with the brake system warning light on can lead
to an accident. If the light is still on after you’ve
pulled off the road and stopped carefully, have
the vehicle towed for service.
BRAKE
United States
Canada
This light should come on briefly when you turn the
ignition key to RUN. If it doesn’t come onthen,
have it fixed so it will be ready to warn you if there’s
a problem.
2-48
When the ignition is on, the brake system warning light
will also coke on when you set your parking brake. The
light will stay on if your parking brake doesn’t release
fully. If it stays on after your parking brake is fully
released, it means you have a brake problem.
Anti-Lock Brake System Warning Light
The anti-lock brake system warning light should come
on briefly when you turn the ignition key to RUN. If the
light doesn’t come on then, have it fixed so it will be
ready to warn you if there is a problem.
Daytime Running Lamps Indicator Light
ANTI LOCK
United States
Canada
With the anti-lock brake system, this light will come on
when you start your engine and may stay on for several
seconds. That’s normal.
You may have this light on
the instrument panel. It will
light whenever the DRL are
on. It is also a reminder to
turn on your headlamps
when driving at night. For
more details about DRL, see
“Headlamps and Vehicle
Lighting” in this section.
If the light stays on, or comes on when you’re driving,
your vehicle needs service. I f the regular brake system
have brakes, but YOLI
warning light isn’t on, y0~1’still
don’t have anti-lock brakes. I f the regular brake system
warning light is also on, you don’t have anti-lock brakes
and there’s a problem with your regular brakes. See
“Brake System Warning Light” earlier in this part.
2-49
Malfunction IndicatorLamp (Service
Engine Soon Light) (Gasoline Engine)
SERVICE
ENGINE SOON
Your vehicle is equipped
with a computer which
monitors operation of the
fuel, ignition and emission
control systems.
This system is called OBD I1 (On-Board
Diagnostics-Second Generation) and is intended to
assure that emissions are at acceptable levels for the
life of the vehicle, helping to produce a cleaner
environment. The SERVICE ENGINE SOON light
comes on to indicate that there is a problem and service
is required. Malfunctions often will be indicated by the
system before any problem is apparent, which may
prevent more serious damage to your vehicle. This
system is also designed to assist your service technician
in correctly diagnosing any malfunction.
2-50
I
NOTICE:
If you keep driving your vehicle with this light
on, aftera while, your emission controls may not
work as well, your fuel economy may not be
as
good and your engine may not run
as smoothly.
This could leadto costly repairs that may not be
covered by your warranty.
This light should come on, as a check to show you it is
working, when the ignition is on and the engine is not
running. If the light doesn’t come on, have it repaired.
This light will also come on during a malfunction in one
of two ways:
Light Flashing -- A misfire condition has been
detected. A misfire increases vehicle emissions and
may damage the emission control system on your
vehicle. Dealer or qualified service center diagnosis
and service is required.
0
Light On Steady -- An emission control system
malfunction has been detected on your vehicle.
Dealer or qualified service center diagnosis and
service may be required.
If the Light Is Flashing
Are you low on fuel?
The following may prevent more serious damage to
your vehicle:
0 Reduce vehicle speed.
0 Avoid hard accelerations.
0 Avoid steep uphill grades.
If towing a trailer, reduce the amount of cargo being
hauled as soon as it is possible.
As your engine starts to run out of fuel, your engine may
not run as efficiently as designed since small amountsof
air are suckedinto the fuel line causing a misfire. The
system can detectthis. Adding fuel should correct this
condition. Make sure to install the fuel cap properly. It
will take a few driving tripsto turn the light off.
If the light stops flashingand remains on steady, see --IT
the Light Is On Steady” following.
If the light continues to flash, when it is safe to do so,
stop the vehicle. Put your vehicle in PARK (P). Turn the
key off, wait at least 10 seconds and restart the engine.
If the light remains on steady, see “If the Light Is On
Steady” following. If the light is still flashing follow the
previous steps, and drivethe vehicle to your dealer or
qualified service center for service.
If the LightIs On Steady
You may be able to correctthe emission system
malfunction by considering the following:
Did you just drive through a deep puddleof water?
If so, your electrical system may be wet. The condition
will usually be corrected when the electrical system
dries out. A few driving trips should turn the light off.
Have you recently changed brands of fuel?
If so, be sure to fuel your vehicle with quality fuel (see
“Fuel” in the Index). Poor fuel quality will cause your
engine not to run as efficiently as designed. You may
notice this as stalling after start-up, stalling when you put
the vehicle into gear, misfiring, hesitation on acceleration
or stumbling on acceleration. (These conditions may go
away once the engine is warmed up.) This will be
detected by the system and cause the light to turn on.
If you experience this condition, change the fuel brand
you use. It will require at least one full tank of the
proper fuel to turn the light off.
If none of the above steps have made the light turn off,
have your dealeror qualified service center checkthe
vehicle. Your dealer has the proper test equipment and
diagnostic tools to fix any mechanical or electrical
problems that may have developed.
2-51
Oil Pressure Gage
The oil pressure gage
shows the engine oil
pressure in psi (pounds
per square inch) when the
engine is running. Canadian
vehicles indicate pressure
in kPa (kilopascals).
OIL
-1TION:
Don't keep drivingif the oil pressure is
low. If
you do, your engine can becomeso hot that it
catches fire.You or others could be burned.
Check your oil as soon as possible and have your
vehicle serviced.
9 3
Oil pressure may vary with engine speed, outside
temperature and oil viscosity, but readings above the
low pressure zone indicate the normal operating range.
A reading in the low pressure zone may be caused by a
dangerously low oil level or other problem causing low
oil pressure. Check your oil as soon as possible.
2-52
AC
NOTICE:
Damage to your engine from neglected
oil
problems can be costly and is not covered by
your warranty.
Fuel Gage
Check Gages Light
The CHECK GAGES light
will come on briefly when
you are starting the engine.
The fuel gage, when the
ignition is on, tells you
about how much fuel you
have left in your tank.
CHECK
GAGES
UNLEADED
FUEL ONLY
If the light comes on and stays on while you are driving,
check your coolant temperature and engine oil pressure
gages to see if they are in the warning zones.
The gage will first indicate EMPTY (E) before you
are out of fuel, and you should get more fuel as soon
as possible.
2-53
Listed are four situations you may experience with your
fuel gage:
Engine Coolant Temperature Gage
At the gas station, the fuel pump shuts off before the
gage reads FULL (F).
It takes a little more or less fuel to fill up than the
fuel gage indicated. For example, the gage may have
indicated the tank was half full, but it actually took a
little more or less than half the tank’s capacity to fill
the tank.
0
The gage moves a little when you turn a corner or
speed up.
The gage doesn’t go back to EMPTY (E) when you
turn off the ignition.
None of these indicate a problem with the fuel gage.
260
TEMP
This gage showsthe
engine coolant temperature.
If the gage pointer moves
into the red area your
engine is too hot!
J-vw
It means that your engine coolant has overheated. If you
have been operating your vehicle under normal
operating conditions, you should pull off the road, stop
your vehicle, and turn off the engine assoon as possible.
In “Problems on the Road,” this manual shows what to
do. See “Engine Overheating” in the Index.
3
LA
Voltmeter
When your engineis not
running, but the ignition is
on (in the RUN position),
this gage shows your
battery’s state of charge
in DC volts.
W
VOLTS
When the engineis running, the gage shows the
condition of the charging system. Readingsbetween
the low and high warning zones indicate the normal
operating range.
Readings in the low warning zone may occur when a
large number of electrical accessories are operatingin
the vehicle and the engine is left at an idle for an
extended period. This condition is normal since the
charging system is not able to provide full power at
engine idle. As engine speeds are increased,this
condition should correct itself as higher engine speeds
allow the charging system to create maximum power.
You can only drive for a short time with the reading in
either warning zone. If you must drive, turn off all
unnecessary accessories.
Readings in either warningzone indicate apossible
problem in the electrical system. Have thevehicle
serviced as soon as possible.
Electronic Road-Speed Governor
(Gasoline Engines)
This optional system automatically controls vehicle top
speed. The system controller receives a signal from the
vehicle speed sensor and reduces power when the
vehicle speed reaches the maximum 65 mph (105 km/h)
governed speed.
2-55
Center High-Mounted Stoplamp
If items are loaded on the roof of the vehicle, as in a
luggage carrier, care should be taken not to block or
damage the center high-mounted stoplamp unit.
If you tow a trailer that is equipped with provisions for
a center high-mounted stoplamp, see your GM dealer
‘forinstructions on how to make it operate with your
vehicle’s electrical system. As with any electrical system
modification, have the work Derformed by a qualified
electrical service person.
Your vehicle’s center high-mounted stoplamp is located
above the rear doors at the center of the vehicle.
2-56
NOTES
NOTES
2-58
Sectic I 3 Comfort Controls and Audio Systems
In this section you’ll find out how to operate the comfort
Heater Controls
control and audio systems offeredwith your vehicle. Be
sure to read about the particular systems supplied with
your vehicle.
Comfort Controls
This section tells you how to make your air systemwork
for you. Your comfort control systemuses
ozone-friendly R- 134a refrigerant.
With these systems, you can control the heating,
cooling and ventilation in your van. Your vehicle also
has a flow-throughventilation system described laterin
this section.
If your vehicle does not have air conditioning,your
heater controls will look like this.
3-1
Fan Knob
Mode Knob
The knob on the left side of the heating system control
panel controls the fan speed. The knob
has four speed
positions. To increase airflow, move the knob toward
HI. To decrease airflow, move it toward LO. To turn the
fan off, move the knob to OFF.
The right knob changes the heater setting.
Temperature Knob
The middle knob lets you select the relative temperature
of the air flowing into the passenger areaof your
vehicle. This knob will allow you to adjust the relative
air temperature independently of the function knob
setting. Move the knob clockwise to the red area for
warmer air. Move the knob counter clockwise to the
blue area forcooler air.
3-2
+a
/J VENT: This setting directs air through the
instrument panel vents.
’#
+e
VENTMEAT Use this setting to divide airflow
between the heater floor vents and instrument panel vents.
e
+” HEAT This setting directs air through the heater
floor vents. This setting is useful for cold weather.
’
Wa
HEAT/DEFROST Use this setting to divide
airflow between the heater floor vents and windshield.
DEFROST This setting with the defrost symbol
directs air through the windshield defroster vents.
This setting is useful when you have fog or ice on
the windshield.
Heater/Air Conditioning Controls
Fan Knob
The knob on the left side of the heating system control
panel controls the fan speed. The knob has four speed
positions. To increase airflow, move the knob toward
HI. To decrease airflow, move it toward LO.
Temperature Knob
The middle knob on the control panel lets you select the
relative temperature of the air flowing into the passenger
area of your vehicle. This knob will allow you to adjust
the relative air temperature independently of the
function knob setting. Move the knob clockwise toward
the red area for warmer air. Move the knob
counterclockwise toward the blue area for cooler air.
If your vehicle has air conditioning, your heaterhir
conditioning controls will look like this.
Before using your vehicle’s air conditioning, open the
windows to clear the vehicle of hot air.
3-3
Mode Knob
The right knob on the control panel changes the
heatedair conditioning setting.
MAX A/C: With A/C on, move the right knob to
MAX A/C for maximum cooling. This setting puts the
system in the recirculation mode and helps to maximize
your air conditioner’s performance and your vehicle’s
fuel economy. This setting also coolsthe air the fastest.
After the vehicle’s interior reaches a comfortable
temperature, move the knob clockwise to place the air
conditioning system in the A/C mode.
A/C: Use for normal cooling on hot days. This setting
cools outside airand directs it through the instrument
panel outlets.
+e
@
VENT: This setting, with the arrow pointing at
the figure’s head, directs air throughthe instrument
panel vents.
3-4
+e
‘N
VENTMEAT Use this setting, with the arrows
pointing at the figure’s feet and head, to divide
airflow between the heater floor vents and instrument
panel vents.
+#
0
HEAT This setting, with the arrow pointing at the
figure’s feet, directs air through the heater floor vents.
U
This setting is useful forcold weather.
W
?#
O
HEATDEFROST Use this setting, with the
arrow pointing at the figure’s feet and the defroster
symbol near the figure’s head, to divide airflow between
the heater floor vents and windshield.
DEFROST This setting with the defrost symbol
directs air through the windshield defroster vents.
This setting is useful when you have fog or iceon
the windshield.
Rear Heater (Without Air Conditioning)
Rear Air Conditioning and Rear Heater
If you have a rear heater (without rear air conditioning),
the control switch is located on the instrument panel.
If your vehicle has a rear air conditioning and rear heater
system combination, controls are provided to regulatethe
temperature, location and speed of the air flow.
To increase and decrease the flow of heated air to the
rear floor vents, move the switch marked REAR HEAT
to the blower speed you want.
The knob has three speed positions. To increase the flow
of heated air, move the switch toward HIGH. To turn the
fan off, move the switch to OFF.
Front Passenger Control
To adjust the air temperature, turn the temperature knob
on the right side of the control panel.
For warmer air, turn the knob clockwise toward the red
area, and for cooler air, turn the knob counterclockwise
toward the blue area.
3-5
To regulate the airflow location, adjust the center knob
on the control panel. Turn the knob counterclockwise
for floorvent air flow or clockwise for
headliner vent air
flow. Generally, the upper vents are used for air
conditioning and the floor vents for heating. The control
knob can be set to any blend setting.
To adjust the air flow speed, turn the fan control knob
on the left side of the control panel to the desired
blower setting.
To activate the rear control, move the fan knob on the
front control to REAR CNTL.
The rear control works just like the front control. It will
allow second seat passengers to adjust the controls as
they desire.
3-6
Air Conditioning
Before using your vehicle’s air conditioning,open the
windows to clearthe vehicle of hot air. This reduces the
time it takes for your vehicle to cool down. Then keep
your windows closed for the air conditionerto work at
its best.
You can use MAX A/C with the temperature knob in the
blue area, when it’s really hot outside and you need to
cool the inside air quickly. MAX A/C lets in only a little
air from the outside.
If you first use MAX A/C, you can then use A/C with
the temperature knob in the blue area, as soon as the
vehicle has cooled down, so outside air will be going
through your vehicle.
If your vehicle has rear air conditioning, setting it on LO
may enhance front A/C performance by allowing
trapped refrigerant in rear lines to circulate.
When the air conditioning, DEFROST orBLEND is on,
you may notice a slight increase or decrease in engine
speed, due to compressor operation. Thisis normal
because the system is designed to cycle the compressor
on and off to keep the desired temperature.
Heating
On cold days, use HEATER with the temperature knob
in the red area. Outside airwill be brought in through
the floor outlets.The heater works best if you keep your
windows closed while using it.
If you use the optional engine coolant heater before
starting your engine, your heating system will produce
warmer air ftdster to heat the passenger compartment in
cold weather. See “Engine Coolant Heater”in the Index.
3-7
Ventilation Tips
Keep the hood and front air inlet free of ice, snow, or
any other obstruction (such as leaves). The heater
and defroster will work far better, reducing the
chance of fogging the inside of your windows.
When you enter a vehicle in cold weather, turn the
blower fan to HI for a few moments before driving
off. This helps clear the intake ducts of snow and
moisture, and reduces the chance of fogging the
inside of your windows.
Keep the air path under the front seats clear of
objects. This helps air to circulate throughout
your vehicle.
Your vehicle has air vents in the center and on the sides
of your instrument panel.
You can move the vents from side to side orup and
down to direct the flow of air, or close the vents
altogether. When you close a vent, it will increase the
flow of air comingout of any vents that are open.
3-8
Rear Window Defogger (Option)
You can tell if your vehicle has this optionby looking at
the rear window. There will be lines across the glass.
These are the wire-like elements which heat your window.
NOTICE:
Scraping the inside of your rear window could
cut and damage the defogger.
Your warranty
would not cover this damage. Don’t put decals
there; you might haveto scrape them off.
Audio Systems
AM-FM Stereo
Your DelcoB audio systemhas been designed to operate
easily and giveyears of listening pleasure. You will get
the most enjoyment out of it if you acquaint yourself
with it first. Find out what your Delco system can do
and how to operate all its controls, to be sure you're
getting the most out of the advanced engineeringthat
went into it.
Setting theClock for AM-FM Stereo and
AM-FM Stereo with Cassette
Tape Player
Press SET. Within five seconds, press and hold the
SEEK right arrow until the correct minute appears on
the display. Press and hold the SEEK left arrow until the
correct hour appearson the display.
Setting theClock for AM-FM Stereo with
Compact Disc Player
Press and hold HR until the correct hour appears onthe
display. Press and hold MIN until the correct minute
appears on the display. To display the clock with the
ignition off, press RECALL and the time will be displayed
for a few seconds. There is an initial two-second delay
before the clock goes into the time-set mode.
Playing the Radio
VOLUME: Turn the knob clockwise to turn the radio
on and counterclockwise to turn it off. To increase
volume, turn the knob clockwise. Turn the knob
counterclockwise to decrease volume.
RECALL: Display the time with the ignition off by
pressing this knob. When the radio is playing, press this
knob to recall the station frequency.
3-9
Finding a Station
AM-FM: Press the lower knob to get AM or FM.
TUNE: Turn this knob to tune in radio stations.
SEEK: Press the right arrow to tune to the next higher
station and the left arrow to tune to the next lower
station and stay there.
SCAN: Press both SEEK buttons to listen to a few
seconds of each radio station. SCAN will light up on
the display. Press the right arrow to tune in the next
higher station and press the left arrow to tune to the
next lower station. Press VOLUME or both SEEK
buttons to stop scanning.
In addition to the four stations set as above, up to three
additional stations may be preset on each band by
pressing two adjoining buttons at the same time. Just:
1. Tune in the desired station.
2. Press SET.
3. Press two adjoining buttons at the same time, within
five seconds. Whenever you press the same two
buttons, the station you set will return.
4. Repeat these steps for each pair of buttons.
Setting theTone
BASS: Slide this lever up to increase the bass.
PUSHBUTTONS: The four numbered pushbuttons let
you return to your favorite stations. You can set up to
14 stations (seven AM and seven FM).
TREB: Slide this lever up to increase the treble. Slide the
lever down to reduce noise with a weak or noisy station.
1. Tune in the desired station.
Adjusting the Speakers
BAL: The control behind the upper knob balances the
sound between the right and left speakers.
2. Press SET.
3. Press and hold one of the four pushbuttons, within
five seconds. Wheneveryou press that numbered
button, the station you set will return.
4. Repeat these steps for each pushbutton.
3-10
FADE: The control behind the lower knob fsldes the
sound between the front and rear speakers.
AR
[
Stereo with CassetteTape
Finding a Station
AM-FM: Press the lower knob to get AM or FM.
TUNE: Turn the lower knob to tune in radio stations.
SEEK: Press this button and the radio will tune to the
next higher or lower station and stay there.
PUSHBUTTONS: The four numbered pushbuttons let
you return to your fmorite stations. You can set up to
14 stations (seven AM and seven FM). Just:
Playing the Rt
VOLUME: Turn the knob clockwise to turn the radio
on and counterclockwise to turn it off. To increase
volume, turn the knob clockwise. Turn the knob
counterclockwise to decreasevolume.
RECALL: Display the time with the ignition off by
pressing this knob. When the radio is playing, press this
button to recall the station frequency.
I . Tune in the desired station.
2. Press SET.
3. Press and hold one of the four pushbuttons, within
five seconds. Wheneveryou press that numbered
button, the station you set will return.
4. Repeat these steps for each pushbutton.
In addition to the four stations set as above, up to three
additional stations may be preset on each band by
pressing two adjoining buttons at the same time. Just:
1. Tune in the desired station.
2 . Press SET.
3. Press two adjoining buttons at the same time, within
five seconds. Whenever you press the same two
buttons, the station you set will return.
4. Repeat these steps for each pair of buttons.
3-11
P.SCAN: Press both SEEK buttons to scan through each
of the preset stations. Thesystem will scan through and
play each preset station stored on your pushbuttons for a
few seconds. Press either SEEKbutton or RECALL to
stop scanningthrough the preset stations.
Setting the Tone
BASS: Slide this lever up to increase the bass.
TREB: Slide this lever up to increase the treble. Slide
the
lever down to reduce noise witha weak or noisy station.
Adjusting the Speakers
BAL: The control behind the upper knob balances the
sound between the right and left speakers.
FADE: The control behind the lower knob fades the
sound between the front and rear speakers.
Playing a Cassette Tape
Your tape player is built to work best with tapes that are
30 to 45 minutes long on each side. Tapes longer than
that are so thin they may not work well in this player.
3
Once the tape is playing, use the knobs for VOLUME,
FADE and BAL just asyou do for the radio.
FWD: Press the SEEK right arrow to advance the
cassette tape. Press the SEEK left arrow to stop
forwarding the tape.
REV Press the SEEK left arrow to reverse the
cassette tape. Press the SEEK right arrow to stop
reversing the tape.
RECALL: Press this button to switch tape sides.
EJECT: Press this button to remove the tape or stop the
tape and play the radio.
CLN: This message may appear on the display. If it
does, your cassette tape player needs to be cleaned. It
will still play tapes, but you should clean it as soon as
possible to prevent damage to your tapes and player. See
“Care of Your Cassette Tape Player” in the Index.
After you clean the player, press and hold EJECT for
five seconds to reset the CLN indicator. The radiowill
display --- to show the indicator was reset.
AM-FM Stereo with CassetteTape and
Automatic Tone Control
SCV This is the Speed-Compensated-Volume (SCV)
knob. Move the control ring behind the PWR-VOL
knob clockwise to adjustthe SCV. Set the volume at the
desired level. As you drive, the SCV automatically
increases the volume, as necessary, to overcome road
and wind noise at any particular speed. The volume
should always sound the same. Each clockwiseposition
on the control ring allows for more compensation at a
faster rate.
Finding a Station
AM-FM: Press this button to switch between AM, FMl
and FM2. The display will show your selection.
Playing the Radio
PWR-VOL: Press this knob to turn the system on and
off. To increase volume, turn the knob clockwise. Turn
it counterclockwise to decrease volume. The faster the
PWR-VOL knob is rotated, the quicker the volume is
increased or decreased.
TUNE: Press lightly on this knob torelease it from its
stored position. Rotate the knob clockwise to increase
frequency and counterclockwise to decrease frequency.
When finished tuning, press the knob again to return it
to its stored position.
SEEK: Press the right arrow to tune to the next higher
station and the left arrow to tuneto the next lower station
and stay there. The sound will mute while seeking.
RECALL: Display the time with the ignition off by
pressing this knob.When the radio is playing, press this
button to recall the station frequency.
3-13
SCAN: Press and hold SEEK for two seconds until
SCAN appears on the display. SCAN allows you to
listen to stations for a fewseconds. The receiver will
continue to scan and momentarily stop at each station
until you press the button again. The sound will mute
while scanning.
PUSHBUTTONS: The six numbered pushbuttons let
you return to your favorite stations. You can set up to
18 stations (six AM, six FMl and six FM2).
1. Press AM-FM to select the band.
2. Tune in the desired station.
3. Press AUTO TONE to select the setting you prefer.
4. Press and hold one of the six pushbuttons. The sound
will mute. When it returns, release the button.
Whenever you press that numbered button, the
station you set will return and the tone you selected
will be automatically selected for that button.
5. Repeat these steps for each pushbutton.
2 I A
P.SCAN: The preset scan button lets you scan through
your fdvorite stations stored on your pushbuttons. Select
either the AM, FMl or FM2 mode and then press
P.SCAN. It will scan through each station stored on your
pushbuttons and stop for a few seconds before
continuing to scan through all of the pushbuttons. Press
P.SCAN again or one of the pushbuttons to stop
scanning to listen to a specific preset station. P.SCAN
will light up on the display while in this mode. If one of
the stations stored on a pushbutton is too weak for the
location you are in, the radio display will show the
channel number (P 1-P6) for several seconds before
advancing to the next preset station.
Setting theTone
Adjusting the Speakers
BASS: Press lightly on this knob to release it from its
BAL: Press this button to remove the control from its
stored position. Turn the knob clockwise to increase the
bass and counterclockwise to decreasethe bass. When
the BASS control is rotated, the AUTO TONE setting
will change to MAN.
stored position. Turn the control clockwise to adjust
sound to the right speakers and counterclockwise to
adjust sound to the left speakers. Press the button again
to return BAL to its stored position.
TREB: Press lightly on the TREB knob to release it
FADE: Press this button to remove the control from its
from its stored position. Turn the knob clockwise to
increase the treble and counterclockwise to decrease the
treble. When the TREB control is rotated, the AUTO
TONE setting will change to MAN.
stored position. Turn the control clockwise to adjust the
sound to the front and counterclockwise for rear
speakers. Press the button again to return FADE to its
stored position.
Push these knobs back in to their stored position when
you’re not using them.
Playing a CassetteTape
AUTO TONE: Press this button to select among the
five preset equalization settings and tailor the sound to
the music or voice being heard. Each time you press the
button, the selection will switch to one of the preset
settings of CLASSIC, NEWS, ROCK, POP or JAZZ. To
return to the manual mode, press and release this button
until MAN appears on the display. This will return the
tone adjustment to the TREB and BASS controls. If a
TREB or BASS control is rotated, the AUTO TONE
setting will change to MAN.
Your tape player is built to work best with tapes that are
30 to 45 minutes long on each side. Tapes longer than
that are so thin they may not work well in this player.
To load a cassette tape with the ignition off, press EJECT
or RECALL. Then, insert the cassette tape. If the ignition
is on but the radio is off, the tape will begin playing.
The player automatically senses if the cassette tape is
metal or Cr02 and adjusts for best playback sound.
For metal tapes, the double-D symbol will appear on
the display.
Once the tape is playing, use the VOL, BAL, FADE,
TREB and BASS controlsjust as you do for the radio.
The tape symbol and a direction arrow will be on the
display whenever a tape is being played. Anytime a tape
is inserted, the top side is selected forplay first.
PREV (I): Press the PREV or the SEEK left arrow to
search for the previous selection. A minimum
three-second blank gap is required for the player to stop
at the beginning of the selection. Thetape direction
arrow will blink during the SEEK operation.
PROG (2): Press this button to switch from one side of
the tape to the other.
NEXT (3): Press NEXT or the SEEK right arrow to
search for the next selection. A minimum three-second
blank gap is required for the player to stop at the
beginning of the selection. The tape direction arrow will
blink during the SEEK operation.
REV (4): Press this button to rapidly reverse the tape to
the beginning of the cassette reel or until you press REV
again. The radio will play the last selected station while
reversing the tape. The tape direction arrow will blink
during REV operation.
00 (5): Press this button to reduce cassette tape noise.
The double-D symbol will appear on the display while
the player is in this mode.
Dolby Noise Reduction is manufactured under a license
from Dolby Laboratories Licensing Corporation. Dolby
and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby
Laboratories Licensing Corporation.
FWD (6): Press this button to rapidly forward the tape
to the end of the cassette reel or until you press FWD
again. The radio will play the last selected station while
forwarding the tape. The tape direction arrow will blink
during FWD operation.
AM-FM: Press this button to switch from a tape to
the radio.
TAPE AUX: Press this button to return to the tape
player. The lighted arrow will appear and show the
direction of play when a tape is in the active mode.
EJECT Press this button to remove the tape. The radio
the ignition
will now play. EJECT can be used with either
or radio off. To load a cassette tape with the ignition or
radio off, press EJECT before loading the cassette.
CLN: This message may appear on the display. If it
does, your cassette tape player needs to be cleaned. It
will still play tapes, but you should clean it as soon as
possible to prevent damage to your tapes and player. See
“Care of Your Cassette Tape Player’’ in the Index.
After you clean the player, press and hold EJECT for
five seconds to reset the CLN indicator. The radio will
display --- to show the indicator was reset.
CD Adapter Kits
Although this is not a recommended practice, it is possible
to use a CD adapter kit with your cassette tape player.
Playing a Compact Disc in the Single Remote
Disc Player
a regular
The adapter kit cassette should begin playing like
audio cassette tape once inserted. If the cassette
immediately ejects, turn the radio off, turn the ignition on
and press and hold theTAPE AUX button until the tape
icon flashes on the display. Irisert the adapter cassette
again. It will power up the radio and begin playing.
This override routinewill remain active until EJECT
is pressed.
If you have this option, you can play one compact disc
(CD) at a time.
To load a CD into the player, hold the disc with the label
side up and insert it carefully into the player
(approximately half way). The disc will automatically
be pulled into the player. If the radio is off and the
ignition is on when a CD is inserted, the radio will turn
on and begin playing the CD. It is possible to load and
unload CD’s with the ignition off. To load a disc with
the ignition off, press the EJECT button on the remote
player and then insert the disc. To remove the disc, press
the EJECT button and remove the disc from the player.
3-17
A disc that has been ejected but is still sitting in the
remote CD player will be pulled back into the player
after approximately 30 seconds. Thisprotects the disc
and player from damage. The disc will not start playing.
To remove the disc, press the EJECT button and remove
the disc from the player.
All of the compact disc functions arecontrolled by the
radio buttons except for EJECT. When a disc is in the
player, a CD symbol will appear on the display. When a
disc is playing, the letters CD will appear next to the CD
symbol in the bottom left corner. The track number will
also be displayed.
If the disc comes back out and ERR appears on the
display, it could be that:
0 The disc is upside down.
0
It is dirty, scratched or wet.
0
There’s too much moisture in the air. (Wait about an
hour and try again.)
0
You are driving on a very rough road.
Please contact your dealer if any error recurs or cannot
be corrected.
PREV (1): Press this button togo back to the start of the
current track if more than eight seconds have played. Press
PREV again to go to the previous track on the disc.
PROG (2):This button is active only when you have
the 12-disc changer.
NEXT (3): Press this button to advance to the next track
on the disc.
REV (4): Press and hold this button to quickly reverse
within a track (song). As the CD reverses, elapsed time
will be displayed to help you find the correct passage.
FWD (6): Press and hold this button to quickly advance
within a track (song). As the CD advances, elapsed time
will be displayed to help you find the correct passage.
SEEK: Press the left arrow while playing a CD to go
back to the start of the current track. It will go back to
the current track if more than eight seconds have played.
Press the left arrow again to go to previous tracks. Press
the right arrow to go to the next higher track on the disc.
TAPE AUX: With a disc loaded in the player and the
radio playing, press this button once to play the compact
disc. To return to playing the radio, press AM-FM. If
both a cassette tape and CD are loaded, press TAPE
AUX to switch between the tape and compact disc.
AM-FM Stereo with Compact Disc Player
and Automatic Tone Control
RANDOM: Press P.SCAN to enter the random play
mode. RANDOM will appear on the display. While in
this mode, the tracks on the discs will be played in
random order. If you press SEEK, PREV or NEXT
while in the random mode, the PREV or NEXT track
will be scanned randomly. Press P.SCAN again to turn
off RANDOM and return to normal operation.
RECALL: Press this button to see what track
is currently playing. Press RECALL again within
five seconds to seehow long the track has been playing.
When a new track starts to play, the track number will
also appear. Press RECALL a third time and the time of
day will be displayed.
EJECT Press this button on the remote player to eject a
compact disc.
Playing the Radio
PWR-VOL: Press this knob to turn the system on and
off. To increase volume, turn the knob clockwise. Turn
it counterclockwise to decrease volume. The faster the
PWR-VOL knob is rotated, the quicker the volume is
increased or decreased.
RECALL: Display the time with the ignition off by
pressing this knob. When the radio is playing, press this
button to recall the station frequency.
3-19
SCV: This is the Speed-Compensated-Volume (SCV)
knob. Move the control ring behind the PWR-VOL
knob clockwise to adjust the SCV. Set the volume at the
desired level. As you drive, the SCV automatically
increases the volume, as necessary, to overcome road
and wind noise at any particular speed. The volume
should always sound the same. Each clockwise position
on the control ring allows for more compensation at a
faster rate.
SCAN: Press and hold SEEK for two seconds until
SCAN appears on the display. SCAN allows you to
listen to stations for afew seconds. The receiver will
continue to scanand momentarily stop at each station
until you press the button again. The sound will mute
while using the SCAN feature.
Finding a Station
I. Press AM-FM to select the band.
AM-FM: Press this button to switch between AM, FM1
and FM2. The display will show your selection.
2. Tune in the desired station.
TUNE: Press lightly on this knob to release it from its
stored position. Rotate theknob clockwise to increase
frequency and counterclockwise to decrease frequency.
When finished tuning, press the knob again to return it
to its stored position.
SEEK: Press the right arrow to tune to the next higher
station and the left arrow to tune to the next lower
station and stay there. The sound will mute while using
the SEEK feature.
3-20
PUSHBUTTONS: The six numbered pushbuttons let
you return to your favorite stations.You can set up to
18 stations (six AM, six FM 1 and six FM2).
3. Press AUTO TONE to select the setting you prefer.
4. Press and hold one of the four pushbuttons. The
sound will mute. When it returns, release the button.
Whenever you press that numbered button, the
station you set will return and the tone you selected
will be automatically selected forthat button.
5. Repeat these steps for each pushbutton.
P.SCAN: The preset scan button lets you scan through
your favorite stations storedon your pushbuttons. Select
either the AM, FM1 or FM2 mode and then press
P.SCAN. It will scan through each station stored on your
pushbuttons and stop for a few secondsbefore
continuing to scan through all of the pushbuttons. Press
P.SCAN again or oneof the pushbuttons to stop
scanning to listen to a specific stored station. P.SCAN
will light up on the display while in this mode. If one of
the stations stored on a pushbutton is too weak for the
location you are in, the radio display will show the
channel number (P 1-P6) for several seconds before
advancing to the next preset station.
Setting theTone
BASS: Press lightly on this knob to release it from its
stored position. Turn the knob clockwise to increase the
bass and counterclockwise to decrease the bass. When
the BASS control is rotated, the AUTO TONE setting
will change to MAN.
TREB: Press lightly on the TREB knob to release it
from its stored position. Turn the knob clockwise to
increase the treble and counterclockwise to decrease the
treble. When the TREB control is rotated, the AUTO
TONE setting will change to MAN.
AUTO TONE: Press this button to select among the
five preset equalization settingsand tailor the sound to
the music or voice being heard. Each time you press the
button, the selection will switch to one of the preset
settings of CLASSIC, NEWS, ROCK, POP or JAZZ.
The display will show which mode the receiver is in. To
return to the manual mode, press and release this button
until MAN appears on the display. This will return the
tone adjustment to the TREB and BASS controls. When
a TREB or BASS control is rotated, tone is
automatically set to MAN.
Adjusting the Speakers
BAL: Press lightly on this knob to release it from its
stored position. Turn the control clockwise to adjust
sound to the right speakers and counterclockwise to
adjust sound to the left speakers.
FADE: Press lightly on this knob to release it from its
stored position. Turn the control clockwise to adjust the
sound to the front and counterclockwise for rear speakers.
Push these knobs back in to their stored position when
you’re not using them.
Push these knobs back in to their stored position when
you’re not using them.
3-21
Playing a CompactDisc
PWR: Press this knob to turn the system on. (Please note
that you can also turn the systemon when you insert a
compact disc intothe player with the ignitionon.)
Insert a disc partway into the slot, label side up. The
player will pull it in. Wdit a few seconds and the disc
should play. CD and a CD symbol will also appear on
the display. Anytime you are playing a CD,the letters
CD will be next to the CD symbol.
If the disc comes back out and ERR appears on the
display, it could be that:
0
You are driving on a very rough road. (The disc
should play when the road gets smoother.)
0
The disc is upside down.
0
It is dirty, scratched or wet.
0
It is very humid. (If so, wait about an hour and
try again.)
0
The disc player is very hot.
Press RECALL to make ERR go off the display.
3-22
RECALL: Press this button to see what track is playing.
Press it again within five seconds to see how long the
CD has been playing that track. Elapsed time is
displayed in minutes and tenths of a second. The track
number will also appearwhen a new track begins to
play. Press RECALL again to return to the time display.
PREV (1): Press PREV or the SEEK left arrow to
search for the previous selection. If you hold this button
or press it more than once, the disc will advance further.
Sound is muted in this mode.
RDM (2): Press this button to play the tracks on the disc
in random (instead of 1, 2,3. . .) order. While in the
RDM mode, RANDOM appears on the display. Press
RDM again to return to normal play.
NEXT (3): Press NEXT or the SEEK right arrow to
search for the next selection. If you hold this button or
press it more than once, the disc will advance further.
The next track number will appear on the display. Sound
is muted in this mode.
a
REV (4): Press and hold REV to return rapidly to a
favorite passage. You will hear the disc selection play at
high speed while you press the REV button. This allows
you to listen and find out when the disc is a t the desired
selection. Release REV to resume playing.
FWD (6): Press and hold this button to advance rapidly
within a track. You will hear the disc selection play at
high speed while you press the FWD button. This allows
you to listen and find out when the disc is at the desired
selection. Release FWD to resume playing.
AM-FM: While in the CD mode, press this button to
stop playing the CD and play the radio. The CD symbol
will still display but the word CD will be replaced with
either AM, FM I or FM2. (If the radio is turned off, the
disc stays in the player and will resume playing at the
point where it stopped.)
CD AUX: To switch between the player and the radio
when a disc is playing, press the AM-FM button. To
return to the player, press CD AUX. When a disc is
playing, the letters CD and the CD symbol will appear
on the display. (If the radio is turned off, the disc stays
in the player and will resume playing at the point where
it stopped.)
EJECT Press this button to eject the disc from the
player and play the radio. When the same or anew disc
is inserted, the disc will start playing on track one. I f a
compact disc is left sitting i n the opening for more than
a few seconds, the player will pull the CD back in. The
radio will continue playing. When the ignition is off,
press this button to load a CD.
Theft-Deterrent Feature
THEFTLOCK is designed to discourage theft of your
radio. It works by using a secret code to disable all radio
functions whenever battery power is removed.
TM
The THEFTLOCK featurefor the radio may be used or
ignored. If ignored, the system plays normally and the
radio is not protected by the feature. I f THEFTLOCK is
activated, your radio will not operate if stolen.
When THEFTLOCK is activated, the radio will display
LOC to indicate a locked condition anytime battery
power is removed. If your battery loses power for any
reason, you must unlock the radio with the secret code
before it will operate.
3-23
Activating the Theft-Deterrent Feature
5. Press MN and 000 will appear on the display.
The instructions which follow, explain how to enter your
secret code to activate the THEFTLOCK system.It is
recommended that you read through all nine steps
before starting the procedure.
6. Press MN again to make the last two digits agree
with your code.
NOTE: If you allow more than 15 seconds to elapse
between any steps, the radio automatically reverts to
time and you must start the procedure over at Step 4.
8. Press AM-FM after you have confirmed that the
code matches the secret code you have written down.
The display will show REP to let you know that you
need to repeat Steps 5 through 7 to confirm your
secret code.
1. Write down any three or four-digit number from
000 to 1999 and keep it in a safe place separate from
the vehicle.
2. Turn the ignition to the ACCESSORY or
RUN position.
3. Turn the radio off.
4. Press the 1 and 4 buttons together. Hold them down
until --- shows on the display. Next you will use the
secret code number which you have written down.
7. Press HR to make the first one or two digits agree
with your code.
9. Press AM-FM and this time the display will show
SEC to let you know that your radio is secure. The
indicator by the volume control will begin flashing
when the ignition is turned off.
Unlocking the Theft-Deterrent Feature After
a
Power Loss
Enter your secret codeas follows; pause no more than
15 seconds between steps:
1. LOC appears when the ignition is on.
2. Press MN and 000 will appear on the display.
3. Press MN again to make the last two digits agree
with your code.
4. Press HR to make the first one or two digits agree
with your code.
5. Press AM-FM after you have confirmed that the
code matches thesecret code you have written down.
The display will show SEC, indicating the radio is
now operable and secure.
If you enter the wrong code eight times, INOP
will
appear on the display. You will have to wait an hour
with the ignition on before you can try again. When you
try again, you will only have three chances to enterthe
correct code before INOP appears.
Disabling theTheft-Deterrent Feature
Enter your secret code as follows; pause no more than
15 seconds between steps:
1. Turn the ignition to the ACCESSORY or RUN
position.
2. Turn the radio off.
3. Press the 1 and 4 buttons together. Hold them down
until SEC shows on the display.
4. Press MN and 000 will appear on the display.
5. Press MN again to make the last two digits agree
with your code.
6. Press HR to make the first one or two digits agree
with your code.
7. Press AM-FM after you have confirmed that the
code matches the secret code you have written down.
The display will show ---,indicating that the radio is
no longer secured.
If you lose or forget your code,contact your dealer.
3-25
If the code entered is incorrect, SEC will appear on the
display. The radio will remain secured until the correct
code is entered.
When battery power is disconnected from a secured
radio, the radio won’t turn on and LOC will appear on
the display.
To unlock a secured radio, see “Unlocking the
Theft-Deterrent Feature After a Power Loss” earlier in
this section.
3-26
Understanding Radio Reception
FM Stereo
FM stereo will give you the best sound. But FM signals
will reach only about 10 to 40 miles (16 to 65 km). Tall
buildings or hills can interfere with FM signals, causing
the sound to come and go.
AM
The range for most AM stations is greater than for FM,
especially at night. The longer range, however, can
cause stations to interfere with each other. AM can pick
up noise from things like storms and power lines. Try
reducing the treble to reduce this noise if you ever get it.
Tips About Your Audio System
Hearing damage from loud noise is almost undetectable
until it is too late. Your hearing can adapt to higher
volumes of sound. Sound that seems normal can be loud
and harmful to your hearing. Take precautions by
adjusting the volume control on your radio to a safe
sound level before your hearing adapts to it.
To help avoid hearing loss or damage:
Adjust the volume control to the lowest setting.
Increase volume slowly until you hear comfortably
and clearly.
NOTICE:
Before you add any sound equipment to your
vehicle like a tape player, CB radio, mobile
telephone or two-way radio be sure you can add
what you want. If you can, it’s very important to
do it properly. Added sound equipment may
interfere with the operation of your vehicle’s
engine, Delcoradio or other systems, and even
damage them. Your vehicle’s systems mayinterfere
with the operation of sound equipmentthat has
been added improperly.
So, before adding sound equipment, check with
your dealer andbe sure tocheck Federal rules
covering mobile radio and telephone units.
--
--
3-27
Care of Your Cassette Tape Player
A tape player that is not cleaned regularly can cause
reduced sound quality, ruined cassettes ora damaged
mechanism. Cassette tapes should be stored in their
cases away from contaminants, direct sunlight and
extreme heat. If they aren’t, they may not operate
properly or may cause failure of the tape player.
Your tape player should be cleaned regularly after every
50 hours of use. Your radio may display CLN to indicate
that you have used your tape player for 50 hours without
resetting the tape clean timer. If you notice a reduction in
sound quality, try a known good cassette tosee if the tape
or the tape player is at fault.If this other cassette hasno
improvement in sound quality, clean the tape player.
Cleaning may be done with a scrubbing action,
non-abrasive cleaning cassette with pads which scrub
the tape head as the hubs of the cleaner cassette turn. It
is normal for the cassette to eject while cleaning. Insert
the cassette at least three times to ensurethorough
cleaning. A scrubbing action cleaning cassetteis
available through your GM dealer
3-28
You may also choose a non-scrubbing action, wet-type
cleaner which uses a cassette with a fabric belt to clean
the tape head. This type of cleaning cassette will not
eject, It may not clean as thoroughly as the scrubbing
type cleaner.
Cassettes aresubject to wear and the sound quality may
degrade over time. Always make surethat the cassette
tape is in good condition before you have your tape
player serviced.
Care of Your Compact Discs
Handle discs carefully. Store them in their original cases
or other protective cases and away from direct sunlight
and dust. If the surface of a disc is soiled, dampen a
clean, soft cloth in a mild, neutral detergent solution and
clean it, wiping from the center to the edge.
Be sure never to touch the signal surface when handling
discs. Pick up discs by grasping the outer edges or the
edge of the hole and the outer edge.
Power Antenna Mast Care
Your power antenna will look its best and workwell if it’s
cleaned from time to time. To clean the antenna mast:
1. Turn on the ignition and radio to raise the antenna.
2. Dampen a clean cloth with mineral spirits or
equivalent solvent.
3. Wipe the cloth over the mast secrtions, removing
any dirt.
4. Wipe dry with a clean cloth.
5. Make the antenna go up and down by turning the
radio or ignition off and on.
6. Repeat if necessary.
I NOTICE:
Don’t lubricate thepower antenna. Lubrication
could damage it.
NOTICE:
Before entering an automatic car wash, turn off
your radio to make the
power antenna go down.
This will prevent the mast from possibly getting
damaged. If the antennadoes not go down when
you turn the radiooff, it may be damaged or
need to be cleaned. In eithercase, lower the
antenna by hand by carefully pressing the
antenna down.
If the mast portion of your antenna is damaged, you can
easily replace it. See your dealer for a replacement kit
and follow the instructions in the kit,
Adjustable Mast Antenna
The mast should be fully retracted before entering
any automated wash facility to minimize the risk of
antenna damage.
I f the mast should ever become slightly bent, you can
straighten it out by hand. If the mast is badly bent, as it
might be by vandals, you should replace it.
Check every once in a while to be sure the antenna is
still tightened to the body side panel.
3-29
NOTES
3-30
NOTES
3-31
NOTES
3-32
Section 4 Your Driving and the Road
Defensive Driving
The best advice anyone can give about driving is:
Drive defensively.
Please start with a very important safety device in your
vehicle: Buckle up. (See “Safety Belts” in the Index.)
Defensive driving really means “be ready for anything.”
On city streets, rural roads or freeways, it means
“always expect the unexpected.”
Assume that pedestrians or other drivers are going to be
careless and make mistakes. Anticipate what they might
do. Be ready for their mistakes.
Here you’ll find information about driving on different
kinds of roads and in varying weather conditions. We’ve
also included many other useful tips on driving.
1
Rear-end collisions are about the most preventable of
accidents. Yet they are common. Allow enough
following distance. It’s the best defensive driving
maneuver, in both city and rural driving. You never
know when the vehicle in front of you is going to brake
or turn suddenly.
4-1
Death and injury associated with drinking and driving
is a national tragedy. It’s the number one contributorto
the highway death toll, claiming thousands of victims
every year.
The obvious way to solve this highway safety problem
is for people never to drink alcohol and then drive. But
what if people do? How much is “too much” if the
driver plans to drive? It’s a lot less than many might
think. Although it depends on each person and situation,
here is some general information on the problem.
Alcohol affects four things that anyone needs to
drive a vehicle:
The Blood Alcohol Concentration (BAC) of someone
who is drinking depends upon four things:
Drunken Driving
Judgment
0
The amount of alcohol consumed
Muscular Coordination
0
The drinker’s body weight
0
Vision
0
0
Attentiveness.
The amount of food that is consumed before and
during drinking
0
The length of time it has taken the drinker to
consume the alcohol.
Police records show that almost half of all motor
vehicle-related deaths involve alcohol. In most cases,
these deaths are the result of someone who was drinking
and driving. In recent years, some 18,000 annual motor
vehicle-related deaths have been associated with the use
of alcohol, with more than 300,000 people injured.
Many adults -- by some estimates, nearly half the adult
population -- choose never to drink alcohol, so they
never drive after drinking. For persons under 21, it’s
against the law in every U.S. state to drink alcohol.
There are good medical, psychological and
developmental reasons for these laws.
4-2
According to the American Medical Association, a
180-lb. (82 kg) person who drinks three 12-ounce
(355 ml) bottles of beer in an hour will end up with a
BAC of about 0.06 percent. The person would reach the
same BACby drinking three 4-ounce (120 ml) glasses
of wine or three mixed drinks if each had 1-1/2 ounces
(45 ml) of a liquor like whiskey, gin or vodka.
Since alcoholis carried in body water, this means that a
woman generally will reach a higher BAC level than a
man of her same body weight when each has the same
number of drinks.
The law in many U.S. states sets the legal limitat a BAC
of 0.10 percent. Ina growing number of U.S. states, and
throughout Canada, the limit is 0.08 percent. In some
other countries, it’s even lower. The BAC limit for all
commercial drivers in theUnited States is 0.04 percent.
The BAC will be over 0.10 percent after three to six
drinks (in one hour). Of course, as we’ve seen, it
depends on how much alcohol is in the drinks, and how
quickly the person drinks them.
It’s the amount of alcohol that counts. For example,if
the same person drank three double martinis (3 ounces
or 90 ml of liquor each) within an hour, the person’s
BAC would be close to 0.12 percent. A person who
consumes foodjust before or during drinkingwill have
a somewhat lower BAC level.
There is a gender difference, too.Women generally have
a lower relative percentageof body water than men.
But the ability to drive is affected well below a BAC
of 0.10 percent. Research shows that the driving
skills of many people are impaired at a BAC
approaching 0.05 percent, and that the effects are worse
at night. All drivers are impaired at BAC levels above
0.05 percent. Statistics show that the chance of being
in a collision increases sharply for drivers who have a
BAC of 0.05 percent or above. A driver with a BAC level
of 0.06 percent has doubled his or her chance of having a
collision. At a BAC level of 0.10 percent, the chance of
this driver having a collision is 12 times greater; at a level
of 0.15 percent, the chance is 25 times greater!
4-3
The body takes about an hour to rid itself of the alcohol
in one drink. No amount of coffee ornumber of cold
showers will speed that up. “I’ll be careful” isn’t the
right answer. What if there’s an emergency, a need to
take sudden action, as when a child darts into the street?
A person with even a moderate BAC might not be able
to react quickly enough to avoid the collision.
There’s something else aboutdrinking and driving that
many people don’t know. Medical research shows that
alcohol in a person’s system can make crash injuries
worse, especially injuries to the brain, spinal cord or
heart. This means that when anyone who has been
drinking -- driver or passenger -- is in a crash, that
person’s chance of being killed or permanently disabled
is higher than if the person had not been drinking.
4-4
Drinking and then driving is verydangerous.
Your reflexes, perceptions, attentiveness and
judgment can be affected by even a small amount
of alcohol. You can have a serious or even
fatal collision if you drive after drinking.
Please don’t drink anddrive or ride with a driver
who has been drinking. Ride home in a cab; or if
you’re with a group, designate a driver who will
not drink.
--
--
Control of a Vehicle
Braking
You have three systems that make your vehicle go where
you want it to go. They are the brakes, the steering and
the accelerator. All three systems have to do their work
at the places where the tires meet the road.
Braking action involves perwption time and
reaction time.
First, you have to decide to push on the brake pedal.
That’s perception time. Then you have to bring up
your foot and do it. That’s reaction time.
Average reaction time is about 3/4 of a second. But
that’s only an average. It might be less with one
driver and as long as two or three seconds ormore
with another. Age, physical condition, alertness,
coordination and eyesight all play a part. So do alcohol,
drugs and frustration. But even in 3/4 of a second, a
vehicle moving at 60 mph (100 km/h) travels 66 feet
(20 m). That could be a lot of distance in an emergency,
so keeping enough space between your vehicle and
others is important.
And, of course, actual stopping distances vary greatly
with the surface of the road (whether it’s pavement or
gravel); the condition of the road (wet, dry, icy); tire
tread; and the condition of your brakes.
Sometimes, as when you’re driving on snow or ice, it’s
easy to ask more of those control systems than the tires
and road can provide. That means you can lose control
of your vehicle.
4-5
Avoid needless heavy braking. Some people drive in
spurts -- heavy acceleration followed by heavy
braking -- rather than keeping pace with traffic. This
is a mistake. Your brakes may not have time to cool
between hard stops. Your brakes will wear out much
faster if you do a lot of heavy braking. If you keep pace
with the traffic and allow realistic following distances,
you will eliminate a lot of unnecessary braking. That
means better braking and longer brake life.
If your engine ever stopswhile you’re driving, brake
normally but don’t pump your brakes. If you do, the
pedal may get harder to push down. If your engine
stops, you will still have some power brake assist. But
you will use it when you brake. Once the power assist is
used up, it may take longer to stop and the brake pedal
will be harder to push.
4-6
Anti-Lock Brakes
Your vehicle has anti-lock brakes (ABS). ABS is an
advanced electronic braking system that will help
prevent a braking skid.
When you start your engine and begin to drive away,
your anti-lock brake system will check itself. You may
hear a momentary motor or clicking noise while this test
is going on. This is normal.
If there’s a problem.with
the anti-lock brake system,
this warning light will stay
on. See “Anti-Lock Brake
ANTI LOCK
The anti-lock system can change the brake pressure
faster than any driver could. The computer is
programmed to make the most of available tire and
road conditions.
Here’s how anti-lock works. Let‘s say the road is wet.
You’re driving safely. Suddenly an animal -jumpsout in
front of you.
You slam on the brakes. Here’s what happens with ABS.
A computer senses that wheels are slowing down. If one
of the wheels is about to stop rolling, the computer will
separately work the brakes at each front wheel and at the
rear wheels.
You can steer around the obstacle while braking hard.
As you brake, your computer keeps receiving updates on
wheel speed and controls braking pressure accordingly.
4-7
Remember: Anti-lock doesn’t change the time you need
to get your foot up to the brake pedal or always decrease
stopping distance. If you get too close to the vehicle in
front of you, you won’t have time to apply your brakes
if that vehicle suddenly slows or stops. Always leave
enough room up ahead to stop, even though you have
anti-lock brakes.
Using Anti-Lock
Don’t pump the brakes. Just hold the brake pedal
down and let anti-lock work for you. You may feel the
brakes vibrate, or you may notice some noise, but this
is normal.
Braking in Emergencies
Use your anti-lock braking system when you need to.
With anti-lock, you can steer and brake at the same
time. In many emergencies, steering can help you more
than even the very best braking.
A Q
Steering
Power Steering
If you lose power steering assist because the engine
stops or the system is not functioning, you can steer but
it will take much more effort.
Steering Tips
Driving on Curves
It’s important to take curves at a reasonable speed.
A lot of the “driver lost control” accidents mentioned on
the news happen on curves. Here’s why:
Experienced driver or beginner, each of us is subject to
the same laws of physics when driving on curves. The
traction of the tires against the road surface makes it
possible for the vehicle to change its path when you turn
the front wheels. If there’s no traction, inertia will keep
the vehicle going in the same direction. If you’ve ever
tried to steer a vehicle on wet ice, you’ll understand this.
The traction you can get in a curve depends on the
condition of your tires and the road surface, the angle
at which the curve is banked, and your speed.
While you’re in a curve, speed is the one factor you
can control.
Suppose you’re steering through a sharp curve. Then you
suddenly accelerate. Both control systems -- steering and
acceleration -- have to do their work where the tires meet
the road. Adding the sudden acceleration can demand too
much of those places. You can lose control.
What should you do if this ever happens? Ease up on the
accelerator pedal, steerthe vehicle the way you want it
to go, and slow down.
Speed limit signs near curves warn that you should
adjust your speed.Of course, the posted speeds are
based on good weather and road conditions. Under less
favorable conditions you’ll want to go slower.
Steering in Emergencies
There are times when steering can be more effective
than braking. For example, you come over a hill and
find a truck stopped in your lane, or a car suddenly
pulls out from nowhere, or a child darts out from
between parked cars and stops right in front of you.
You can avoid these problems by braking -- if you
can stop in time. But sometimes you can‘t; there isn’t
room. That’s the time for evasive action -- steering
around the problem.
Your vehicle can perform very well in emergencies like
these. First apply your brakes. (See “Braking in
Emergencies” earlier in this section.) It is better to
remove as much speed as .you can from a possible
collision. Then steeraround the problem, to the left or
right depending on the space available.
If you need to reduce your speed as you approach a
curve, do it before you enter the curve, while your front
wheels are straight ahead.
Try to adjust your speed so you can “drive” through the
curve. Maintain a reasonable, steady speed. Wait to
accelerate until you are out of the curve, and then
accelerate gently into the straightaway.
4-9
Off-Road Recovery
You may find sometimethat your right wheels have
dropped off the edge of a road onto theshoulder while
you’re driving.
OFF-ROAD RECOVERY
/
An emergency like this requires close attention and a
quick decision. If you are holding the steering wheel at
the recommended 9 and 3 o’clock positions, you can
turn it a full 180 degrees very quickly without removing
either hand. But you have to act fast, steer quickly, and
just as quickly straighten the wheel once you have
avoided the object.
The fact that such emergency situations are always
possible is a good reason to practicedefensive driving at
all times and wear safety belts properly.
~
4-10
w
rY/
edge of pawed surface
If the level of the shoulder is only slightly below the
pavement, recovery should be fairly easy. Ease off the
accelerator and then, if there is nothing inthe way, steer
so that your vehiclestraddles the edge of the pavement.
You can turn the steering wheel upto one-quarter turn
until the rightfront tire contacts the pavement edge. Then
turn your steering wheel to go straight down the roadway.
Passing
The driver of a vehicle about to pass another on a
two-lane highway waits for justthe right moment,
accelerates, moves aroundthe vehicle ahead, then goes
back into the right lane again. A simple maneuver?
Not necessarily! Passing another vehicleon a two-lane
highway is a potentially dangerous move, sincethe
passing vehicle occupies the same laneas oncoming
traffic for several seconds.A miscalculation, an error in
judgment, or abrief surrender to frustration or anger
can
suddenly put the passing driver face tof x e with the
worst of all traffic accidents -- the head-on collision.
So here are some tips for passing:
“Drive ahead.” Look down the road, to the sides and
to crossroads for situationsthat might affect your
passing patterns. If you have any doubt whatsoever
about making a successful pass, wait for a better
time.
Watch for traftic signs, pavement markings and lines.
If you can see a sign up ahead that might indicate a
turn or an intersection, delay your pass.A broken
center line usually indicatesit’s all right to pass
(providing the road ahead is clear). Never crossa solid
line on your side of the lane or a double solid line,
even if the road seems empty of approaching traffic.
Do not get too close to the vehicle you want to
pass while you’re awaiting an opportunity. For one
thing, following too closely reduces your area of
vision, especially if you’re following a larger
vehicle. Also, you won’t have adequate space if
the vehicle ahead suddenly slows or stops. Keep
back a reasonable distance.
When it looks like a chance to pass is coming up,
start to accelerate but stay in the right lane and don’t
get too close. Time your move so you will be
increasing speed as the time comes to move into the
other lane. If the way is clear to pass, you will have
a “running start”that more than makes up for the
distance you would lose by dropping back. And if
something happens to cause you to cancel your pass,
you need only slow down and drop back again and
wait for anotheropportunity.
If other cars are lined up to pass a slow vehicle, wait
your turn. But take care that someone isn’t trying to
pass you as you pull out to pass the slow vehicle.
Remember to glance over your shoulder and check
the blind spot.
Check your mirrors, glance over your shoulder and
start your left lane change signal before moving out
of the right lane to pass. When you are farenough
ahead of the passed vehicle to see its front in your
inside mirror, activate your right lane change signal
and move back into the right lane. (Remember that
your right outside mirror is convex. The vehicle you
just passed may seem to be farther away from you
than it really is.)
0
Try not to pass more than one vehicle at a time
on two-lane roads. Reconsider before passing the
next vehicle.
Don’t overtake a slowly moving vehicle too rapidly.
Even though the brake lamps are not flashing, it
may be slowing down or starting to turn.
If you’re being passed, make it easy for the
following driver toget ahead of you. Perhaps you
can ease a little to the right.
Loss of Control
Let’s review what driving experts say about what
happens when the three control systems (brakes, steering
and‘acceleration) don’t have enough friction where the
tires meet the road to do what the driver has asked.
In any emergency, don’t give up. Keep trying to
steer and constantly seek an escape route or area
of less danger.
Skidding
In a skid, a driver can lose control of the vehicle.
Defensive drivers avoid most skids by taking
reasonable care suited to existing conditions, and
by not ‘‘overdriving” those conditions. But skids are
always possible.
The three types of skids correspond to your vehicle’s
three control systems. In the braking skid, your wheels
aren’t rolling. In the steering or cornering skid, too
much speed or steering in a curve causes tires to slip and
lose cornering force. And in the acceleration skid, too
much throttle causes the driving wheels to spin.
A cornering skid and an acceleration skid are best
handled by easing your foot off the accelerator pedal.
A 13
If your vehicle starts to slide, ease your foot off the
accelerator pedal and quickly steer the way you want the
vehicle to go. If you start steering quickly enough, your
vehicle may straighten out. Always be ready for a
second skid if it occurs.
Driving at Night
Of course, traction is reduced when water, snow, ice,
gravel or other material is on the road. For safety, you’ll
want to slow down and adjust your driving to these
conditions. It is important to slow down on slippery
surfaces because stopping distance will be longer and
vehicle control more limited.
While driving on a surface with reduced traction, try
your best to avoid sudden steering, acceleration or
braking (including engine braking by shifting to a
lower gear). Any sudden changes could cause the tires
to slide. You may not realize the surface is slippery
until your vehicle is skidding. Learn to recognize
warning clues -- such as enough water, ice or packed
snow on the road to make a “mirrored surface” -- and
slow down when you have any doubt.
Remember: Any anti-lock brake system (ABS) helps
avoid only the braking skid.
Night driving is more dangerous than day driving.
One reason is that some drivers are likely to be
impaired -- by alcohol or drugs, with night vision
problems, or by fatigue.
4-13
Here are some tips on night driving.
0
Drive defensively.
0
Don’t drink and drive.
0
Adjust your inside rearview mirror to reduce the
glare from headlamps behind you.
0
Since you can’t see as well, you may need to
slow down and keep more space between you
and other vehicles.
0
Slow down, especially on higher speed roads. Your
headlamps can light up only so much road ahead.
0
In remote areas, watch for animals.
0
If you’re tired, pull off the road in a safe place
and rest.
Night Vision
No one can see as well at night as in the daytime. But as
we get older these differences increase. A 50-year-old
driver may require at least twice as much light to see the
same thing at night as a 20-year-old.
What you do in the daytime can also affect your night
vision. For example, if you spend the day in bright
sunshine you are wise to wear sunglasses. Your eyes will
4-14
have less trouble adjusting to night. But if you’re
driving, don’t wear sunglasses at night. They may cut
down on glare from headlamps, but they also make a
lot of things invisible.
You can be temporarily blinded by approaching
headlamps. It can take a second or two, or even several
seconds, for your eyes to readjust to the dark. When you
are faced with severe glare (as from a driver who
doesn’t lower the high beams, or a vehicle with
misaimed headlamps), slow down a little. Avoid staring
directly into the approaching headlamps.
Keep your windshield and all the glass on your vehicle
clean -- inside and out. Glare at night is made much
worse by dirt on the glass. Even the inside of the glass
can build up a film caused by dust. Dirty glass makes
lights dazzle and flash more than clean glass would,
making the pupils of your eyes contract repeatedly.
Remember that your headlamps light up far less of a
roadway when you are in a turn or curve. Keep your
eyes moving; that way, it’s easier to pick out dimly
lighted objects. Just as your headlamps should be
checked regularly for proper aim, so should your eyes
be examined regularly. Some drivers suffer from night
blindness -- the inability to see in dim light -- and aren’t
even aware of it.
hiving in Rain and onWet Roads
your tire-to-road traction isn’t as good as on dry roads.
And, if your tires don’t have much tread left, you’ll get
even less traction. It’s always wise to go slowerand be
cautious if rain starts to fall while you are driving. The
surface may get wet suddenly when your reflexes are
tuned for driving on dry pavement.
if your
The heavier the rain, the harder it is to see. Even
windshield wiper blades are in good shape, aheavy rain
can make it harder to see road signs and traffic signals,
pavement markings, the edge of the road and even
people walking.
It’s wise to keep your wiping equipment in good shape
and keep your windshield washer tank filled with
washer fluid. Replace your windshield wiper inserts
when they show signs of streaking or missing areas on
the windshield, or when strips of rubber start to separate
from the inserts.
Rain and wet roads can mean driving trouble. On a wet
road, you can’t stop, accelerate orturn as well because
4-15
Wet brakes can causeaccidents. They won’t work
well in a quick stop and maycause pulling to one
side. You could lose controlof the vehicle.
of water or
After driving through a large puddle
a car wash, apply your brake pedal lightly until
your brakeswork normally.
Driving too fast through large water puddles or even
going through some car washes can cause problems, too.
The water may affect your brakes. Try to avoid puddles.
But if you can’t, try to slow down before you hit them.
4-16
Hydroplaning
Driving Through Deep Standing Water
Hydroplaning is dangerous. So much water can build up
under your tires that they can actually ride on the water.
This canhappen if the road is wet enough and you’re
going fast enough.When your vehicle is hydroplaning,
it has little or no contact with the road.
I
NOTICE:
If you drive too quickly throughdeep puddles
or standing water, watercan come in through
your engine’sair intake and badly damage your
engine. Never drive through water that
is slightly
lower than the underbody
of your vehicle.If you
can’t avoid deep puddlesor standing water, drive
through them very slowly.
Hydroplaning doesn’t happen often. But it can if your
tires haven’t much tread or if the pressure in one or
more is low. It can happen if a lot of water is standing on
the road. If you can see reflections from trees, telephone
poles or other vehicles, and raindrops “dimple” the
water’s surface, there could be hydroplaning.
Hydroplaning usually happens at higher speeds. There
just isn’t a hard and fast rule about hydroplaning. The
best advice is to slow down when it is raining.
Some Other Rainy Weather Tips
0 Turn on your low-beam headlamps -- not just
your parking lamps -- to help make you more
visible to others.
0
Besides slowing down,allow some extra following
distance. And be especially careful when you pass
another vehicle. Allow yourself more clear room
ahead, and be prepared to have your view restricted
by road spray.
Have good tires with proper tread depth. (See
“Tires” in the Index.)
4-17
City Driving
Here are ways to increase your safety in city driving:
Know the best way to get to where you are
going. Get a city map and plan your trip into an
unknown part of the city just asyou would for a
cross-country trip.
Try to use the freeways that rim and crisscross
most large cities. You’ll save time and energy. (See
the next part, “Freeway Driving.”)
Treat a green light as a warning signal. A traffic
light is there because the corner is busy enough to
need it. When a light turns green, and just before
you start to move, check both ways for vehicles that
have not cleared the intersection or may be running
the red light.
One of the biggest problems with city streets is the
amount of traffic on them. You’ll want to watch out for
what the other drivers are doingand pay attention to
traffic signals.
4-18
Freeway Driving
The most important advice on freeway driving is: Keep
up with traffic and keep to the right. Drive at the same
speed most of the other drivers aredriving. Too-fast or
too-slow driving breaks a smoothtraffic flow. Treat the
left lane on a freeway as a passing lane.
At the entrance, there is usually a ramp that leads to the
freeway. If you have a clear view of the freeway as you
drive along the entrance ramp, you should begin to
check traffic. Try to determine where you expect to
blend with the flow. Try to merge into the gap at close to
the prevailing speed. Switch on your turn signal, check
your mirrors and glance over your shoulder as often as
necessary. Try to blend smoothly with the traffic flow.
Once you are on the freeway, adjust your speed to the
posted limit or to the prevailing rate if it’s slower. Stay
in the right lane unless you want to pass.
Before changing lanes, check your mirrors. Then use
your turn signal.
Mile for mile, freeways (also called thruways, parkways,
expressways, turnpikes or superhighways) are the safest
of all roads. But they have their own special rules.
Just before you leave the lane, glance quickly over
your shoulder to make sure there isn’t another vehicle in
your “blind” spot.
4-19
Once you are moving on the freeway, make certain
you allow a reasonable following distance.Expect to
move slightly slower at night.
When you want to leave the freeway, move to the
proper lane well in advance. If you miss your exit, do
not, under any circumstances, stop and back up. Drive
on to the next exit.
The exit rampcan be curved, sometimes quitesharply.
Is your vehicle ready for a long trip? If you keep it
serviced and maintained, it’s ready to go. If it needs
service, have it done before starting out. Of course,
you’ll find experienced and able service experts in GM
dealers all across North America. They’ll be ready and
willing to help if you need it.
Here are some things you can check before a trip:
0
Windshield Washer Fluid: Is the reservoir full? Are
all windows clean inside and outside?
0
Wiper Blades: Are they in good shape?
0
Fuel, Engine Oil, Other Fluids:Have you checked
all levels?
0
Lamps: Are they all working? Are the lenses clean?
0
Tires: They are vitally important to a safe,
trouble-free trip. Is the tread good enough for
long-distance driving? Are the tires all inflated to the
recommended pressure?
0
Weather Forecasts: What’s the weather outlook
along your route? Should you delay your trip a short
time to avoid a major storm system‘?
0
Maps: Do you have up-to-date maps?
The exit speed is usually posted.
Reduce your speed according to your speedometer, not
to your sense of motion. After driving for any distance
at higher speeds, you may tend to think you are going
slower than you actually are.
Before Leavingon a Long Trip
Make sure you’re ready. Try to be well rested. If you
must start when you’re not fresh -- such as after a day’s
work -- don’t plan to make too many miles that first part
of the journey. Wear comfortable clothingand shoes you
can easily drivein.
4-20
Highway Hypnosis
Hill and Mountain Roads
Is there actually such a condition as “highway
hypnosis”? Or is it just plain falling asleep at the
wheel? Call it highway hypnosis, lack of awareness,
or whatever.
There is something about an easy stretch of road with
the same scenery, along with the hum of the tires on
the road, the drone of the engine, and the rush of the
wind against the vehicle that can make you sleepy.
Don’t let it happen to you! If it does, your vehicle can
leave the road in less than a second, and you could
crash and be injured.
What can you do about highway hypnosis‘?First, be
aware that it can happen.
Then here are some tips:
0
Make sure your vehicle is well ventilated, with a
comfortably cool interior.
Keep your eyes moving. Scan the road ahead and
to the sides. Check your mirrorsand your
instruments frequently.
If you get sleepy, pull off the road into a rest, service
or parking areaand take a nap, get some exercise, or
both. For safety, treat drowsiness on the hinhway as
an emergency.
Driving on steep hills or mountains is different from
driving in flat or rolling terrain.
If you drive regularly in steep country, or if you’re
planning to visit there, here are some tips that can make
your trips safer and more enjoyable.
4-21
0
Keep your vehicle in good shape. Check all fluid
levels and also the brakes, tires, cooling system and
transmission. These parts can work hard on
mountain roads.
rA\
Coasting downhill inNEUTRAL (N) or with the
ignition off is dangerous. Yourbrakes will have to
do all the work of slowing down. They could getso
hot that they wouldn’t work well. You would then
have poorbraking or even none going down a hill.
You could crash. Always haveyour engine running
and your vehicle in gear when you go downhill.
Know how to go down hills. The most important
thing to know is this: let your enginedo some of the
slowing down. Shift to a lower gear when you go
down a steep or long hill.
A CAUTION:
If you don’t shift down, your brakes could getso
hot that they wouldn’t work well. You would then
have poor braking or even none going downa hill.
You could crash. Shift down to let your engine
assist your brakes on a steep downhill slope.
0
0
0
0
4-22
CAUTIO :
Know how to go uphill. You may want to shift down
to a lower gear. The lower gears help coolyour engine
and transmission, and you can climb thehill better.
Stay in your own lane when driving on two-lane
roads in hills or mountains. Don’t swing wide or
cut across the center of the road. Drive at speeds
that let you stay in your own lane.
As you go over the top of a hill, be alert. There could be
something in your lane, likea stalled car or an accident.
You may see highway signs on mountains that warn of
special problems. Examples are long grades, passing or
no-passing zones, a falling rocks area or winding
roads. Be alert to these and take appropriate action.
Winter Driving
Here are sometips for winter driving:
0
Have your vehicle in good shape for winter.
0
You may want to put winter emergency supplies in
your vehicle.
Include an ice scraper, a small
brush or broom, a supply
of windshield washer fluid, a rag, some winter outer
clothing, a small shovel, a flashlight, red
a cloth and a
couple of reflective warning triangles. And, if you will
be driving under severe conditions, include small
a
bag
of sand, a pieceof old carpet or a coupleof burlap bags
to help provide traction. Be sure you properly secure
these items in your vehicle.
Driving on Snow or Ice
Most of the time, those places where your tires meet the
road probably have good traction.
However, if there is snow or ice between your tires and
the road, you can have a very slippery situation. You’ll
have a lot less traction or “grip” and will need to be
very careful.
What’s the worst time for this‘? “Wet ice.” Very cold
snow or ice can be slick and hard to drive on. But wet
ice can be even more trouble because it may offer the
least traction of all. You can get wet ice when it’s about
freezing (32°F; 0°C) and freezing rain begins to fall.
Try to avoid driving on wet ice until salt and sand crews
can get there.
4-23
t
2.
I
Whatever the condition -- smooth ice, packed, blowing
or loose snow -- drive with caution.
If You’re Caught in a Blizzard
Accelerate gently. Try not to breakthe fragile traction. If
you accelerate too fast, the drive wheels will spin and
1 polish the surface under the tires even more.
<
,’
$
%
e
,’
8
,,’
’:
1’
Your anti-lock brakes improve your vehicle’s stability
when you make a hard stop on a slippery road. Even
though you have an anti-lock braking system, you’ll
want to begin stopping sooner than you would on dry
pavement. See “Anti-Lock” in the Index.
Allow greater following distance on any slippery road.
Watch for slippery spots. The road might be fine
until you hit a spot that’s covered with ice. On an
otherwiseclear road, ice patches may appear in
shaded areas where the sun can’t reach: around
clumps of trees, behind buildings or under bridges.
Sometimes the surface of a curve or an overpass may
remain icy when the surrounding roads are clear. If
you see a patch of ice aheadof you, brake before you
are on it.Try not to brake while you’re actually on
the ice, and avoid sudden steering maneuvers,
If you are stopped by heavy snow, you could be in a
serious situation. You should probably stay with your
vehicle unless you know for surethat you are near help
and you can hike through the snow. Here are some
things to do to summon help and keep yourself and your
passengers safe:
0
Turn on your hazard flashers.
0
Tie a red cloth to your vehicle to alert police that
you’ve been stoppedby the snow.
0
Put on extra clothing or wrap a blanket around
you.
If you have no blankets or extra clothing,make body
insulators fromnewspapers, burlap bags, rags,floor
mats -- anything you can wrap around yourself or
tuck under your clothingto keep warm.
I
A CAUTION:
Snow can trap exhaust gases under your vehicle.
This can cause deadly CO (carbonmonoxide) gas
to get inside. CO could overcome you and kill
you. You can’t see it or smell it, so you might not
know it is in your vehicle. Clear away snow from
around the base of your vehicle, especiallyany
that is blocking your exhaust pipe. And check
around again from time to time to be suresnow
doesn’t collect there.
Open a window just a little on the side of the
vehicle that’s away from the wind. This will help
keep CO out.
i
You can run the engine to keepwarm, but be careful.
i
4-25
Run your engine only as long as you must. This saves
fuel. When you run the engine, make it go a little faster
than just idle. Thatis, push the accelerator slightly.
This uses less fuel for the heat that you get and it
keeps the battery (or batteries) charged. You will need
a well-charged battery (or batteries) to restart the
vehicle, and possibly for signaling later on with your
headlamps. Let the heater run for awhile.
If you have a diesel engine, you may have to run it at a
higher speed to get enough heat. Then, shut the engine
off and close the window almost all the way to preserve
the heat. Start the engine again and repeat this only
when you feel really uncomfortable from the cold. But
do it as little as possible. Preserve the fuel as long as you
can. To help keep warm, you can get out of the vehicle
and do some fairly vigorous exercises every half hour or
so until help comes.
4-26
Loading Your Vehicle
The Certificationflirelabel is found on the rear edge
of the driver’s door. The label shows the size of your
original tires and the inflation pressures needed to obtain
the gross weight capacity your vehicle. This is called
GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating). The GVWR
includes the weight of the vehicle, all occupants, fuel
and cargo.
The Certification/Tire label also tells you the maximum
weights for the front and rear axles, called Gross Axle
Weight Rating (GAWR). To fine out theactual loads
on your frontand rear axles, you need to go to a weigh
station and weigh your vehicle. Your dealer can help
you with this. Be sure to spreadout your load equally
on both sides of the centerline.
Never exceed the GVWRfor your vehicle, orthe
GAWR for either the front rear
or axle.
And, if you do have a heavy load, you should spread
it out.
Do not load your vehicle any heavier than
the GVWR, or either themaximum front or
rear GAWR. If you do, parts on your vehicle
can break,or itcan change the way your
vehicle handles. These could cause you to lose
control. Also, overloading can shorten thelife
of your vehicle.
A CAUTION:
1
~
I
Things you put inside your vehicle can strike
and injurepeople in a sudden stopor turn, or
in a crash.
Put things in the cargo area of your vehicle.
Try to spread theweight evenly.
Never stack heavier things, like suitcases,
inside the vehicle so that some of them are
above the tops of the seats.
Don’t leave an unsecured child restraint in
your vehicle.
When you carry something inside the
vehicle, secure it whenever you can.
Don’t leave a seat folded down unless you
need to.
4-27
Towing a Trailer
~
~
NOTICE:
If you don’t use the correctequipment and drive
properly, you can lose control when you pull a
trailer. For example, if the traileris too heavy, the
brakes may not work well or even at all. You
and your passengers could be seriously injured.
Pull a trailer only if you have followed all the
steps in this section. Ask your GM dealer for
advice and information about towing a trailer
with your vehicle.
--
Pulling a trailer improperly can damage your
vehicle and result in costly repairs not covered by
your warranty. To pull a trailer correctly, follow
the advice in this part, andsee your GM dealer
for importantinformation about towing a trailer
with your vehicle.
Your vehicle can tow a trailer. To identify what the
vehicle trailering capacity is for your vehicle, you
should read the information in “Weight of the Trailer’’
that appears later in this section. But trailering is
different than just driving your vehicle by itself.
Trailering means changes in handling, durability and
fuel economy. Successful, safetrailering takes correct
equipment, and it has to be used properly.
That’s the reason for this section. In it are many
time-tested, important trailering tips and safety rules.
Many of these are important for your safety and that of
your passengers. So please read this section carefully
before you pull a trailer.
,4128
If You Do Decide To Pull A Trailer
0
Then, during the first 500 miles (800 km) that you
tow a trailer, don’t drive over 50 mph (80 kmh) and
don’t make startsat full throttle. This helps your
engine and other parts of your vehicle wear in at the
heavier loads.
0
You should use DRIVE (D) (or, as you need to,
a lower gear)when towing a trailer. Operating
your vehicle in DRIVE (D) when towing a trailer
will minimize heat build-up and extendthe life of
your transmission.
If you do, here are some importantpoints:
0
0
0
There are many different laws, including speed limit
restrictions, having to do with trailering. Make sure
your rig will be legal, not only where you live but
also where you’ll be driving. A good source for this
information can be state or provincial police.
Consider using a sway controlif your trailer will
weigh 4,000 lbs. (1 800 kg) or less. You should
always use a sway control if your trailer will weigh
more than 4,000 lbs. ( 1 800 kg). You can ask ahitch
dealer aboutsway controls.
Don’t tow a trailer at all during the first 500 miles
(800 km) your new vehicle is driven. Your engine,
axle or other parts could be damaged.
Three important considerationshave to dowith weight:
the weight of the trailer,
the weight of the trailer tongue
and the weight on your vehicle’s tires.
Weight of the Trailer
How heavy can a trailer safely be?
It depends on how you plan to use your rig. For
example, speed, altitude, road grades, outside
temperature and how much your vehicle is used to pull a
trailer are all important. And, it can also depend on any
special equipment that you have on your vehicle.
The following chart shows how much your trailer can
weigh, based upon vehicle model and options.
4-30
ModelEngineAxleRatioWeight
3.42
G 10000 4.3L
3.73
5 .OL
3.42
5.7L
3.42
3.73
G20000
4.3L
3.42
4.10
5 .OL
3.42
5.7L
3.42
3.73
4.10
6.5L
3.73
4.10
5.7L
G30000
3.73
4.10
6.5L
3.73
4.10
7.4L
3.42
3.73
4.10
Max. Trailer
(lbs.) (kg)
4000
(1816)
(2043)
4500
5000
(2270)
5500
(2497)
(2724)
6000
4000
(1816)
(2270)
5000
5000 (2270)
5500
(2497)
(2724)
6000
7500
(3405)
6500
(295 1)
8000
(3632)
6000
(2724)
7500
(3405)
6500
(295 1 )
8000
(3632)
7000
(3178)
8000
(3632)
10,000 (4540)
Maximum trailer weight is calculated assuming the
driver and one passenger are inthe towing vehicle andit
has all the required trailering equipment. The weight of
additional equipment, passengersand cargo in the
towing vehicle must be must be subtracted from the
above maximum trailer weights.
You can ask your dealer for our
trailering information or
advice, or you can write us at the address listed in your
Warranty and Owner Assistance Information Booklet.
In Canada, write to:
General Motors of Canada Limited
Customer Communication Centre
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, OntarioL 1H 8P7
Weight of the Trailer Tongue
The tongue load (A) of any trailer is an important
weight to measure because it affects the total or gross
weight of your vehicle. The Gross Vehicle Weight
(GVW) includes the curb weight of the vehicle, any
cargo you may carry in it, and the people who will be
riding in the vehicle. And if you will tow a trailer, you
must add the tongue load to the GVW because your
vehicle will be carrying that weight, too. See “Loading
Your Vehicle” in the Index for more information about
your vehicle’s maximum load capacity.
A
B
4-31
If you’re using your platform hitch as aweight-carrying
hitch, the trailer tongue (A) should weigh 10 percent of
the total loaded trailer weight (B). If you’re using your
platform hitch as a weight-distributing hitch, the trailer
tongue (A) should weigh 12 percent of the total loaded
trailer weight (B).
After you’ve loaded your trailer, weigh the trailer and
then the tongue, separately, to see if the weights are
proper. If they aren’t, you may be able to get them right
simply by moving some itemsaround in the trailer.
Hitches
It’s important to have the correct hitch equipment.
Crosswinds, large trucks going by and rough roads are a
few reasons why you’ll need the right hitch. Here are
some rules to follow:
0
The bumpers on your vehicle are not intended for
hitches. Do not attach rental hitches or other
bumper-type hitches to them. Use only a
frame-mounted hitch that does not attach to the
bumper. Do not use a ball hitch, because it could pull
the bumper loose.
0
If you’ll be pulling a trailer that, when loaded, will
weigh more than 4,000 lbs. (1 800 kg), be sure to use
a properly mounted, weight-distributing hitch and
sway control of the proper size. This equipment is
very important for proper vehicle loading and good
handling when you’re driving.
Total Weight on Your Vehicle’s Tires
Be sure your vehicle’s tires are inflated to the limit for
cold tires. You’ll find these numbers on the Certification
label at the rear edge of the driver’sdoor or see “Tire
Loading” in the Index. Then be sure you don’t go over
the GVW limit for yourvehicle, including the weight of
the trailer tongue.
4-32
0
Will you have to make any holes in the body of your
vehicle when you install a trailer hitch?
If you’re using the wiring provided by the
factory-installed hitch, you should not need to make
any holes in the body of your vehicle. However, if
you have an aftermarket hitch installed, :you may
need to make holes in the body.
If you do, then be sure to seal the holes later when
you remove the hitch. If you don’t seal them, deadly
carbon monoxide (CO) from your exhaust can get
into your vehicle(see “Carbon Monoxide” in the
Index). Dirt and water can, too.
Safety Chains
You should always attach chains between your vehicle
and your trailer. Cross the safety chains under the tongue
of the trailer so that the tongue will not drop tothe road
if it becomes separated fromthe hitch. Instructions
about safety chains may be provided by the hitch
manufacturer or by the trailer manufacturer. Follow the
manufacturer’s recommendation for attaching safety
chains and do not attach them to the bumper. Always
leave just enoughslack so you can turn with your rig.
And, never allow safety chains to drag on the ground.
Trailer Brakes
If your trailer weighs more than 1,000 lbs.(450 kg)
loaded, then it needs its own brakes -- and they must be
adequate. Be sure to read and follow the instructionsfor
the trailer brakes so you’ll be able to install, adjust and
maintain them properly.
Driving with a m
.’.er
If you have a rear-most window open and you
pull a trailer with your vehicle, carbon monoxide
(CO) could comeinto your vehicle. You can’t see
or smell CO. It can cause unconsciousness or
death. (See “Engine Exhaust” in the Index.) To
maximize your safety when towinga trailer:
a Have your exhaust system inspected for
leaks, and make necessary repairs before
starting on your trip.
a Keep the rear-most windows closed.
a If exhaust does come into your vehicle
through a window in therear or another
opening, drive with your front, main
heating or cooling system on and with the
fan on any speed. This will bring fresh,
outside air into your vehicle. Do not use
MAX A/C because it only recirculates the
air inside your vehicle. (See“Comfort
Controls” in the Index.)
4-34
Towing a trailer requires a certain amount of experience.
Before setting out for the open road, you’ll want to get
to know your rig. Acquaint yourself with the feel of
handling and braking with the added weight of the
trailer. And always keep in mind that the vehicle you are
driving isnow a good deal longer and not nearly as
responsive as your vehicle is by itself.
Before you start, checkthe trailer hitch and platform
(and attachments), safety chains, electrical connector,
lamps, tires and mirror adjustment. If the trailer has
electric brakes, start your vehicle and trailer moving and
then apply the trailer brake controller by hand to be sure
the brakes are working. This lets you check your
electrical connection at the same time.
During your trip, check occasionally to be sure that the
load is secure, and that the lamps and any trailer brakes
are still working.
Following Distance
Stay at least twice as far behind the vehicle ahead as you
would when driving your vehicle without a trailer. This
can help you avoid situations that require heavy braking
and sudden turns.
Passing
You’ll need more passing distance up ahead when
you’re towing atrailer. And, because you’re a good deal
longer, you’ll need to go much farther beyond the
passed vehicle before you can return to your lane.
Backing Up
Hold the bottom of the steering wheel with one hand.
Then, to movethe trailer to the left, just move that hand
to the left. To move the trailer to the right, move your
hand to the right. Always back up slowly and, if
possible, have someone guideyou.
Making firns
I NOTICE:
Making very sharp turns while trailering could
cause the trailer to come in contact with the
vehicle. Your vehicle couldbe damaged. Avoid
making very sharp turns while trailering.
When you’re turning with a trailer, make wider
turns than normal. Do this so your trailer won’t
strike soft shoulders, curbs,road signs, trees or other
objects. Avoid jerky or suddenmaneuvers. Signal well
in advance.
lhrn Signals When Towing a Trailer
When you tow a trailer, your vehicle has to have extra
wiring and a heavy-duty turn signal flasher (included in
the optional trailering package).
The green arrows on your instrument panel will flash
whenever you signal a turn or lane change.Properly
hooked up, thetrailer lamps will also flash, telling other
drivers you’re about to turn, changelanes or stop.
When towing atrailer, the green arrows on your
instrument panel will flash for turns even if the bulbs on
the trailer are burned out. Thus, you may think drivers
behind you are seeing your signal when they are not. It’s
important to check occasionallyto be sure the trailer
bulbs are still working.
4-35
Driving On Grades
Parking on Hills
Reduce speed and shift to a lower gear before you start
down a long or steep downgrade.If you don’t shift
down, you might have to useyour brakes so much that
they would get hot and no longer work well.
You really should not park your vehicle, with a trailer
attached, on a hill. If something goes wrong, your rig
could start to move. People can be injured, and both
your vehicle and the trailer can be damaged.
On a long uphill grade, shift down and reduce your
speed to around 45 mph (70 k d h ) to reduce the
possibility of engine and transmission overheating.
But if you ever have to park your rig on a hill, here’s
how to do it:
1. Apply your regular brakes, but don’t shift into
PARK (P) yet. Then turn your wheels into the curb
if facing downhill or into traffic if facing uphill.
’
When towing at high altitude on steep uphill grades,
consider the following: Engine coolant will boil at a
lower temperature than at normal altitudes. If you turn
your engine off immediately after towing at high altitude
on steep uphill grades, your vehicle may show signs
similar to engine overheating. To avoid this, let the
engine run while parked (preferablyon level ground)
with the automatic transmission in PARK (P) for a few
minutes before turning the engine off. If you do get the
overheat warning, see “Engine Overheating” in the Index.
4-36
2. Have someone place chocks under the trailer wheels.
3. When the wheel chocks are in place, release the
regular brakes until the chocks absorbthe load.
4. Re-apply the regular brakes. Then apply your
parking brake and then shift to PARK (P).
5. Release the regular brakes.
When You Are Ready to Leave After
Parking on aHill
1. Apply your regular brakes and hold the pedal down
while you:
Start your engine;
Shift into a gear; and
Release the parking brake.
2. Let up on the brake pedal.
3. Drive slowly until the trailer is clear of the chocks.
4. Stop and have someone pick up and store the chocks.
Main mr ce When Trailer Towing
~
~
Your vehicle will need service more oftenwhen you’re
pulling a trailer. See the Maintenance Schedule formore
on this. Things that are especially importantin trailer
operation are automatictransmission fluid (don’t
overfill), engine oil, axle lubricant,belt, cooling system
and brake adjustment. Each of these is covered in this
manual, and the Index will help you find them quickly.
If you’re trailering, it’s a good idea to review these
sections before you start your trip.
Trailer Wiring Harness
The eight-wire harness, if you have one, is stored under
your vehicle along the rear frame crossmember. It is
wrapped and bound with a plastic strap. The harness has
a 30-amp battery feed and no connector, and you should
have a qualified electrical serviceperson wire your
harness for you. Attach the harness to the trailer, then
tape or strap it to your vehicle’s frame rail. Be sure you
leave it loose enough so the wiring doesn’t bend or
break, but not so loose that it drags on the ground.
Store the harness in its original place. Wrap the harness
together and tie it neatly so it won’t be damaged.
The five-wire harness, if you have one, is stored inside
the vehicle at the passenger side rear corner, behind the
jack. This should be wired by a qualifiedelectrical
service person. It must be routed out of your vehicle
between the rear door and the floor, with enough of the
harness left on both sides so that the trailer or the body
won’t pull it.
Store the harness in its original place. Wrap the harness
together and tie it neatly so it won’t be damaged.
Check periodically to see that all hitch nuts and bolts
are tight.
4-37
NOTES
4-38
NOTES
4-39
NOTES
4-40
Section 5 Problems on theRoad
Here you’ll find what to do about some problems that
can occur on the road.
Hazard Warning Flashers
Your hazard warning flashers let you warn others. They
also let police know you have a problem. Your front and
rear turn signal lamps will flash on and off.
But they won’t flash if you’re braking.
Push the button at the top of
the steering column all the
way down to make your
front and rear turn signals
flash on and off.
Your hazard warning flashers work no matter what
position your key is in, and even if the key isn’t in.
5-1
To turn off the flashers, push the button until the first
click and release.
When the hazard warning flashers areon, your turn
signals won’t work.
Other Warning Devices
If you carry reflective triangles, you can use them to
warn others. Set one up at the side of the road about
300 feet (100 m) behind your vehicle.
Jump Starting
If your battery has run down, you may wantto use another
Iehicle and somejumper cables to start your vehicle. But
)lease use the following steps listedto do it safely.
A CAUTJON:
Batteries can hurt you. They can be
dangerous because:
They contain acid that can burn you.
They contain gas that can explode or ignite.
They contain enough electricityto burn you.
If you don’t follow these steps exactly, someor all
of these things can hurt you.
5-2
NOTICE:
Ignoring these steps could result in costly damage
to your vehicle that wouldn’t be covered by
your warranty.
Trying to startyour vehicle by pushing or pulling
it won’t work, and itcould damage your vehicle.
1. Check the other vehicle. It must have a 12-volt
battery with a negative ground system.
NOTICE:
If the othersystem isn’t a 12-volt system with a
negative ground, both vehicles can be damaged.
If you have a diesel engine vehicle with two batteries
(or more) you should know before you begin that,
especially in cold weather, you may not be able to
get enough power from a single battery in another
vehicle to start your diesel engine.
If your vehicle has more than one battery, use the
battery that is under the hood of the vehicle -- this
will reduce the electrical resistance.
2. Get the vehicles close enough so the jumper cables
can reach, but be surethe vehicles aren’t touching
each other. If they are, it could cause a ground
connection you don’t want. You wouldn’t be able to
start your vehicle, and the bad grounding could
damage the electrical systems.
Set the parking brake firmlyon each vehicle. Put an
automatic transmission in PARK (P) or amanual
transmission in NEUTRAL (N).
3. Turn off the ignition on both vehicles. Turn off all
lamps that aren’t needed, and radios. Thiswill avoid
sparks and help save both batteries, and could save
your radio!
NOTICE:
If you leaveyour radioon, it could be badly
damaged. The repairswould not be covered by
your warranty.
4. Open the hoods and locate the batteries. Find
the positive (+) and negative (-) terminals on
each battery.
A CAUTION:
Using a match near a battery cancause battery
gas to explode. People have been hurt doing this,
and some have been blinded. Use a flashlight if
you need more light.
Be sure the battery (or batteries) has
enough
water. You don’t need to add water to theDelco
Freedom@ battery (or batteries)
installed in
every new GM vehicle. But if a battery hasfiller
caps, be sure the right amount
of fluid is there. If
it is low, add water to take careof that first. If
you don’t, explosive gas could be present.
Battery fluid contains acid that can burn you.
Don’t getit on you. If you accidentally get it in
your eyes or on your skin, flush the place with
water and get medical help immediately.
5. Check that the jumpercables don’t have loose or
missing insulation. If they do, you could get a shock.
The vehicles could be damaged,too.
Before you connect thecables, here are somebasic
things you should know. Positive (+) will go to
positive (+) and negative (-) will.go tonegative (-)
or a metal engine part. Don’t connect positive (+) to
negative (-) or you will get a short that would
damage the battery and maybe other parts, too.
-
I /I\ CAUTION:
Fans or other moving engine parts can injure you
6. Connect the red positive (+) cable to the positive (+)
badly. Keep your hands away from moving parts
terminal of the vehicle with the dead battery. Use a
once the engines are running.
remote positive (+) terminal if the vehicle has one.
5-4
7. Don’t let the other end
touch metal. Connect it
to the positive (+)
terminal of the good
battery. Use a remote
positive (+) terminal if
the vehicle has one.
8.
Now connect the black
negative (-) cable to
the good battery’s
negative (-) terminal.
Don’t let the other end touch anything until the
next step.
9. Make your last connection away from the battery,
to the engine block, frame or othermetal parts of
your vehicle.
10. Now start the vehicle with the good battery and run
the engine for a while.
11. Try to start the vehicle with the dead battery.
If it won’t start after a few tries, it probably
needs service.
5-5
12. Remove the cables in reverse order to prevent
electrical shorting. Take care that they don’t touch
each other or any other metal.
I
B
+
Towing Your Vehicle
Try to have yourGM dealer or a professional towing
service tow your vehicle. They can provide the right
equipment and know how to tow
it without damage. See
“Roadside Assistance” in your Index.
If your vehicle has been changed since it was
factory-new, by adding things like fog lamps, aero
skirting, or special tires and wheels, these things could
be damaged during towing.
Before you do anything, turnon the hazard
warning flashers.
When you call, tell the towing service:
That your vehicle has rear wheel drive.
0
0
C . Dead Battery
The make, model and yearof your vehicle.
0
Whether you can move the shift lever for
the transmission.
0
If there was an accident, what was damaged.
A. Engine Block, Frame, Heavy Metal Engine Part
B. Good Battery
,
IA
I
A CAUTION:
CAUTION:
To help avoid injury to you or others:
0 Never let passengers ride in a vehicle that is
being towed.
Never tow faster thansafe or posted speeds.
0 Never tow with damaged parts not
fully secured.
0 Never get under your vehicle after it has
been lifted by the tow truck.
Always use separate safety chains on each
side when towing a vehicle.
I
I
A vehicle can fall from a car carrierif it isn’t
adequately secured. This can cause a collision,
serious personal injury and vehicle damage. The
vehicle should be tightly secured with chains or
steel cables before it is transported.
Don’t use substitutes (ropes, leather straps,
canvas webbing, etc.) that canbe cut by sharp
edges underneath the towed vehicle.
When your vehicle is being towed, have the ignition
key off. The steering wheel should be clamped in a
straight-ahead position, with a clamping device
designed for towing service.Do not use the vehicle’s
steering column lock for this. Thetransmission should
be in NEUTRAL (N) and the parking brake should
be released.
5-7
Front Towing
A towing dolly must be used under the drive wheels
when towingfrom the front.
Tow Limits -- 35 mph (56 km/h), 50 miles (80 km)
NOTICE:
Do not tow with sling-type equipment or the
front bumper system will be damaged. Use
wheel-lift or car-carrier equipment. Additional
ramping may be required for car-carrier
equipment. Use safety chains and wheel straps.
Towing a vehicle over rough surfaces could
damage a vehicle or wheel-lift equipment.
To help avoid damage, install a towing dolly
a,nd raise the vehicle until adequateclearance
is obtained between the ground and/or
wheel-lift equipment.
Rear Towing
NOTICE:
Do not tow the vehicle from therear with
loads approaching rated GVW as theweight
transfer will cause the frontsuspension to
become overloaded.
NOTICE:
Do not tow with the sling-type equipment or the
rear bumperwill be damaged. Use wheel-lift or
car-carrier equipment. Additional ramping may
be required for car-carrier equipment. Use safety
chains and wheel straps.
Towing a vehicle over rough surfaces could
damage a vehicle. To help avoid damage, install a
towing dolly and raise thevehicle until adequate
clearance is obtained between the ground and/or
wheel-lift equipment.
5-9
Engine Overheating
(Gasoline Engine)
You will find a coolant temperature gage on your
vehicle instrument panel. If you have a diesel engine,
you will also find a low coolant light on your
instrument panel.
If your vehicle has a diesel engine, see"Engine
Overheating" in the GM Diesel Engine Supplement.
If Steam Is Coming From Your Engine
---
-
>?.
Steam from an overheated engine can burn you
badly, evenif you just open the hood. Stay away
from the engine if you seeor hearsteam coming
from it. Just turn it off and get everyone away
from the vehicle until itcools down. Wait until
there is no sign of steam or coolant before
opening the hood.
If you keep driving when your engine is
overheated, the liquids in it cancatch fire. You or
others could be badly burned. Stop your engine if
it overheats, and get out of the vehicle until the
engine is cool.
NOTICE:
If your engine catches fire because you keep
driving with no coolant, your vehicle can be
badly damaged. The costly repairs would not be
covered by your warranty.
5-10
If No Steam Is Coming From Your Engine
If you get the overheat warning but see or hear no
steam, the problem may not be too serious. Sometimes
the engine can get a little too hotwhen you:
0
Climb a long hill on a hot day.
0
Stop after high-speed driving.
0
Idle for long periods in traffic.
0
Tow a trailer. See “Driving on Grades” in the Index.
If you get the overheat warning with no sign of steam,
try this for aminute or so:
1. If you have an air conditioner, turn it off.
2. Turn on your heater to full hot at the highest fan
speed and openthe window as necessary.
If you no longer have the overheat warning, you can
drive. Just tobe safe, drive slower forabout 10 minutes.
If the warning doesn’t come back on, you can
drive normally.
If the warning continues, pull over, stop, and park your
vehicle right away.
If there’s still no sign of steam, you can idle the engine
for two or three minutes while you’re parked, to push
the accelerator until the engine speed is about twice as
fast as normal idle speed. Bring the engine speed back to
normal idle speed after two or three minutes. Now see if
the warning stops. But then, if you still have the
warning, turn o f t h e engine and get everyone out qf the
vehicle until it cools down.
You may decide not to lift the hood but to get service
help right away.
3. If you’re in a traffic jam, shift to NEUTRAL (N);
otherwise, shift to the highest gear while
driving -- DRIVE (D).
5-11
Cooling System
If the coolant inside the coolant recovery tank is boiling,
don’t do anything else until it cools down.
When you decide it’s safe to lift the hood, here’s what
you’ll see:
A. Radiator Pressure Cap
B. Coolant Recovery Tank
C. Engine Fan(s)
5-12
The coolant level should be at or above the FULL
COLD mark. If it isn’t, you may have a leak in the
radiator hoses, heater hoses, radiator, water pump or
somewhere else in the cooling system.
A CAUTION:
Heater and radiatorhoses, and otherengine
parts, can be very hot. Don’t touch them. If you
do, you can be burned.
Don’t run theengine if there is a leak. If you run
the engine, it could lose all coolant. That could
cause an engine fire, andyou could be burned.
Get anyleak fixed before you drive thevehicle.
NOTICE:
Engine damage from runningyour engine
without coolant isn’t covered by your warranty.
If there seems to be no leak,start the engine again. See
if the fan speed increases when idle speed is doubled by
pushing the accelerator pedal down. If it doesn’t, your
vehicle needs service. Turn off the engine.
How to Add Coolant to the Coolant
Recovery Tank
If you haven’t found a problem yet, but the coolant level
isn’t at the FULL COLD mark, add a 5060 mixture of
clean water (preferably distilled) and DEX-COOL’”
(orange-colored, silicate-free) antifreezeat the coolant
recovery tank. (See “Engine Coolant”in the Index for
more information.)
Adding only plain water toyour cooling sy,,,m
can be dangerous. Plain water, or some other
liquid like alcohol, can boil before the proper
coolant mix will. Your vehicle’scoolant warning
system is set for the propercoolant mix. With
plain wateror thewrong mix, your engine could
get too hot but you wouldn’t get the overheat
warning. Your engine could catch fire and you or
others could be burned. Use a 50/50 mix of clean
water and DEX=COOL antifreeze.
TM
c
1 1
I NOTICE:
~~
In cold weather, water can freeze and crack the
engine, radiator, heater core and other parts.
Use the recommended coolant and the proper
coolant mix.
A
CAIJTION:
You can be b
ed if you spill coolant on hot
engine parts. Coolant contains ethylene glycol
and itwill burn if the engine parts arehot
enough. Don’t spillcoolant on a hot engine.
When the coolant in the coolant recovery tank is at the
FULL COLD mark, start your vehicle.
If the overheat warning continues, there’s one more
thing you can try. You can add the proper coolant mix
directly to the radiator, but be sure the cooling system is
cool before you do it.
5-14
Steam and scalding liquids froma hot cooling
system can blow out and burn you badly. They
are underpressure, and if you turn the pressure
cap even a little they can come out at high
speed. Neverturn thecap when the cooling
system, including the radiatorpressure cap,is
hot. Wait for the cooling system and radiator
pressure capto cool if you ever have to turn the
pressure cap.
--
--
5-15
How to Add Coolant to the Radiator
2. Then keep turning the pressure cap,but now push
down as you turn it. Removethe pressure cap.
1. You can remove the radiator pressure cap when the
cooling system, including the radiator pressure cap
and upper radiator hose, is no longer hot.Turn the
pressure cap slowly counterclockwise until it first
stops. (Don’t press down while turning the
pressure cap.)
If you hear a hiss, wait for that to stop. A hiss means
there is still some pressure left.
5-16
I
3. Fill the radiator with the proper mix, up to the base
of the fillerneck.
4. Then fill the coolant recoverytank to the FULL
COLD mark.
5-17
I
5. Put the cap back on the coolant recovery tank, but
leave the radiator pressure capoff.
6. Start the engine and let it run until you can feel the
upper radiator hose getting hot. Watch out for the
engine fan.
7. By this time the coolant level inside the radiator
filler neck may be lower. If the level is lower, add
more of the proper mix through the filler neck until
the level reaches the base of the filler neck.
5-18
Engine Fan Noise
Your vehicle has a clutched engine cooling fan. When the
clutch is engaged, the fan spins faster to provide more air
to cool the engine. In most every day driving conditions,
the fan is spinning slower and clutch is not fully engaged.
This improves fuel economy and reduces fan noise.
Under heavy vehicle loading, trailer towing and/or high
outside temperatures, the fan speed increases as the clutch
more fully engages. So you may hear an increase in fan
noise. This is normal and should not be mistaken as the
transmission slipping or making extra shifts. It is merely
the cooling system functioning properly. The fan will
slow down when additional cooling is not required and
the clutch partially disengages.
8. Then replace the pressure cap. At any time during
this procedure if coolant begins to flow out of the
filler neck, reinstall the pressure cap. Be sure the
arrows on the pressure cap line up like this.
You may also hear this Fan noise when you start
the engine. It will go away as the fan clutch
partially disengages.
5-19
If a Tire Goes Flat
Changing a Flat Tire
It’s unusual for a tireto “blow out” while you’re driving,
especially if you maintain your tires properly. If air goes
out of a tire, it’s much more likely to leak out slowly.
But if you should ever have a “blowout,” here are a few
tips about what to expect and what to do:
If a tire goes flat,avoid further tire and wheel damage
by driving slowly to a level place. Turn on your hazard
warning flashers.
If a front tire fails, the flat tire will create a dragthat
pulls the vehicle toward that side. Take your foot off the
accelerator pedal and grip the steering wheel firmly.
Steer tomaintain lane position, and then gently brake to
a stop well out of the traffic lane.
A rear blowout, particularly on a curve, acts much like a
skid and may require the same correction you’d use in a
skid. In any rear blowout, remove your foot from the
accelerator pedal. Get the vehicle under control by
steering the way you want the vehicle to go. It may be
very bumpy and noisy, but you can still steer. Gently
brake to a stop -- well off the road if possible.
If a tire goes flat,the next part shows how to use your
jacking equipment to change a flat tire safely.
5-20
I
Changing a tire can cause an injury. The vehicle
can slip off the jack androll over you or other
people. You and they could be badly injured.
Find a level place to change your tire. To help
prevent the vehicle from moving:
1. Set the parking brakefirmly.
2. Put the shift lever in PARK (P).
3. ”urn off the engine.
To be even more certain thevehicle won’t move,
you can put blocks at the front and rear
of the
tire farthestaway from the one being changed.
That would be the tireon the otherside of the
vehicle, at the opposite end.
Removing the Spare Tire and Tools
The following steps will tell you how to use the jack and
change a tire.
Your spare tire is stored underneath the rear of your
vehicle. You will use the ratchet and extension to lower
the spare tire.
5-21
NOTICE:
Never remove or restorea tire frondto a stowage
position under the vehicle while the vehicle
is
supported bya jack. Always tighten the tire
fully against the underside of the vehicle
when restowing
A flat rear tire reduces clearance to remove the spare
tire. If there is less than 12 inches (30.48 cm) between
the ground and the rear bumper or any trailer hitch, jack
up the vehicle until the flat tireis off the ground.
(See “Removing the Flat Tire” and “Installing the
Spare Tire,’’ Steps 4 through 8, in this section.)
Unless your vehicle has a flatrear tire, do not remove or
restore a tire from/to a stowage position under the
vehicle while the vehicle is supported by a jack.Always
tighten the tire fully against the underside of the vehicle
when restowing.
5-22
If you have a vehicle which was completed from a cab
and chassis, refer to the information from the body
suppliedinstaller.
The spare tire is a full size tire, like the other tires on
your vehicle.
For cargo vans, the jack
is secured in the rear
Remove the retaining wing bolt and lift it off the
mounting bracket. Set the jack and jacking equipment
near the flat tire.
The ratchet has an UP side anda DOWN side.
For passenger vans, the jack is secured on the rear
passenger side floorof the vehicle.
Remove the retaining wing bolt and lift it out of the
mounting bracket. Setthe jack and jacking equipment
near the flat tire.
5-23
inside of the wheel and pull the spare tire out from under
the vehicle.
When the tire has been lowered, tilt the retainer at the
end of the cable and pull it through the wheel opening.
Attach the ratchet, with the DOWN side facing you, to
the extension. The extension has a socket end and a flat
chisel end.
Put the flat end of the extension on an angle through the
hole in the rear door frame, above the bumper. Be sure
the flat end connects into the hoist shaft.
Turn the ratchet counterclockwise to lower the spare tire
to the ground. If you are changing aflat rear tire and the
vehicle is already jacked up, use the jack handle and
extension to hook the cable. Then pull the spare from
beneath the vehicle. If the retainer pulls out, hook the
5-24
I NOTICE:
To help avoid vehicle damage,do not drive
vehicle before the cableis restored.
Jacking Tool Storage
A. Socket
B. Jack Handle
The tools you’ll be using include the jack (A), jack
handle extension (B), jack handle (C), socket (D) and
the ratchet (E).
C. Ratchet
D. Jacking Tool Storage Box
E. Jack Handle Extension
5-25
Removing the Wheel Coversand Locking
Wheel Nuts
2. Loosen the plastic nut caps with the ratchet and
socket and remove them. Make sure the DOWN
side faces you.
1. You will need to take off the wheel n u t caps to reach
your wheel nuts.
5-26
Removing the Flat Tire and Installing the
Spare Tire
3. Remove the center cap.
I . With the DOWN side Facing you, use the ratchet and
socket to loosen a l l the wheel nuts. Don't remove
them yet.
5-27
3. Rotate the ratchet clockwise. That will raise the jack
lift head a little.
2 . The jackhas a bolt on the end. AtLach the socket end
of the extension to the jack bolt.
Attach the ratchet to the extension with the UP side
facing you.
5-28
Front Position
4. Position jack under the
vehicle as shown.
Rear Position
AC
A
UTION:
5. Raise the vehicle by rotating the ratchet clockwise.
Make sure the UP mark faces you. Raise the vehicle
h r enough off the ground so there is enough room
for the spare tire to fit.
Getting undera vehicle when itis jacked up is
dangerous. If the vehicle slipsoff the jack, you
could be badly injuredor killed. Never get under
a vehicle when it is supported onlyby a jack.
5-29
6. Remove all the wheel
nuts, and take off the
flat tire.
7. Remove any rust or dirt
from the wheel bolts,
mounting surfaces and
spare wheel.
A CAUTION:
Rust or dirton the wheel, or on the parts to
which it is fastened, can make thewheel nuts
become looseafter atime. The wheel could come
off and cause an accident. When you change a
wheel, remove any rust or dirtfrom the places
where the wheel attaches to thevehicle. In an
emergency, you can use a cloth or a paper towel
to do this; but be sure to use a scraper or wire
brush later, if you need to, to get all the rustor
dirt off.
I A CAUTION:
Never use oilor grease on studs or nuts. If you
do, the nutsmight come loose. Your wheel could
fall off, causing a serious accident.
I
5-30
I
8. Replace the wheel nuts
with the rounded end of
the nuts toward the
wheel. Tighten each
wheel nut by hand until
the wheel is held against
the hub.
10. Tighten the nuts firmly
in a criss-cross sequence
as shown. Rotate the
wheel wrench
clockwise.
9. Lower the vehicle by rotating the jack handle
counterclockwise. Lowerthe jack completely.
5-31
A CAUTION:
Incorrect wheel nuts orimproperly tightened
wheel nuts can cause the wheel to become loose
and even comeoff. This could lead to anaccident.
Be sure touse the correctwheel nuts. If youhave
to replace them, be sure toget new GM original
equipment wheel nuts.
Stop somewhere as soon as you can and have
the nutstightened with a torque wrench to
122 lb-ft (165 Nom).
5-32
NOTICE:
Improperly tightened wheel nuts can lead to
brake pulsation and rotordamage. To avoid
expensive brake repairs, evenly tighten the wheel
nuts in the propersequence and to the proper
torque specification.
11. Put the wheel cover back on, if you have one.
Remove any wheel blocks.
Remember that the jack, jackingequipment and tire
must be properly stored in their original storage
position before you begin driving again. The next
part will show you how.
Storing a Flat or Spare Tire and Tools
Storing a jack, a tire or other equipment in the
passenger compartmentof the vehicle could
cause injury. In a sudden stop or collision, loose
equipment could strikesomeone. Store all these
in the proper place.
I . Put the tire on the ground at the rear of the vehicle,
with the valve stem pointed down.
2. Pull the retaining bar through the center of the
wheel, making sure it is properly attached.
5-33
3. Pull the wheel toward the rear of the vehicle keep the
cable tight.
5-34
4. Attach the ratchet, with the UP side facing you, to
the extension.
If You’re Stuck: In Sand, Mud,
Ice or Snow
What you don’t want to do when your vehicle is stuck is
to spin your wheels too fast. The method known as
“rocking’’ can help you get out when you’re stuck, but
you must use caution.
5. Put the flat end of the extension on an angle through
the hole in the rear door frame, abovethe bumper.
Turn the ratchet clockwise until the tire is against the
underside of the vehicle.
You will hear two “clicks” when the tire is up all the
way. Try to move the tire with your hands to make
sure it is securely in place.
If you let your tires spin at high speed, they can
explode, and you or others could be injured.
And, the transmission or other partsof the
vehicle can overheat. That could cause an engine
compartment fireor otherdamage. When you’re
stuck, spin thewheels as little as possible. Don’t
spin the wheels above 35 mph (55 km/h) as shown
on the speedometer.
Return the jacking equipment tothe proper location.
Secure the items and replace the jack cover.
L 2t
I NOTICE:
Spinning your wheels can destroy parts of your
vehicle as well as the tires. If you spin the wheels
too fast while shifting your transmission back
and forth, you can destroy your transmission.
~
~
~~
For information about usingtire chains onyour vehicle,
see “Tire Chains” in the Index.
5-36
Rocking your vehicleto get it out:
First, turn your steering wheel left and right. That will
clear the area around your front wheels. Then shift back
and forth between REVERSE (R) and a forward gear,
spinning the wheels as little as possible. Release the
accelerator pedal while you shift, and press lightly on
the accelerator pedal when the transmission is in gear. If
that doesn’t get you out after a few tries, you may need
to be towed out. I f you do need to be towed out, see
“Towing Your Vehicle” in the Index.
Section 6 Service and Appearance Care
Here you will find information about the care of your
vehicle. This section begins with service and fuel
information, and then it shows how to check important
fluid and lubricant levels. There is also technical
information about your vehicle, and a part devoted to its
appearance care.
We hope you’ll want to keep your GM vehicle all GM.
Genuine GM parts have one of these marks:
Service
Your GM dealer knows yourvehicle best and wants you
to be happy with it. We hope you’ll go to your dealer for
all your service needs. You’ll get genuine GM parts and
GM-trained and supported service people.
Doing Your Own Service Work
If you want to do some of your own service work, you’ll
want to get the proper GM Service Manual. It tells you
much more about how to service your vehicle than this
manual can. To order the proper service manual, see
“Service and Owner Publications’’ in the Index.
Your vehicle may have an air bag system. If it does, see
“Servicing Your Air Bag-Equipped Vehicle” in the
Index before attempting to do your own service work.
You should keep a record with all parts receipts and list
the mileage and the date of any service work you
perform. See “MaintenanceRecord” in the Index.
You can be injured and your vehicle could be
damaged if you try todo service work on a
vehicle without knowing enough about it.
Be sure you have sufficient knowledge,
experience, and the proper replacement
parts and tools before you attempt any
vehicle maintenance task.
0 Be sure to use the proper nuts, bolts and
other fasteners. “English” and “metric”
fasteners canbe easily confused.If you use
the wrong fasteners, parts can later break
or fall off. You could be hurt.
6-2
Fuel (Gasoline Engine)
If your vehicle has a diesel engine, see “Diesel Fuel
Requirements and Fuel System” in the Diesel Engine
Supplement. For vehicles with gasoline engines, please
read this.
Use regular unleaded gasoline rated at 87 octane or
higher. At a minimum, it should meet specifications
ASTM D48 14 in the United States and CGSB 3.5-M93
in Canada. Improved gasoline specifications have been
developed by the American Automobile Manufacturers
Association (AAMA) for better vehicle performance
and engine protection. Gasolines meeting the AAMA
specification could provide improved driveability and
emission control system protection compared to
other gasolines.
Be sure the posted octane is at least 87. If the octane is
less than 87, you may get a heavy knocking noise when
you drive. If it’s bad enough, it can damage your engine.
If you’re using fuel rated at 87 octane or higher and you
still hear heavy knocking, your engine needs service.
But don’t worry if you hear a little pinging noise when
you’re accelerating or driving up a hill. That’s normal,
and you don’t have to buy a higher octane fuel to get rid
ofpinging. It’s the heavy, constant knock that means
you have a problem.
If your vehicle is certified to meet California Emission
Standards (indicated on the underhood tune-up label), it
is designed to operate on fuels that meet California
specifications. If such fuels are not available in states
adopting California emissions standards,your vehicle
will operate satisfactorily on fuels meeting federal
specifications, but emission control system performance
may be affected. The malfunction indicator lamp on
your instrument panel may turn on and/or your vehicle
may fail a smog-check test. If this occurs, return to your
authorized GM dealer for diagnosis to determine
the
cause of hilure. In the event it is determined that the
cause of the condition is the type of fuels used, repairs
may not be covered by your warranty.
To provide cleaner air, all gasolines are now required to
contain additives that will help prevent deposits from
forming in your engine and fuel system, allowing your
emission control system to function properly. Therefore,
you should not have to add anything to the fuel. In
addition, gasolines containing oxygenates, suchas ethers
and ethanol, and reformulated gasolines may be
available in your area to help clean the air. General
Motors recommends that you use these gasolines if they
comply with the specifications described earlier.
In Canada, some gasolines contain an octane-enhancing
additive called MMT. If you use such fuels, your
emission control system performance may deteriorate
and the malfunction indicator lamp on your instrument
panel may turn on. If this happens, return to your
authorized GM dealer for service.
Your vehicle was not designedfor fuel that
contains methanol. Don’t use it.
It can corrode
metal parts in your fuel system and
also damage
plastic and rubber parts. That damage wouldn’t
be covered under your warranty.
NOTICE:
6-3
Fuels in Foreign
Countries -- Gasoline Engines
Filling Your Tank
If you plan on driving in another country outside the
United States or Canada, the proper fuel may be hard to
find. Never use leaded gasoline or any other fuel not
recommended in the previous text on fuel. Costly repairs
caused by use of improper fuelwouldn’t be covered by
your warranty.
~
1
j
To check on fuel availability, ask an auto club, or
contact a major oil company that does business in the
country where you’ll be driving.
You can alsowrite us at thefollowing address for
advice. Just tell us where you’re going and give your
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN).
General Motors Overseas Distribution Corporation,
North American Export Sales(NAES)
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
1 C ,U
ION:
Gasoline vapor is highly flammable. It burns
violently, and that can cause very bad injuries.
Don’t smoke if you’re near gasolineor refueling
your vehicle. Keep sparks, flames and smoking
materials away.fromgasoline.
I
I
If you getgasoline on yourself and then
something ignites it, you could be badly burned.
Gasoline can spray out on youif you open the
fuel filler cap too quickly.This spray can happen
if your tank is nearly full, and is more likely in
hot weather. Open the fuel filler cap slowly and
wait for any “hiss” noise to stop. Then unscrew
the capall the way.
While refueling, hang the cap inside the fuel
door.
To take off the cap, turn it slowly to
the left
Be careful not to spill gasoline. Clean gasoline from
painted surfacesas soon as possible. See “Cleaning
the
Outside of Your Vehicle” in the Index.
(counterclockwise).
6-5
When you put the cap back on, turn it to the right until
you hear at least three clicks. Make sureyou fully install
the cap. The diagnosticsystem can determine if the fuel
cap has been left off or improperly installed. This would
allow fuel to evaporate into the atmosphere. See
“Malfunction Indicator Lamp” in the Index.
I NOTICE:
If’you needa new cap, be sure to get the right
type. Your dealer can get one for you. If you get
the wrong type,it may notfit or have proper
venting, and your fuel tank and emissions system
might be damaged.
6-6
I
Checking Things Under theHood
To open the hood, first pull
this handle inside the
vehicle. It is just in front of
the driver’s side door frame
near the floor.
Lift the hood, release the
hood prop from its retainer
and put the hood prop into
the slot in the hood hinge.
The underhood lamp will
automatically come on
and stay on until the hood
is closed.
Then go to the front of the vehicle and release the
secondary hood release.
6-7
When you lift the hood, you’ll see these items:
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
Battery
Coolant Recovery Tank
Engine Oil Dipstick
Engine Oil Fill
Transmission Dipstick
6-8
F.
G.
H.
I.
Air Cleaner
Power Steering Reservoir
Brake Master Cylinder
Windshield Washer Fluid
If your vehicle has a 7.4L engine and air conditioning,
your vehicle will have a auxiliary engine fan in addition
to the belt driven fan.
A CAUTION:
If your vehicle has airconditioning, the auxiliary
engine fan underthe hood can start up and
injure you even whenthe engine is not running.
Keep hands, clothing and tools away from any
underhood electric fan.
Things that burncan get on hot engine parts and
start a fire. These include liquids like gasoline,
oil, coolant, brake fluid, windshield washer and
other fluids, and plastic or rubber. You or others
could be burned. Be careful not to drop orspill
things that will burn onto a hot engine.
Before closing the hood, be sure all the filler caps are
on properly.
Then lift the hood to relieve pressure on the hood prop.
Remove the hood prop from the slot in the hood and
return the prop to its retainer. Then just letthe hood
down and close it firmly.
Noise Control System
The following information relates to compliance with
Federal noise emission standards for vehicles with a
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) of more than
10,000 lbs. (4 536 kg). The Maintenance Schedule
booklet provides information on maintaining the noise
control system to minimize degradation of the noise
emission control system during the life of your vehicle.
The noise control system warranty is given in your
Warranty booklet.
These standards apply only to vehicles sold in the
United States.
6-9
Tampering With Noise Control
System Prohibited
Engine:
Removal or rendering engine speed governor (if so
equipped) inoperative so as to allow engine speed to
exceed manufxturer specifications.
Federal law prohibits the following acts or the
causing thereof
1. The removal or rendering inoperative by any person,
other than for purposes of maintenance, repair or
replacement, of any device orelement of design
incorporated into any new vehicle for the purpose of
noise control, prior to its sale ordelivery to the
ultimate purchaser or while it is in use; or
2. The use of the vehicle after such device or element
of design has been removed or rendered inoperative
by any person.
Among those acts presumed to constitute tampering are
the acts listed below.
Insulation:
0
Removal of noise shields or underhood insulation.
6-10
Fan and Drive:
Removal of fan clutch (if so equipped) or rendering
clutch inoperative.
Removal of fm shroud (if so equipped).
Air Intake:
0
Removal of air cleaner silencer.
0
Reversing air cleaner cover.
Exhaust:
0
Removal of muffler and/or resonator.
Removal of exhaust pipes and exhaust pipe clamps.
Engine Oil (Gasoline Engine)
If your vehicle has a diesel engine, see “EngineOil
(Diesel Engine)” in the Diesel Engine Supplement.
It’s a good idea to check your engine oilevery time you
get fuel. In order to get an accurate reading, the oil must
be warm and the vehicle must be on level ground.
Turn off the engine and give
the oil a few minutes to drain
back into the oil pan. If you
don’t, the oil dipstick might
not show the actual level.
When to Add Oil
If the oil is at or below the ADD mark, then you’ll need to
add some oil. But you must use the right kind. This part
explains what kind of oil to use. For crankcase capacity,
see “Capacities and Specifications” in the Index.
I NOTICE:
Checking Engine Oil
Pull out the dipstick and clean it with a paper towel or
cloth, then push it back in all the way. Remove it again,
keeping the tip down, and check the level.
Don’t add too much oil.If’your engine has so much
oil that the oil level gets above the upper mark that
shows the proper operating range,your engine
could be damaged.
6-11
What Kind of Oil to Use
Oils recommended for your vehicle can be identified by
looking for the “Starburst” symbol. This symbol
indicates that the oil has been certified by the American
Petroleum Institute (API). Do not use any oil which
does not carry this Starburst symbol.
The engineoil filler cap is located between the air
cleaner and engine oil dipstick.
Just fill it enough to put the level somewhere in the
proper operating range. Push the dipstick all the way
back in when you’re through.
6-12
If you change your ownoil,
be sure you use oil that has
the Starburst symbol on the
front of the oil container.
If you have your oil
changed for you, be sure
the oil put into your engine
is American Petroleum
Institute certified for
gasoline engines.
You should also use the proper viscosity oil for your
vehicle, as shown in the following chart:
RECOMMENDED SAE VlSCOSlTV GRADE ENGINE OILS
FOR BEST FUEL ECONOMY AND COLD STARTING, SELECT THE LOWEST
SAE VISCOSITY GRADE OIL FOR THE EXPECTED TEMPERATURE RANGE.
WOK
FOR MIS
SYMBOL
HOT
WEATHER
As shown in the chart, SAE 5W-30 is best for your
vehicle. However, you can use SAE IOW-30 if it’s going
to be 0°F (-18°C) or above. These numbers on an oil
container show its viscosity, or thickness. Do not use
other viscosity oils, such as SAE 20W-50.
I NOTICE:
Use only engine oil with the American Petroleum
Institute Certified For Gasoline
Engines
“Starburst” symbol. Failureto use the
recommended oil can result
in engine damage
not covered by your warranty.
GM Goodwrench@oil meets all the requirements for
your vehicle.
Engine Oil Additives
r
1-30
RED
Don’t add anything to your oil. Your GM dealer is ready
to advise if you think something should be added.
COLD
WEATHER
DO NOTUSESAE 2OW-50 OR ANYOTHER
GRADE OIL NOT RECOMMENDED
6-13
When to Change Engine Oil
What toDo with Used Oil
See if any one of these is true for you:
Did YOU know that used engine oil contains certain
elements that may be unhealthy for yourskin and could
even causecancer? Don’t let used oil stay on your skin
for very long. Clean your skin and nails with soap and
water, or a good hand cleaner. Wash or properly throw
away clothing or rags containing
used engine oil. (See
the manufacturer’s warnings about the use and disposal
of oil products.)
0
Most trips are less than 5 to 10 miles (8 to 16 km).
This is particularly important when outside
temperatures are below freezing.
Most trips include extensive idling (such as frequent
driving in stop-and-go traffic).
Most trips are through dusty areas.
0
You frequently tow a trailer or use a carrier on top of
your vehicle.
The vehicle is used for delivery service, police, taxi
or other commercial application.
Driving under these conditions causes engine oil to
break down sooner. If any one of these istrue for your
vehicle, then you need to change your oil and filter
every 3,000 miles (5 000 km)or 3 months -- whichever
occurs first.
If done of them is true, change the oil and filter every
7,500 miles (12 500 km) or 12 months -- whichever
occurs first. Driving a vehicle with a fully warmed
engine under highway conditions causes engine oil to
break down slower.
6-14
Used oil can be a real threat to theenvironment. If you
change your own oil, be sure todrain all free-flowing oil
from the filter before disposal. Don’t ever dispose of oil
by putting it in the trash, pouring it on the ground, into
sewers, or into streams or bodies of water. Instead,
recycle it by taking it to a place that collects used oil. If
you have a problem properly disposing of your used oil,
ask your dealer, a service station or a local recycling
center for help.
Air Cleaner
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine when to
replace the air filter and crankcase ventilation filter.
See “Scheduled Maintenance Services” in the Index.
I
-\CAUTAN:
Operating theengine with the aircleaner off can
cause you or others to be burned. The air cleaner
not only cleans the air, it stopsflame if the engine
backfires. If it isn’t there, and the engine
backfires, you could be burned. Don’t drive with
it off, and be careful working on the engine with
the air cleaner off.
70 remove the air cleaner nlter:
loosen screw bolt to air induct hose
0 remove the three bolts
remove the full air cleaner housing
unsnap the three clips
Then tilt the top cover up and back to expose the filter
element. Install anew filter element with the folds in the
down position.
See “Normal Replacement Parts” for the proper filter
to use.
I NOTICE:
I
If the air cleaner is off, a backfire can cause a
damaging engine fire. And, dirt can easily get
into your engine, which will damage it. Always
have the air cleaner in place when you’re driving.
6-15
Automatic Transmission Fluid
How to Check
When to Check and Change
.Because this operation can be a little difficult, you
may choose tohave this done at your GM dealer
Service Department.
A good time to check your automatic transmission fluid
level is when the engine oil is changed.
Change both the fluid and filterevery 50,000 miles
(83 000 km) if the vehicle’s GVWR is over 8,600 or
if the vehicle is mainly driven under one or more of
these conditions:
0
In heavy city traffic where the outside temperature
regularly reaches 90°F (32°C) orhigher.
0
In hilly or mountainous terrain.
0
When doing frequent trailer towing.
0
Uses such as found in taxi, police or delivery service.
If your vehicle’s GVWR is not over 8,600 and you do
not use your vehicle under any of these conditions, the
fluid and filterdo not require changing.
If you do it yourself, be sure to follow all the
instructions here, or you could get a falsereading on
the dipstick.
NOTICE:
Too much or too little fluid can damage
your
transmission. Too much can mean that some of
the fluid could comeout and fallon hot engine
parts or exhaust system parts, starting a fire. Be
sure to get an accurate reading if you check your
transmission fluid.
See “Scheduled Maintenance Services” in the Index.
6-16
-
Wait at least 30 minutes before checking the
transmission fluid levelif you have been driving:
When outside temperatures are above 90°F (32°C).
0
At high speed for quite a while.
0
In heavy traffic -- especially in hot weather.
0
While pulling a trailer.
To get the right reading, the fluid should be at normal
operating temperature, whichis 180°F to 200°F
Checking Transmission Fluid Cold
A cold checkis made after the vehicle has been sitting
for eight hours or more with the engine off and is
used only as a reference. Let the engine run at idle for
five minutes if outside temperatures are50°F (10°C) or
more. If it's colder than 50°F ( 10°C), you may have to
idle the engine longer. Should the fluid level be low
during a cold check,you must perform a hot check
before adding fluid. Thiswill give you a more accurate
reading of the fluid level.
(82°C to 93°C).
Checking Transmission FluidHot
Get the vehicle warmed up by driving about 15 miles
(24 km) when outside temperatures are above50°F
(10°C). If it's colder than 50°F (lO"C), drive the
vehicle in DRIVE (D) until the engine temperature
gage moves and then remains steady for 10 minutes.
Then follow thehot check procedures.
Checking the Fluid Hot or Cold
Park your vehicle on a level place. Keep the
engine running.
With the parking brake applied, place the shift lever
in PARK (P).
0
With your foot on the brake pedal, move the shift
lever through each gear range, pausing for about
three seconds in each range. Then, position the shift
lever in PARK (P).
Let the engine run at idle for three minutes or more.
-
6-17
Then, without shuttingoff the engine, follow these steps:
3. Check both sides of the dipstick, and read the lower
level. The fluidlevel must be in the COLD area for a
cold check or in the HOT area or cross-hatched area
for a hot check.
1. Flip the handle up and then pull out the dipstick and
wipe it with a clean rag or paper towel.
2. Push it back in all the way, wait three seconds and
then pull it back out again.
6-18
4. If the fluid level is in the acceptable range, push the
dipstick back in all the way; then flip the handle
down to lock the dipstick in place.
How to Add Fluid
Rear Axle
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine what
kind of transmission fluid to use. See “Recommended
Fluids and Lubricants” in the Index.
When to Check and Change Lubricant
Add fluid only after checking the transmission fluid
HOT. (A COLD check is used only as a reference.) If
the fluid level is low, add only enough of the proper
fluid to bring the level up to the HOT area for ahot
check. It doesn’t take much fluid, generally less than a
pint (0.5 L). Don ’t overjX. We recommend you use only
fluid labeled DEXRON@-111, because fluid with that
label is made especially for your automatic transmission.
Damage caused by fluid other than DEXRON-I11 is not
covered by your new vehicle warranty.
Refer to the Maintenance Scheduleto determine how
often to check the lubricant and when to change it. See
“Scheduled Maintenance Services”in the Index.
How to Check Lubricant
If the level is below the
bottom of the filler plug
hole, you’ll need to add
some lubricant. Add
enough lubricantto raise
the level to the bottom of
the filler plug hole.
After adding fluid, recheck the fluid level as
described under “How to Check.”
0
When the correct fluid level is obtained, push the
dipstick back in all the way; then flip the handle
down to lock the dipstick in place.
What to Use
Refer to the Maintenance Scheduleto determine what
kind of lubricant to use. See “Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants” in the Index.
6-19
Engine Coolant
The cooling system in your vehicle is filled with new
DEX-COOL TM (orange-colored, silicate-free) engine
coolant. Thiscoolant is designed to remain in your
vehicle for 5 years or 100,000 miles ( 166 000 km),
whichever occurs first.
The following explains your cooling system and how to
add coolant when it is low. If you have a problem with
engine overheating, see “Engine Overheating” in
the Index.
A 5060 mixture of water and the proper coolant for
your vehicle will:
0
Give freezing protection down to -34°F (-37°C).
Give boiling protection up to 265 “F ( 129O C).
Protect against rust and corrosion.
0
Help keep the proper engine temperature.
Let the warning lights and gages work as they should.
6-20
NOTICE:
When adding coolant itis important that you use
DEX-COOL (orange-colored, silicate-free)
coolant meeting GM Specification 6277M.
If silicated coolant is added to the system,
premature engine, heater coreor radiator
corrosion may result. In addition, the engine
coolant will require change sooner at
30,000 miles (50 000 km) or 24 months,
whichever occurs first.
TM
--
What toUse
Use a mixture of one-half clean water (preferably
distilled) and one-half DEX-COOLRul (orange-colored,
silicate-free) antifreeze that meets
GM Specification
6277M, which won’t damage aluminum parts. Use
GM Engine Coolant Supplement (sealer)(GM Part
No. 3634621) with any complete coolant change. If you
use this mixture, you don’t needto add anything else.
’/d
CAUTION:
’
Adding only plain water to yourcooling system
can be dangerous. Plain water, or some other
liquid like alcohol, can boil before the proper
coolant mix will. Your vehicle’scoolant warning
system is set for the propercoolant mix. With
plain water or the wrong mix, your engine could
get too hot but you wouldn’t get the overheat
warning. Your engine could catch fire andyou or
others could be burned. Use a 50/50 mix of clean
water and DEX-COOL (orange-colored,
silicate-free) antifreeze.
TM
6-21
NOTICE:
Checking Coolant
If you use an improper coolant mix, your engine
could overheat and be badly damaged. The
repair cost wouldn't be coveredby your
warranty. Too much water in themix can freeze
and crack theengine, radiator, heater core and
other parts.
If you have to add coolant more than four times a year,
have your dealer check your cooling system.
NOTICE:
If you use the propercoolant, you don't have to
add extra inhibitorsor additives which claim to
improve the system. These can be harmful.
6-22
When your engine is cold, the coolant level should be at
FULL COLD, or a little higher.
Adding Coolant
If you need more coolant, add theproper mix ut the
coolant recovery tank.
A CAUTION:
-
,
-
.'.
-
You can be burned if you spill coolant on hot
engine parts. Coolant contains ethylene glycol,
and it will burn if the engine parts arehot
enough. Don't spill coolant on a hot engine.
I
Turning theradiator pressure cap when the
engine and radiator arehot can allow steam
and scalding liquids toblow out and burnyou
badly. With the coolant recovery tank, you will
almost never have to addcoolant at the radiator.
Never turn the radiator pressure cap even a
little when the engine and radiator arehot.
--
0-
L
Add coolant mix at the recovery tank, but be careful not
to spill it.
Radiator PressureCap
The radiator pressure cap must be tightly installed with
the arrows on the cap lined up with the overflow tube on
the radiator filler neck.
I NOTICE:
Your radiator capis a pressure-type cap and
must be tightly installed to prevent coolant loss
and possible engine damage from overheating. Be
sure the arrowson the cap line up with the
overflow tube on the radiator filler neck.
6-23
Thermostat
When to Check Power Steering Fluid
Engine coolant temperature is controlled by a thermostat
in the engine cooling system. The thermostat stops the
flow of coolant through the radiator until the coolant
reaches apreset temperature.
It is not necessary to regularly check power steering
fluid unless you suspect there is a leak in the system or
you hear an unusual noise. A fluid loss in this system
could indicate a problem. Have the system inspected
and repaired.
When you replace your thermostat, an AC@ thermostat
is recommended.
Power SteeringFluid
How To Check Power Steering Fluid
When the engine compartment is cool, unscrew the cap
and ,wipe the dipstick with a clean rag. Replace the cap
and completely tighten it. Then remove the cap again
and look at the fluid level on the dipstick.
The level should be at the FULL COLD mark. If
necessary, add only enough fluid to bring the level up to
the mark.
To prevent brake fluid contamination, never check or fill
the power steering reservoir with the master cylinder
cover off.
What to Use
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine what
kind of fluid to use. See “Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants’’ in the Index. Always use the proper fluid.
Failure to use the proper fluid can cause leaks and
damage hoses and seals.
6-24
Open the cap labeledWASHER FLUID. Add washer
fluid until the tank is full.
Windshield Washer Fluid
What to Use
~
When you need windshield washer fluid, b, S‘ure to re:ad
the manufacturer’s instructions beforeuse. If you will be
operating your vehicle in an area where the temperature
may fall below freezing, use a fluidthat has sufficient
protection against freezing.
I P
Adding Washer Fluid
NOTICE:
0
0
0
0
I
When using concentrated washer fluid,
follow the manufacturer’s instructions for
adding water.
Don’t mix water with ready-to-use washer
fluid. Water cancause the solution to fre,eze
and damage yourwasher fluid tank and
other partsof the washer system. Also,
water doesn’t clean as well as washer fluid.
Fill your washer fluid tank only
three-quarters full when it’s very cold.This
allows for expansion, which coulddamage
the tank if it is completely full.
Don’t use radiator antifreeze in your
windshield washer. It can damage your
washer system and paint.
Brakes
Brake Fluid
I
goes back up. The other reason is that fluid is leaking out
of the brake system. If it is, you should have your brake
system fixed, since a leak means that sooner or later your
brakes won’t work well, or won’t work at all.
So, it isn’t a good idea to “top off’ your brake fluid.
Adding brake fluid won’t correct a leak. If you add fluid
when your linings are worn, then you’ll have too much
fluid when you get new brake linings. You should add
(or remove) brake fluid, as necessary, only when work is
done on the brake hydraulic system.
- Your brake master cylinder reservoir is here. It is filled
with DOT-3 brake fluid.
There are only two reasonswhy the brake fluid level in the
reservoir might go down. The first is that the brake fluid
goes down to an acceptable level during norrnal brake
lining wear. When new linings are put in, the fluid level
6-26
I
If you have too much brake fluid, it can spill on the
engine. The fluidwill burn if the engine is hot
enough. You or others could be burned, and your
vehicle could be damaged. Add brake fluid only
when work is done on the brake hydraulic system.
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine when to
check your brake fluid. See “Periodic Maintenance
Inspections” in the Index.
Checking Brake Fluid
What to Add
When you do need brake fluid, use only DOT-3 brake
fluid -- such as Delco Supreme 1 1 (GM Part
No. 1052535). Use new brake fluid from a sealed
container only, and always clean the brake fluid
reservoir cap before removing it.
@
1 A CAUTION:
With the wrong kindof fluid in your brake
system, your brakes may not work well,
or they
may not even workat all. This could cause a
crash. Always use the proper brake fluid.
You can check the brake fluid without taking off the cap.
Just look at the windows on the brake fluid reservoir.
The fluid levels should be above MIN. If they aren’t,
have your brake system checked to see if there is a leak.
After work is done on the brake hydraulic system,
make sure the levels are aboveMIN and below the top
of each window.
6-27
NOTICE:
a Using the wrong fluid can badly damage
0
brake system parts. For example, just a few
drops of mineral-based oil, such as engine
oil, in your brake system can damage brake
system parts so badly that they’ll have to be
replaced. Don’t let someone put in the
wrong kind of fluid.
If you spill brake fluid on your vehicle’s
painted surfaces, the paintfinish can be
damaged. Be careful not to spill brake fluid
on your vehicle. If you do, washit off
immediately. See“Appearance Care” in
the Index.
Brake Wear
Your vehicle has front disc brakes and rear drum brakes.
Disc brake pads have built-in wear indicators that make a
high-pitched warning sound when thebrake pads are worn
and new pads are needed. The sound may come and go or
be heard all the time your vehicle is moving (except when
you are pushing on the brake pedal firmly).
I
The brake wear warning sound means that
sooner or later your brakes won’t work well.
That could lead to an accident. When you hear
the brake wear warning sound, have your
vehicle serviced.
I NOTICE:
Continuing to drive with worn-out brake pads
could result in costly brake repair.
Some driving conditionsor climates may cause a brake
squeal when the brakes are first applied
or lightly
applied. This doesnot mean something is wrong with
your brakes.
Free movement or Drake calipers and properly torqued
wheel nuts are necessary to help preventbrake
pulsation. When tires are rotated, inspect brake calipers
for movement, brake pads for
wear, and evenly torque
wheel nuts inthe proper sequence to GM specifications.
Your rear drum brakes don’t have wear indicators, butif
you ever hear a rear brake rubbing noise, have the rear
brake linings inspected. Also, the rear brakedrums should
be removed and inspected each time the tires
are removed
for rotation or changing. When you have the front brakes
replaced, have the rear brakes inspected, too.
Brake Pedal Travel
See your dealerif the brakepedal does not return to
normal height, or if there is a rapid increase in pedal
travel. This couldbe a sign of brake trouble.
Brake Adjustment
Every time you make a brake stop, yourdisc brakes
adjust forwear.
If your brake pedal goes down farther than normal, your
rear drum brakes may need adjustment. Adjust them by
backing up and firmly applying the brakes a few times.
Brake linings should always be replaced
as complete
axle sets.
6-29
Replacing Brake System Parts
Battery
The braking system on amodern vehicle is complex. Its
many parts have to be of top quality and work well
together if the vehicle is to have really good braking.
Vehicles we design and test have top-quality GM brake
parts in them, as your vehicle does when it is new. When
you replace parts of your braking system -- for example,
when your brake linings wear down and you have to
have new ones put in -- be sure you get new genuine
GM replacement parts. If you don’t, your brakes may
no longer work properly. For example,if someone
puts in brake linings that are wrong for your vehicle,
the balance between your frontand rear brakes can
change -- for the worse. The braking performance
you’ve come to expectcan change in many other ways if
someone puts in the wrong replacement brake parts.
Every new vehicle has a Delco Freedom@battery. You
never have to add water to one of these. When it’s time
for a new battery, we recommend a Delco Freedom
battery. Get one that has the replacement number shown
on the original battery’s label.
6-30
Vehicle Storage
If you’re not going to drive your vehicle for 25 days
or more, take off the black, negative (-) cable from
the battery. This will help keep your battery from
running down.
A CAUTION:
i
Batteries have acid that can burn you ana gas
that can explode. You can be badly hurt if you
aren’t careful. See “Jump Starting” in the Index
for tips onworking around a battery without
getting hurt.
Halogen Bulbs
’A
I
I
I
CAUTION:
Halogen bulbs have pressurized gas inside and
can burst if you drop or scratch thebulb. You or
others could be injured. Be sure to read and
follow the instructionson the bulbpackage.
Contact your dealerto learn how to prepare your vehicle
for longer storageperiods.
Headlamps
Also, for your audio system, see“Theft-Deterrent
Feature” in the Index.
You have either a sealed beam headlamp system or a
composite system.
Bulb Replacement
Before you replace any bulbs,be sure that all the lamps
are off and the engine isn’t running. See “Replacement
Bulbs” in the index for the proper types of bulbs to use.
6-31
Sealed Beam Headlamps
..
.
2. Unplug the lamp assembly from the connector.
1. Remove the four screws from the headlamp retainer.
Pull the retainer out and set it aside.
6-32
3. Install a new headlamp.
4. Reverse Steps 2 through 3 to reinstall the headlamp.
Composite Headlamps
1. Open the hood.
2. Locate the rear side of each of the headlamps.
5. Install a new bulb. Do not handle the glass part of
the bulb.
6. Reverse Steps 3 through 4 to reinstall the headlamp.
3. Without removing the headlamp assembly itself,
remove the bulb assembly from the back of the
headlamp on the driver's side by turning the bulb
counterclockwise one quarterturn.
4. On the passenger side, turn the bulb clockwise
one-quarter turn. Also, to remove the bulb on the
passenger side, you will need to move the battery.
6-33
Front Parking/Turn Signal Lamps
To replace the front parkingkurn signal lamps:
L
2. Remove the lamp from the grille.
1. Remove the outer screws from the parkinghrn
signal lamp lens assembly. (There are either two or
four screws, depending on your vehicle’s trim level.)
6-34
Sidemarker Lamps
3. Remove the bulb assembly from the back of the lens
and replacethe bulb.
4. Follow Steps 2 and 3 to replace the bulb. Turn the
socket clockwise to replace it in the lens assembly.
1. Remove the screw from the top of the lens.
6-35
Taillamps
1. Open the rear door.
2. Un-clip the bottom of the lamp from the grille.
3. Remove the bulb by twisting it out of the socket.
Turn the bulb to remove it. Install the new bulb.
4. Reverse these steps to reinstall the lamp.
6-36
2. Push the socket protector until you can see
the fasteners.
3. Remove the nutswith a deep socket wrench.
4. Remove the hidden upper nuts.
6-37
5. Lift the lamp as you
rotate it toward the
rear of the vehicle.
6. Turn the sockets to the left to remove.
6-38
Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement
7. With the door open, turn the bulb to the left to
remove it. Install the new bulb.
5. Reverse the above steps to reinstall the lamp.
See “Normal Maintenance ReplacementParts” in the
Index for theproper type of replacement blade.
6-39
Replacement blades come in different types and are
removed in different ways. To remove the type with a
release clip:
4. To install the new wiper insert, slide the notched end
last, into the end with two blade claws. Slide all the
way through the blade claws at the opposite end.
1. To remove the old wiper blades, lift the wiper arm
until it locks into a vertical position.
5. Be sure that the notches are locked by the bottom
claws. Make sure that all other claws are properly
locked on both sides of the insert slots.
2. Press down on the blade assembly pivot locking tab.
Pull down on the blade assembly to release it from
the wiper arm hook.
3. Remove the insert from the blade assembly. The
insert has two notches at one end that are locked by
bottom claws of the blade assembly. At the notched
end, pull the insert from the blade assembly.
6-40
6. Put the blade assembly pivot in the wiper arm
hook. Pull up until the pivot locking tab locks in
the hook slot.
7. Carefully lower the wiper arm and blade assembly
into the windshield.
Tires
We don’t make tires. Your new vehicle comes with
high-quality tires made by a leading tire manufacturer. If
you ever have questions about your tirewarranty and
where to obtain service, see your GM Warranty booklet
for details.
0
0
Poorly maintained and improperly used tires
are dangerous.
Overloading your tires can cause
overheating as a result of too much friction.
You could have an air-out anda serious
accident. See “Loading Your Vehicle” in
the Index.
CAUTION: (Continued)
Underinflated tires pose the same danger as
overloaded tires. The resulting accident
could cause serious injury. Check all tires
frequently to maintain therecommended
pressure. Tire pressure should be checked
when your tires are cold.
Overinflated tires are more likely to be
cut, punctured or broken by a sudden
impact such as when you hit a pothole.
Keep tires at the recommended pressure.
Worn, old tires can cause accidents. If your
tread is badly worn, or if your tires have
been damaged, replace them.
--
0
6-41
Inflation
-- Tire Pressure
The Certificationflire label, which is on the rear edge of
the driver’s door, shows the correct inflation pressures
for your tires when they’re cold. “Cold” means your
vehicle has been sitting forat least threehours or driven
no more than 1 mile (1.6 km).
I NOTICE:
Don’t let anyone tell you that .underinflation or
overinflation is all right. It’s not. If your tires
don’t have enough air junderinflation), you can
get the following:
Too much flexing
Too much heat
0 Tire overloading
Bad wear
Bad handling
Bad fuel economy.
NOTICE: (Continued)
6-42
I NOTICE: (Continued)
If your tires have too much air (overinflation),
you can get the following:
Unusual wear
Bad handling
Rough ride
Needless damage from road hazards.
When to Check
Check your tires once a month or more. Also, check the
tire pressure of the spare tire.
How to Check
Use a good quality pocket-type gage to check tire
pressure. You can’t tell if your tires are properly inflated
simply by looking at them. Radial tires may look
properly inflated even when they’re underinflated.
Be sure to put the valve caps back on the valve stems.
They help prevent leaks by keeping out dirt and moisture.
I
Tire Inspection and Rotation
Tires should be inspected every
6,000 to 8,000 miles
(10 000 to 13 000 km)for any signsof unusual wear. If
unusual wear is present, rotate your tires as soon as
possible and check wheelalignment. Also check for
damaged tires or wheels. See “When It’s Time forNew
Tires” and “Wheel Replacement” laterin this section for
more information.If your vehicle has dual rearwheels,
also see“Dual Tire Operation’’ later in this section.
If your vehiclehas single rear wheels, always use one of
the correct rotation patterns shown herewhen rotating
your tires.
II
The purpose of regular rotation is to achieve more
uniform wear for all tires on the
vehicle: The first
rotation is the most important. See “Scheduled
Maintenance Services”in the Index for scheduled
rotation intervals.
I
FRT
FRT
If your vehicle has dual rear wheels, always use oneof
the correctrotation patterns shown here when rotating
your tires.
When you install dual wheels, be sure the vent holes in
the inner and outer wheels on each side arelined up.
After the tires have been rotated, adjust the frontand
rear inflation pressures as shown on the
Certificationmire label. Makecertain that all wheel nuts
are properly tightened. See “Wheel Nut Torque’’ in
the Index.
6-43
A CAUTION:
Rust or dirton a wheel, or on the parts to which
it is fastened, can makewheel nuts become loose
after a time. The wheel could comeoff and cause
an accident. When you change a wheel, remove
any rust or dirt
from places where the wheel
attaches to thevehicle. In anemergency, you can
use a cloth or a paper towel to do this; but be
sure touse a scraper orwire brush later, if you
off. (See
need to, to get all the rust or dirt
Index.)
“Changing a Flat Tire” in the
I
When It’s Time for New Tires
One way to tell when it’s
time fornew tires is to
check the treadwear
indicators, which will
appear when your tires have
only 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) or
less of tread remaining.
Some commercial truck
tires may not have
treadwear indicators.
You need a new tire if any of the following statements
are true:
0
6-44
You can see the indicators at three or more places
around the tire.
You can see cord or fabric showing through the
tire’s rubber.
The tread or sidewall is cracked, cutor snagged deep
enough to show cord or fabric.
The tire has a bump, bulge or split.
The tire has a puncture, cut or other damage that
can’t be repaired well because of the size orlocation
of the damage.
Dual Tire Operation
Buying New Tires
To find outwhat kind and size of tires you need, look at
When the vehicle is new, or whenever a wheel, wheel
bolt or wheel nut is replaced, check the wheel nut torquethe Certificatioflire label.
after 100, 1,000 and 6,000 miles (160, 1 600and
The tires installed on your
vehicle when it was new had
10 000 km)of driving. For proper torque, see “Wheel
a Tire Performance Criteria Specification(TPC Spec)
,Nut Torque” in the Index.
number on each tire’s sidewall. Whenyou get new tires,
The outer tire on a dual wheel setup generally
wears
faster than the inner tire.Your tires will wear more
evenly and last longerif you rotate the tiresperiodically.
If you’re goingto be doing a lotof driving on
high-crown roads, you can reduce tirewear by adding
5 psi (35 kPa) to the tire pressurein the outer tires.Be
sure toreturn to the recommended pressureswhen no
longer driving under those conditions. See “Changing a
Flat Tire” in the Index for more information.
get ones with that same TPC Specnumber. That way
your vehicle will continue to have tiresthat are designed
to give proper endurance, handling, speed rating,
traction, ride and other things during normal service on
your vehicle. If your tires have an all-seasontread
design, the TPC numberwill be followed by an “MS”
(for mud and snow).
11 you
ever replace your tireswith those not having a
TPC Specnumber, make sure they are the same size,
load range, speed rating and construction type (bias,
bias-belted or radial)as your original tires.
If you operate your vehicle with a tire that
is
badly underinflated, the tire can overheat. An
overheated tire can lose air suddenly or catch
fire. You or others could be injured.
Be sure all
tires (including the spare) are properly inflated.
6-45
' A CAUTION:
I
Mixing tires could cause you to lose control while
driving. If you mix tires of different sizes or types
(radial andbias-belted tires), the vehicle may not
handle properly, and you could havea crash.
Using tires of different sizes mayalso cause
damage to your vehicle. Be sure to use the same
size and type tires on all wheels.
Uniform Tire Quality Grading
The following information relates to the system
developed by the United States National Highway
Traffic Safety Administration, which grades tires by
treadwear, traction and temperature performance. (This
applies only to vehicles sold in the United States.) The
grades are molded on the sidewalls of most passenger
car tires. The Uniform Tire Quality Grading system does
not apply to deep tread, winter-type snow tires,
space-saver or temporary use spare tires, tires with
nominal rim diameters of 10 to 12 inches (25 to 30 cm),
or to some limited-production tires.
While the tires available on General Motors passenger
cars and light trucks may vary with respect to these
grades, they must also conform to Federal safety
requirements and additional General Motors Tire
Performance Criteria (TPC) standards.
6-46
Treadwear
The treadwear gradeis a comparative rating based on
the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled
conditions on a specified governmenttest course. For
example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and a half
(1 1/2) times as well on the government course as a tire
graded 100. The relative performanceof tires depends
upon the actual conditions of their use, however, and
may depart significantly fromthe norm due to variations
in driving habits, service practices and differences in
road characteristics and climate.
--
Traction A, B, C
The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are A, B, and
C, and they represent the tire’s ability to stop on wet
pavement as measured under controlled conditions on
specified government test surfacesof asphalt and concrete.
A tire marked C may have poor traction performance.
Warning: The traction grade assigned to thistire is based
on braking (straightahead) traction tests and ,does not
include cornering (turning) traction.
Temperature
-- A, B, C
The temperature grades areA (the highest), B, and C,
representing the tire’s resistance to the generation of
heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under
controlled conditions ona specified indoorlaboratory
test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the
material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and
excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure.
The grade C corresponds to alevel of performance
which all passenger car tires must meet under the
Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109.
Grades B and A represent higher levels of performance
on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required
by law.
Warning: The temperature grade for this tire is
established for a tire that is properly inflated and not
overloaded. Excessive speed,underinflation, or
excessive loading, eitherseparately or in combination,
can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure.
6-47
Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance
The wheels on your vehicle were aligned and balanced
carefully at the factory to give you the longest tire life
and best overall performance.
In most cases, you will not need to have your wheels
aligned again. However, if you notice unusual tire wear
or your vehicle pulling one way or the other, the
alignment may need to be reset. If you notice your
vehicle vibrating when driving on a smooth road, your
wheels may need to be rebalanced.
Each new wheel should have the same load-carrying
capacity, diameter, width, offset and be mounted the
same way as the one it replaces.
If you need to replace any of your wheels, wheel bolts
or wheel nuts, replace them only with new GM original
equipment parts. This way, you will be sure to have the
right wheel, wheel bolts and wheel nuts for your vehicle.
I
Wheel Replacement
Replace any wheel that is bent, cracked, orbadly rusted
or corroded. If wheel nuts keep coming loose, the wheel,
wheel bolts and wheel nuts should be replaced. If the
wheel leaks air, replace it (except some aluminum
wheels, which can sometimes be repaired). See your
GM dealer if any of these conditionsexist.
Your dealer will know the kind of wheel you need.
6-48
~
A CAUTION:-
-
Using the wrong replacement wheels, wheel bolts
or wheel nutson your vehicle can be dangerous.
It could affect the braking and. handling of your
vehicle, make your tires loseair and make you
lose control.You could have a collision in which
you or others could be injured. Always use the
correct wheel, wheel bolts and wheel nuts
for replacement.
Used Replacement Wheels
NOTICE:
The wrong wheel can also cause problems
with
bearing life, brake cooling, speedometer or
odometer calibration, headlampaim, bumper
height, vehicle ground clearance and tireor tire
chain clearance to the
body and chassis.
Whenever a wheel,wheel bolt or wheel nut is replaced
on a dualwheel setup, checkthe wheel nut torque after
100, 1,000 and 6,000 miles (160, 1 600and 10 000 km)
of driving. For proper torque, see “Wheel
Nut Torque”
in the Index.
Putting aused wheel on yourvehicle is
dangerous. You can’t know how it’s been usedor
how many miles it’sbeen driven. It could fail
suddenly and cause an accident. If you have to
replace a wheel, use a new GM original
equipment wheel.
See “Changing aFlat Tire” in the Index for
more information.
6-49
Never use these to clean your vehicle:
Tire Chains
~~
NOTICE:
0
Gasoline
0
Benzene
Naphtha
Carbon Tetrachloride
0
Use tire chains only where legal
and only when you
must. Use chains that are the proper size for your
tires. Install themon the tires of the rear axle.
Tighten them as tightly as possible with the ends
securely fastened. Drive slowlyand follow the chain
manufacturer’s instructions.If you can hear the
chains contactingyour vehicle, stop and retighten
them. If the contact continues,slow down until it
stops. Drivingtoo fast or spinning thewheels with
chains onwill damage your vehicle.
Appearance Care
Remember, cleaning products can be hazardous. Some
are toxic. Others can burst into flame if you strike a
match or getthem on a hot part of the vehicle. Some are
dangerous if you breathe their fumes in a closed space.
When you use anything from a containerto clean your
vehicle, be sure to follow the manufacturer’s warnings
and instructions. And always open your doors or
windows when you’re cleaning the inside.
6-50
0
0
Acetone
Paint Thinner
0
Turpentine
Lacquer Thinner
0
Nail Polish Remover
0
They can all be hazardous -- some more than
others -- and they can all damage your vehicle, too.
Don’t use any of these unless this manual says you can.
In many uses, these will damage your vehicle:
0
0
0
0
Alcohol
Laundry Soap
Bleach
Reducing Agents
Cleaning theInside of Your Vehicle
Using Foam-Type Cleaner on Fabric
Use a vacuum cleaner often
to get rid of dust and loose
dirt. Wipe vinyl or leather with a clean, damp cloth.
1. Vacuum and brush the area to removeany
loose dirt.
Your GM dealer has twoGM cleaners, a solvent-type
spot lifter and a foam-type powdered
cleaner. They will
clean normal spots and stainsvery well. Do not use
them on vinyl or leather.
2. Always clean awhole trim panel or section.
Mask surrounding trim along stitch or welt lines.
Here are some cleaningtips:
4. Use suds only and apply with a clean sponge.
3. Mix Multi-Purpose Powdered Cleaner following
the directions on the container label.
Always read the instructions on the cleaner label.
5. Don’t saturate the material.
Clean up stains as soon as you can -- before they set.
6 . Don’t rub it roughly.
0
Use a clean cloth or sponge, and change to a clean area
often. A soft brush may be used if stainsare stubborn.
7. As soon as you’ve cleaned the section, use a
sponge to remove the suds.
0
Use solvent-type cleaners in a well-ventilated area
only. If you use them, don’t saturate the stained area.
8. Rinse the section with a clean, wet sponge.
0
If a ring forms after spot cleaning, clean the entire
area immediately or it will set.
0
9. Wipe off what’s left with a slightly damp paper
towel or cloth.
10. Then dry it immediately with a blow dryer.
11. Wipe with a clean cloth.
6-51
Using Solvent-’Qpe Cleaner on Fabric
Special CleaningProblems
First, see if you have to use solvent-type cleaner at all.
Some spotsand stains will clean off better with just
water and mild soap.
Greasy or Oily Stains
If you need to use a solvent:
Gently scrape excess soil from the trim material with
a clean, dull knife or scraper. Use very little cleaner,
light pressure and clean cloths(preferably
cheesecloth). Cleaning should start at the outside of
the stain, “feathering” toward the center. Keep
changing to a clean sectionof the cloth.
When you clean a stain from fabric, immediately
dry the area with a blow dryer to help prevent a
cleaning ring.
Fabric Protection
Your GM has upholstery and carpet that has been treated
with Scotchgard” Fabric Protector, a 3M product. It
protects fabrics by repelling oil and water, which are the
carriers of most stains. Even with this protection, you
still need to clean your upholstery and carpet often to
keep it looking new.
Further information on cleaning is available by calling
1-800-433-3296 (in Minnesota, 1-800-642-6 167).
6-52
Stains caused by grease, oil, butter, margarine, shoe
polish, coffeewith cream, chewing gum, cosmetic
creams, vegetable oils, wax crayon, tar and asphalt can
be removed as follows:
1. Carefully scrape off excess stain.
2. Follow the solvent-type instructions described earlier.
3. Shoe polish, wax crayon, tar and asphalt will stain if
left on a vehicle’s seat fabric. They should be removed
as soon as possible. Be careful, because the cleaner
will dissolve them and may cause themto spread.
Non-Greasy Stains
Cleaning Vinyl
Stains caused by catsup, coffee (black), egg, fruit, fruit
juice, milk, soft drinks, wine, vomit, urine and blood can
be removed as follows:
Use warm water and a clean cloth.
0
1. Carefully scrape off excess stain, then sponge the
soiled area with cool water.
2. If a stain remains, follow the foam-type instructions
described earlier.
3. If an odor lingers after cleaningvomit or urine, treat
the area with a waterhaking soda solution:
1 teaspoon ( 5 ml) of baking soda to 1 cup (250 ml)
of lukewarm water.
Things like tar, asphalt and shoe polish will stain if
you don’t get them off quickly. Use a clean cloth and
a GM VinyULeather Cleaner or equivalentproduct.
Cleaning Leather
Use a soft cloth with lukewarm water and a mild soap or
saddle soap.
0
For stubborn stains, use a GM VinyVLeather Cleaner
or equivalent product.
0
Never use oils, varnishes, solvent-based or abrasive
cleaners, furniturepolish or shoe polish on leather.
0
Soiled leather should be cleaned immediately. If dirt is
allowed to work into the finish, it can harm the leather.
4. If needed, clean lightly with solvent-type cleaner.
Combination Stains
Stains caused by candy, ice cream, mayonnaise, chili
sauce and unknown stainscan be removed as follows:
0
Carefully scrape off excess stain, then clean with
cool water and allow todry.
0
If a stain remains, clean it with solvent-type cleaner.
Rub with a clean, damp cloth to remove dirt. You
may have to do it more than once.
Cleaning theTop of the Instrument Panel
Glass
Use only mild soap and water to clean the top surfaces Glass should be cleaned often.
GM Glass Cleaner
'of the instrument panel. Sprays containing silicones or (GM Part No. 1050427) or a liquid household glass
waxes may cause annoying reflections in the windshield cleaner will remove normal tobacco smoke and
and even make it difficult to see through the windshield dust films.
under certain conditions.
Don't use abrasive cleaners on glass, because they may
cause scratches. Avoid placing decals on the inside rear
Care of Safety Belts
window, since they may have to be scraped off later.
If
Keep belts clean and dry.
abrasive cleanersare used on the inside of the rear
window, an electric defogger element may be damaged.
Any temporary license should not be attached across the
CAUTION:
defogger grid.
IA
Do not bleach or dye safety belts.
If you do, it
~
~
1
may severely weaken them.In a crash, they
might not be able to provide adequate protection.
Clean safety belts only with mild soap and
lukewarm water.
6-54
Cleaning the Outsideof the
Windshield and Wiper Blades
If the windshield is not clear after using thewindshield
washer, or if the wiper blade chatterswhen running, wax
or other material may be on the blade or windshield.
Clean the outside of the windshield with GM
Windshield Cleaner, Bon-Ami Powder@(GM Part
No. 105001 1). The windshield is clean
if beads do not
form when you rinse it with water.
Clean the blade by wiping vigorously with a cloth
soaked in full-strength windshield washer solvent. Then
rinse the bladewith water.
Wiper blades should be checked on a regular basis and
replaced when worn.
Weatherstrips
Silicone grease on weatherstrips will make them last
longer, seal better, and not stick or squeak. Apply silicone
grease with a clean cloth at least every six months.
During very cold, damp weather more frequent
application may be required. (See “Recommended
Fluids and Lubricants” in the Index.)
Cleaning the Outsideof Your Vehicle
The paint finish on your vehicle provides beauty, depth
of color, gloss retention and durability.
Washing Your Vehicle
The best way to preserve your vehicle’s finish isto keep it
clean by washing it often with lukewarm or cold water.
Don’t wash your vehicle in the direct raysof the sun.
Don’t use strong soaps or chemical detergents. Use
liquid hand, dish or car washing (mild detergent) soaps.
Don’t use cleaning agentsthat are petroleum based, or
that contain acid or abrasives. All cleaning agents
should be flushed promptly and not allowed to dry on
the surface, or they could stain. Dry the finish with a
soft, clean chamois ora 100% cotton towel toavoid
surface scratchesand water spotting.
High pressure vehicle washes may cause water to enter
your vehicle.
6-55
Occasional waxing or mild polishing of your vehicle by
hand may be necessary to remove residue from the paint
finish. You can get GM-approved cleaning products
from your dealer. (See “Appearance Care and Materials”
in the Index.)
Foreign materials such as calcium chloride and other
salts, ice melting agents, road oil and tar, tree sap, bird
droppings, chemicals from industrial chimneys, etc.,can
damage your vehicle’s’finishif they remain on painted
surfaces. Wash the vehicle as soon as possible. If
necessary, use non-abrasive cleaners that are marked
safe forpainted surfaces to remove foreign matter.
Your GM manufactured vehicle may have a
“basecoat/clearcoat” paint finish. The clearcoat gives
more depth and gloss to the colored basecoat. Always
use waxes and polishes that are non-abrasive and made
for a basecoat/clearcoat paint finish.
Exterior painted surfaces are subject to aging, weather
and chemical fallout that can take their toll over a period
of years. You can help to keep the paint finish looking
new by keeping your vehicle garaged or covered
whenever possible.
I NOTICE:
Protecting Exterior Bright Metal Parts
Finish Care
Machine compoundingor aggressive polishing on
a basecoat/clearcoat paint finish may dull the
finish or leave swirl marks.
6-56
Bright metal parts should be cleaned regularly to keep
their luster. Washing with water is all that is usually
needed. However, you may use GM Chrome Polish on
chrome or stainless steel trim, if necessary.
Use special care with aluminum trim. To avoid
damaging protective trim, never use auto or chrome
polish, steam or caustic soap to clean aluminum. A
coating of wax, rubbed to high polish, is recommended
for all bright metal parts.
Alur-inum Wheels(If So Equipped)
Sheet Metal Damage
Keep your wheels clean using a soft clean cloth with
mild soap and water. Rinse with clean water. After
rinsing thoroughly, dry with a soft clean towel. A wax
may then be applied.
The surface of these wheels is similar to the painted
surface of your vehicle. Don’t use strong soaps,
chemicals, abrasive polishes, abrasive cleanersor
abrasive cleaning brushes on them because you could
damage the surface.
Don’t take your vehicle through an automatic vehicle wash
that has silicon carbide tire cleaning brushes. These
brushes can also damage the surfaceof these wheels.
If your vehicle is damaged and requires sheet metal
repair or replacement, make sure the body repair shop
applies anti-corrosion material to the parts repaired or
replaced to restore corrosion protection.
Tires
Finish Damage
Any stone chips, fracturesor deep scratchesin the finish
should be repaired right away. Bare metal will corrode
quickly and may develop into a majorrepair expense.
Minor chips and scratches canbe repaired with touch-up
materials available from your dealeror other service
outlets. Larger areas of finish damage can be corrected
in your dealer’s body and paint shop.
To clean your tires,use a stiff brush with a tire cleaner.
I NOTICE:
When applying a tire dressingalways take careto
wipe off any oversprayor splash from all painted
surfaces on the body or wheels of the vehicle.
Petroleum-based products maydamage the
paint finish.
6-57
Underbody Maintenance
Chemical Paint Spotting
Chemicals used for ice and snow removal and dust control
can collect on the underbody.If these are not removed,
accelerated corrosion (rust) can occuron the underbody
parts such as fuel lines, frame, floor pan and exhaust
system even though they have corrosion protection.
Some weather and atmospheric conditions can createa
chemical fallout. Airborne pollutants can fall upon and
attack painted surfaces on your vehicle. This damage
can take two forms: blotchy, ringlet-shaped
discolorations, and small irregular dark spots etched
into the paint surface.
At least every spring, flush these materials from the
underbody with plain water. Clean any areas where mud
and other debriscan collect. Dirt packed in closed areas
of the frame should be loosened before being flushed.
Your dealer oran underbody vehicle washing system
can do this for you.
Although no defect in the paint job causes this, GM will
repair, at no charge to the owner, the surfaces of new
vehicles damaged by this fallout condition within
12 months or 12,000 miles (20 000 km) of purchase,
whichever occurs first.
This applies only to materials manufactured and sold by
General Motors. Bodies, body conversions or equipment
not made or sold by General Motors arenot covered.
6-58
Appearance Care Materials Chart
6-59
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
Service Parts IdentificationLabel
You’ll find this label on the front passenger door frame.
It’s very helpful if you ever need to order parts. On this
label is:
I!E I
SAMPLE4UXTM072675
I I
II
your VIN,
the model designation,
paint information, and
0
This is the legal identifier for your vehicle. It appears on
a plate in the front corner of the instrument panel, on the
driver’s side. You can see it if you look through the
windshield from outside your vehicle. The VIN also
appears on the Vehicle Certification and Service Parts
labels and the certificates of title and registration.
Engine Identification
The eighth character in your VIN is the engine code.
This code will help you identify your engine,
specifications and replacement parts.
6-60
a list of all production options and special
equipment.
Be sure that this label is not removed from the vehicle.
Electrical System
Headlamp Wiring
Add-on Electrical Equipment
The headlamp wiring is protected by a circuit breaker in
the lamp switch.An electrical overload will cause the
lamps to flickeron and off, or in some cases to remain
off. If this happens, have your headlamp wiring checked
right away.
NOTICE:
Don’t add anything electrical to your vehicle unless
you check with your dealer first. Some electrical
equipment can damage your vehicle and the
damage wouldn’t be covered by your warranty.
Some add-on electrical equipment can keep other
components from working as they should.
Your vehicle has an air bag system. Before attempting to
add anything electricalto your vehicle, see “Servicing
Your Air Bag-Equipped Vehicle” in the Index.
Windshield Wiper Fuses
The windshield wiper motor is protected by a circuit
breaker and a fuse. If the motor overheats due to heavy
snow, etc., the wiper will stop until the motor cools.
Although the circuit is protected from electrical
overload, overload dueto heavy snow, etc., may cause
wiper linkage damage. Always clearice and heavy snow
from the the windshield before using the windshield
wipers. If the overload is caused by some electrical
problem and not snow, etc., be sure toget it fixed.
Power Windows and Other Power Options
Circuit breakers in the fuse panel protect the power
windows and other power accessories. When the current
load is too heavy, the circuit breaker opens and closes.
This protects the circuit until the current load returns to
normal or the problem is fixed.
6-61
Instrument Panel FuseBlock
~
The fuseblock access door
is on the driver’s side of the
instrument panel below the
hood release lever.
feature of your vehicle that you can get along
without -- like the radio or cigarettelighter -- and use
its fuse, if it is of the value you need. Replace it as soon
as you can. See “Fuses and Circuit Breakers” in the
Index for more information.
FUSE BLOCK INFORMATION
(u
30A
hD
You can remove fuses with a fuseextractor. The fuse
extractor is mounted to the fuseblock access door.
To remove fusesif you don’t have a fuseextractor, hold
the end of the fuse between your thumb and index finger
and pull straight out.
Be sureto use the correct fuse.If you ever have a
problem on the road and don’t have aspare fuse, you
can “borrow” one of the correct value. Just pick some
6-62
E F ~
d
1
;
:1 a
20A
10A
F D I O q
$2
9
25A
15990609
CIRCUITS PROTECTED
POSITION
NAME
1.
STOP
Stop/CHMSL, Stoplamps
2.
HTD MIR
Electric Heated Mirrors
3.
CTSY
Courtesy Lamps, Dome/RDG Lamps, Vanity Mirrors, Power Mirrors
4
GAUGES
IP Cluster, DRL Relay, DRL Module, HDLP Switch, Keyless Entry
Illumination, Low CoolantModule, CHIME Module, DRAB Module
5.
Hazard
Hazard LampsKHIME Module
6.
CRUISE
Cruise Control
7.
PWR AUX
Auxiliary Power Outlet, ALDL
8.
Crank
9.
PARK LPS
License Plate Lamp, Parking Lamps, Taillamps,Front Sidemarkers,
Glove Box Ashtray
10.
AIR BAGS
SDM
11.
WIPER
Wiper Motor, Washer Pump
12.
HTR-A/C
N C , A/C Blower, High Blower Relay, HTD Mirror
13.
CIG LTR
Power Amp, Cigarette Lighter, Door Lock
Relay
14.
ILLUM
LP Cluster, HVAC Controls, RR HVAC Controls, IP Switches, Radio
Illumination, Door Switch Illumination
15.
DRL
DRL Relay
6-63
POSITION
16.
NAME
TURN B/U
CIRCUITS PROTECTED
Front Turn, RR Turn, Back-up Lamps, BTSI Solenoid
17.
RADIO- 1
Radio (Ign, Accy)
18.
BRAKE
4WAL PCM, ABS, Cruise Control
19.
RADIO-B
Radio (Battery), Power Antenna
20.
TRANS
PRNDL, Automatic Transmission
21.
RR FOG
Rear Window Defog
22.
Not Used
23.
Not Used
24.
RR HVAC
RR HVAC Controls, HIGH, MED, LOW Relays
A.7-
PWR ACCY
Power Door Lock, Six-Way Power Seat, Keyless Entry
Illumination Module
€3.7
PWR WDO
Power Windows
?Circuit Breaker
Do not use fuses of higher amperage than those recommended above. Fuse amperage levels are also imprinted on the
fuse panel under the dash.
6-64
Capacities and Specifications
Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts
Replacement part numbers listed in this section are based on the latest information available at the time of printing,
and are subject to change.If a part listed in this manual is not the same as the part used in your vehicle when it was
built, or if you have any questions, please contactyour GM truck dealer.
These specifications are for informationonly. If you have any questions, see the service manual for the chassis or
refer to the body manufacturer’s publications.
Engine Identification-- Gasoline Engines
Engine
“VORTEC” 4300
“VORTEC” 5000
V6
V8
M
SFI
Type
VIN Code
Fuel System
w
SFI’
Sequential Central Port Fuel Injection
“VORTEC” 5700
V8
R
SFI’
“VORTEC” 7400
V8
J
SFI~
2Sequential Multi-Port Fuel Injection
Wheel Nut Torque
MODEL
All
TORQUE
122 ft-lb ( 165 N-m)
L LC
Cooling System Capacity
ENGINE
“VORTEC” 4300
“VORTEC” 5000
“VORTEC” 5700
“VORTEC” 7400
W
M
R
J
QTY Without Rear Heater*
11 quarts ( 10.4 L)
17 quarts ( 16 L)
17 quarts ( 16 L)
23 quarts (2 1.8 L)
QTY With Rear Heater*
14 quarts(13.2 L)
20 quarts (18.9 L)
20 quarts ( 18.9 L)
26 quarts (24.6 L)
After refill,the level MUST be checked as outlinedunder “Engine Cooling System”in Section 5.
*All quantities are approximate.
Crankcase Capacity
ENGINE
VIN
Quantity With Filter
“VORTEC” 4300
W
4.5 quarts (4.3 L)
“VORTEC” 5000
M
5 quarts (4.8 L)
“VORTEC” 5700
R
5 quarts (4.8 L)
“VORTEC” 7400
J
7 quarts (6.5 L)
All quantities are approximate.
After refill, the level MUST be checked as outlined under “Engine Oil And Filter Recommendations” in Section 5.
*Add an additional quart ( 1 L) for RPO 521 and RPO KL5 Models.
Fuel Tank Capacity
QUANTITY
TYPE
3 1 gallons (1 17.3 L)
Standard Tank
Cutaway Standard Tank
35 gallons (132 L)
Cutaway Optional Tank
55 gallons (208.2 L)
All quantities are approximate.
Normal Replacement Parts
00
“VORTEC”
Engine
VIN
Oil Filter
Air Cleaner
Filter*
lve
PCV
Spark Plugs
Fuel Filter
Cap Radiator
w
PF52
A9 17C
CV789C
4 1-932
GF48 1
VORTEC” 5000
M
PF1218
A9 17C
cv774c
“VORTEC” 5700
R
PF1218
A9 17C
cv774c
“VORTEC” 7400
J
PF1218
A917C
cv774c
4 1-932
GF48 1
RC36
4 1-932
4 1-932
GF48 1
RC36
GF48 1
RC36
*For severe dusty conditions, use AC Air Filter, Part No. 1236C.
6-67
Air Conditioning Refrigerants
Not all air conditioning refrigerants are the same.
If the air conditioningsys&m in your vehicle needs refrigerant, be
sure the proper refrigerant is used. If you’re
not sure, ask yourGM dealer.
u
TYPE
Refrigerant
R- 134a
QTY Front
Only
3.00 lbs.
(1.36 kg)
QTY Front and
Rear
4.875 lbs.
(2.21 kg)
Lamp and Bulb Data
LAMP OR BULB
HEADLAMPS
2 Headlamp System (Sealed BeamSystem)
Low/High Beam
4 Headlamp System (Composite Headlamp System)
Low/High Beam
High Beam
TRADE NO.
POWER RATING
AT 12.8V, WATTS
H6054
35/65
2
6052
9005
51
60
2
2
LAMP ORBULB
EXTERIOR
Front Sidemarker Lamp
Front Park and Turn Lamp
Rear Parking Lamp
Rear Stop and Turn Lamp
Back-up Lamp
Back-up Lamp
Rear Park, Stopand Turn Lamp
CHMSL
License Plate Lamp
Underhood Lamp
Reel Lamp
TRADE NO.
194
2357NA
3057
3057
2
4
3156
1156
1157
92 1
I94
232
232
6-69
LAMP OR BULB
INTERIOR
Dome Lamps
Reading Lamps
IP Courtesy Lamp
Stepwell Lamp
instrument Panel Compartment Lamp
Ashtray Lamp
Sunshade Vanity Mirror
TRADE NO.
LAMP OR BULB
INSTRUMENT PANEL
Daytime Running Lamps Indicator
Charging System Indicator Lamp
instrument Cluster Illumination
Headlamp Beam Indicator
Turn Signal Indicator
Brake Warning indicator
SIR (Air Bag)
Safety Belt Warning
Check Gages Indicator
Malfunction Indicator
(“Service Engine Soon”) Lamp
TRADE NO.
6-70
21 1-2
21 1-2
194
194
194
194
74
74
74
194
74
74
74
74
74
74
74
3
6
2
214
1
1
4
1
1
6
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
NOTES
6-71
NOTES
6-72
Section 7 Maintenance Schedule
Introduction
IMPORTANT:
KEEP ENGINE OIL
AT THE PROPER
,EVEL AND CHANGE A:
RECOMMENDED
This section coversthe maintenance required for your
vehicle. Your vehicle needs these services toretain its
safety, dependability and emission control performance.
GP”
m
Protection
Plan
Your Vehicle and the Environment
Proper vehicle maintenancenot only helpsto keep your
vehicle in good working condition,but also helps the
environment. All recommended maintenance procedures
are important. Improper vehicle maintenance can even
affect the quality of the air we breathe. Improper fluid
levels or the wrong tire inflation can increase the level
of emissions from yourvehicle. To help protect our
environment, andto keep your vehiclein good
condition, pleasemaintain your vehicle properly.
Have you purchased the GM Protection Plan? The Plan
supplements your new vehicle warranties. Seeyour
Wurranty and Owner Assistance booklet,o r your
GM dealer for details.
7-1
How This Section is Organized
The remainderof this section is divided into fiveparts:
“Part A: Scheduled Maintenance Services” shows
what to have done and how often. Some of these
services can be complex, so unless you are technically
qualified and have the necessary equipment, you should
let your dealer’s service department or another qualified
service center do these jobs.
kerformmg maintenance work on a vehicle can
be dangerous. In trying todo some jobs, YOU can
be seriously injured. Do your own maintenance
work only if you have the required know-how
and the propertools and equipment for the job.
If you have any doubt, have a qualified
technician do the work.
If you are skilled enough to do somework on your
vehicle, you will probably want to get the service
information GM publishes. See “Service and Owner
Publications’’ in the Index.
7-2
“Part B: Owner Checks and Services” tells you what
should be checked whenever you stop forfuel. It also
explains what you can easily do to help keep your
vehicle in good condition.
“Part C: Periodic Maintenance Inspections” explains
important inspections that your GM dealer’s service
department or another qualified service center
should perform.
“Part D: Recommended Fluids and Lubricants” lists
some products GM recommends to help keep your
vehicle properly maintained. These products, or their
equivalents, should be used whether you do the work
yourself or have it done.
“Part E: Maintenance Record” provides a place for
you to record the maintenance performed on your
vehicle. Whenever any maintenance is performed, be
sure to write it down in this part. This will help you
determine when your next maintenance should be done.
In addition, it is a good idea to keep your maintenance
receipts. They may be needed to qualify your vehicle for
warranty repairs.
Part A: Scheduled Maintenance
Services
Using Your Maintenance Schedule
We at General Motors want to help you keep your
vehicle in good working condition. But we don’t know
exactly how you’ll drive it. You may drive very short
distances only a few times a week. Or you may drive
long distances all the time in very hot, dusty weather.
You may use your vehicle i n making deliveries. Or
you may drive it to work, to do errands or in many
other ways.
Because of all the different ways people. use their GM
vehicles, maintenance needs vary. You may even need
more frequent checksand replacements than you‘ll find
in the schedules in this section. So please read this
section and note how you drive. If you have any
questions on how to keep your vehicle in good
condition, see your GM dealer.
This part tells you the maintenance services you should
have done and when you should schedule them.If you
go to your dealer for your service needs, you’ll know
that GM-trained and supported service people will
perform the work using genuine GM parts.
The proper fluids and lubricants to use are 1iste.d in
Part D. Make sure whoever services your vehicle uses
these. All parts should be replaced and all necessary
repairs done before you or anyone else drivesthe
vehicle.
I nese
schedules are forvehicles that:
0
carry passengers and cargo within recommended
limits. You will find these limits on your vehicle’s
CertificatiodTire label. See “Loading Your Vehicle”
in the Index.
0
are driven on reasonable road surfaces within legal
driving limits.
0
use the recommended fuel. See “Fuel“ in the Index.
Selecting the Right Schedule
First you’ll need to decide which of the two schedules is
right for your vehicle. Here’s how to decide which
schedule to follow:
Gasoline engine vehicles and diesel engine vehicles
have different maintenance requirements. If you have a
diesel engine, follow a schedule designated for diesel
engine vehicles only.
See the Diesel Engine Supplement for diesel engine
maintenance schedules.
7-3
Maintenance Schedule
I Short Trip/City Definition -- Gasoline Engines I
Follow the Short TripKity Maintenance Schedule if any
one of these conditions is true for your vehicle:
Short Trip/City Intervals
-- Gasoline Engines
1
Most trips are less than 5 to 10 miles (8 to 16 km).
This is particularly important when outside
temperatures are below freezing.
Every 3,000 Miles (5 000 km): Engine Oil and Filter
Change (or 3 months, whichever occurs first). Chassis
Lubrication (or 3 months, whichever occurs first).
Drive Axle Service (or 3 months, whichever
occurs first).
Most trips include extensive idling (such as frequent
driving in stop-and-go traffic).
At 6,000 Miles (10 000 km) Then Every
12,000 Miles (20 000 km): Tire Rotation.
--
You frequently tow a trailer or use a carrier on top of
your vehicle. (With some models, you should never
tow a trailer. See “Towing a Trailer” in the Index.)
Every 15,000 Miles (25 000 km): Air Cleaner Filter
Inspection, if driving in dusty conditions. Shields and
Underhood Insulation Inspection (GVWR above
8,500 Ibs. only). Thermostatically Controlled Engine
Cooling Fan Check (or every 12 months, whichever
occurs first). Front Wheel Bearing Repack (or at each
brake relining, whichever occurs first).
If the vehicle is used for delivery service, police, taxi
or other commercial application.
Every 30,000 Miles (50 000 km): Air Cleaner Filter
Replacement. Fuel Filter Replacement.
Most trips are through dusty areas.
You frequently tow a trailer or use a carrier on top of
your vehicle.
One of the reasons you should follow this schedule (f
you operate your vehicle under anyof these conditions
is that these conditionscuuse engine oil to break
down soonex
Every 50,000 Miles (83 000 km):Automatic
Transmission Service (vehicles over 8600 GVWR
or driven under severe conditionsonly).
Maintenance Schedule
I ShortTripKityIntervals -- GasolineEngines I
Every 60,000 Miles (100 000 km): Engine Accessory
Drive Belt Inspection. FuelTank, Cap and Lines
Inspection. Exhaust Gas Recirculation System
Inspection. Evaporative Control System Inspection.
Every 100,000 Miles (166 000 km): Cooling System
Service (or evezy 60 months, whichever occursfirst).
Spark Plug Wire Inspection.Spark Plug Replacement.
Positive Crankcase Ventilation (PCV) Valve Inspection.
Long WplHighway Definition -- ,asoline Engines
1
Follow this maintenance schedule
only if none of the
conditions from the Short
TripKity Maintenance
Schedule is true.
Driving a vehicle with afully warmed engine under
highway conditions causes engine oil
to break
down slowel:
These intervals only summarize maintenance services.
Be sure to followthe complete maintenance scheduleon
the following pages.
7-5
-
Maintenance Schedule
I LongTripMighwayIntervals
-- Gasoline En
Every 7,500 Miles (12 500 km): Engine Oil and Filter
Change (orevery 12 months, whichever occurs first).
Chassis Lubrication (or every 12 months, whichever
occurs first). Drive Axle Service.
--
At 7,500 Miles (12 500 km) Then Every
15,000 Miles (25000 km): Tire Rotation.
Every 15,000 Miles (25 000 km): Shields and
Underhood Insulation Inspection (GVWR above
8,500 lbs. only). Thermostatically Controlled Engine
Cooling Fan Check (or every 12 months, whichever
occurs first).
Every 30,000 Miles (50 000 km): Fuel Filter
Replacement. Air Cleaner Filter Replacement.
Front Wheel Bearing Repack (or at each brake
relining, whichever occurs first).
Every 50,000 Miles (83 000 km): Automatic
Transmission Service (vehicles over8600 GVWR or
driven under severe conditions only).
1,ong ‘lrip/Highn.ay
Intervals
-- GasolineEngines
Every 60,000 Miles (100 000 km): Engine Accessory
Drive Belt Inspection. Fuel Tank, Cap and Lines
Inspection. Exhaust Gas Recirculation System
Inspection. Evaporative Control System Inspection.
Every 100,000 Miles (166 000 km): Cooling System
Service (or every 60 months, whichever occurs first).
Spark Plug Wire Inspection. Spark Plug Replacement.
Positive Crankcase Ventilation (PCV) Valve Inspection.
These intervals only summarizemaintenance services.
Be sure to follow the complete maintenance schedule
on
the following pages.
Short TripKity Maintenance Schedule -- Gasoline Engines I
The services shown in this schedule up to 100,000 miles
(166 000 km) should be performed after 100,000 miles
(166 000 km) at the same intervals.
** Drive axle service:
0
Locking Differential -- Drain fluid and refill at first
engine oil change. At subsequent oil changes,check
fluid level and add fluid asneeded. If driving in
dusty areas or towing a trailer, drain fluid and refill
every 15,000 miles (25 000 km).
0
Standard Differential -- Check fluid level and add
fluid as needed at every oil change.If driving in
dusty areas or towing a trailer, drain fluid and refill
every 15,000 miles (25 000 km).
0
More frequent lubricationmay be required for
heavy-duty use.
Footnotes
The U.S. Environmental Protection Agency or the
California Air Resources Board has determined that the
failure to perform this maintenance itemwill not nullify
the emission warranty or limit recallliability prior to the
completion of the vehicle’s useful life. We, however,
urge that all recommended maintenance services
be
performed at the indicated intervals and the maintenance
be recorded.
# Lubricate the front suspension, kingpin bushings,
steering linkage and rear driveline center splines.
7-7
I
Short TripKity Maintenance Schedule -- Gasoline Engines
I
3,000 Miles (5 000 km)
6,000 Miles (10 000 km)
0Change engine oil and filter (or every
0Change engine oil and filter (or every
3 months, whichever occurs first).
3 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service.
An Emission Control Service.
0Lubricate chassis components; see
footnote ## (or every 3 months, whichever
occurs first).
0Check axle fluid level and add fluid
as needed. **
DATE
7-8
ACTUAL MILEAGE
SERVICED B Y
0Lubricate chassis components; see footnote#
(or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).
0Check axle fluid level and add fluid
as needed. **
0Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and
Rotation’’ in the Index for proper rotation
pattern and additional information. During
tire rotation, check brake calipers for
freedom of movement. Refer to the
appropriate GM service manual for proper
caliper service procedures.
--
Short TkipKity Maintenance Schedule Gasoline Engines
9,000 Miles (15 000 km)
12,000 Miles (20 000 km)
0Change engine oil and filter (or every
0Change engine oil and filter (or every
3 months, whichever occurs first).
3 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service.
An Emission Control Service.
0Lubricate chassis components; see
0Lubricate chassis components; see
footnote # (or every 3 months, whichever
occurs first).
0Check axle fluid level and add fluid
as needed. **
footnote # (or every 3 months, whichever
occurs first).
0Check axle fluid level and add fluid
as needed. **
I
DATE
ACTUAL MILEAGE
SERVICED BY:
I
I
DATE
ACTUAL MILEAGE
SERVICED B Y
7-9
Short TripKity Maintenance Schedule -- Gasoline Engines
15,000 Miles (25 000 km)
0Change engine oil and filter (or every
3 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service.
0Lubricate chassis components; see
footnote # (or every 3 months, whichever
occurs first).
0Inspect air cleaner filter if you are driving
in dusty conditions. Replace filter if
necessary. An Emission Control Service.
Check axle fluid level and add fluid
as needed. :k*
0Clean and repack the front wheel bearings
(or at each brake relining, whichever
occurs first).
7-10
0Vehicles With GVWR Above 8,500 lbs.
On'ly: Inspect shields and underhood
insulation for damage or looseness. Adjust
or replace as required. This is (I Noise Emission
Control Service. Applicable only to vehicles sold in
the United Stlltes.
t
0If your engine hasa thermostatically
controlled cooling fan, inspect all hoses
and ducts for proper hook-up (or every
12 months, whichever occurs first). Be sure
the valve works properly.This is a Noise
Emission Control Service. Applicable only to
vehicles sold in the United Sfates.
I
Short TripKity Maintenance Schedule
-- Gasoline Engines I
18,000 Miles (30 000 km)
21,000 Miles (35000 km)
0Change engine oil and filter (or every
0Change engine oil and filter (or every
3 months, whichever occurs first).
3 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service.
An Ernissiot?.Control Service.
17 Lubricate chassis components; see footnote#
(or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).
Check axle fluid level and add fluid
as needed. **
0Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and
Rotation” in the Index for proper rotation
pattern and additional information. During
tire rotation, check brake calipers for
freedom of movement. Refer to the
appropriate GM service manual for proper
caliper service procedures.
0Lubricate chassis components; see
footnote ## (or every 3 months, whichever
occurs first).
0Check axle fluid level and add fluid
as needed. w
7-11
I
Short TriplCity Maintenance Schedule -- Gasoline Engines I
24,000 Miles (40 000 km)
27,000 Miles (45000 km)
0Change engine oil and filter (or every
0Change engine oil and filter (or every
3 months, whichever occurs first).
3 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service.
An Emission Control Service.
0Lubricate chassis components; see
0Lubricate chassis components; see
footnote # (or every 3 months, whichever
’ occurs first).
17 Check axle fluid level and add fluid
as needed. **
footnote # (or every 3 months, whichever
occurs first).
0Check axle fluid level and add fluid
as needed. **
DATE
7-12
ACTUAL MILEAGE
SERVICED B Y
DATE
ACTUAL MILEAGE
SERVICED B Y
Short TripKity Maintenance Schedule-- Gasoline Engines
30,000 Miles (50 000 km)
0Change engine oil and filter (or every
0If your engine has a thermostatically
controlled cooling fan, inspect all hoses
and ducts for proper hook-up (or every
12 months, whichever occurs first). Be sure
the valve works properly. This is a Noise
3 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service.
0Lubricate chassis components; see footnote#
(or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).
0Check axle fluid level and add fluid
as needed. **
0Clean and repackthe fiont wheel bearings (or at
each brake relining, whichever occurs first).
0Replace fuel filter.
An Emission Control Service.
Emission Control Service. Applicable only to
vehicles sold in the United States.
0Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and
Rotation” in the Index for proper rotation
pattern and additional information. During
tire rotation, check brake calipers for
freedom of movement. Refer to the
appropriate GM service manual for proper
caliper service procedures.
3-
0Replace air cleaner filter.
An Emission Control Service.
0Vehicles With GVWR Above 8,500 lbs. Only:
I
DATE
I
ACTUAL MILEAGE
ISERVICED B Y
I
Inspect shields and underhood insulation for
damage or looseness. Adjustor replace as
required. This is a Noise Emission Control Service.
Applicable only to vehicles sold in the United States.
7-13
1
--
Short TripKity Maintenance Schedule Gasoline Engines
33,000 Miles (55000 km)
I
36,000 Miles (60 000 km)
0Change engine oil and filter (or every
3 months, whichever occurs first).
Change engine oil and filter (or every
3 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service,
An Emission Control Service.
0Lubricate chassis components; see
0Lubricate chassis components; see
footnote # (or every 3 months, whichever
occurs first).
0Check axle fluid level and add fluid
as needed. **
footnote ## (or every 3 months, whichever
occurs first).
0Check axle fluid level and add fluid
as needed. **
I
I
DATE
7-14
3
I
ACTUAL MILEAGE
SERVICED BY:
I
DATE
ACTUAL MILEAGE
SERVICED BY:
Short TripKity Maintenance Schedule -- Gasoline Engines
39,000 Miles (65 000 km)
42,000 Miles (70 000 km)
0Change engineoil and filter (or every
0Change engineoil and filter (or every
3 months, whichever occurs first).
3 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service.
An Emission Control Service.
0Lubricate
chassis components; see
footnote ## (or every 3 months, whichever
occurs first).
0Check axle fluid leveland add fluid
as needed. **
0Lubricate chassis components; see footnote##
(or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).
0Check axle fluid level and add fluid
as needed. **
0Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and
Rotation” in the Index for proper rotation
pattern and additional information. During
tire rotation, check brake calipers for
freedom of movement. Refer tothe
appropriate GM service manual for proper
caliper service procedures.
7-15
Short TripKity Maintenance Schedule
-- Gasoline Engines
45,000 Miles (75000 km)
0Change engine oil and filter (or every
0Vehicles With GVWR Above 8,500 lbs.
3 months, whichever occurs first).
Only: Inspect shields and underhood
insulation for damage or looseness. Adjust
or replace as required. This is a Noise Emission
An Emission Control Service.
Lubricate chassis components; see
footnote # (or every 3 months, whichever
occurs first).
0Check axle fluid level and add fluid
as needed. **
0Clean and repack the front wheel bearings
(or at each brake relining, whichever
occurs first).
0Inspect air cleaner filter if you are driving
in dusty conditions. Replace filter if
necessary. An Emission Control Service. 7
Control Service. Applicable only to vehicles sold in
the United States.
0If your engine has a thermostatically
controlled cooling fan, inspect all hoses
and ducts for proper hook-up (or every
12 months, whichever occurs first). Be sure
the valve works properly. This is a Noise
Emission Control Service. Applicable only to
vehicles sold in the United States.
I
DATE
I
ACTUAL MILEAGE
(SERVICED B Y
I
I
Short TripKity Maintenance Schedule
-- Gasoline Engines I
50,000 Miles (83 000 km)
48,000 Miles (80 000 km)
0Change automatic transmission fluid and
Change engine oil and filter (or every
3 months, whichever occurs first).
filter if the vehicle’s GVWR is over
8600 lbs. or if the vehicle is mainly driven
under one or more of these conditions:
- In heavy city traffic where the outside
temperature regularly reaches 90 O F
(32 O C) or higher.
- In hilly or mountainous terrain.
- When doing frequent trailer towing.
- Uses such as found in taxi, police or
delivery service.
An Emission Control Service.
0Lubricate chassis components; see
footnote ## (or every 3 months, whichever
occurs first).
0Check axle fluid level and add fluid
as needed. **
I f you do not useyour vehicle under any of these
conditions, thefluid andfilter do
not require changing.
I
I
I
DATE
ACTUAL MILEAGE
SERVICED BY:
1
DATE
ACTUAL MILEAGE
SERVICED BY:
7-17
I
Short Trip/City Maintenance Schedule-- Gasoline Engines
51,000 Miles (85000 km)
Change engine oil and filter (or every
3 months, whichever occurs first).
Lubricate chassis components; see
footnote ## (or every 3 months, whichever
occurs first).
0Check axle fluid level and add fluid
as needed. **
ACTUAL MILEAGE
0Change engine oil and filter (or every
3 months, whichever occurs first).
A n Emission Control Service.
An Emission Control Service.
DATE
54,000 Miles (90 000 km)
SERVICED BY:
0Lubricate chassis components; see footnote#
(or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).
0Check axle fluid level and add fluid
as needed. **
0Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and
Rotation’’ in the Index for proper rotation
pattern and additional information. During
tire rotation, check brake calipers for
freedom of movement. Refer to the
appropriate GM service manual for proper
caliper service procedures.
DATE
ACTUAL MILEAGE
SERVICED BY:
I
Short TripKity Maintenance Schedule -- Gasoline Engines I
57,000 Miles (95 000 km)
60,000 Miles (100 000 km)
0Change engine oil and filter (or every
0Change engine oil and filter (or every
3 months, whichever occurs first).
3 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service.
An Emission Control Service.
0Lubricate chassis components; see
0Lubricate chassis components; see footnote#
footnote # (or every 3 months, whichever
occurs first).
0Check axle fluid level and add fluid
as needed. **
(or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).
0Check axle fluid level and add fluid
as needed. **
0Clean and repack the front wheel bearings
(or at each brake relining, whichever
occurs first).
El Vehicles With GVWR Above 8,500 lbs.
Only: Inspect shields and underhood
insulation for damage or looseness. Adjust
or replace as required. This is n Noise Emission
I
DATE
I
ACTUAL MILEAGE
ISERVICED BY:
I
Control Service. Applicable only to vehicles sold in
the United States.
(Continued)
7-19
--
Short TripKity Maintenance Schedule Gasoline Engines I
60,000 Miles (100 000 km) (Continued)
0If your engine has a thermostatically
0Conduct evaporative control system
controlled cooling fan, inspect all hoses
and ducts for proper hook-up (or every
12 months, whichever occurs first). Be sure
the valve works properly.This is ~1 Noise
inspection. Check all fuel and vapor lines
and hoses for proper hook-up, routing and
condition. Check that the purge valve works
properly (if equipped). Replace as needed.
Emission Control Service. Applicable o ~ ~tol y
vehicles sold in the United States.
An Emission Control Service.
0Replace air cleaner filter.
0Inspect engine accessory drive belt.
An Emission Control Service.
An Emission Control Service.
0Inspect fuel tank, cap and lines for damage
0Replace fuel filter.
or leaks. Inspect fuel cap gasket for any
damage. Replace parts as needed.
An Emission Control Service.
Conduct Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR)
system inspection as described in the
service manual. An Emission Control Service. ?
7-20
AFIEmission Control Service.
I
3
I
I
DATE
ACTUAL MILEAGE
SERVICED B Y
I
Short TripKity Maintenance Schedule -- Gasoline Engines I
63,000 Miles (105 000 km)
66,000 Miles (110 000 km)
0Change engine oil and filter (or every
0Change engine oil and filter (or every
3 months, whichever occurs first).
3 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service.
An Emission Control Service.
0Lubricate chassis components; see
footnote # (or every 3 months, whichever
occurs first).
0Check axle fluid level and add fluid
as needed. **
DATE
ACTUAL MILEAGE
0Lubricate chassis components; see footnote#
(or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).
0Check axle fluid level and add fluid
as needed. **
0Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and
Rotation” in the Index for proper rotation
pattern and additional information. During
tire rotation, check brake calipers for
freedom of movement. Refer to the
appropriate GM service manual for proper
caliper service procedures.
SERVICED B Y
7-21
Short TripKity Maintenance Sryedule -= Gasoline Engines
69,000 Miles (115 000 km)
72,000 Miles (120 000 km)
0Change engine oil and filter (or every
0Change engine oil and filter (or every
3 months, whichever occurs first).
3 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service.
An Emission Control Service.
0Lubricate chassis components; see
footnote ## (or every 3 months, whichever
occurs first).
Check axle fluid level and add fluid
as needed. **
0Lubricate chassis components; see
footnote ## (or every 3 months, whichever
occurs first).
0Check axle fluid level and add fluid
as needed. **
DATE
7-22
ACTUAL MILEAGE
SERVICED B Y
DATE
ACTUAL
MILEAGE
SERVICED BY:
--
Short Trip/City Maintenance Schedule Gasoline Engines
75,000 Miles (125 000 km)
0Change engineoil and filter (or every
3 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service.
0Lubricate chassis components; see
footnote # (or every 3 months, whichever
occurs first).
0Clean and repack the front wheel bearings
(or at each brake relining, whichever
occurs first).
0Inspect air cleaner filter if you are driving
in dusty conditions. Replace filter if
necessary. An Emission Control Service.
Check axle fluid leveland add fluid
as needed. **
0Vehicles With CVWR Above 8,500 lbs.
Only: Inspect shields and underhood
insulation for damage or looseness. Adjust
or replace as required. This is u Noise Emission
Control Service. Applicable only to vehicles sold in
the United States.
0If your engine has a thermostatically
controlled cooling fan, inspect all hoses
and ducts for proper hook-up (or every
12 months, whichever occurs first). Be sure
the valve works properly. This is u Noise
Emission Control Service. Applicable only to
vehicles sold in the United States.
DATE
ACTUAL MILEAGE
SERVICED BY:
7-23
I
Short TripKity Maintenance Schedule-- Gasoline Engines I
78,000 Miles (130 000 km)
81,000 Miles (135 000 km)
0Change engine oil and filter (or every
0Change engine oil and filter (or every
3 months, whichever occurs first).
3 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service.
An Emission Control Service.
0Lubricate chassis components; see footnote##
(or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).
0Check axle fluid level and add fluid
as needed. **
0Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and
Rotation’’ in the Index for proper rotation
pattern and additional information. During
tire rotation, check brake calipers for
freedom of movement. Refer to the
appropriate GM service manual for proper
caliper service procedures.
I
DATE
7-24
I
ACTUAL MILEAGE
ISERVICED
BYJ
Lubricate chassis components; see
footnote # (or every 3 months, whichever
occurs first).
Check axle fluid level and add fluid
as needed. **
DATE
ACTUAL MILEAGE
SERVICED B Y
I
Short TripKity Maintenance Schedule
84,000 Miles (140 000 -=-
~
~
-- Gasoline Engines I
87,000 Miles (i '5 000 km)
0Change engine oil and filter (or every
0Change engine oil and filter (or every
3 months, whichever occurs first).
3 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service.
An Emission Control Service.
0Lubricate chassis components; see
0Lubricate chassis components; see
footnote # (or every 3 months, whichever
occurs first).
0Check axle fluid level and add fluid
as needed. **
footnote # (or every 3 months, whichever
occurs first).
0Check axle fluid level and add fluid
as needed. **
DATE
ACTUAL MILEAGE
SERVICED BY:
DATE
ACTUAL MILEAGE
SERVICED B Y
7-25
I Short Trip/City Maintenance Schedule -- Gasolin-1
90,000 Miles (150 000 km)
0Change engine oil and filter (or every
3 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service.
0Lubricate chassis components; see
footnote # (or every 3 months, whichever
occurs first).
0Check axle fluid level and add fluid
as needed. **
0Clean and repack the front wheel bearings
(or at each brake relining, whichever
occurs first).
0Replace fuel filter.
An Emission Control Service.
7-26
0Replace air cleaner filter.
An Emission Control Service.
0Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and
Rotation” in the Index for proper rotation
pattern and additional information. During
tire rotation, check brake calipers for
freedom of movement. Refer to the
appropriate GM service manual for proper
caliper service procedures.
0Veh’icles With GVWRAbove 8,500 lbs.
Only: Inspect shields and underhood
insulation for damage or looseness. Adjust
or replace as required. This is a Noise Emission
Control Service. Applicable only to vehicles sold in
the United States.
Short TripKity Maintenance Schedule-- Gasoline Engines
93,000 Miles (155 000 km)
0If your engine has a thermostatically
controlled cooling fan, inspect all hoses
and ducts for proper hook-up (or every
12 months, whichever occurs first). Be sure
the valve works properly. This i s LL Noise
Emissior2 Control Service. Applicableorrly to
vehic*iess o l ~ in
l the United States.
DATE
ACTUAL MILEAGE
SERVICED BY:
0Change engine oil and filter (or every
3 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Conttd Service.
0Lubricate chassis components; see
footnote # (or every 3 months, whichever
occurs first).
0Check axle fluid level and add fluid
as needed %:!:
DATE
ACTUAL MILEAGE
SERVICED B Y
7-27
I
--
Short TripKity Maintenance Schedule Gasoline Engines I
96,000 Miles (160 000 km)
99,000 Miles (165 000 km)
0Change engine oil and filter (or every
0Change engine oil and filter (or every
3 months, whichever occurs first).
3 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service.
An Emission Control Service.
0Lubricate chassis components; see
0Lubricate chassis components; see
footnote ## (or every 3 months, whichever
occurs first).
0Check axle fluid level and add fluid
as needed. **
footnote # (or every 3 months, whichever
occurs first).
0Check axle fluid level and add fluid
as needed. **
DATE
7-28
ACTUAL MILEAGE
SERVICED B Y
I
I
DATE
I
ACTUAL MILEAGE
SERVICED B Y
3
Short TripKity Maintenance Schedule -- Gasoline Engines
100,000 Miles (166 000 km)
0Drain, flush and refill cooling system
(or every 60 months since last service,
whichever occurs first). See “Engine
Coolant’’ in the Index for what to use.
Inspect hoses. Clean radiator, condenser,
pressure cap and neck. Pressure test cooling
system and pressure cap.
An Emission Control Service.
0Inspect spark plug wires.
An Emission Control Service.
0Replace spark plugs.
An Emission Control Service.
0Change automatic transmission fluid and
filter if the vehicle’s GVWR is over
8600 lbs. or if the vehicle is mainly driven
under one or more of these conditions:
-
-
In heavy city traffic where the outside
temperature regularly reaches 90°F
(32°C) or higher.
In hilly or mountainous terrain.
When doing frequent trailer towing.
Uses such as found in taxi, police or
delivery service.
If’you do not use your vehicle under an? of
these conditions, the.fluid und